Well Control Manual

WELL CONTROL MANUAL
Introduction and
How to Use
Volume 1
Procedures and Guidelines
Volume 2
Fundamentals of Well Control
BP EXPLORATION
© 1995 British Petroleum Company PLC
Text originated by BP Drilling Department
Manual produced by ODL Publications, Aberdeen, Tel (01224) 637171
BP WELL CONTROL MANUAL
WELCOME
Click here to zoom in on text, then click on text to scroll through
Ladies and Gentlemen:
Following is the Second Edition of the “BP Well Control Manual” first issued in 1987.
When issued it was expected to be a living document, accounting for changes in
technology and experience, it still is. Now, eight years later, horizontal and extended
reach wells, coil tubing drilling and under balance drilling have or will become part
of our kit for improved profitability.
Our objective with this Second Edition is to bring three changes to the operating
groups:
1) Issue the manual in an electronic version as a pilot which may lead to collecting
all of the manuals on a server or CD-ROM.
2) Make available Excel based well control worksheets which have been
incorporated into the manual.
3) Modify parts of Volume I Chapters 1 and 6 for high angle and horizontal well
operations.
In a separate file we have issued the “HTHP Well Control Manual”. Future updates
will tie this manual with the “BP Well Control Manual”.
Publication of the manual in electronic format should make the abundance of

information in it more accessible to you. A powerful search capability and “hot button”
references are part of the software package we have selected. Software used is
compatible with Macintosh, MS-DOS and DEC hardware platforms making it accessible
to BP and our contractors when needed. Electronic publishing makes modifications
easier and we solicit your suggestions for correction, clarification, change or addition
to the manual. If we have not managed to make the resource more useful and clear
to you we have failed our objective. Your views on how well we have done are
important.
To open and use the manual please read the section below. While use of the electronic
version of the manual is encouraged there is still the option of printing a hard copy
of the manual. Hard copies can still be obtained from ODL in Aberdeen at a cost for
printing and shipping.
Originally this manual was not issued as “policy”. In the October 1994 Drilling Managers
Meeting this and two other documents, the “Drilling Policy Manual” and “Casing
Design Manual”, were designated as the three core policy documents covering our
operations. Every effort has been made in this edition to tie to the other two documents.
March 1995
HOW TO USE
This manual has been converted into Adobe Acrobat software and is a ‘read only’ version,
ie you cannot make any changes to text or figures, you can copy the text and figures and
paste them in to another application.
Navigating through the Manual

When you have read this you will be able to navigate quickly through the manual, to and
from volumes, sections, subsections and figures.
Clicking the mouse on the `Main Contents' button at the bottom of this page will take you to the
Well Control Manual overall contents list, ie Volume 1 or 2. For additional help use the Acrobat
Help files.
To go back or forward to a The header at the top of each

previous move you have made, page has been hot spotted,
use the Acrobat arrows in the to return you to the Main
Menu Bar. Contents page of the Volume
you have selected.
Once you have reached the section you require (e.g. 1.1 General), the hand cursor will
appear with an arrow inside it.
Press the mouse button on the section you require to read, and you will be zoomed into the
section, press it again and it will scroll through that section, at the end of the section it will
reset to the beginning of the section.
Excel Worksheets
Each example of a Worksheet in the manual is linked to a blank Excel Template for you to
use for your own calculations, just click on the example Worksheet and Excel will
automatically open. To return to the manual, simply Quit out of Excel.
Printing
When printing to a US Letter size printer please click on the “Shrink to Fit” box in the Print
dialogue box. Printing of Excel Worksheets is through Excel.
Manual
Contents
March 1995
Volume 1 – Contents
Nomenclature
Abbreviations
1 PREPARATION
Section Page
1.1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 1-1
1.2 MANPOWER ORGANISATION 1-9
1.3 DRILLS AND SLOW CIRCULATING RATES 1-15
1.4 USE OF THE MUD SYSTEM 1-27
1.5 KICK TOLERANCE 1-35
2 THE PREVENTION OF A KICK

Section
2.1 CORRECT TRIPPING PROCEDURES 2-1
2.2 MAINTAIN SUITABLE HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE 2-9
2.3 CONTROL LOST CIRCULATION 2-17
3 WARNING SIGNS OF A KICK

Paragraph
1 GENERAL 3-2
2 DRILLING BREAK 3-2
3 INCREASED RETURNS FLOWRATE 3-2
4 PIT GAIN 3-3
5 HOLE NOT TAKING CORRECT VOLUME DURING
A TRIP 3-4
6 CHANGE IN PROPERTIES OF RETURNED MUD
7 INCREASE IN HOOKLOAD 3-6
8 CHANGE IN PUMP SPEED OR PRESSURE 3-6
March 1995
4 ACTION ON DETECTING AN INFLUX

Section Page
4.1 SHALLOW GAS PROCEDURE 4-1
4.2 SHUT-IN PROCEDURE 4-9
4.3 DURING SHUT-IN PERIOD 4-17
5 WELL KILL DECISION ANALYSIS

Paragraph
1 GENERAL 5-2
2 PIPE ON BOTTOM 5-2
3 PIPE OFF BOTTOM – (Drillpipe in the Stack) 5-2
4 PIPE OFF BOTTOM – (Drillcollar in the Stack) 5-5
5 NO PIPE IN THE HOLE 5-5
6 WHILE RUNNING CASING OR LINER 5-7
7 UNDERGROUND BLOWOUT 5-9
6 WELL KILL TECHNIQUES

Section
6.1 STANDARD TECHNIQUES 6-1
– Wait and Weight Method 6-2
– Driller’s Method 6-3
6.2 SPECIAL TECHNIQUES 6-31
1. Volumetric Method 6-33
2. Stripping 6-47
3. Bullheading 6-67
4. Snubbing 6-75
5. Baryte Plugs 6-84
6. Emergency Procedure 6-93
6.3 COMPLICATIONS 6-97
March 1995
NOMENCLATURE
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION UNIT
A Cross sectional area in.2
a Constant –
An Total nozzle area in.2
b Constant –
c Constant –
C Annular capacity bbl/m
Cp Pipe capacity bbl/m
Ca Cuttings concentration %
CL Clinging constant –
CR Closing ratio –
D Depth m
Dshoe Shoe depth m
Dwp Depth of openhole weak point m
dbit Bit diameter in.
dh Hole diameter in.
dhc Hole/casing ID in.
do Pipe OD in.
di Pipe ID in.
dcut Average cuttings diameter in.
dc Drilling exponent (corrected) –
F Force lb
Fsh Shale formation factor –
FPG Formation Pressure Gradient SG
g Gravity acceleration –
G Pressure gradient psi/ft
psi/m
SG
Gi Influx gradient psi/ft
H Height m
Hi Height of influx m
Hp Height of plug m
ITT Interval Transit Time µsec/m
K Bulk modulus of elasticity
L Length m
λ Rotary exponent –
MR Migration rate m/hr
M Matrix stress psi
m Threshold bit weight lb
MW Mud weight SG
March 1995

N Rotary speed rpm
OPG Overburden Pressure Gradient SG
P Pressure psi/SG
(The units of subsurface pressure
may be either psi or SG)
∆P Adjustment pressure psi
Pa Annulus pressure psi
∆Pbit Bit pressure drop psi
Pcl Choke line pressure loss psi
Pdp Drillpipe pressure psi
Pf Formation pressure psi/SG
Pfrac Fracture pressure psi/SG
Pfc Final circulating pressure psi
Pi Hydrostatic pressure of influx psi
Pic Initial circulating pressure psi
Plo Leak off pressure psi/SG
Pmax Maximum allowable pressure
at the openhole weak point psi/SG
Poc Wide open choke pressure psi
Pp Pore pressure psi/SG
Pscr Slow circulating rate pressure psi
PV Plastic Viscosity cP
Q Flowrate gal/min
Qmud Mud flowrate gal/min
Qgas Gas flowrate gal/min
Re Reynolds number –
R Resistivity ohm-m
Rw Resistivity of water ohm-m
ROP Rate of Penetration m/hr
Shale factor meq/100g
S Overburden pressure psi
Sg Gas saturation Fractional
Sw Water saturation Fractional
t Time seconds
min
TR Transport Ratio –
T Temperature degrees
C, F, R
TD Total Depth m
TVD True Vertical Depth m
V Kick tolerance bbl
March 1995

V Volume bbl
cc
ml
l
v Velocity m/min
m/s
vmud Mud velocity m/min
vp Average pipe running speed m/min
vs Slip velocity m/min
W Weight gm
kg
lb
w Weight lb/ft
lb/bbl
SG
w Weight of pipe lb/ft
wb Baryte required for weighting up lb/bbl
wcut Average cuttings weight SG
WOB Weight on Bit lb
x Offset ()
YP Yield Point lb/100ft2
Z Compressibility factor –
µ Viscosity cP
ν Poissons’s Ratio –
σ’1 Maximum effective principle stress psi/SG
σ’t Tectonic stress psi/SG
Ø Porosity Fractional
Ø600 Fann reading lb/100ft2
β Tectonic stress coefficient –
ρ Density SG
ρb Bulk density SG
March 1995
ABBREVIATIONS
API RP American Petroleum Institute Recommended Practice

BHA Bottomhole Assembly
BOP Blowout Preventer
BRT Below Rotary Table
DWT Dead Weight Tester
ECD Equivalent Circulating Density
EMW Equivalent Mud Weight
H2S Hydrogen Sulphide
IADC International Association of Drilling Contractors
ID Internal Diameter
KTOL Kick Tolerance
LCM Lost Circulation Material
LMRP Lower Marine Riser Package
LO Leak off
MAASP Maximum Allowable Annular Surface Pressure
OBM Oil Base Mud
OD Outside Diameter
PMS Preventive Maintenance System
PV Plastic Viscosity
ROP Rate of Penetration
SCR Slow Circulating Rate
SG Specific Gravity
SPM Strokes per Minute
YP Yield Point
March 1995
1 PREPARATION
Section Page
1.1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 1-1
1.2 MANPOWER ORGANISATION 1-9
1.3 DRILLS AND SLOW CIRCULATING RATES 1-15
1.4 USE OF THE MUD SYSTEM 1-27
1.5 KICK TOLERANCE 1-35
March 1995
1.1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Paragraph Page
1 General 1-2
2 Pressure Gauges 1-2
3 Pump Control 1-4
4 Fluid Measurement 1-6
Illustrations
1.1 Suggested Instrumentation for a Floating Rig 1-3
1.2 Suggested Instrumentation for a Fixed Installation 1-5
1.3 Suggested Fluid Measurement System 1-7
1-1
March 1995
1 General
It is essential that an appropriate level of control equipment is provided on every rig in order
that a well that is under pressure can be accurately monitored.
In general, during a well control incident, there is a necessity for more accurate
instrumentation than under conditions encountered during routine drilling.
The level of instrumentation on every rig therefore must be evaluated in order to assess
its␣ s uitability for well control purposes. This evaluation should ideally be carried out
in␣conjunction with the pre contract rig audit and any deficiencies made good prior to
contract␣award.
The purpose of this section is to highlight the important aspects of instrumentation and
control and to recommend a standard level of equipment for all rig types.
The level of instrumentation that is recommended will ensure that a suitable level of control
is afforded during unusually critical operations, and that adequate back-up is provided.
Therefore, much of this equipment would not be necessary in routine circumstances. However
equipment failure is most likely when the equipment is highly stressed. It is in these situations
that serious incidents can develop if a suitable level of back-up instrumentation and control
equipment is not to hand.
2 Pressure Gauges
When a well is under pressure it is important that accurate pressure measurements can be made.
Each rig will normally be equipped with gauges to read standpipe pressure and annulus
pressure. The gauges that are fitted to the choke panel and at the driller’s console are often
the only gauges available for well control purposes.
Although the standpipe and choke manifold will generally be fitted with ‘Cameron’ gauges,
these are considered to be so inaccurate as to have little application to well control.
All of these gauges will have a fullscale deflection that is at least equal to the working
pressure rating of the equipment. In all cases, this means that it will be necessary to install
gauges of lower rating in order that relatively low pressures can be accurately recorded.
This will be especially important with high pressure equipment.
It is also important that suitable pressure gauges are installed at the choke manifold in case
the well has to be controlled from this position. This will apply to land rigs which may be
equipped only with manual chokes and the majority of rigs that are equipped with both
manual and remote operated chokes.
Accurate readout of pump pressure and choke pressure is, in the majority of cases, all that is
required. However an extra pressure reading is required on a floating rig in order that the
wellhead pressure can be monitored through the kill line.
In order to be able to install additional pressure gauges it may be necessary to fabricate

manifolds and install high pressure instrument hose between the choke panel and the
standpipe/choke manifold. All this equipment must be rated to the working pressure of
the␣equipment.
1-2
March 1995
Figure 1.1 Suggested Instrumentation for a Floating Rig
STANDPIPE
1
CAMERON
GAUGE
STANDPIPE
2
1/4in
NEEDLE
VALVE D
TRANSDUCER K CHECK
C
VALVE
STANDPIPE
MANIFOLD
HYDRAULIC
FLUID INLET
CAMERON CHOKE
GAUGE PANEL
D
K SW
AC
C O
KILL PUMP
LINE OUTPUT
MONITOR
REMOTELY
OPERATED
CHOKE
CHOKE
MANIFOLD
MANUAL
CHOKES
CHOKE
BUFFER LINE
TANK
DRAIN FROM
BOP
OVERBOARD
LINE
D – DRILL PIPE
POORBOY K – KILL LINE
DEGASSER C – CHOKE LINE
– 1/4in NEEDLE VALVES
FLOWLINE – CHECK VALVE/HYDRAULIC FLUID INLET
WEOX02.001
1-3
March 1995
So in general:
• There must be gauges available to read choke pressure, standpipe pressure and kill line
static pressure in the case of a floating rig.
• The above gauges must be readable from the manifold if manual chokes are fitted to the
manifold.
• It must be possible to easily install and remove low range pressure gauges at the choke
panel and at the choke manifold.
Suggested pressure recording systems for a floating rig and a fixed installation are shown in
Figures 1.1 and 1.2. The proposed systems can also be used for measuring slow circulating
rate pressures (SCRs).
The following points should be noted from the proposed systems:
• A good selection of gauges should be available. Gauges should be calibrated on a regular

basis with a Dead Weight Tester. It is suggested that the gauges are checked at each
BOP Test and at this stage the pressure monitors in the mud logging unit should be
checked against the rig equipment.
• It must be easy to change the gauges.
• A hydraulic fluid hand pump should be available to purge the lines at suitable points as
shown.
• Consideration should be given to completely isolating the supplementary pressure

monitoring system from that originally fitted to the rig. This would ensure that the original
system was closed and hence in no way susceptible to leaking needle valves or misuse
of the supplementary system.
• Sensitive low pressure rated gauges should be removed from the system unless required.
The piping and manifolding should be permanently installed. It would be a good idea to
fabricate a cover for the manifolding at the choke manifold and choke panel.
• The gauges that are used to measure the slow circulating rate pressures should be used
to monitor well pressures in the event a kick is taken.
• A stroke counter, similar to the battery operated ‘Swaco’ unit, is recommended for remote
installation at the choke manifold. It should be removed when not required. A suitably
isolated terminal should be located at a convenient point at the choke manifold, in order
that the signal from the limit switches on the pumps can be transmitted to the counter.
3 Pump Control
It is desirable that the remote control of the pump used to kill a well that is under pressure is
located reasonably close to the choke operator.
In most cases the rig pumps will be used. Generally, the Driller will control these pumps
from a position that is close to the choke panel. Most choke panels contain a meter that
displays the cumulative output of the pump. Therefore, in the majority of cases, if the well
is controlled with a remote operated choke, the man on the pump will be able to co-ordinate
with the choke operator.
1-4
March 1995
Figure 1.2 Suggested Instrumentation for a Fixed Installation
TO
STANDPIPE
TO
STANDPIPE
STANDPIPE
MANIFOLD D
C
CHOKE
PANEL
D SW
AC
O
1/4in HYDRAULIC
FLUID FILLED
HIGH PRESSURE HOSE
TO PUMP/
FROM CHOKE PANEL
BOP
CHOKE
CHOKE
PRESSURE
GAUGE
TO
DEGASSER
TO BURN PIT
REMOTELY
OPERATED
CHOKE
TO BURN PIT
TRANSDUCER
CHOKE
CAMERON
MANIFOLD GAUGE
TO BURN PIT
C – CHOKE LINE
TO D – DRILL PIPE
DEGASSER – 1/4in NEEDLE VALVES
– CHECK VALVE/HYDRAULIC FLUID INLET
WEOX02.002
1-5
March 1995
However, if the choke manifold contains manual chokes, the choke operator may be some
considerable distance from the man on the pump and a monitor of the pump output. In such
cases, it is recommended that a remote pump output meter is positioned at the choke manifold.
This will be especially important on land rigs which may be equipped only with manual
chokes and where often the choke manifold is located at some distance from the rig floor.
A further complication may arise if a kill pump or cement pump is used during a well control
operation. It may become necessary to use these pumps on any rig, but the use of a relatively
small displacement pump will be standard well control procedure on a floating rig that is drilling
in deep water. Therefore, on a floating rig, it is desirable that it is possible to control and monitor
the kill/cement pump from the rig floor.
4 Fluid Measurement
During stripping operations, as well as during a volumetric kill, it is important to be␣able to
accurately measure small volumes of fluid bled from, or pumped into the␣well.
API RP 53 recommends that ‘a trip tank or other method of accurately measuring the drilling
fluid bled off, leaked from, or pumped into a well within an accuracy of half a barrel
is␣required’.
Most rigs will not have suitable equipment to do this.
It is usually assumed that the choke manifold lined up across a manual choke to the trip
tank␣is a suitable fluid measurement system. However , in most cases this will not be a
satisfactory arrangement because of the relatively large volume in the line between the
choke and the tank.
In general, there is a requirement for a line from the well, terminating at a manual choke
positioned directly above a measuring cylinder, such as the trip tank (hydraulically activated
chokes are not suitable for this application). However a bleed line from the well to the
mixing tanks on the cement/kill pump may be sufficient.
The most satisfactory arrangement is to use a strip tank as shown in Figure 1.3. This tank
would typically have a 3 to 4 bbl capacity so that very small volumes of fluid can be measured.
After bleeding into the strip tank, the tank contents can be emptied into the trip tank where
the total volume of mud bled from the well, together with the mud leaked past the preventers,
can be measured.
Although it is not ideal, it may be sufficient to use a Lo-Torq valve instead of a␣manual
choke to bleed fluid to the tank. However, during a long operation this is likely to wash out
and so provision should be made to easily and quickly replace the valve.
It is not recommended to bleed mud into a measuring tank that is situated in a confined area
when there is a possibility that gas is entrained in the mud.
1-6
March 1995
PRESSURE
GAUGE
FROM CHOKE MANUAL

MANIFOLD/BOP CHOKE
3in PIPE
LEVEL
INDICATOR
STRIP TANK
(3 – 4bbl
capacity)
LARGE ID
DRAIN
WORKING PLATFORM
FLOWLINE
TRIP
RETURNS
TANK
WEOX02.003
Figure 1.3 Suggested Fluid Measurement System
1-7/8
1-7
March 1995
1.2 MANPOWER ORGANISATION
Paragraph Page
1 General 1-10
2 Individual Responsibilities 1-10
3 Communication 1-12
Illustrations
1.4 An Example Communication System 1-13
1-9
March 1995
1 General
This section is intended to provide a guideline for the allocation of individual responsibilities
during a well control incident. It is Company policy that a well control contingency plan
should include the allocation of individual responsibilities.
The contingency plan should be drawn up in conjunction with the drilling contractor and
should be regularly reassessed. Well control drills provide an opportunity to assess the
effectiveness of the contingency plan and to identify and make good any inadequacies.
2 Individual Responsibilities
The well control contingency plan must allocate the responsibilities of all those concerned
in the operation. Circumstances at the rigsite may dictate that these responsibilities be
modified in the event of an incident; however, the following can be used as guidelines for
the allocation of responsibilities in the event of a well control incident:
(a) The Company Representative

• Once the well has been shut-in and is being correctly monitored, to organise a pre-kill
meeting for all those involved in the supervision of the well control operation.
• To provide specific well control procedures, using the contingency plan as a

guideline.
• To monitor and supervise the implementation of these procedures.
• To be present on the rig floor at the start of the kill operation. Either the Toolpusher
or the Company Representative should be present at all times on the rig floor during
the operation.
• To maintain communication with the Operations base.
• The Company Representative has the right to assume complete control of the work
required to regain control of the well.
• To assign the responsibility of keeping a diary of events.
(b) The Company Drilling Engineer

• Will provide technical back-up to the Company Representative.
• To keep a diary of events.
(c) The Senior Contractor Representative

• Has the overall responsibility for all actions taken on the rig.
• Has the responsibility for supervising the contractor staff that are not directly
involved in the well control operation.
1-10
March 1995
• However, in the event that the well gets out of control, the Company Representative
has the right to assume complete control and supervise the work required to regain
full control of the well. (This entitlement is a standard condition of Company drilling
contracts.)
(d) The Contractor Toolpusher

• Has overall responsibility for the implementation of the well control operation.
• Has the responsibility for ensuring that the driller and the drill crew are correctly
deployed during the well control operation.
• Must be present at the rig floor during the start of the kill operation. Either the
Toolpusher or the Company Representative should be present at all times on the rig
floor during the operation.
• Has the responsibility for briefing the off duty drill crew prior to starting a new␣shift.
(e) The Driller

• Has the responsibility for the initial detection of the kick and closing in the well.
• Has the responsibility for supervising the drill crew during the well control operation.
(f) The Mud Engineer

• Has continuous responsibility for monitoring the mud system and the conditioning
of the mud.
It may be prudent to send an extra Mud Engineer to the rig in the event of a well control
incident to ensure constant supervision of the mud system.
(g) The Cementing Engineer

• Will ensure that the cement unit is ready for operation at any time.
• Will operate the cement unit at the discretion of the Company Representative.
(h) The Subsea Engineer (where appropriate)

• Should be available for consultation at all times during the well control operation.
• Has the responsibility for checking all the BOP equipment during the operation.
(j) The Mud Logging Engineers

• Have the responsibility for continuously monitoring the circulating system during
the well control operation.
• One member of the crew must keep a diary of events.
1-11
March 1995
3 Communication
One of the Company Representative’s responsibilities is to organise a pre-kill meeting once
the well has been shut-in. The purpose of this meeting is to ensure that all those involved in
the supervision and implementation of the well control operation are familiar with the
procedures that will be used to kill the well. This meeting is also the first stage in the
process of communication during the well control operation.
Experience has shown that even the most well conceived well control procedures can go
badly wrong if communication before and during the operation is not properly organised
and effective.
It is therefore most important that the well control contingency plan details the method and
line of communication for each individual involved in the operation.
The objectives of a suitable system of communication are:
• To ensure that all information relevant to the well control operation is communicated to
the Company Representative.
• To ensure that those involved in the supervision of the operation are at all times in
communication with the Company Representative.
• To ensure that all those involved in the operation are aware of the line and method of
communication that they should use.
• To ensure that communication equipment on the rig is adequate, and is used during the
well control operation in the most effective manner possible.
Figure 1.4 shows an example of a possible communication system on a semi-submersible␣rig

for use during standard well control operations. The following can be noted from this example:
• After the kick is taken, the well is shut-in and closely monitored.
• The Company Representative calls a pre-kill meeting of those involved in the supervision
of the operation.
• Responsibilities are allocated to those involved in the operation by the supervisors who
attended the meeting.
• Each line and method of communication is defined. It should be noted that:
– The rig telephone system is not overloaded.
– The most important lines of communication to and from the Company Representative
(denoted by those inside the broken line) are best maintained with the use of hand
held radios.
– The use of intrinsically safe hand held radios ensures that all those inside the broken
line can listen in on each others communication.
– Depending on the type of operation it may be necessary to include others within the
broken line.
1-12
March 1995
Figure 1.4 An Example Communication System
(1) KICK TAKEN – WELL SHUT-IN – WELL BEING MONITORED
(2) PREKILL MEETING
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
COMPANY DRILLING ENGINEER
SENIOR CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATIVE
TOOLPUSHER
MUD ENGINEER
MUD LOGGING ENGINEER
(3) ALLOCATE RESPONSIBILITIES
SENIOR
MUD CONTRACTOR
TOOLPUSHER
ENGINEER REPRESENTATIVE
OFF DUTY SUBSEA CONTRACTOR

MATES
DRILL CREW ENGINEER STAFF
CONTRACTOR
DRILLER
SHOREBASE
PUMPMAN/
DRILL CREW
DERRICKMAN
(4) MAJOR LINES/METHOD OF COMMUNICATION

DURING THE WELL CONTROL OPERATION
DRILL CREW
CONTRACTOR MARINE PUMPMAN/

DRILLER SHOREBASE STAFF DERRICKMAN
RT RT
RT SENIOR S/S
CONTRACTOR MUD
TOOLPUSHER
REPRESENTATIVE ENGINEER
H/H
H/H H/H
COMPANY
S/S REPRESENTATIVE RT
RT
SUBSEA COMPANY SERVICE COMPANY MUD LOGGING

ENGINEER SHOREBASE ENGINEERS ENGINEER
RT – RIG TELEPHONE SYSTEM S/S – SHIP TO SHORE H/H – HAND HELD SET
WEOX02.004
1-13/14
1-13
March 1995
1.3 DRILLS AND SLOW CIRCULATING RATES
Paragraph Page
1 General 1-16
2 BOP Drills 1-16
3 D1: Kick while Tripping 1-17
4 D2: Kick while Drilling 1-17
5 D3: Diverter Drill 1-19
6 D4: Accumulator Drill 1-19
7 D5: Well Kill Drill 1-21
8 Slow Circulating Rate Pressures, SCRs 1-22
9 Choke Line Losses 1-23
Illustrations
1.5 SCR Pressure Plot 1-23
1.6 Choke Line Pressure Loss Data Sheet 1-25
1.7 An example Determination of Choke Line Losses 1-26
1-15
March 1995
1 General
Both BOP Drills and the recording of slow circulating rate pressures will be carried out on
a routine basis on all rigs.
This section covers the reasons why it is necessary to carry out BOP Drills, to regularly
record SCRs, as well as recommended procedures.
2 BOP Drills
The purpose of BOP Drills is to familiarise the drillcrews with techniques that will be
implemented in the event of a kick.
One of the major factors that influences the wellbore pressures after a kick is taken is the
volume of the influx. The smaller the influx, the less severe will be the pressures during the
well kill operation. In this respect, it is important that the drillcrew react quickly to any sign
that an influx may have occurred and promptly execute the prescribed control procedure.
Drills should be designed to reduce the time that the crew take to implement these procedures.
The relevant Drills should be carried out as often as is necessary, and as hole conditions
permit, until the Company Representative and the Contractor Toolpusher are satisfied that
every member of the drillcrew is familiar with the entire operation.
Every effort must be made to ensure that the Drill is carried out in the most realistic manner
possible. Where practical, there should be no difference between the Drill and actual control
procedures.
Once satisfactory standards have been achieved, the Drills (D1, D2 and D3, as appropriate)
should be held at least once per week. If standards fall unacceptably, the Company
Representative should stipulate that the Drills are conducted more frequently.
It is important that returning drillcrews have frequent Drills.
The following Drills should be practised where applicable:
D1 – Tripping
D2 – Drilling
D3 – Diverter
D4 – Accumulator
D5 – Well Kill
(Suffix R to be included if the remote panel was used)
These codes should be used to record the results of the Drill on the BOP Drill Record
Proforma. This form should be sent to the Drilling Superintendent fortnightly. The results
of each Drill must also be recorded on the IADC Drilling Report.
1-16
March 1995
3 D1: Kick while Tripping

The purpose of this Drill is to familiarise the crew with the shut-in procedure that will be
implemented in the event of a kick during a trip. This Drill should only be conducted when
the BHA is inside the last casing string.
Before the trip is started, the Standing Orders to the Driller will have been posted. This will
detail the action that the crew should take in the event a kick is detected.
When directed by the Company Representative, the Contractor Toolpusher will instruct the
Driller to assume that a positive flowcheck has been conducted, and to implement the
prescribed control procedure as detailed in the Standing Orders.
Shut-in procedures to be adopted in the event of a kick while tripping are detailed in Chapter␣4.
However, as a guideline the following procedure should be initiated:
• Without prior notice, the Company Representative will start the Drill by manually raising
the trip tank float to indicate a rapid pit gain.
• The Driller is expected to take the following steps to shut in the well:
1. Stop other operations.
2. Install the drillpipe safety valve.
3. Open the choke line valve.
4. Close the annular preventer.
5. Record the casing and drillpipe pressure.
6. Notify the Company Representative that the well is shut-in.
7. Record the time for the Drill on the IADC Drilling Report.
The Contractor Toolpusher must ensure that the crew are correctly deployed and that each
individual completely understands his responsibilities.
The time taken for the crew to shut in the well should be recorded.
Having shut-in the well, preparations should be made to strip pipe. These preparations should
include lining up the equipment as required, assigning individual responsibilities and
preparing the Stripping Worksheet.
4 D2: Kick while Drilling

The purpose of this Drill is to familiarise the crew with the control procedure that will be
implemented in the event of a kick while drilling.
This Drill may be conducted either in open or cased hole. However if the drill is conducted
when the drillstring is in openhole, the well will not be shut-in .
1-17
March 1995
When the pipe is on bottom, the following procedure can be used as a guideline for the drill:
• Without prior notice, the Company Representative gradually increases the apparent pit
level by manually raising the float.
• The Driller is expected to detect the pit gain and take the following steps:
1. Pick up the kelly (or topdrive) until the tool joint clears the BOPs and
the kelly cock is just above the rotary table.
2. Shut down the pumps.
3. Check the well for flow.
4. Report to the Company Representative.
5. Record the time required for the crew to react and conduct the Drill on
the IADC drilling report.
When the bit has been tripped to the previous casing shoe, a further Drill may be conducted
that will result in the well being shut-in.
Therefore after tripping the bit to the shoe, the following procedure may be used as a guideline
for this Drill:
• Stop tripping operations and install the kelly (or topdrive) and start circulating.
• Having been instructed to do so by the Company Representative, the Driller is expected

to take the following steps to shut-in the well:
1. Pull up until the tool joint clears the BOPs.
2. Shut down the pumps.
3. Open the choke line valve.
4. Close the annular preventer.
5. Record the casing and drillpipe pressure.
* 6. Double check spaceout, close and lock hang-off rams and hang-off pipe
and check that the kelly cock is just above the rotary table.
7. Notify the Company Representative that the well has been shut-in.
8. Record the time taken for the crew to shut-in the well on the IADC drilling
report.
* If on a floating rig
The procedures adopted during these Drills should be in line with the shut-in procedures as
outlined in the Standing Orders. These procedures are outlined in Chapter 4.
1-18
March 1995
5 D3: Diverter Drill

If shallow gas is encountered and the well kicks, blowout conditions may develop very
quickly. It is therefore important that crew initiate control procedures as soon as possible in
the event of a shallow gas kick.
Diverter Drills should therefore be carried out to minimise the reaction time of the crews. A
further objective of the Drill is to check that all diverter equipment is functioning correctly.
The time taken for each diverter function to operate should be recorded. A Drill should be
carried out prior to drilling out of the conductor casing.
The procedures that should be implemented in the event of a shallow gas kick are covered
in Chapter 4. Drills should be designed in line with the specific procedure that will be
adopted in the event of a shallow gas kick.
The Contractor Toolpusher must ensure that the drill crew, and marine staff (offshore), are
correctly deployed during the Drill and that each individual understands his responsibilities.
The time recorded in the log should be the time elapsed from initiation of the Drill until the
rig crew (and marine staff) are ready to initiate emergency procedures.
6 D4: Accumulator Drill

The purpose of the Accumulator Drill is to check the operation of the BOP closing system.
The following specific tests are recommended:
(a) Accumulator precharge pressure test

This test must be conducted on each well prior to spudding and approximately every
30␣days thereafter at convenient times.
On closing units with two or more banks of accumulator bottles, the hydraulic fluid line to
each bank must have a full opening valve to isolate individual banks. The valves must be in
the open position except when accumulators are isolated for testing, servicing or transporting.
The precharge test should be conducted as follows:
1. Shut-off all accumulator pumps.
2. Drain the hydraulic fluid from the accumulator system into the closing unit
fluid reservoir.
3. Remove the guard from the valve stem assembly on top of each
accumulator bottle. Attach the charging and gauging assembly to each
bottle and check the nitrogen precharge.
4. If the nitrogen precharge pressure on any bottle is less than the minimum
acceptable precharge pressure listed below, recharge that bottle (with
nitrogen gas only) to achieve the specified desired precharge pressure.
5. If the nitrogen precharge on any bottle is greater than the maximum

acceptable precharge pressure listed below, a sufficient volume of nitrogen
gas must be bled from the accumulator bottle to provide the specified
desired precharge pressure.
1-19
March 1995
Accumulator Desired Min. Acceptable Max. Acceptable

Working Pressure Precharge Precharge Precharge
Rating Pressure Pressure Pressure
1500 psi 750 psi 750 psi 850 psi

2000 psi 1000 psi 950 psi 1100 psi
3000 psi 1000 psi 950 psi 1100 psi
(b) Accumulator closing test

This test should be conducted before BOP stack tests. The test should be conducted as
follows:
1. Position a joint of drillpipe in the blowout preventer stack.
2. Close off the power supply to the accumulator pumps.
3. Record the initial accumulator pressure.
The pressure should be the designed operating pressure of the accumulators. Adjust
the regulator to provide 1500 psi operating pressure to the annular preventer.
4. Operate the sequence of functions as relevant to the rig type.
For a land rig:

Close the annular preventer and one pipe ram (sized for the pipe in the stack).
Open the HCR valve on the choke line.
For the floating rig:

Close and open all the well control functions (apart from blind/shear rams).
Duplicate the operation of the blind/shear rams.
After each function, record the volume used, the time taken, and the residual
accumulator pressure. The residual accumulator pressure after completing all the
tests must be at least 200 psi greater than the precharge pressure.
5. Turn on the accumulator pumps.
Having completed the tests, recharge the accumulator system to its designed operating
pressure. Record the time taken to recharge the system.
(c) Closing unit pump test

Prior to conducting any tests, the closing unit reservoir should be inspected to be sure it
does not contain any foreign fluid or debris. The closing unit pump capability test should
be conducted before BOP stack tests. This test can be conveniently scheduled either
immediately before or after the accumulator closing time test. The test should be
conducted according to the following procedure.
1. Position a joint of drillpipe in the blowout preventer stack.
2. Isolate the accumulators from the closing unit manifold by closing the
required valves.
1-20
March 1995
3. If the accumulator pumps are powered by air, isolate the rig air system
from the pumps.
A separate closing unit air storage tank should be used to power the pumps during
this test. When a dual power (air and electric) source system is used, both power
supplies should be tested separately.
4. Close the annular preventer and open one choke line failsafe valve
(or␣HCR valve).
Record the time (in seconds) required for the closing unit pumps to close the annular
preventer plus open the choke line valve and obtain 200 psi above the accumulator
precharge pressure on the closing unit manifold. It is recommended that the time
required for the closing unit pumps to accomplish these operations does not exceed
two minutes.
5. Close the choke line failsafe (or HCR valve) and open the annular
preventer.
Open the accumulator system to the closing unit and charge the accumulator system
to its designed operating pressure using the pumps.
7 D5: Well Kill Drill

The objective of this Drill is to give drillcrews the most realistic type of well control␣training
and a feel for the equipment and procedures that they would use to kill a well.
This Drill should be carried out prior to drilling out the intermediate and production strings.
It should never be carried out when openhole sections are exposed. The following procedure
is recommended:
1. Run in hole and tag the top of cement.
2. Pull back one stand and install the kelly (or install topdrive).
3. Break circulation and establish slow circulating rate pressures.
(Consider circulating bottoms up prior to this if the annulus may contain contaminated mud).
4. Carry out standard BOP Drill D2, resulting in the well being shut-in.
5. Consider applying low pressure to the casing (typically 200 psi), bring the
pump up to kill speed controlling the drillpipe pressure according to a
predetermined schedule.
It is important that this opportunity to circulate across a choke is used to maximum effect. A
drillpipe pressure schedule should be drawn up and carefully adhered to.
It is important that the choke operator develops a feel for the lag time between manipulation
of the choke and its subsequent effect on the drillpipe pressure. The lag time should be
recorded, so that it can be used for reference should a kick be taken in the next hole section.
1-21
March 1995
8 Slow Circulating Rate Pressures, SCRs

There are many reasons why a kick should be displaced from the hole at a rate that is
considerably slower than that used during normal drilling. These include:
• To minimise the pressure exerted on the openhole.
• To allow weighting of the mud as the kick is displaced.
• To permit adequate degassing of the returned mud.
• To limit the speed of required choke adjustments.
• To reduce the pressure exerted on well control equipment.
All these factors must be taken into account when deciding at what rate to displace the kick.
However the absolute upper limit for the displacement rate may be restricted by the pressure
rating of the surface equipment, in particular the setting of the pump relief valve. It should
be noted that it is potentially hazardous to displace a kick from the hole when the surface
pressure is close to the relief valve setting.
In order to estimate the circulating pressures during the displacement of a kick, it is necessary
to know the friction pressure in the circulating system at low rates. For this reason, it is
useful to have determined the SCR pressure before a kick is taken.
At a given rate of circulation, the initial circulating pressure can be estimated from the sum
of the shut-in drillpipe pressure and the SCR pressure.
Company policy states that SCRs should be conducted regularly and at least:
• Once per tour (or at 300m intervals during the tour).
• When the bit is changed.
• When the BHA is changed.
• When the mud weight or properties are changed.
The range of circulation rates used will be dependent upon many factors, but should fall
within the limits of 1/2 and 4 barrels per minute. If oil base mud is in the hole, when back on
bottom after a trip, circulate bottoms up before measuring SCRs.
At these relatively low pump speeds the volumetric efficiency of the rig pumps may be
significantly less than at normal speeds used during drilling. It is therefore recommended
that the volumetric efficiency of the rig pumps is checked at low pump speed, such as when
pumping a slug prior to a trip.
It is useful to plot the SCRs on a graph as shown in Figure 1.5. The drillstring internal
friction should be calculated at the SCRs and used to determine the annulus frictional pressure
as shown. The annulus frictional pressure is a major factor that will influence the rate at
which the kick will be displaced from the hole (using standard well control procedure the
annulus frictional pressure will be added to wellbore pressure as the pump is brought up to
speed to kill the well).
1-22
March 1995
STANDPIPE PRESSURE (psi)
PSCR3
Drillstring internal
pressure drop
PSCR2
Annulus pressure
PSCR1
drop
SCR1 SCR2 SCR3
Other SCRs can be selected PUMP OUTPUT

to displace the kick (bbls/min) (stks/min)
WEOX02.005
Figure 1.5 SCR Pressure Plot
A graph similar to Figure 1.5 aids the selection of circulation rates other than these actually
measured and also provides a guide to the size of the annulus circulating losses over a range
of circulation rates.
9 Choke Line Losses

The frictional pressure caused by circulating through the choke line, while displacing a kick
from the well, can cause additional pressures to act in the wellbore.
These pressures are not significant in the case of land, platform and jack-up rigs, but can be
critical in the case of a floating rig.
In most cases however, if the correct procedures are adhered to, the choke line frictional
pressure should be accounted for as the kick is displaced out of the hole. The recommended
method is to monitor the wellhead pressure through the kill line as the pump is started. If
the wellhead pressure remains constant as the pump is brought up to speed then the choke
line friction will in most cases be automatically compensated for. (This technique is outlined
in detail in Chapter 6.)
It is also possible to account for the choke line losses by reducing the choke pressure by an
amount equal to the choke line loss as the pump is brought up to speed. This method is not
considered to be as reliable as using the kill line monitor.
1-23
March 1995
It is important that the choke line frictional pressure is accurately known at a wide range of
circulating rates. From this information the additional load on the wellbore can be assessed
at a range of displacement rates and subsequently the most suitable rate can be selected.
The following procedure should be implemented in order to properly assess the choke line
frictional pressures at slow circulating rates. This procedure should be carried out initially
when the BOP and riser are installed and before drilling out of each subsequent casing shoe.
1. Install suitable pressure gauges to record standpipe and choke pressures

during circulation.
2. Record SCR pressure at a range of rates from 1/2 to 4 bbl/min down drillpipe
and up the riser.
3. Open choke line valves.
4. Line up choke manifold to route flow across a fully opened remote operated
choke. Route returned flow through the poorboy gas separator to the
shakers.
5. Space out to ensure no tool joint is opposite annular preventer.
6. Close annular preventer.
7. Circulate down the drillpipe and up through the choke line until returns are
uniform.
8. Record SCR pressure at same rates as before. Record the choke pressure
at each rate.
9. Calculate the choke line frictional pressure at each rate.
Figure 1.6 shows a form that can be used to record the data. The form also shows how to
determine the choke line friction pressure from the recorded data. Figure 1.7 shows an
example determination of choke line losses.
The choke line losses should be adjusted for changes in mud weight as shown on the form.
The accuracy of this adjustment is however questionable over a wide range of mud weights.
In order to verify choke line losses after drilling out of the casing shoe, it is acceptable to
isolate the well and pump down the choke line at the range of slow circulating rates.
1-24
March 1995
Figure 1.6 Choke Line Pressure Loss Data Sheet
CHOKE LINE PRESSURE LOSS DATA SHEET
WELL No 25 RIG RIG 19 DATE 25/7/87

WELL STATUS DURING TEST 133/8in CASING RUN AND TESTED / 135/8in STACK INSTALLED AND TESTED
PROPERTIES OF THE MUD IN THE HOLE DURING THE TEST 1.4SG OBM/PV24CP/YP100 lb/100ft2 RECORDED BY J. P.
MEASURED CORRECTED CORRECTED CORRECTED
CHOKE LINE CHOKE LINE CHOKE LINE CHOKE LINE
CIRCULATION 6.5
……………in ……………in SCR SCR CHOKE LOSS LOSS LOSS LOSS
RATE LINER LINER PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE
PUMP RATE PUMP RATE UP RISER UP AT SCR 1.4 SG
AT…………… AT…………… AT…………… AT……………
CHOKE LINE MUD WEIGHT MUD WEIGHT MUD WEIGHT MUD WEIGHT
(bbl/min) (SPM) (SPM) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)

RIG PUMPS: NATIONAL 12 - P - 160
4.78 40 985 1435 80 370
1-25
3.58 30 680 985 55 250

2.39 20 400 590 40 150
CEMENT PUMP - HT - 400 (4in PLUNGER)

1.00 120 190 25 45
0.5 50 65 0 10
0.25 0 0 0 0
(1) (2) (3) (2)-(1)-(3)

March 1995
WEOX02.006
Figure 1.7 An example Determination of Choke Line Losses
CIRCULATING @ 20SPM UP
CIRCULATING @ 20SPM UP RISER CHOKE LINE (CHOKE WIDE OPEN)
400 600 50
PSCR @ 20SPM = 400psi POC = 50psi
PCL = PSCR (up choke line) – PSCR (up riser) – POC

= 600 – 400 – 50
PCL = 150psi
where PSCR = Slow Circulating Rate Pressure (psi)

PCL = Choke Line Pressure Loss at SCR (psi)
POC = Choke Pressure recorded at SCR with choke
wide open (psi)
WEOX02.007
1-26
March 1995
1.4 USE OF THE MUD SYSTEM
Paragraph Page
1 General 1-28
2 Pit Management 1-28
3 Building Mud Weight 1-29
4 Dealing with Gas at Surface 1-31
5 Chemical Stocks 1-34
Illustrations
1.8 An example Mud Gas Separator 1-32
– operating at maximum capacity
1-27
March 1995
1 General
Well control contingency plans should outline the manner in which the mud system will be
utilised during standard well control operations.
This section is intended to highlight the major factors that will determine the most satisfactory
arrangement of the mud system in such circumstances.
2 Pit Management
The following guidelines should be considered when specifying pit arrangements:
(a) While drilling a critical hole section

• Keep the active mud system surface area as small as is practical to ease kick detection.
Any reserve mud stocks in the tanks should be positively isolated from the active
system. Ensure that the gates on the trough are sealing properly.
• Adequate reserve stocks of mud should be held; the volume and weight of which
will be determined by the nature of the next hole section.
• Ensure all pit level systems and tank isolating valves are working correctly before
drilling into possible gas-bearing zones.
• Keep all mud treatments and pit transfers to the absolute minimum at critical sections
of the well. Ensure that the Driller and the Mud Logging Engineer are aware in
advance of any changes to the system.
• Crew safety meetings should discuss the problem of gas kicks, especially if oil
based mud is in use, and emphasise the importance of early detection. Mud
engineering and mud logging personnel should attend these meetings.
(b) When displacing a kick

The major factors that will determine the most satisfactory pit arrangement for displacing
a kick include the following:
• The technique that will be used to displace the kick.
• The usable surface pit volume in relation to the hole volume.
• The method of weighing up the mud.
• How to deal with the kick when it is displaced to the surface.
• How to deal with the pit gain caused by influx expansion during displacement.
• How to deal with contaminated returns.
• The nature and toxicity of the influx fluid.
• The monitoring of pit levels in the active system.
1-28
March 1995
The kick can be displaced from the hole using either the Wait and Weight Method or the
Driller’s Method. The most satisfactory arrangement of the pits will be different for each
technique and clearly will be rig-specific. There are three different stages at which the mud
can be weighted up for these two techniques:
• The Wait and Weight Method
– In a typical situation when it is impractical to weight up a complete hole volume

prior to displacement of the kick. This will therefore entail that some mud is weighted
while the kick is displaced from the hole. The volume that is weighted prior to
displacement of the kick will depend, for a given hole capacity, on the rate at which
baryte can be added into the system in relation to the desired rate of displacement.
– In the unusual situation when there is adequate surface volume, a complete hole
volume of kill mud can be prepared before displacement of the kick.
• The Driller’s Method
– In this case the mud is weighted either while the kick is displaced with original
weight mud or after the first circulation depending on the availability of baryte and
tank space.
3 Building Mud Weight

(a) Baryte delivery to the mud pits
The rate at which baryte can be added to the original mud influences the time required
to increase the weight of a volume of mud. For this reason it is important to measure the
rate at which both the conventional hopper system and the high rate system (if fitted)
can supply baryte.
If the Driller’s Method is used this will determine the time required to build the mud
weight after the kick has been displaced from the hole.
If the Wait and Weight Method is used, the maximum rate at which baryte can be supplied
to the mud will:
• Determine the time required to weight the hole volume of mud before the kick is
displaced.
• Or it may limit the rate at which the kick can be displaced, if the mud is weighted as
the kick is displaced.
The maximum rate at which the mud can be weighted can be determined for a given
required mud weight increase from the following formula:
Maximum possible rate = Baryte delivery rate (lb/min)

at which the mud can Baryte required to weight up (lb/bbl)
be weighted (bbl/min)
1-29
March 1995
Therefore for the following example:
Required mud weight increase = 0.2 SG (from 1.5 SG to 1.7 SG)
Baryte required = 1490 X (1.7 - 1.5) = 117 lb/bbl

4.25 - 1.7
If the maximum barytes delivery rate for the rig = 350 lb/min
Then:
Maximum rate at which the = 350 = 3 bbl/min

mud can be weighted 117
This figure therefore gives an indication of the maximum displacement rate if the mud
is weighted as the kick is displaced from the hole.
(b) Baryte storage

When possible at least one full barytes storage tank should be pressured up at all times
and the bulk delivery system tested regularly.
The bulk system should be included in the rig PMS (Preventive Maintenance) system.
(c) Building viscosity into the mud

There may be well control situations which require that considerable volumes of weighted
mud are built from a water or oil base. This may be the case in the following situations:
• If considerable losses are experienced.
• If the required volume of kill weight mud is greater than the surface stocks of active
and reserve weighted mud.
• If the returns are severely contaminated and have to be dumped.
The limiting factor for an oil base mud may be the rate at which viscosity can be built
into the base oil. Building viscosity is usually a less important factor when water base
muds are used.
Shear equipment is required for building viscosity using clay viscosifiers in new base
oil. Some offshore rigs have jet line mixers to help build viscosity.
In circumstances in which large volumes of new oil mud must be built, it would be
useful to know the rate at which new mud can be sheared to a level at which barytes can
be suspended.
This rate is determined by shearing a known volume of new mud until the minimum
viscosity is reached. As a guideline, the minimum viscosity would be represented by a
yield point of 10, and a 10 second gel reading of 3.
In emergency situations, viscosity can be built quickly using an oil mud polymer (Baroid’s
LFR 2000 as an example) at 4 lb/bbl in conjunction with organophilic clays. However,
it is recognised that these polymers can cause high temperature gelation of the mud, and
as such, they are not recommended for use in high temperature wells.
1-30
March 1995
(d) Volume increase due to baryte addition

The volume of a given amount of mud will increase as baryte is added to it. This may be
significant when large mud weight increase is required in a large volume of mud.
The volume increase due to baryte addition can be determined from the following
relationship:
Volume increase = 1.48 bbl per metric ton of baryte added
Therefore in the following situation:
The required addition of baryte = 200 lb/bbl
Volume to weight up = 600 bbl
Volume increase due to baryte addition
= 600 X 200 X 1.48 = 80 bbl

2205
4 Dealing with Gas at Surface

It is important that suitable equipment is available on the rig to deal with the influx once it
is displaced to surface.
Returns should be piped through the mud gas separator and then on to the degasser for
further treatment.
(a) The mud gas separator (poorboy)

The mud gas separator should be lined up at all times when a kick is being displaced.
The separator is used to remove large gas bubbles from the mud and to deal with a flow
of gas once the influx is at surface.
There will be a limit to the volume of gas that each separator can safely deal with. When
this limit is exceeded, there exists the possibility that gas will blow through into the
shaker header box.
An estimation can be made of the maximum gas flowrate that the separator can handle.
The limiting factors will be the back pressure at the outlet to the vent line in relation to
the hydrostatic head of fluid at the mud outlet of the separator. When the back pressure
due to the gas flow is equal to, or greater than, the hydrostatic head available at the mud
outlet, the gas will blow through to the shaker header tank. See Figure 1.8.
In order to minimise the possibility of a gas blow-through, the vent line should be as
straight as possible and have a large ID. The mud outlet should be configured to develop
a suitable hydrostatic head (minimum recommended head is 10 feet). See Figure 1.8.
1-31
March 1995
The back pressure due to the flow of gas should be monitored with a pressure gauge as
shown in Figure 1.8. Some warning of the possibility of a gas blow-through will be
given when the registered pressure approaches the hydrostatic head of the fluid in the
discharge line. It should be noted that the maximum hydrostatic head available may not
be that of the mud in the event that large volumes of oil or condensate are displaced
to␣surface.
If the safe operating limit of the separator is approached, the choke can be closed in
(while ensuring that the well is not overpressured) or the flow switched to the overboard
line or the burn pit.
GAS OUTLET
8in ID MINIMUM
GAS BACK PRESSURE

REGISTERED AT
THIS GAUGE
(Typically 0 to 20psi)
STEEL TARGET
PLATE
INLET
INSPECTION
COVER
SECTION A-A
APPROX 30in OD TANGENTIAL INLET
HEIGHT
1/2 OF
A A
4in ID INLET-TANGENTIAL TO SHELL

FROM CHOKE MANIFOLD
BRACE
10ft MINIMUM INSPECTION

HEIGHT COVER
HALF CIRCLE
BAFFLES ARRANGED
IN A ‘SPIRAL’
CONFIGURATION
TO SHAKER HEADER
TANK
MAXIMUM HEAD AVAILABLE

DEVELOPED BY THIS
HEIGHT OF FLUID
eg: 10ft HEAD AT 1.75 SG
GIVES 7.6psi MAXIMUM CAPACITY
10ft APPROX
8in NOMINAL
‘U’ TUBE
2in DRAIN
4in CLEAN-OUT OR FLUSH LINE WEOX02.008
PLUG
Figure 1.8 An example Mud Gas Separator

– operating at maximum capacity
1-32
March 1995
(b) The degasser

The degasser should be lined up at all times during the well control operation.
The degasser is designed to remove the small bubbles of gas that are left in the mud
after the mud has been through the mud gas separator.
It is important that the degasser is working properly and as such it should be tested
every tour. While drilling with gas cut returns, the degasser can be checked as follows:
1. Measure actual (gas cut) mud weight at the shaker header box using a
non pressurised mud balance.
2. Measure actual mud weight at the degasser outlet using a non

pressurised mud balance.
If the actual mud weight at the outlet of the degasser is greater than the actual mud
weight at the inlet, then the degasser is working. If the mud weight at this stage is
not equal to the active system mud weight, then either the degasser is not working
properly, or the returns are at a lower weight than the mud in the active system.
If the actual mud weight measured at this stage is equal to the active system mud
weight, then the degasser is working properly.
3. Measure mud weight at the degasser outlet and the shaker header box
using a pressurised mud balance.
If the actual mud weight at the outlet of the degasser is equal to the reading on␣the
pressurised mud balance, the degasser has removed all the gas from the mud.
(c) Overboard lines/Flare lines

It is recommended that a second method of dealing with severely gas cut returns be
available at the rigsite, whether on land or offshore. This will generally be either an
overboard line, or a flare line to the burn pit on land.
It should be easy to switch the returns from the mud system to the flare line. It may be
necessary to use the flare line during a well control operation in the following situations:
• The gas flowrate is too high for the mud gas separator.
• Hydrates are forming in the gas vent line from the mud gas separator.
• The gas is found to contain H2S.
• The mud system is overloaded.
Lines that are required to handle high velocity gas must be as straight as possible to
minimise erosion. Significant erosion is likely to occur in the path of high velocity gas
and solids, therefore the redundancy in flowlines and manifolds downstream of the choke
must be analysed on all rigs.
1-33
March 1995
5 Chemical Stocks
(a) Baryte and mud chemical stocks
Company policy details the minimum stocks of baryte and mud chemicals that should
be held at the rigsite. The policy states that:
‘Sufficient weighting material stocks must be maintained on site such that the entire
mud circulating volume can be raised by a minimum of 0.25 SG (See formula in
Paragraph 3). Reserve stocks of bentonite or viscosifier must also be on site to
enable this increase in mud weight to be effected’.
‘Where transport and logistics are not assured (offshore and remote locations) the
minimum onsite weighting material stock must be 100 tonnes’.
This is a minimum standard, and as such, the Company Representative may wish to
stock a greater quantity of baryte and chemicals.
(b) Cement stocks

Cement stocks should not drop below the quantity of cement and additives that will be
required to set 2 X 150m of cement plugs in the hole section being drilled.
Additionally, in high pressure wells, an abandonment plug recipe should be onsite prior
to drilling into the reservoir. Batch mix tanks should also be onsite during the drilling of
such reservoir sections.
1-34
March 1995
1.5 KICK TOLERANCE
Paragraph Page
1 General 1-36
2 Kick Tolerance Calculation Methods 1-36
3 Procedure for Kick Tolerance Calculations 1-37
4 Considerations for High Angle and Horizontal Wells 1-40
5 When to Calculate Kick Tolerance 1-41
6 Excel Kick Tolerance Calculator 1-42
Illustrations
1.9 Kick Tolerance Values Through a Zone
of Increasing Pore Pressure 1-43
1.10 Excel Kick Tolerance Calculator – Example Calculations 1-44
1-35
Rev 1 March 1995
1 General
Many definitions of kick tolerance have been used in the drilling industry. Within BP, Kick
Tolerance is defined as the maximum volume of kick influx that can be safely
shut-in and circulated out of the well without breaking down the formation at
the openhole weak point.
It is now an accepted part of the Company Casing Design policy to determine the casing
setting depth by the Limited Kick Method. It is therefore particularly important that the
kick tolerance in critical hole sections be accurately monitored.
This section explains how to calculate kick tolerance and when to calculate kick tolerance.
In critical hole sections, it is important to calculate kick tolerance on a regular basis. This is
because kick tolerance changes as a function of hole depth, BHA geometry, mud weight,
formation pressure and influx type, etc.
2 Kick Tolerance Calculation Methods

Depending upon how kick tolerance is defined, a number of methods exist for kick tolerance
calculations. In general, these methods can be classified into two categories:
1 Simple Methods
In these methods kick tolerance calculations are simplified based on several assumptions:
• The kick influx is a “single bubble”.
• At the initial shut-in condition, the influx is at the bottom of the openhole.
• The effects of the gas migration, gas dispersion, gas solubility, downhole temperature
and the gas compressibility are ignored.
Although these assumptions may seem unrealistic, the simple methods have gained wide
acceptance in the drilling industry because they are simple and generally yield
conservative (safer) kick tolerance. However these methods have an inherent
shortcoming: they do not measure how quickly an influx will grow. This is to say that in
some cases formation deliverability may be such that the well could not be shut in
before the kick tolerance volume was exceeded. Therefore the same kick tolerance
between two wells may not mean that they share the same level of risk !
2 Computer Kick Simulators
In the recent years many sophisticated computer simulators have been developed which
can provide a good approximation of kick conditions from the stage when it flows into
the wellbore to that when it is circulated out. In the simulations, assumptions used in
the simple methods are replaced by mathematical models.
Among many other applications, the kick simulators can be used for kick tolerance
calculations. They can predict the maximum pressures at any point of the annulus and
the results are more accurate and less conservative than using the simple methods. In
addition, as simulators can simulate how quickly an influx will flow into the wellbore,
they can predict how much time the rig crew have to shut in the well before the influx
exceeds the kick tolerance limit. Therefore simulators can be used to provide direct
indications in the level of risk involved under various scenarios.
1-36
March
Rev 1 1995
March 1995
However, due to complexity, kick simulators are recommended only in the situations
where kick tolerance is considered critical based on the simple methods.
Some computer kick simulators are available from the Drilling & Completions Branch,
BP Exploration, Sunbury.
3 Procedure for Kick Tolerance Calculations

The method illustrated in the following is one of the simple methods. The method calculates
the maximum allowable kick influx volume when the well is shut in. The method considers
two scenarios:
• When the influx is at the bottom of the hole at the initial shut in condition
• When the top of the influx has been displaced to the openhole weak point (with the
original mud weight)
The following procedure can be used to calculate the kick tolerance:
1 Estimate the safety factor to be applied to the Maximum Allowable Annular

Surface Pressure (MAASP)
When the influx is displaced from the hole, there will be additional pressures acting in
the wellbore. The following are some of the possible causes of such additional pressures
during circulation:
• Choke operator error (depending upon the choke’s condition, operator ’s

experience,␣etc.)
• Annular friction pressure (depending on the hole size, mud properties, etc.)
• Choke line losses (in particular on floating rigs)
The safety factor (SF) to be applied to the MAASP will be the sum of these additional
pressures. The drilling engineer must use his/her judgement to determine the most
appropriate safety factor.
2 Calculate the Maximum Allowable Annular Surface Pressure (MAASP)

Without Breaking Down the Weak Point Formation:
MAASP = Pleak – 1.421 x MW x TVD wp – SF (psi)
where:
MAASP Maximum allowable annular surface pressure (psi)
MW Mud weight in hole (SG)
Pleak Leak-off pressure at the openhole weak point (psi)
SF Safety factor (psi)
TVDwp Vertical depth at the openhole weak point (m)
It should be seen that MAASP is determined based on the consideration of the formation
fracturing pressure at the openhole weak point. So it is considered only when there is a
full mud column from the weak point to the surface (i.e. the influx is still below the
weak point). If lighter fluids (such as a gas influx) occupy the annulus above the weak
point, the surface pressure in excess of MAASP may not cause downhole failure.
Therefore from the moment the top of an influx has been displaced past the openhole
1-37
Rev 1 March 1995
weak point, MAASP is no longer a consideration and may be exceeded by a margin

which should be determined based on the casing burst strength and the pressure ratings
of BOP stack and choke manifold.
The method for estimating the position of the influx top is described in Vol.I, Chapter 6,
Section 6.1.
3 Calculate the maximum allowable height of the influx in the openhole

section:
MAASP – ( Pf – 1.421X MW X TVD h)

H max = (m)
1.421 X (MW – Gi)
where:
Hmax Maximum allowable height of the influx (m)
Gi Influx gradient (SG)
Pf Formation pore pressure (psi)
TVD h Vertical depth of openhole (bit) (m)
4 Calculate the maximum allowable influx volume that Hmax corresponds to

at the initial shut-in conditions
Vbh = H max x C1 / cos(θ bh) (bbl)
where:
Vbh Maximum allowable influx volume at initial shut-in condition (bbl)
C1 Annular capacity around BHA (bbl/m)
θ bh Hole angle in the bottom hole section (degree)
If the bottom hole section is horizontal (or above 90 degree), the hole angle used in the
calculation should be the openhole angle immediately above the horizontal section. The
kick tolerance should be the sum of the calculated volume (Vbh ) plus the annular volume
of the horizontal section.
In cases where Hmax /cos(θbh ) is greater than the length of BHA, the maximum allowable
volume (Vbh) should be calculated partly based on the annular capacity around BHA
and partly around drillpipe.
5 Calculate the maximum allowable influx volume that Hmax corresponds to

when the top of the influx is at the openhole weak point
Vwp = Hmax x C2 / cos(θ wp) (bbl)
where:
Vwp Maximum allowable influx volume when top of the influx is at the openhole
weak point (bbl)
C2 Annular openhole capacity around drillpipe (bbl/m)
θwp Hole angle in the openhole section below the weak point (degree)
In cases where Hmax /cos(θwp ) is greater than the openhole drillpipe length below the
weak point, the maximum allowable influx volume (Vwp) should be calculated partly
based on the annular openhole capacity around drillpipe and partly around BHA.
1-38
March
Rev 1995 1995
1 March
6 Convert the maximum allowable influx volume at the weak point (Vwp ) to
what would be at the initial shut in condition
Based on Boyle’s law, the maximum allowable influx volume at initial shut-in
corresponding to Vwp will be:
V bh' = V wp X Pleak (bbl)

Pf
7 The actual kick tolerance should be the smaller of Vbh (Step 4) and Vbh'
(Step 6)
Example:
Bit depth: 4000 m
Current hole size: 12-1/4"
Hole angle: Vertical
Mud weight in hole: 1.60 SG
BHA length / OD: 182 m / 8"
Drillpipe OD: 5"
Estimated pore pressure at 4000 m: 1.58 SG
Last casing shoe: 2695 m
Leak-off test EMW: 1.72 SG
Annular back pressure at SCR: 70 psi
Safety margin for choke operator error: 150 psi
1. Estimate the safety margin to be applied to MAASP:
SF = 70 + 150 = 220 psi
2. Calculate MAASP:
Leak-off pressure, Pleak = 1.421 x 1.72 x 2695 = 6587 psi
MAASP = 6587 - 1.421 x 1.6 x 2695 - 220 = 240 psi
3. Calculate the maximum allowable influx height in the openhole section:
Pore pressure gradient, P f = 1.421 x 1.58 x 4000 = 8981 psi
240 - (8981 - 1.421X 1.6X 4000)

H max = = 178m
1.421 X (1.60 - 0.2)
4. Calculate the maximum allowable influx volume at the initial shut-in condition:
Annular capacity around BHA, C1= (12.252 - 8 2) / 313.8 = 0.2743 (bbl/m)
As the BHA length (182 m) is longer than Hmax (178 m), so the influx is around BHA
only when it is at the bottom of the hole. Therefore:
Vbh = 178 x 0.2743 = 49 bbl
5. Calculate the maximum allowable influx volume when the top of influx is at the
casing shoe:
Annular capacity around openhole DP, C2= (12.252 - 5 2) / 313.8 = 0.3985 (bbl/m)
Openhole DP length = 4000 - 2695 - 182 = 1123 m ( > H max of 178 m)
1-39
Rev 1 March 1995
Vwp = 178 x 0.3985 = 71 bbl
6. Convert Vwp to the initial shut-in condition:
Vbh' = 71 x 6587 / 8981 = 52 bbl
7. Therefore the actual kick tolerance is 49 bbl.
4 Considerations for High Angle

and Horizontal Wells
In high angle and horizontal wells, reservoirs are often drilled at a high or horizontal
angle with the last casing or liner string set on top of the reservoir. When considering
kick tolerance for the reservoir section, it is often the case that the maximum allowable
gas height (determined by step 3 in the previous section) extends from the openhole
bottom to inside the casing/liner. This implies that the well can tolerate an infinite volume
of gas influx without fracturing the openhole weak point.
On the other hand, because of the long openhole section through the reservoir in a high
angle or horizontal well, the influx volume can be potentially high. So when the influx
is circulated to surface, it may fill up the entire annuli of the vertical and low angle
sections and result in very high choke pressures at surface. Therefore, the kick tolerance
volume in this case should be determined not only by the formation fracture gradient at
the openhole weak point but also by the maximum allowable surface pressure based on
the casing burst strength and the pressure ratings of the surface equipment.
When drilling a high angle or horizontal well, the following procedure should be used
to determine the kick tolerance:
a. Calculate kick tolerance volume as V1 using the method as described in

the previous section (Step 1 through 7)
b. Determine the maximum allowable surface pressure Psurf based on the

casing burst strength and the pressure ratings of the surface equipment
(BOP stack, choke manifold, etc.). Note its difference with MAASP which
is based on the formation fracture gradient at the weak point.
c Calculate the maximum allowable gas height Hmax when the gas influx
top has reached the surface:
(Psurf - SF) - (Pf - 1.421X MW X TVD h)

H max =
1.421 X (MW - Gi)
where:
Gi Influx gradient (SG)
Pf Formation pore pressure (psi)
SF Safety factor mainly determined by the choke operator error margin (psi)
TVD h Vertical depth of openhole (bit) (m)
1-40
March
Rev 1995 1995
1 March
d Calculate the influx volume that Hmax corresponds to when the gas influx
top has reached the surface:
Vsurf = Hmax x Ccsn (bbl)
where:
Vsurf Maximum allowable influx volume when the influx top reaches surface (bbl)
Ccsn Annular capacity in the casing near surface (bbl/m)
e Convert Vsurf to the corresponding volume at the initial shut-in condition:
Psurf
V 2 = V surf X (bbl)
Pf
f The actual kick tolerance volume is the smaller of V2 (step e) and V 1

(step␣a).
5 When to Calculate Kick Tolerance

Company policy states that:
“The kick tolerance of the weakest known point of the hole section being drilled must be
updated continuously whilst drilling.
If the kick tolerance is less than 50 bbl the Drilling Superintendent must be informed.
If the kick tolerance is less than 25 bbl for offshore wells or 10 bbl for land wells, drilling
may only continue when dispensation has been given by the Manager Drilling in town.”
Kick tolerance will change if there is a change in hole depth, mud weight, formation pressure
or BHA. Therefore kick tolerance must be constantly re-evaluated as the well is drilled, not
only based on the current condition but also on the future conditions which are expected to
occur deeper in the well.
The frequency with which the kick tolerance should be re-evaluated is dependent on the
nature of the well. However, in hole sections where kick tolerance is likely to be a critical
factor, the following guidelines should be considered:
• After LO test, evaluate the kick tolerance at suitable intervals throughout the next hole
section with a number of mud weights that are likely to be used.
• If the hole section contains a zone of rapid pore pressure increase, the kick tolerance
should be evaluated frequently based on the anticipated pore pressure.
• If any factors that affect the kick tolerance (such as mud weight, BHA) change as the
section is drilled, the kick tolerance below that point in the section should be re-evaluated.
• At each stage in the hole section, the Company Representative and the Drilling Engineer
must assess the possibility of the pore pressure developing in a manner different to that
predicted and hence its effect on the kick tolerance.
1-41
Rev 1 March 1995
Figure 1.9 shows an example of the type of calculations that should be worked. The kick
tolerance figures shown are those that would typically be calculated before a transition
zone. As shown, the current bit depth is 3500 m and the kick tolerance has been calculated
at various intervals across the zone of increasing pore pressure. The kick tolerance has been
calculated for the mud weight currently in use, for the maximum mud weight anticipated for
the section, and intermediate weight.
From these figures, it is clear that a serious situation would develop if a kick was taken
from the high pressure zone with the mud weight currently in the hole. This might occur if
either the pore pressure developed more rapidly than predicted, or if the steady increase in
pore pressure was undetected at the surface.
The kick tolerance figures for the intermediate mud weight show that even at this weight,
the kick tolerance would be small if the high pressure zone was unexpectedly encountered.
The kick tolerance is finally calculated at the maximum mud weight. These figures show a
final minimum kick tolerance of 50 bbl at that mud weight. The table also shows the kick
tolerance if the pore pressure developed higher than predicted of 1.6 SG. In general these
figures indicate that drilling should proceed cautiously through the zone of increasing pore
pressure. On the basis of these figures, it may be decided to weight up the mud a certain
amount before the predicted increase in pressure occurs.
The decisions that are made on the basis of kick tolerance figures such as these will be
largely dependent upon the particulars of each situation, including the level of confidence
placed in the pore pressure prediction.
6 Excel Kick Tolerance Calculator

Figure 1.10 is an Excel Kick Tolerance Calculator, which can be activated to calculate the
kick tolerance by entering data into green-shaded cells. The kick tolerance volume, together
with a range of other parameters, will be displayed automatically. The calculator is based on
the same method as described in the previous sections, except that it uses the pressures at
the mid-point of the gas influx. So the calculator is slightly less conservative.
1-42
Rev 1 1995
March March 1995
Figure 1.9 Kick Tolerance Values though a Zone

of increasing Pore Pressure
PORE PRESSURE (psi)
3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000
CASING SHOE
Maximum Allowable Pressure
9000 13.8ppg EMW
10,000 9.2ppg
DEPTH
(ft)
11,000
CURRENT BIT DEPTH

MW = 9.6ppg
12,000
9.2ppg
11.3ppg
13.2ppg
13,000
FOR CURRENT MW (9.6ppg) FOR MUD AT 12ppg FOR MUD AT 13.3ppg

TVD MW PORE KTOL TVD MW PORE KTOL TVD MW PORE KTOL
(ft) (ppg) PRESSURE (bbl) (ft) (ppg) PRESSURE (bbl) (ft) (ppg) PRESSURE (bbl)
(ppg) (ppg) (ppg)
11,480 9.6 9.2 600 11,480 12 9.2 600 11,480 13.3 9.2 600
12,470 9.6 9.2 600 12,470 12 9.2 600 12,470 13.3 9.2 600
12,630 9.6 10.2 460 12,630 12 10.2 450 12,630 13.3 10.2 450
12,795 9.6 11.3 215 12,795 12 11.3 246 12,795 13.3 11.3 280
12,960 9.6 12.3 30 12,960 12 12.3 112 12,960 13.3 12.3 153
12,990 9.6 12.4 7
13,123 9.6 13.2 (0) 13,123 12 13.2 10 13,123 13.3 13.2 50
12,960 9.6 13.2 (0) 12,960 12 13.2 10 13,123 13.3 13.3 35

13,123 12 13.3 (0) 13,123 13.5 13.2 40
WEOX02.009
1-43
Rev 1 March 1995
Figure 1.10 Example Calculations using Excel Kick

Tolerance Calculator
KICK TOLERANCE CALCULATOR

For Vertical, Deviated or Horizontal Wells
Version 1.2, March 1995
Well: Example Calculation Units: (UK/US): UK
Kick Zone Parameters: Input Messages:

1 Openhole Size ? (inch) 12.25
2 Measured Depth ? (m) 4000
3 Vertical Depth (m) ? (m) 4000
4 Horizontal Length (Angle>87 deg) ? (m) 0 Non-Horizontal
5 Tangent Angle Above Horizontal ? (deg) 0
6 Min Pore Pressure Gradient ? (sg) 1.580
7 Max Pore Pressure Gradient ? (sg) 1.600
Weak Point Parameters:
8 Measured Depth ? (m) 2695
9 Vertical Depth ? (m) 2695
10 Section Angle (<87 deg) ? (deg) 0
11 Fracture Gradient / EMW ? (sg) 1.720
Other Parameters:
12 Bottom Hole Assembly OD ? (inch) 8
13 Bottom Hole Assembly Length ? (m) 182
14 Drillpipe OD ? (inch) 5
15 Gas Hydrostatic Pres Gradient ? (sg) 0.2
16 Pressure Safety Factor ? (psi) 220
17 Mud Weight in Hole ? (sg) 1.600
Annular Capacity Around BHA: (bbl/m) 0.27426

Annular Capacity Around DP: (bbl/m) 0.39854
Fracturing Pres at Weak Point: (psi) 6587
Max Allowable Shut-in Csg Pres: (psi) 240
Comments:
Min Pore Pressure at Kick Zone: (psi) 8981
Maximum Allowable Gas Height: (m) 178
Kick Tolerance at Min Pore Pres: (bbl) 48.7
Max Pore Pressure at Kick Zone: (psi) 9094

Maximum Allowable Gas Height: (m) 120
Kick Tolerance at Max Pore Pres: (bbl) 33.0
1.60
Pore Pressure Gradient
1.60
1.59
33 1.60
1.59 41 1.59
49 1.58
1.58
1.58
1.57
33 41 49
Kick Tolerance (bbl)
For more infor or help, please contact YUEJIN LUO, BP Exploration, Sunbury, Tel: 853-2424, Fax: 853-4183
1-44
March
Rev 1995 1995
1 March
Figure 1.10 Example Calculations using Excel Kick

Tolerance Calculator (cont'd)
APPENDIX:
Maximum Allowable Gas Influx Volume
Based on Surface Equipment Rating & Casing Burst
Max Allowable Surface Pressure ? (psi) 5000

Casing ID in Surface Section ? (inch) 12.515
Annular Capacity: (bbl/m) 0.419456
At Minimum Pore Pressure Gradient: Comments:

Maximum Allowable Gas Height
When Gas Arrives at Surface: (m) 2460
Max Allowable Gas Vol. on Shut-in: (bbl) 613
At Maximum Pore Pressure Gradient:

Maximum Allowable Gas Height
When Gas Arrives at Surface: (m) 2403
Max Allowable Gas Vol. on Shut-in: (bbl) 547
1.60
Pore Pressure Gradient
1.60
547 1.60
580 1.59
1.59
613 1.58
1.59
1.58
540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620
Max Allowable Gas Volume on Shut-in (bbl)
For more infor or help, please contact YUEJIN LUO, BP Exploration, Sunbury, Tel: 853-2424, Fax: 853-4183
1-45
Rev 1 March 1995
2 THE PREVENTION OF A KICK

Section Page
2.1 CORRECT TRIPPING PROCEDURES 2-1
2.2 MAINTAIN SUITABLE HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE 2-9
2.3 CONTROL LOST CIRCULATION 2-17
Formation pressures are contained by the hydrostatic pressure of a column of drilling

fluid – this is primary well control.
If primary control is lost the blowout preventers are closed and secondary well control
techniques are used to kill the well.
Primary control is maintained by ensuring that a full column of drilling fluid of an

appropriate weight is allowed to exert its full hydrostatic pressure in the hole.
Industry wide experience has shown that the most common causes of loss of
primary control and hance the well kicks are:
• Swabbing during trips.
• Not adequately filling the hole during a trip.
• Insufficient mud weight.

• Lost circulation.
The evidence also shows that the majority of kicks have occurred during trips.
This chapter outlines the measures that are required to eliminate or minimise the risk
of a kick due to the above causes, and to minimise influx volumes if a kick occurs.
March 1995
2.1 CORRECT TRIPPING PROCEDURE

Paragraph Page
1 General 2-2
2 Prior to Tripping 2-2
3 Tripping Procedure 2-5
4 Special Procedure for Oil Base Muds 2-8
Illustrations
2.1 Typical Trip Tank Hook-up – on a floating rig 2-3
2.2 BP Trip Sheet – example of a completed sheet 2-4
2.3 Example of Standing Orders for Driller 2-6
2-1
March 1995
1 General
Industry wide experience has shown that the majority of well control problems have occurred
during trips. It is therefore particularly important that special attention is paid to ensuring
correct tripping procedure.
During tripping the potential exists for a significant reduction in bottomhole pressure due to
the following effects:
• Reduction in ECD as the pumps are stopped.
• Swab pressures due to pipe motion.
• Reduction in height of the mud column as pipe is removed from the well.
The procedures required to deal with an influx when the pipe is off bottom are not so
straightforward as when the pipe is on bottom. Every effort must therefore be made to ensure
both that the well is stable prior to initiating a trip out of the hole, and that correct tripping
procedure is strictly adhered to.
2 Prior to Tripping
Considerable preparation is required before the trip is commenced. The following are among
the most important actions that should be carried out prior to tripping:
• Circulate the hole
– The mud should be conditioned to ensure that tripping will not cause excessive swab/
surge pressures.
– Any entrained gas or cuttings should be circulated out.
– The mud weight should be such as to ensure an adequate overbalance will exist at all
times during the trip.
• Determine the maximum pipe speed
– Swab/surge pressures should be calculated at various tripping speeds using the

appropriate formulae. (See Chapter 3, Volume 2.)
– The maximum average pipe speed should be selected bearing in mind the estimated
overbalance or trip margin.
• Line up the trip tank
– Company policy states that:
“A trip tank must be available on every rig and be complete with a mechanically
operated indicator of the trip tank level, visible from the Driller’s position. The trip
tank level must also be monitored from the Mud Logger’s cabin.”
2-2
March 1995
TRIP TANK
LEVEL
REMOTE RIG FLOOR
INDICATOR
CONTROL VALVE
OVERBOARD
ROTARY TABLE
DIVERTER
RETURNS TO HOLE FILL

SHAKERS UP LINE
FLOWLINE
TELESCOPIC
JOINT
FROM
MISSION PUMPS RISER
CHECK
VALVE
DRAIN
TRIP TANK PUMP
WEOX02.010
Figure 2.1 Typical Trip Tank Hook-up

– on a floating rig
Figure 2.1 shows a typical trip tank hook-up on a floating rig.
– It is considered unsafe to trip without a trip tank and as such, spare parts for the hole
fill pump/motor should be kept at the rig site.
– In order that maximum use is made of the trip tank on trips in and out of the hole, a
trip sheet should be used to record the mud volumes required to keep the hole full.
• Fill in the trip sheet
– Company policy states that:
“A trip sheet will be filled out by the Driller on every trip.”
2-3
March 1995
Figure 2.2 BP Trip Sheet

– example of a completed sheet
TRIP SHEET
WELL No 26 RIG RIG 20 DATE AND TIME 15.30 27/8/87 SHEET No 1

REASON FOR TRIP CHANGE BIT No 20 DRILLER A.C.E.
HOLE DEPTH 3250m INITIAL BIT DEPTH 3250m
DISPLACEMENT OF 5 in DRILLPIPE : 0.0246 bbl/m : 0.697 bbl/stand
DISPLACEMENT OF 5 in HEAVYWEIGHT : 0.0564 bbl/m : 1.60 bbl/stand

DISPLACEMENT OF 91/2 in DRILL COLLARS : 0.2624 bbl/m : 7.35 bbl/stand
DISPLACEMENT OF in : bbl/ : bbl/stand
DISPLACEMENT OF in : bbl/ : bbl/stand
Trip On: Singles Doubles Stands NO OF STANDS TO CASING SHOE 53 STANDS

NO OF STANDS TO TOP OF BHA AT THE STACK 108 STANDS AND 1 SINGLE
STAND STAND Measured Hole Calculated
……… ……… Trip Tank Discrepancy
Fill/Disp Fill/Disp
No Increment Volume Remarks
(bbl) increment accum increment accum increment accum
(bbl) (bbl) (bbl) (bbl) (bbl) (bbl)
30.5
1 1 30.0 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.7 -0.2 -0.2
2 1 29.4 0.6 1.1 0.7 1.4 -0.1 -0.3
3 1 28.6 0.8 1.9 0.7 2.1 +0.1 -0.2
5 2 27.2 1.4 3.3 1.4 3.5 0 -0.2
7 2 25.9 1.3 4.6 1.4 4.9 -0.1 -0.3
10 3 23.8 2.1 6.7 2.1 7.0 0 -0.3
15 5 20.1 3.7 10.4 3.5 10.5 +0.2 -0.1
20 5 16.6 3.5 13.9 3.5 14.0 0 -0.1
25 5 13.2 3.4 17.3 3.5 17.5 -0.1 -0.2
Single Single
Double Double (1) (2) (3) (4) (1)-(3) (2)-(4)
Stands Stands
WEOX02.011
2-4
March 1995
– Figure 2.2 shows a completed example of the BP trip sheet. This trip sheet should be
used if the contractor cannot provide a similar sheet. The basic requirement for a
trip sheet is that a clear method of comparing calculated with actual hole fill volumes
is provided. The cumulative discrepancy between the two values should also be
recorded.
– The trip sheet for the last trip out of the hole should be available for comparison.
• Provide the Driller with the necessary information
– The Driller should be told the reason for the trip.
– He should be told of any indicators of increasing pore pressure or near balance that
were identified during drilling before, or since, he came on shift.
– He should be fully aware of the procedures to be adopted in the event of a kick while
tripping.
– An example of the standing orders that should be provided to the Driller is shown in
Figure 2.3.
• Drill floor preparation
– Crossovers should be available on the rig floor to allow a full opening drillpipe
safety valve to be made up to each tubular connection that is in the hole.
– A drillpipe safety valve (kelly valve) should be available on the rig floor. It should
be kept in the open position.
– A back-up safety valve, such as a Gray valve, should be available close to the rig
floor. This valve should only be used in the event that the drillpipe safety valve does
not hold pressure, or if stripping in the hole is required and no dart sub is fitted.
– The rig crew should be completely familiar with, and practiced in, their
responsibilities in the event of a kick.
3 Tripping Procedure
Having completed the preparations as outlined in the previous section, the trip out of the
hole can be started. The following procedure is proposed as a guideline:
1. Flow check the well with the pumps off to ensure that the well is stable
with the ECD (equivalent circulating density) effect removed.
2. Pump a slug.
This enables the pipe to be pulled dry and the hole to be accurately monitored during a trip.
2-5
March 1995
Figure 2.3 Example of Standing Orders for Driller
STANDING ORDERS TO DRILLER WHILE TRIPPING
WELL NO 15 RIG RIG 12

ORDERS EFFECTIVE ON ALL TRIPS
DATE 15/6/87 COMPANY REP K.D. SMB TOOLPUSHER
IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING OCCUR:

1. HOLE NOT TAKING CORRECT VOLUME DURING THE TRIP
2. THE WELL IS FLOWING
3. ……………………………………………………………………………
4. ……………………………………………………………………………
5. ……………………………………………………………………………
6. ……………………………………………………………………………
7. ……………………………………………………………………………
8. ……………………………………………………………………………
Or if there is any other possible indication of a kick.
1. STOP TRIPPING OPERATIONS

2. FLOWCHECK THE WELL IF NECESSARY
IS THE
YES NO
WELL
FLOWING?
1. SET THE SLIPS 1. NOTIFY COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE

……………………………………………………………
AND TOOLPUSHER
2. INSTALL OPEN DP SAFETY VALVE
……………………………………………………………
3. CLOSE DP SAFETY VALVE 2. PROCEED AS DIRECTED
……………………………………………………………
4. OPEN CHOKE LINE VALVE (S)
……………………………………………………………
5. CLOSE ANNULAR PREVENTER
……………………………………………………………
6. CHECK THAT WELL IS SHUT IN
……………………………………………………………
7. NOTIFY COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE
……………………………………………………………
8. INSTALL KELLY
……………………………………………………………
9. LINE UP STANDPIPE MANIFOLD
……………………………………………………………
10. OPEN DP SAFETY VALVE
……………………………………………………………
11. RECORD DP AND CSG PRESSURE
……………………………………………………………
12. IF IN OPENHOLE: ENGAGE
……………………………………………………………
BUSHINGS, ROTATE THE PIPE
……………………………………………………………
13. PROCEED AS DIRECTED
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
WEOX02.012
2-6
March 1995
The following formula can be used to calculate the volume of slug to ensure a length, L, of
dry pipe:
Vsl = MW X L X Cp (bbl)
(MWsl – MW)
where Vsl = volume of slug (bbl)

L = length of dry pipe (m)
Cp = internal capacity of the pipe (bbl/m)
MWsl = slug weight (SG)
MW = mud weight in the hole (SG)
As a general rule, the slug should be mixed to maintain a minimum of 2 stands of dry pipe.
It is important to accurately displace the slug to the pipe. In this manner, the Driller will
know the weight, depth and height of the slug at all times during the trip.
3. For the first 5 – 10 stands off bottom, monitor the hole through the rotary.
This is to check that the annulus is falling as pipe is removed from the hole. The pipe
wiper should therefore be installed only after the first stands have been pulled. The trip
tank should not be overfilled at this stage to ensure that swabbing is clearly indicated,
should it occur. The circulating pump should be switched off at this stage and the hole
filled from the trip tank, after each stand.
4. Circulate the hole across the trip tank and continue to trip out, monitoring
hole volumes with the aid of the trip sheet.
5. Conduct a flowcheck when the BHA is into the casing shoe.
6. Conduct a flowcheck prior to pulling the BHA through the stack.

Be aware that the required hole fill volume per stand of heavy weight and drill collars will
be greater than for drillpipe as the BHA is being removed from the hole.
If unsure of the overbalance, consideration should be given to conducting a short round trip.
Once back on bottom, the overbalance can be assessed from the level of the trip gas at
bottoms up.
If the hole does not take the correct amount of fluid at any stage in the trip, a flowcheck
should be carried out.
If the flowcheck indicates no flow and the cause of the discrepancy cannot be accounted for
at surface, the string should be returned to bottom while paying particular attention to
displacement volumes. After circulating bottoms up, it may be necessary to increase the
mud weight before restarting the trip out of the hole.
If the flowcheck is positive, the well should be shut-in according to the procedure indicated
in the standing orders. Subsequent action will be dependent upon the conditions at the rigsite
(See Chapter 5).
2-7
March 1995
4 Special Procedure for Oil Base Muds

When oil base mud is in use, gaseous fluids have a tendency to go into solution with the
mud at high temperature and pressure. Experience has shown that once an influx has gone
into solution, it will not break out of solution until the bubble point is reached, typically at
1000 – 1500psi (this will depend on the fluids concerned). The possible consequence of this
is that a small influx that was undetected at depth may suddenly break out of solution close
to the surface. This may cause a dangerous liberation of gas at surface as well as significant
reduction in hydrostatic pressure in the well.
Consideration should also be given to the possibility of thermal expansion of the mud at
high temperatures. This can cause a reduction in effective mud weight and hence in the
overall hydrostatic head.
It is therefore recommended that tripping procedures are modified to take account of this
potential problem when oil base mud is in use in the following situations:
• When drilling or coring in a potential pay zone.
• On prediction of an increase in pore pressure.
• On detecting significant levels of gas in the mud.
In these circumstances the following procedure is recommended prior to pulling out of the
hole:
1. Flow check the well.
2. Circulate bottoms up.
3. Check trip to the shoe monitoring hole volumes.
4. Flow check at the shoe and run back to bottom.
5. Circulate bottoms up. Close in the BOP and circulate through the choke when
the potential influx is at 500m below the stack, watching for any pit gain.
6. If necessary increase the mud weight and perform a further check trip.
This procedure can be relaxed if, after several trips under the same conditions, the well
remains stable.
The following procedure is recommended in these circumstances after a round trip.
1. When back on bottom prior to any further drilling or coring, circulate

bottoms up to check for trip gas.
2. Circulate until potential influx is at 500m below the stack, watching for any
pit gain.
3. Close in the well and circulate the potential influx through the choke.
2-8
March 1995
2.2 MAINTAIN SUITABLE HYDROSTATIC

PRESSURE
Paragraph Page
1 General 2-10
2 Gas Cutting 2-10
3 Cuttings Contamination 2-14
Illustrations
2.4 Bottomhole Pressure Reduction – due to gas cutting 2-12
2-9
March 1995
1 General
Primary well control is achieved by controlling formation pressures with the hydrostatic
pressure of the drilling fluid. The drilling fluid may be contaminated with cuttings and
formation fluids during drilling. These contaminants can significantly alter the effective
hydrostatic pressure exerted by the drilling fluid, and in certain circumstances, this can
cause loss of primary control.
Hydrostatic pressure will be reduced once drilling stops as a result of the loss of annulus
frictional pressure and the removal of cuttings from the annulus. The settling of cuttings to
the bottom of the hole may significantly reduce the hydrostatic pressure further up the hole.
This section outlines the techniques that can be used to predict the effect of drilling fluid
contamination on the hydrostatic pressure.
2 Gas Cutting
When drilling through a formation that contains gas, it is inevitable that the mud will become
contaminated with gas from the drilled formation even if the formation is penetrated
overbalance.
Drilled gas will enter the mud system at a rate determined by the following factors:
• Rate of penetration, ROP (m/hr)
• Hole diameter, d h (in.)
• Formation porosity, Ø (fractional)
• Gas saturation, Sg (fractional)
The rate of gas entering the mud at bottomhole conditions, Qgas (gal/min), is given by the
following formula:
2
dh (gal/min)
Qgas = X 1.285 X ROP X Ø X Sg
24
Therefore as an example in the following conditions:
ROP = 25 m/hr
dh = 12 1/4 in.
Ø = 0.2
Sg = 0.75
Bottomhole pressure = 6000psi
Hole depth and depth at which
gas enters the mud, D = 3020m
2
Qgas = 12.25 X 1.285 X 25 X 0.2 X 0.75
24
= 1.26 gal/min at 6000psi
2-10
March 1995
Therefore at atmospheric pressure the gas flowrate is given by:
Qgas = 1.26 X 6000 = 514 gal/min at atmospheric pressure

14.7
This simplified calculation treats the gas as ideal and does not consider the effects of
temperature.
In this hole section the flowrate of mud is 700 gal/min; the actual mud weight at surface can
be calculated using the following formula:
Qmud
MW act = MW X
Qmud + Qgas
where MWact = actual mud weight at surface (SG)

MW = uncut mud weight (SG)
Qmud = flowrate of mud (gal/min)
Qgas = flowrate of gas (gal/min)
Therefore in this case the actual (or gas cut) mud weight at surface is given by:
MW act = 1.4 X 700 = 0.81 SG

700 + 514
It should be stressed that this figure is an estimation of the actual mud weight at the flowline
and as such will not reflect the actual density of the mud in the hole.
The percentage gas cutting is given by:
Percentage cut = MW – MWact X 100

MW
Which in this case gives a figure of:
Percentage cut = 1.4 – 0.81 X 100 = 42% cut

1.4
The following formula can be used to estimate the bottomhole pressure reduction due to gas
cut mud:
∆P = 14.7 (MW – MW act) ln (96.46 X MW X D) (psi)

MW act 1000
where ∆P = bottomhole pressure reduction due to gas cutting (psi)

D = depth at which gas enters the mud (m)
Figure 2.4 shows the effect of various levels of gas cutting for two different mud weights
using the above formula. It should be noted that these curves represent an ideal gas;
temperature and solubility effects are not considered.
In this case:
∆P = 14.7 (1.4 – 0.81) ln (96.46 X 1.4 X 3020) (psi)

0.81 1000
∆P = 64psi
2-11
March 1995
Figure 2.4 Bottomhole Pressure Reduction

– due to gas cutting
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
-1000
-2000
2.1
SG
1.05
SG
TRUE VERTICAL DEPTH (m)
-3000
2.1
SG
1.05
SG
2.1
-4000 SG
1.05
SG
2.1
SG
1.05
-5000 SG
2.1
SG
1.05
SG
-6000
2.1
SG
1.05
SG
5% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%
PERCENT GAS CUT AT THE FLOWLINE

-7000
0 20 40 60 80 100
DECREASE IN BOTTOMHOLE PRESSURE (psi)
WEOX02.013
2-12
March 1995
Therefore the average mud weight in the hole is equal to:
MW = (6000 – 64) = 1.38 SG

3020 X 1.421
It can be seen that what appeared to be significant gas cutting, at 42%, caused a very small
reduction in the bottomhole pressure and actually only reduced the effective mud weight by
0.02 SG, or by a factor of 1.4%.
The actual reduction in bottomhole pressure is caused by the gas when it has considerably
expanded. This expansion does not occur until the gas has been circulated to near the surface.
As can be seen from the previous example, this near surface expansion has a small effect on
the bottomhole pressure in a deep well for moderate levels of gas cutting. However the
effect of near surface expansion may be critical in relatively shallow hole sections.
The effect of gas cutting in a relatively shallow hole is demonstrated with the following
example:
dh = 24 in. Ø = 0.3
Instantaneous ROP = 80 m/hr Sg = 0.7
D = 300m Pump output = 750 gal/min
MW = 1.13 SG Formation pressure = 1.03 SG
Gas enters the mud system at a rate given by:

2
= 24 X 1.285 X 80 X 0.3 X 0.7
24
= 21.6 gal/min at bottomhole conditions
Gas flowrate at surface is given by:
21.6 X 1.03 X 1.421 X 300 = 645 gal/min

14.7
The actual mud weight at surface is given by:
750 X 1.13 = 0.61 SG

750 + 645
Corresponding to a pressure reduction of:
14.7 X (1.13 – 0.61) ln (96.46 X 1.13 X 300) = 44 psi

0.61 1000
The average mud weight in the hole is given by:
(1.13 X 1.421 X 300) – 44 = 1.02 SG

300 X 1.421
Quite clearly the potential exists for the well to kick in this situation, given that the pore
pressure at this depth is assumed to be normal at 1.03 SG.
2-13
March 1995
Industry experience has shown that excessive gas cutting in shallow hole has in many cases
been the cause of shallow gas blowouts in offshore environments. The previous example
shows the possible effect of gas cutting in shallow hole. However it should also be noted
that in shallow hole the annulus pressure loss during circulation will be negligible, and the
expansion of the gas may cause mud to be unloaded at surface, thereby further reducing the
hydrostatic head of the mud column.
It is therefore important that the ROP is restricted in shallow hole. High pump output should
also be maintained to disperse the gas within the mud to minimise variations in SG.
3 Cuttings Contamination
One of the most important functions of the drilling fluid is to transport cuttings from the bit
to the surface. The presence of cuttings in the annulus will increase the effective hydrostatic
pressure of the fluid column. If this increase is excessive, it can cause losses which may
possibly lead to the loss of primary control.
It is therefore useful to be able to estimate the additional pressure caused by the cuttings in
the annulus. In order to be able to estimate this additional pressure, a measure of the ability
of the drilling fluid to remove the cuttings from the well is required.
The cuttings slip velocity is defined as the velocity of the cuttings relative to the velocity of
the mud. There are many factors that influence the cuttings slip velocity, however the
following relationship can be used to estimate its value:
Slip Velocity, v s = 108 X d cut X (wcut – MW) 0.667

MW 0.333 X µ0.333
where vs = slip velocity (m/min)

µ = average viscosity (cP)
MW = mud weight (SG)
wcut = average cuttings weight (SG)
dcut = cutting average diameter (in.)
However, if the particle Reynolds number is greater than 2000, the following formula should
be used to calculate the slip velocity:
1
dcut (w cut – MW) 2
vs = 34.56
1.5 X MW
The particle Reynolds number, Re is given by:
Re = 422.78 X MW X v s X d cut
µ
2-14
March 1995
The transport ratio is defined as the ratio of the actual cuttings velocity to the mud velocity;
it is therefore determined as follows:
Transport ratio, TR = v m – vs
vm
where vm = Q (m/min)
0.134(d hc 2 – do 2)
and vm = mud velocity (m/min)

Q = pump output (gal/min)
dhc = hole/casing ID (in.)
do = pipe OD (in.)
The concentration of cuttings in the annulus can be calculated from the following formula:
Ca = ROP X d bit2 X (1 – Ø)
448.4 X Q X TR
where ROP = rate of penetration (m/hr)

dbit = diameter of the bit (in.)
Ø = porosity
The extra pressure caused by the cuttings in the annulus is given by the formula:
∆P = (w cut – MW) X 1.421 X sum (L X Ca)
where L = the length of each section (m)
The cuttings concentration must therefore be determined for each section of hole.
Consider the following example for a 17 1/2 in. hole section drilled from a floating rig.
Casing shoe at 900m Average viscosity = 50 cP

Casing ID = 22 in. Pump output = 700 gal/min
Riser ID = 22 in. ROP = 50 m/hr
Bit size = 17.5 in. Openhole length = 180 m
Drillpipe OD = 5 in. Cuttings density = 2.5 SG
Collar OD/length = 8 in./180m Cuttings diameter = 0.3 in.
Mud weight = 1.5 SG
The slip velocity = 108 X 0.3 X (2.5 – 1.5)0.667

1.50.333 X 50 0.333
= 7.7 m/min
The velocity of the mud in 17 1/2 in. hole is given by:
Velocity = 700 = 21.6 m/min

0.134 X (17.5 2 – 82)
In the 22 in. section:
Velocity = 700 = 11.4 m/min

0.134 X (22 2 – 52)
2-15
March 1995
This gives a transport ratio of 64% in 17 1/2 in. hole and of 32% in 22 in. hole.
The cuttings concentration, Ca, in the 17 1/2 in. hole is given by:
Ca = 50 X 17.5 2 = 0.076 (= 7.6%)

448.4 X 700 X 0.64
In the 22 in. hole section:
Ca = 50 X 17.5 2 = 0.152 (= 15.2%)

448.4 X 700 X 0.32
The porosity is not considered.
The additional hydrostatic pressure due to the cuttings is determined as follows:
∆P = (2.5 - 1.5) X 1.421 X [(0.076 X 180) + (0.152 X 900)]
∆P = 214 psi
This additional pressure therefore increases the effective mud weight to a figure given␣by:
MW = (1.5 X 1.421 X 1080) + 214 = 1.64 SG

1080 X 1.421
2-16
March 1995
2.3 CONTROL LOST CIRCULATION

Paragraph Page
1 General 2-18
2 Causes of Lost Circulation 2-18
3 Classification of Lost Circulation 2-19
4 Identification of Loss Zone 2-19
5 General Procedure for Spotting Plugs 2-20
6 Lost Circulation Decision Analysis 2-23
7 Drilling Blind 2-27
Illustrations
2.5 Balanced Plug Technique 2-22
2.6 Lost Circulation Remedies 2-24
2-17
March 1995
1 General
Lost circulation can occur as a result of the following:
• Unconsolidated or highly permeable low pressure formations (including depleted

reservoirs and at the base of long permeable reservoirs).
• Natural fractures.
• Induced fractures.
• Cavernous formations.
Lost circulation is undesirable primarily for three reasons. Firstly, that a loss of hydrostatic
head may lead to the well kicking and secondly, that the cost of the replacement mud required
may be considerable. Thirdly, it precludes accurate monitoring of the hole.
This section is intended to outline how to identify the different types of loss zone and, in
each case, to determine the most appropriate remedy.
2 Causes of Lost Circulation

These are as follows:
• Setting intermediate casing too high
Optimum casing design ensures that weak formations are isolated prior to drilling into
known areas of higher pressure.
• Drilling with excessive overbalance
• Drilling too fast
Overloading the annulus can cause excessive ECDs or the formation of mud rings as the
concentration of cuttings increases.
• Swab/surge pressures when running pipe
The mud properties and tripping procedures must be controlled to ensure that surge
pressures are not excessive when running pipe. Care should be taken when breaking
circulation, possibly by breaking circulation at several depths on the trip in the hole.
• Mud cake build up
In severe cases, mud cake can reach a level where the hole packs-off around the drillstring.
To minimise this problem good fluid loss control and maximum use of the solids-control
equipment must be coupled with a low fluid-loss mud. The drilled solids content of the
mud must be carefully controlled, by dilution if necessary.
2-18
March 1995
3 Classification of Lost Circulation

The severity of the loss zone can be assessed as follows:
• Seepage Losses (0.25 – 10 bbl/hr)
This takes the form of very slow losses or sometimes undetectable loss to a permeable
formation. In some instances, this may be due to filtration loss due to poor fluid loss
control. (The identification of seepage losses may be confused with the removal of
cuttings from the mud at the shakers.)
Curing this level of loss is sometimes not economical if a cheap mud is in use and the
rig rate is high. If pressure constraints are tight the losses may have to be cured. Other
factors such as the need for a good cement job, formation damage or the risk of possible
stuck pipe need to be considered in specific cases.
• Partial Losses (10 – 500 bbl/hr)
Because these losses are more severe the cost of the mud in use becomes more important
and so it is more likely to be economical to take some rig time to cure them.
Drilling with losses can be considered if the fluid is cheap and the pressures are within
operating limits.
• Complete Losses (500 bbl/hr – No returns)
If complete loss of returns is experienced, immediately pump water down the annulus,
monitoring the volumes required to fill the hole. From the volume required, the
hydrostatic head that the hole can maintain should be determined.
When drilling in top hole sections with high ROP, complete losses may be caused by
overloading the annulus. In this case consideration should be given to pulling out and
circulating in stages to clean the hole.
If efforts to cure the losses are unsuccessful, consideration may be given to drilling
blind.
4 Identification of Loss Zone

The formation type determines the most appropriate remedial treatment required to cure
losses. It is therefore important that the loss zone is correctly identified.
Each type of lost circulation zone will exhibit certain characteristics which can be outlined
as follows:
• Unconsolidated formations
Occur mainly at shallow depth. For whole mud to be lost to a formation, in the absence
of fractures, requires permeability of the order of 10 Darcies.
Will cause a gradual loss of mud to the hole, however, may worsen if no remedial action
is taken.
2-19
March 1995
• Natural fractures
Can occur in many rock types.
May cause a gradual loss of mud to the hole, however if drilling proceeds and more
fractures are exposed, complete losses may be experienced.
• Induced fractures
Horizontal fractures may be induced at relatively shallow depths after the formation of
mud rings and by overloading the annulus. The formation of a mud ring will be indicated
by an increase in pump pressure and the drillstring becoming tight.
Vertical fractures may occur at greater depth and may be caused by any pressure surge
on the formation. Usually indicated by sudden and complete losses.
• Cavernous formations
Normally only experienced in limestone formations.
Loss of returns may be sudden and complete. May be accompanied by the bit dropping
up to several feet depending on the height of the cavern.
• Underground blowout
Condition where the act of shutting in on a kick induces a fracture in the openhole
above the point of influx. Kick fluids flow, usually from the lower active zone to the
zone which has been fractured. Generally indicated by unstable pressure readings at
surface.
The depth of the loss zone must be established in order to calculate the hydrostatics
involved and to determine the remedial action required.
The loss zone can be located using a Temperature Survey, which operates by identifying
a discontinuity in the temperature gradient within the wellbore. A noise log may also be
used. Correlation with the known lithology at the confirmed loss zone is very important
to identify the type of formation that has been fractured.
5 General Procedure for Spotting Plugs

Accurate placement of plugs downhole is vital if the loss zone is to be sealed. To do this,
accurate measurement of pump efficiencies and internal pipe sizes must be made.
When drilling in areas of potential lost circulation, large nozzles should be fitted to the bit.
However, coarse LCM must not be pumped through a bit with nozzles.
When the bit in the hole contains small nozzles and an LCM pill is required, consideration
should be given to tripping the pipe and running a bit with large nozzles or even open ended
drillpipe.
The use of bits with a centre jet will also increase the area available for spotting plugs.
When the plug is being spotted, keep the pipe moving to avoid getting stuck.
When placing plugs containing cement, wherever possible the slurry formulation should be
tested by the cementing contractor to determine thickening time.
2-20
March 1995
The best displacement method for placing plugs is to use the balanced plug technique. This
is however not always possible to achieve or desirable, depending on the rate of loss or the
type of slurry to be pumped.
In general, placement techniques will be as follows (refer to Paragraph 6 for recipes):
(a) Conventional circulation

Used for techniques 2A and 2B.
Place the plug through open ended pipe (if possible) opposite the loss zone. Pump at
1.0␣bbl/min until the losses cease.
(b) Balanced plug

Used for techniques 3A, 3B, 3C, 4A, 4B, 4C and 4D.
The balanced plug method should be used for the above techniques. However, if cement
in any of the above techniques and it becomes necessary to spot the plug through a bit,
the balanced plug technique should not be used. In this case, the bit should be tripped
into the casing and the non-balanced plug technique used (See/(c)).
The basic requirement for a balanced plug is that the correct volume of spacer is pumped
behind the slurry, to ensure that the hydrostatic pressure in the annulus is balanced with
that in the pipe before the pipe is pulled out of the plug. The pipe is then pulled out of
the plug. If it is decided to squeeze the plug, 2 bbl should be pumped down the pipe, the
BOPs closed and then squeeze pressure applied on the annulus below the rams. Balanced
plugs can be allowed to lose to the formation under the hydrostatic head of the column
alone, or by squeezing. It may be desirable to reverse circulate the pipe contents, if this
is possible after pulling out of the plug.
Plug balancing calculations are as follows:
• Calculate the volume of cement plug for the required height of plug
Volume (bbl) = height (m) X hole capacity (bbl/m) X factor for excess
No of sacks required = volume (bbl)

slurry yield (bbl/sk)
2-21
March 1995
TUBING
MUD
SPACER
where h = height of spacer (m)
H = height of plug (m)
h L = drillpipe/tubing length (m)
PLUG
WEOX02.014
Figure 2.5 Balanced Plug Technique
• With the volume of spacer ahead known calculate the height and volume of spacer behind
(See Figure 2.5)
If the same fluid is used before and after the plug:
h = Spacer vol ahead (bbl)

annulus capacity (bbl/m)
Spacer vol behind (bbl) = h X pipe capacity (bbl/m)
where h = height of spacer (m)
2-22
March 1995
• Calculate the height of the cement plug before the pipe is pulled out
H(m) = Volume of slurry(bbl)

annulus cap (bbl/m) + pipe cap (bbl/m)
where H = height of the plug (m)
• Calculate the plug displacement volume
Displacement volume (bbl) = (L – H – h) X pipe cap (bbl/m)
where L = Drillpipe/tubing length (m)
(c) Non-balanced plug

Used for techniques 5A, 5B, 6, 7A and 7B or whenever using techniques 3C, 4A, 4B
and 4C through a bit.
Where the loss zone depth is known with certainty then the pipe can be placed
approximately␣50m above it. The slurry is displaced to the end of the pipe and the BOP is
closed. For a downhole mixed plug, pump simultaneously down the annulus and pipe at
2␣bbl/min. For a spotted plug pump the slurry out of the pipe plus 5 bbl excess, then pump
down the annulus only.
6 Lost Circulation Decision Analysis

Figure 2.6 can be used as a guide to determining the most suitable method of dealing with a
lost circulation problem. The techniques referred to in Figure 2.6 are specified below.
• Technique 1
Pull up and wait
The bit should be pulled up to safety inside casing and the hole left static for 4 to
8/hours without circulation. (While waiting, a lost circulation pill can be mixed (eg/2A
or 2B), at comparatively low cost, for use in case the zone does not self heal.)
This technique is only likely to succeed in zones of induced fractures. It is therefore not
applicable to naturally occurring horizontal loss zones eg/gravels, natural fractures, vugs
and caverns where the overburden is self-supporting.
• Technique 2A
LCM pill
Mix a 100 – 500 bbl pill as follows:
100 – 500 bbl mud
15 lb/bbl fine walnut/sawdust/etc
10 lb/bbl fine fibres (wood, mica or cane)
5 lb/bbl medium to fine fibres (wood, cane, mica or similar)
5 lb/bbl large cellophane flakes (1.0 in. diameter)
Pump the pill as recommended in Paragraph 5. Repeat if the hole still takes fluid. If the
hole is still not filling go on to use a ‘High filter loss slurry squeeze’.
2-23
March 1995
LOST CIRCULATION REMEDIES
SEVERITY OF EFFECTIVE IN
TYPE OF LOSS LOSS, bbl/hr LOSS ZONE GEOMETRY LOST CIRCULATION REMEDIAL TECHNIQUE WBM OBM*
Seeping 1 – 10 to horizontal loss zones** Technique 2A – Plug of fine bridging agents in mud yes yes
to induced vert fractures Technique 3A – High-filter-loss slurry squeeze with yes yes
fine bridging agents
Partial 10 – 500 to horizontal loss zones** Technique 1 – Pull up and wait (primarily for induced yes partial
vertical fracture)
to induced vert fractures Technique 2B – Plug of medium bridging agents in yes yes
mud
Technique 3A – High-filter-loss slurry squeeze with yes yes
coarse bridging agents
Complete 500 – complete to horizontal loss zones** Technique 3B or 3C – High-filter-loss slurry squeeze yes yes
with coarse bridging agents
Technique 4B – Thixotropic cement or other cements yes no
(4A, 4C, 4D)
Technique 5B – Mud + diesel-oil-bentonite plus yes no
cement
Technique 5A – Downhole-mixed soft plug yes yes
(mud-diesel oil-bentonite)
Technique 7B – Downhole-mixed hard plug (sodium yes yes
silicate, calcium chloride, cement squeeze
Flo-Check)
Long Complete to horizontal loss zones** Technique 3A, 3B or 3C – High-filter-loss slurry yes no
honeycomb or squeeze with 25 – 35 lb/bbl or coarse bridging agents
caverns (only Technique 5B – Downhole-mixed soft/hard plug
in limestones) continuously mixed in large amounts
Deep induced Complete Vertical in WBM or OBM Technique 1 – Pull up and wait yes partial
fractures in WBM Technique 5B – Downhole-mixed soft/hard plug yes no
in WBM Technique 5A – Downhole-mixed soft plug yes no
in WBM Technique 7B – Downhole-mixed hard plug yes yes
(sodium, silicate, calcium chloride, cement
squeeze, Flo-Check)
in OBM Technique 3B or 3C – High-filter-loss slurry squeeze yes yes
with coarse bridging agents
in OBM Technique 4A – Neat portland cement yes yes
in OBM Technique 7B – Downhole-mixed plug yes yes
(sodium, silicate, calcium chloride, cement
squeeze, Flo-Check)
* Usually not in use where loss zones are WBM – water-base mud
horizontal. They consist of porous sands OBM – oil-base mud
and gravels, natural fractures, and
honeycomb and caverns.
Figure 2.6 Lost Circulation Remedies

• Technique 2B
LCM pill
As above but using larger concentrations of coarse materials eg coarse mica, wood,
walnut or cellophane.
• Technique 3A
High filter loss slurry squeeze (Diearth, Diaseal M etc)
100 bbl water

15 lb/bbl bentonite or 1.0 lb/bbl Drispac (or 1.0 lb/bbl XC Polymer)
0.5 lb/bbl lime
50 lb/bbl Diearth, Diaseal M
15 – 20 lb/bbl fine mica, walnut, cellophane or similar material as can be mixed and
remain pumpable.
2-24
March 1995
• Technique 3B
High filter loss slurry squeeze
As Technique 3A but include the following:
15 – 30 lb/bbl medium and coarse LCM
• Technique 3C
High filter loss slurry squeeze
As Technique 3A but include the following:
Reduce Diearth concentration to 10 – 25 lb/bbl

Use barytes as inert filler at 300 lb/bbl
Add cement at 70 lb/bbl
Place in 30 bbl slugs into loss zone with 200 psi squeeze pressure.
Note: Wherever possible, slurry formulations should be tested prior to spotting to

eliminate possible premature setting. When this is the case, always be aware
of the thickening time and avoid leaving cement in or opposite the pipe beyond
this time.
• Technique 4A
Neat cement slurry
Neat cement slurries give high compressive strength plugs.
Mix Class G cement at 1.90 SG in water
• Technique 4B
Extended cement slurry (using bentonite)
Prehydrated bentonite slurry gives a degree of fluid loss control and ‘plating effect’ to
help stop lost circulation. Coupled with this, a lightweight slurry can be formulated
(1.58 SG) which helps in areas of serious lost circulation. A further benefit is that
reasonable compressive strength characteristics are found with slurries of this type.
Add 10 lb/bbl bentonite to pre-treated fresh water (with 0.25 lb/bbl caustic and 0.25/lb/
bbl soda ash). Mix cement up to 1.58 SG.
• Technique 4C
Aggregated cement slurry (with sand or ground coal)
Add aggregrate to the neat cement slurry at 1.90 SG up to a maximum weight of 20 – 35

lb/sack of cement in the mix.
2-25
March 1995
• Technique 4D
Thixotropic cements
Cement of this type exhibits good flow characteristics when being pumped and a quickly
developing gel strength when stationary. This thixotropic behaviour is beneficial for
the following reasons:
– A plug of cement displaced past the loss zone is self supporting and does not fall
back under its own weight.
– The cement will tend to remain next to the wellbore when squeezed into fractures
due to their rapidly developing gel strength.
Due to the temperature and chemical formulation sensitivity of this type of slurry, it is
not recommended to use this cement without rigorous quality control and testing prior
to each job. Halliburton Thixset 1 or 2 are examples of this type of cement.
• Technique 5A
Downhole mixed soft plug
This type of lost circulation pill is designed to mix with a water base mud or formation
water in the downhole environment and subsequently be squeezed into the formation.
Mix 10.5 gal of diesel or base oil to 100 lb of bentonite.
Granular or fibrous LCM may be added to this mix if required, ie mica at 10 ppb plus
walnut at 10 ppb.
This mixture must be kept away from contact with water until it is placed out of the
drillpipe. To do this, a 10 bbl oil spacer is pumped ahead of a plug, followed by 10 bbl
after the plug.
The principle of this plug is to form a rubbery plug whenever the mixture contacts the
water base mud. Formation water will assist the hydration of the bentonite.
• Technique 5B
Downhole mixed soft/hard plug
This type of lost circulation pill is designed to mix with a water base mud or formation
water in the downhole environment. It can be designed to form an initially fluid mixture
of a soft or semi-hard nature depending on its composition, and can be squeezed into
the formation where it will harden and develop compressive strength.
The proportion of mud to the pill in the final mix downhole will determine the strength
of the plug. For example, a 1:1 mix with fresh water will result in a soft plug, whereas
a 1:3 (water/mix ratio) mix will result in a hard plug. In every case however, pilot tests
should be carried out at surface for various mixes, prior to spotting the pill.
Mix on surface 300 lb of G neat cement and 158 lb of bentonite to 1 bbl of diesel or base
oil. All water should be excluded from the mix on surface.
2-26
March 1995
• Technique 6
Downhole mixed soft plug
Oleophilic clay and water
This type of plug formulation is designed for use in an oil base mud. It works by the
same principle as 5A, except that the clay disperses in water and hydrates in oil (the
opposite of a bentonite squeeze).
Mix on surface 280 lb of oleophilic clay to 1 bbl of water. Add lignosulphonate at 4/lb/
bbl water.
An example of oleophilic clay is Baroid Geltone.
The spacers ahead and behind this plug must be water based.
• Technique 7A
Surface mixed soft plug (polymer type)
These formulations are mixed on surface, where polymers are blended with activators
and extenders, to give a delayed thickening reaction. This allows enough time to place
the plug in the loss zone before the chemical reaction takes place.
Haliburton Temblok is an example of this type of material.
This treatment is only temporary and the yield strength breaks down fairly quickly. It
should be followed by a cement slurry to effect a permanent seal.
• Technique 7B
Downhole mixed hard plug
Haliburton Flocheck can be used for this.
This is a Sodium Silicate material which on contact with calcium ions forms insoluble
Calcium Silicate. By pumping a CaCl 2 brine to the formation, followed by the Flocheck
material, plugging of the formation occurs when the two chemicals mix in the formation
matrix.
Placement as follows:
Pump 50 bbl 10% (by weight) CaC12 followed by 10 bbl fresh water. Then pump 35/bbl␣of
Flocheck followed by a further 10 bbl fresh water. Care must be taken to ensure that
CaC1 2 does not come into contact with Flocheck on surface as it will go hard in the pits.
This treatment, whilst permanent, may be reinforced by a cement slurry.
7 Drilling Blind
In certain circumstances it may become necessary to drill ahead without any returns at surface,
ie drilling ahead blind. This may be required if all attempts as laid out in Paragraph 6 have
failed. Once the decision to drill blind has been made, the main objective will be to set
casing in the first competent formation penetrated.
2-27
March 1995
Although no cuttings will be obtained while drilling blind, casing seat can be located by
logging and by keeping up a penetration log whilst drilling ahead. The hole has to be logged
frequently, for example every 100m or whenever the penetration rate suggests a formation
change. Once a competent formation has been identified, the new formation has to be
penetrated by at least 20m to successfully set and cement the next casing string.
Whilst drilling blind the following precautions must be taken:
• Use one pump for drilling as normal with the other continuously filling the annulus
with water.
• Assign personnel to monitor the flowline for returns at all times.
• Pick the drillstring up off bottom every 2m drilled to ensure that the hole is not packing
off above the bit.
• Keep one pit full of viscous mud at all times ready to pump to the hole.
• If one pump requires repair, use the cement unit to fill the annulus continuously.
• After drilling each single, wipe the hole over a full single and kelly length prior to
drilling ahead. Wipe the hole over the length of a stand if using a topdrive.
If overpull is experienced wipe the hole 3 or 4 times.
Spot a viscous pill around the bit prior to making each connection. This pill should be
balanced in and outside the pipe.
• If, during drilling, the fluid in the annulus reaches surface, stop drilling immediately.
Pick up the drillstring so that the BOPs can be closed if required. Stop the pump on the
drillpipe and the annulus. Close in and observe for any pressure build up.
– If there is no pressure on the annulus, start up the pump on the drillpipe and circulate
bottoms up through a fully opened choke (if this is possible). The loss zone may be
plugged with drill cuttings. Drill ahead if everything is normal to a predetermined
depth, if the area is well known. Stop and log if the area is not well known to determine
if a suitable casing seat has been found and has been sufficiently penetrated.
– If there is pressure on the annulus be prepared to adopt procedures for an

underground␣blowout.
At all times be prepared to cement the well.

If tripping is required when complete loss of returns exists then the following precautions
must be taken:
• Spot a viscous pill across the openhole section.
• Before tripping, stop the pumps on drillpipe and annulus and observe the well for
30␣minutes. Keep the string moving and be prepared to close in the well if necessary .
• Drop the dart into the drop-in dart sub.
• Fill up the annulus continuously during the trip.
• Monitor the flowline at all times.
2-28
March 1995
• Stop the pumps and monitor the well whenever the bit is pulled into the previous casing
shoe.
• Be prepared to shut in at all times during the trip.
If wireline logging is required when complete loss of returns exists then the following
precautions must be taken.
• When logging, the pump should be kept continuously on the hole. The only exception is
when static fluid level has to be established.
• Logging is best conducted using through drillpipe logging tools, with open ended drillpipe
run to the casing shoe.
2-29/30
2-29
March 1995
3 WARNING SIGNS OF A KICK

Paragraph Page
1 General 3-2
2 Drilling Break 3-2
3 Increased Returns Flowrate 3-2
4 Pit Gain 3-3
5 Hole not Taking Appropriate Volume During a Trip 3-4
6 Gas Cut Mud 3-4
7 Increase in Hookload 3-6
8 Change in Pump Speed or Pressure 3-6
3-1
March 1995
1 General
When drilling with returns to surface, a kick cannot occur without any warning sign. This
Chapter outlines and explains the signs that indicate either that a kick has occurred or that a
kick may soon develop.
2 Drilling Break
One of the first indications that a kick may occur is an increase in penetration rate, or a
drilling break.
Many factors influence the rate of penetration, but an increase in penetration rate can be
caused by an increase in formation porosity, permeability or pore pressure. A change in all
or one of these formation parameters may create the conditions in which a kick could occur.
For this reason any drilling break should be checked for flow.
Even if the flowcheck indicates no flow, the reason for each drilling break should be
determined.
As an example, a drilling break could be caused by drilling into an impermeable transition

zone above a permeable reservoir. Because the formation is impermeable, it is unlikely that
any significant flow would be noticed during a flowcheck. However, the formation may be
considerably underbalanced by the mud column. If drilling continued and the reservoir was
penetrated, a kick would be taken.
Consideration must therefore be given to circulating bottoms up before drilling ahead after
a negative flowcheck, especially in critical sections of the well.
3 Increased Returns Flowrate

The first confirmation that a kick is occurring is an increase in returns flowrate while the
pumps are running at constant output.
However, this increase may not be detected if the influx flowrate is particularly slow. In this
case a slight pit gain may be the first detectable confirmation of the kick.
If low gravity formation fluids enter the wellbore during drilling, the hydrostatic pressure
in the annulus will decrease rapidly as more influx enters and when the influx expands as it
is circulated up the hole. As a result, rapid influx flowrates can quickly develop, even though
the initial influx flowrate might have been very low.
The length of formation exposed also has direct bearing on the rate of flow into the well.
The greater the length of formation exposed, the larger the flowrate.
It is therefore important that surface equipment be able to reliably detect a small increase in
returns flowrate.
3-2
March 1995
4 Pit Gain
(a) While Drilling
A gain in pit volume, that was not caused by the movement of mud stocks at surface, is
confirmation that a kick is occurring or has occurred.
This is the most reliable indicator of a kick. Consequently, every effort must be made to
ensure that pit levels are accurately monitored at all times.
Very small influx volumes may not be detected at surface as they occur. This may be
due to the fact that, either the initial influx was particularly small, or the influx flowrate
was very slow. This could be the case if the formation has low permeability or if a more
permeable formation was only very slightly underbalanced. In such cases, the influx
may be detected before it is circulated to the surface if it expands significantly as it
rises up the hole. In general, the greater the amount of gas that is contained in the
influx, the greater the expansion of the influx will be as it rises up the hole.
As a result, the greater the proportion of gas in the influx, the more likely it is that the
influx will be detected as it is circulated up the hole.
Consequently, a low volume influx heavy oil or brine that does not contain any
appreciable quantity of gas, will be relatively difficult to detect at surface.
However, if the active system is accurately monitored, pit gains of less than 10 bbl
should be detected reliably, even on floating rigs.
(b) During a Connection

An influx may only occur during a connection due to the reduction in bottomhole pressure
as the pumps are shut down and the pipe pulled off bottom.
If the well flows only during a connection, it is likely that the influx flowrate will be
slow initially, resulting in only a small pit gain. Therefore, early detection of flow during
a connection may be difficult.
However, it is important to check for flow during a connection, because if a close to

balance situation is developing, it is most likely to show initially during a connection.
The first signs are likely to be increasing connection gases. However, if the underbalance
develops very rapidly and the bottoms up time is considerable, then it is possible that an
influx may occur before the connection gases are detected at surface. In this instance,
flow during a connection may be the first indication of an underbalanced situation.
The detection of a small pit gain during a connection is complicated by the volume of
mud in the flowline returning to the pit after the pumps have been shut down. This will
cause an increase in pit level during each connection.
It is important therefore to establish the volume of mud that is contained in the flowline
during circulation. For instance, this volume might be 10 bbl and as such, a 10 bbl pit
gain during a connection would not be significant. However, a 15/bbl gain may indicate
that a 5 bbl influx has occurred.
3-3
March 1995
5 Hole not Taking Appropriate Volume

During a Trip
As pipe is pulled from the hole, it is essential that the appropriate volume of mud is used to
keep the hole full. This is essential in order that both a full head of mud is maintained in the
hole and that if an influx is swabbed into the hole, it is detected immediately.
Before every trip, a trip sheet (See Page 2-4) should be filled out. This must clearly show
the expected hole fill volumes as the pipe is pulled out of the hole. As the trip proceeds,
actual hole fill volumes should be entered in the trip sheet alongside the expected volumes.
If the hole takes less mud than expected, this should be taken as positive indication that an
influx has been swabbed into the hole.
A flowcheck should be carried out immediately or, if in a reservoir section, the well should
immediately be shut in.
A negative flowcheck at this point is not necessarily confirmation that an influx has not
occurred. It is quite possible, even if an influx has been swabbed into the well, that the well
will not flow if the pipe is stationary.
Therefore, if at any stage in a trip the hole does not take the correct volume of mud, the pipe
should be run back to bottom, using the trip tank, and bottoms up circulated.
The problems associated with dealing with a kick when the pipe is off bottom can be
considerable, and so every effort must be made to ensure that significant swab pressures are
avoided during a trip.
Swabbing is minimised by ensuring that the mud is in good condition prior to pulling out
of␣hole and that predetermined speeds are not exceeded at any stage in the trip (see Chapter␣3,
Volume 2).
6 Gas Cut Mud

A kick is confirmed at surface as an increase in returns flowrate and a pit gain.
However, a minor influx that is not detected as a pit gain may first be identified at surface in
the returned mud. Formation fluids and gas in the returned mud may therefore indicate that
a low volume influx is occurring or has occurred, even though no gain has been detected.
Returned mud must be monitored for contamination with formation fluids. This is done by
constantly recording the flowline mud density and accurately monitoring gas levels in the
returned mud.
Gas cut mud does not in itself indicate that the well is kicking (gas may be entrained in the
cuttings). However, it must be treated as early warning of a possible kick. Therefore the pit
level should be closely monitored if significant levels of gas are detected in the mud.
An essential part of interpreting the level of gas in the mud is the understanding of the
conditions in which the gas entered the mud in the first place.
3-4
March 1995
Gas can enter the mud for one or more of the following reasons:
• As a result of drilling a formation that contains gas even with a suitable overbalance.
• As a result of a temporary reduction in hydrostatic pressure caused by swabbing as pipe

is moved in the hole.
• Due to the pore pressure in a formation being greater than the hydrostatic pressure of
the mud column.
Gas due to one or a combination of the above, is classified as follows:
(a) Drilled Gas

As porous formations containing gas are drilled, it is inevitable that a certain quantity
of the gas contained in the cuttings will enter the mud.
Any gas that enters the mud, unless in solution with oil base mud and above the bubble
point, will expand as it is circulated up the hole, causing gas cutting at the flowline. Gas
cutting due to this mechanism will occur even if the formation is overbalanced. Raising
the mud weight will not prevent it.
However, drilled gas will only be evident during the time taken to circulate out the
cuttings from the porous formation.
(b) Connection Gas

Connection gases are detected at surface as a distinct increase above background gas, as
the hole is circulated bottoms up after a connection.
Connection gases are caused by the temporary reduction in effective total pressure of
the mud column during a connection. This is due to pump shut down and the swabbing
action of the pipe.
In all cases, connection gases indicate a condition of near balance. Consequently, when
connection gases are identified, consideration should be given to weighting up the mud
before drilling ahead and particularly prior to a trip.
(c) Trip Gas

Trip gas is any gas that entered the mud while the pipe was tripped and the hole appeared
static. Trip gas will be detected in the mud on circulating bottoms up after a round trip.
If the static mud column is sufficient to balance the formation pressure, the trip gas is
caused by swabbing and gas diffusion.
Significant trip gas may indicate that a close to balance situation exists in the hole.
(d) Gas due to Inadequate Mud Density

Surface indications of an underbalanced formation depend on the degree of underbalance,
as well as the formation permeability.
The penetration of a permeable formation that is significantly underbalanced will cause

an immediate pit gain.
3-5
March 1995
A permeable formation that is only slightly underbalanced may only cause a small flow
into the well. The first evidence of this at surface is likely to be gas cut mud, accompanied
by a small pit gain. The initial pit gain may be so small that it is only detected as it
expands as it is circulated up the hole.
In the case a tight formation is underbalanced, there may be little or no actual flow of
gas into the wellbore. Therefore, drilling such a formation may show only gas cut mud,
even if the underbalance is relatively high. This is a relatively difficult situation to
detect and is also potentially dangerous.
7 Increase in Hookload
If an influx occurs while drilling, an increase in hookload may be noticed at surface.
Influx fluids will generally be lighter than the drilling fluid, especially so if the influx is
gas. Displacement of the drilling fluid by the influx will reduce the buoyancy of the
bottomhole assembly. This will increase the effective weight of the drillstring, a change that
is likely to be registered as an increase in hookload.
An increase in hookload may only be noticed after a considerable volume of influx has
occurred. It is not therefore a reliable method of detecting a kick at an early stage.
8 Change in Pump Speed or Pressure

Pump pressure may decrease with a corresponding increase in pump speed if an influx occurs
during drilling.
This indication is caused as a result of the U-tube effect, caused by light fluids flowing into
the annulus. However, it is only likely to become noticeable as the influx is circulated up
the hole.
A washout in the drillstring will cause the same decrease in pump pressure and increase in
pump speed. However, if these signs are noticed, the Driller should first assume that a kick
may have occurred and flowcheck the well.
3-6
March 1995
4 ACTION ON DETECTING AN INFLUX
Section Page
4.1 SHALLOW GAS PROCEDURE 4-1
4.2 SHUT-IN PROCEDURES 4-9
4.3 DURING SHUT-IN PERIOD 4-15
March 1995
4.1 SHALLOW GAS PROCEDURE

Paragraph Page
1 General 4-2
2 Gas encountered whilst drilling without a riser from
a Floating Rig 4-3
3 Gas encountered whilst drilling for surface casing
from a Floating Rig with a riser 4-4
4 Gas encountered whilst drilling for surface casing
from a Bottom Supported Rig 4-6
5 Onshore Shallow Gas 4-7
4-1
March 1995
1 General
Offshore shallow gas accumulations are normally associated with recently laid down
sand␣ l enses that are totally enveloped by mudstones. When encountered at shallow
depths,␣lenses tend to be highly porous, permeable and relatively unconsolidated. They
are␣commonly thin, flat and normally pressured. However , overpressured lenses have been
encountered. Overpressure at this depth is generally caused by inclination of the lens which
has the effect of increasing the height of the lens and hence the pore pressure gradient at the
top of the lens.
In some areas, shallow gas has been associated with buried reefs or vuggy limestone which
can be extremely porous and almost infinitely permeable.
Shallow gas kicks are generally caused by loss of hydrostatic head due to one or a combination
of the following:
• Overloading the annulus with cuttings and hence causing losses.
• Drilled gas expanding and unloading the annulus.
• Improper hole fill while tripping.
Consequently it is strongly recommended to take the following general precautions to

minimise the possibility of inducing a shallow gas flow:
• Drill pilot hole
• Drill riserless
• Restrict ROPs
• Accurately monitor the hole
Shallow gas flows are often extremely prolific, producing very high flow rates of gas and
considerable quantities of rock from the formation; particularly so when a long section of
sand has been exposed.
In the event of a shallow gas flow, the Company Representative must immediately liaise
with the Senior Contractor Representative to make preparations to evacuate initially
non-essential personnel from the rig. The eventuality of having to completely evacuate the
rig must also be addressed (the contractor’s emergency evacuation procedures will be
implemented).
A well should not be drilled through a shallow seismic anomally (bright spot), which may
indicate the presence of shallow gas. If a bright spot is present at the proposed drilling
location it is good practice to move the rig to avoid the hazard. The new drilling location
should, if possible, be located on a shallow seismic shot point.
It should be noted that the absence of bright spots does not rule out the possibility of the
existence of shallow gas. Further to this, the absence of shallow gas in one well of a series
drilled from a surface location does not guarantee the absence of shallow gas in subsequent
directional wells drilled from the same surface location.
4-2
March 1995
2 Gas encountered whilst drilling without

a riser from a Floating Rig
Company policy states that surface hole will be drilled riserless unless the particular
conditions as outlined in Drilling Policy and Guidelines Manual are applicable.
Drilling riserless ensures that the major cause of blowouts from shallow, normally pressured
gas reservoirs – namely, the loss of hydrostatic head – is eliminated. There remains however,
the danger of penetrating an overpressured reservoir.
A contingency plan must be developed, prior to spud, in conjunction with the Drilling
Contractor to cover the following situations:
• The procedures to be adopted in the event of a shallow gas flow.
• The procedure for winching the rig off location.
The contingency plan must be discussed in detail at the pre-spud meeting.
A gas blowout in open water produces a 10 degree cone of low density water and a discharge
of highly flammable gas. The intensity of the blowout depends to a large extent on the water
depth and current. The plume is likely to become more dispersed with greater water depth,
whilst the effect of a current would be to displace the plume away from the rig.
Within a plume of expanding gas, a floating vessel will suffer some loss of buoyancy; however,
this diminishes rapidly with water depth such that the effect on a semi-submersible at operating
draft would be negligible. The eruption of the gas would tend to displace a vessel, and if
constrained by its moorings, might cause a drillship to keel towards the plume, thereby
reducing its freeboard further. Under calm conditions, the gas cloud would disperse slowly
and would constitute a fire hazard if the gas became entrapped in a confined area.
The severity of the hazard can only be assessed at the time, and whilst there is unlikely to be
an immediate danger to crew or vessel, the following precautions or considerations should
be addressed before and whilst the surface hole is open:
• The rig should be moored with length of moorings remaining in the locker to allow the
rig to be winched 400 ft away from the plume. If practical, the windlasses should be
held on their brakes and the chain stoppers only applied after surface casing is set.
• All hatches should be secured to prevent invasion of voids by inflammable gas or

downflooding if the freeboard is reduced by loss of buoyancy or heel. This is critical
for a drillship.
• Facilities and personnel should be continuously available at short notice to slack off the
moorings closest to the plume and heave in those up current (but not down wind). Before
spudding, a contingency plan should be prepared detailing individual responsibilities
and duties.
• Drill pilot hole, limiting the ROP and circulate at a high rate to distribute the cuttings
and drilled gas.
• A float valve should always be run in the drillstring.
• Sufficient mud should be kept on site to fill the hole volume twice. (Typically at 1.15/SG.)
4-3
March 1995
• Weather conditions and current should be continuously monitored and the sea surface
should be checked for evidence of gas.
If a shallow gas flow is detected:
If there is no immediate danger to personnel or the rig:
1. Attempt to control the well by pumping mud/seawater at a maximum rate.
If the gas flow is endangering personnel or the rig:
2. Drop the drillstring or shear the pipe (See Section 6.2).
3. Winch the rig to a safe position outside the gas plume.
3 Gas encountered whilst drilling for surface

casing from a Floating Rig with a riser
In relatively shallow offshore environments, the conductor is usually set in a formation that
is too weak to contain the pressure of a gas kick. If a kick is detected in such circumstances,
the well should be diverted in order to avoid an underground blowout and the possibility of
the gas broaching around the conductor shoe.
It is Company policy that where the situation demands that a riser is to be used when drilling
for the surface casing, an annular preventer and subsea dump valves are installed at the
mudline, in addition to the normal diverter system at surface.
Industry experience has shown that current diverter systems cannot be relied upon to safely
control shallow gas blowouts. As a result, shallow gas flows should be controlled at the
seabed, using the subsea dump valves at the mudline and annular preventer. Immediate
preparations should then be made to unlatch the pin connector or LMRP and winch off
location, up current but not down wind.
A contingency plan must be developed, prior to spud, in conjunction with the Drilling
Contractor to cover the following situations:
• The procedures to be adopted in the event of a shallow gas flow.
• The procedure for winching the rig off location.
• The procedure to be adopted in the event of failure of any of the major components of
the BOP/riser/diverter system.
The contingency plan must be discussed in detail at the pre-spud meeting.
The surface diverter system ensures that there is a back-up system available in the event of
a failure of the subsea system. It can also be used to divert gas which may be in the riser
above the stack.
4-4
March 1995
The following precautions, in line with those listed in Paragraph 2, should be taken routinely
whilst the surface hole is open:
• The rig should be moored with length of moorings remaining in the locker to allow the
rig to be winched 400 ft away from the plume. If practical, the windlasses should be
held on their brakes and the chain stoppers only applied after surface casing is set.
• All hatches should be secured to prevent invasion of voids by inflammable gas or

downflooding if the freeboard is reduced by loss of buoyancy or heel. This is critical
for a drillship.
• Facilities and personnel should be continuously available at short notice to slack off the
moorings closest to the plume and heave in those up current (but not down wind). Before
spudding, a contingency plan should be prepared detailing individual responsibilities
and duties.
• Care should be taken to ensure that the annulus does not become overloaded with cuttings,
causing losses or cuttings liberated gas, and hence the possibility of unloading the
annulus. This is achieved by drilling a pilot hole, limiting the ROP and circulating at a
high rate to distribute the cuttings and drilled gas.
• Facilities should be continuously available to fill the annulus rapidly from surface in
the event of sudden losses.
• Care should be taken to monitor the hole and ensure that it remains full whilst tripping.
• Sufficient mud should be kept onsite to fill the hole volume twice. (Typically 1.15/SG.)
Should the well start to flow, the following procedure can be used as a guideline:
1. Open the subsea dump valves.
2. Close the annular preventer and allow the gas to vent at the seabed.
If there is no immediate danger to personnel or the rig:
3. Attempt to control the well by pumping sea water/mud at a maximum rate.
If the gas flow is endangering personnel or the rig:
4. Consider dropping the drillstring or shearing prior to (5) (See Section 6.2).
5. Unlatch the LMRP or pin connector and winch the rig to a safe position
outside the gas plume.
In the event of failure of the subsea diverter system there remains the option to divert at
surface or to unlatch the LMRP or pin connector, thereby venting the gas at the wellhead.
Diverting at surface is not recommended, however if it becomes absolutely necessary to
divert at surface, proceed as follows:
1. Maintain maximum pump rate.
2. Space out so that the lower kelly cock is just above the rotary table.
3. Open the diverter lines, close the shaker valve and diverter element thereby
diverting returns overboard.
4-5
March 1995
4. Shut down all non-essential equipment and machinery to minimise potential

sources of ignition. Deploy fire hoses beneath the rig floor .
5. Prepare to unlatch the pin connector or LMRP and winch to a safe position.
If the situation is deteriorating and loss of control is imminent:
6. Consider dropping the drillstring or shearing the pipe prior to (7) (See
Section 4.3).
7. Release the pin connector or LMRP and winch the rig to a safe position
outside the gas plume.
4 Gas encountered whilst drilling for surface

casing from a Bottom Supported Rig
Shallow gas reservoirs are potentially much more hazardous when penetrated from a jack-up
or platform. Because the conductor extends almost to the rig floor, the products of a kick are
discharged directly into a hazardous zone.
In the event of a shallow gas flow, the diverter will immediately be closed in order to direct
the flow overboard. The reliability of the diverter system while subject to the stress of a
shallow gas flow is uncertain and so the possibility of equipment failure at this stage must
be considered.
On a bottom supported rig, a hazardous situation is created if a restriction forms in the

diverter line. The subsequent pressure build up may cause gas to broach around the casing to
the seabed. In this event there is a real risk that the seabed becomes fluidized, thus inducing
a sudden reduction in spudcan resistance.
The following precautions should be taken routinely whilst the surface hole is open:
• Care should be taken to ensure the annulus does not become overloaded with cuttings,
thus causing losses or gas to be liberated from the cuttings to such an extent that the
annulus unloads. This is achieved by drilling pilot hole, limiting the ROP, and circulating
at a high rate to distribute the cuttings and drilled gas.
• Facilities should be continuously available to rapidly fill the annulus from surface in
the event of sudden losses.
• Facilities should be available and care taken to monitor the hole and ensure that it remains
full whilst tripping.
• A means of diverting the flow away from hazardous zones, without restricting flow or
imposing backpressure on the well, should be available for immediate activation.
• Sufficient mud should be kept onsite to fill the hole volume twice.
4-6
March 1995
Should the well start to flow, the following procedure may be used as a guideline:
1. Maintain maximum pump rate.
2. Space out such that the lower kelly cock is just above the rotary table.
3. Ensure that diverter lines are open, close shaker valve and diverter element
thereby diverting returns overboard.
4. Shut down all non-essential equipment and machinery to minimise potential

sources of ignition. Deploy fire hoses beneath the rig floor.
5. Evacuate all non-essential personnel.
6. Monitor the sea for evidence of gas breaking through outside the conductor.
(Evacuate all personnel if any evidence is detected.)
5 Onshore Shallow Gas

The shallow geology of onshore locations varies widely, but shallow gas is a rare occurrence
onshore. Geological control is usually sufficient to predict formations accurately and, when
necessary, specific contingency plans should be made to counter potential problems.
Shallow onshore reservoirs are generally older, more consolidated and less permeable than
those offshore, which will tend to restrict the flow potential of a shallow kick onshore.
Onshore, most wells are spudded through a thin layer of weathered formation into a bed
rock. The conductor and surface casing strings are normally set in competent formation
which can permit secondary well control by normal means.
However, if it is not possible to positively exclude the possibility of either a shallow gas
accumulation or a weak casing shoe, a means of diverting the flow away from the rig should
be provided. Provision should also be made to ensure an adequate supply of water is available
to pump to the hole at a high rate without taking returns.
Diverter procedures for an onshore well will be similar to those for a bottom supported
offshore rig. However, if water supply is known to be limited, a baryte plug may be the only
practical method of halting a shallow gas flow.
Most flows from shallow onshore reservoirs are associated with aquifers that outcrop at
higher elevations (or indeed lower elevations if air or foam drilling fluid is in use). A water
flow of this type is usually predictable and of limited consequence. Severe shallow flows
have been encountered in the past as a result of a shallow zone becoming charged by a lower
high pressure zone; the shallow zone having been charged by a faulty cement job in a
previously drilled well.
4-7/8
4-7
March 1995
4.2 SHUT-IN PROCEDURES

Paragraph Page
1 General 4-10
2 Fast Shut-in 4-10
3 Shut-in Procedure 4-11
Illustrations
4.1 Kick while Drilling, Floating Rig, Fast Shut-in 4-12
4.2 Kick while Drilling, Fixed Rig, Fast Shut-in 4-13
4.3 Kick while Tripping, Fast Shut-in 4-14
4-9
March 1995
1 General
It is Company policy that a well kick will be shut in and controlled at the BOP stack on hole
sections below the surface casing.
The procedures to be adopted in the event of a kick while drilling ahead from the surface
casing shoe are drawn up at the discretion of the Company Representative and the Company
Drilling Superintendent.
There are various methods of shutting in a well that is flowing. In general, the best method
is that which ensures that the well is safely shut in and the influx volume is minimised. The
smaller the volume of influx, the lower will be the pressures in the wellbore and at surface
throughout the kick control process.
It is the responsibility of the Company Representative to ensure that the Contractor is made
aware of the procedures that should be initiated in the event of a well kick.
The speed with which the Drillcrew carry out these procedures is a critical
factor. In this respect, if a primary indicator of a kick, such as either a pit gain
or an increase in returns flowrate is detected, no time should be spent
flowchecking the well. In such circumstances, the kelly (or topdrive) should
be picked up, the pumps stopped and the BOP closed immediately.
Speed and proficiency are achieved by regular drills. It is a further responsibility of the
Company Representative that he ensures these drills are carried out at suitable intervals to
ensure the drillcrews are proficient at implementing the shut-in procedures.
The forms illustrated in Figures 4.1 to 4.3 should be used to make absolutely clear the
shut-in procedures that will be used on each rig. These forms are intended primarily for the
Driller, however copies should be distributed to other relevant personnel including the
Toolpusher and, where appropriate, the Subsea Engineer.
When a standard shut-in procedure is finalised, this procedure should be written on a large
notice board that will be positioned prominently on the rig floor.
2 Fast Shut-in
Drilling management have issued the following guideline:
The fast shut-in is the preferred method of shutting in a well.
In order to implement the fast shut-in, the equipment should be set up as follows:
• The remote operated choke closed and isolated by a high pressure valve immediately
upstream.
(Ensure that the choke pressure can be monitored in this position.)
• One remote operated chokeline valve closed.

(Outer failsafe on a floating rig and HCR valve on a fixed rig.)
In the event that a kick is detected, or suspected, the choke line valve(s) are opened and the
BOP closed.
4-10
March 1995
On a floating rig, the annular BOP will be used to initially shut-in the well. On a fixed rig,
the pipe rams may be used to initially shut-in the well, in order to speed up the procedure, if
the position of the tooljoint in relation to the pipe ram is known with confidence.
The advantage of this method is quite clear, namely that the operation is relatively simple in
comparison with the soft shut-in. Consequently, mistakes are unlikely and the time taken to
close in the well will be minimised.
At all times, be aware that the pressure rating of the standpipe equipment is generally less
than that of the BOP stack and the choke manifold.
3 Shut-in Procedure
It is the responsibility of the Company Representative and the Company Drilling
Superintendent to define the shut-in procedure that will be implemented in the event of
a␣kick.
The following forms are examples of the information that should be provided to the Driller:
Figure 4.1: Kick while Drilling, Floating Rig, Fast Shut-in.
Figure 4.2: Kick while Drilling, Fixed Rig, Fast Shut-in.
Figure 4.3: Kick while Tripping, Fast Shut-in.
4-11
March 1995
Figure 4.1 Kick while Drilling, Floating Rig, Fast Shut-in
STANDING ORDERS TO DRILLER

ORDERS EFFECTIVE THROUGH 121/4in HOLE SECTION
DATE 10/3/87 COMPANY REP S.M.B. K.D. TOOLPUSHER
1. DRILLING BREAK
*2. INCREASED RETURNS FLOWRATE
*3. PIT GAIN
4. CHANGE IN PUMP SPEED OR PRESSURE
5. SUDDEN CHANGE IN PROPERTIES OF RETURNED MUD
6. ……………………………………………………………………………
7. ……………………………………………………………………………
8. ……………………………………………………………………………
9. ……………………………………………………………………………
10. ……………………………………………………………………………
LOWER KELLY COCK IS …………………………

1. PICK UP UNTIL ………………………… 2.5m ABOVE ROTARY
UPPER PIPE
(Space out to ensure that a tool joint is clear of ………………………… rams)
2. SHUT DOWN THE PUMPS
(Do not flowcheck if 2* or 3* as above have been detected.)
IS THE
YES NO
WELL
FLOWING?
1. OPEN UPPER CHOKE LINE 1. NOTIFY COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE

……………………………………………………………
AND TOOLPUSHER
FAILSAFE (S)
……………………………………………………………
2. CLOSE UPPER ANNULAR 2. PROCEED AS DIRECTED
……………………………………………………………
3. CHECK WELL IS SHUT IN
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
5. CHECK SPACEOUT
……………………………………………………………
6. CLOSE UPPER PIPE RAMS
……………………………………………………………
7. ADJUST ANNULAR CLOSING
……………………………………………………………
PRESSURE
……………………………………………………………
8. HANG OFF ON UPPER PIPE RAMS
……………………………………………………………
9. CLOSE RAMLOCKS
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
WEOX02.015
4-12
March 1995
Figure 4.2 Kick while Drilling, Fixed Rig, Fast Shut-in
STANDING ORDERS TO DRILLER

ORDERS EFFECTIVE FOR WELL No 28
DATE 15/9/87 COMPANY REP J.B.H. J.P. TOOLPUSHER
1. DRILLING BREAK
*2. INCREASED RETURNS FLOWRATE
*3. PIT GAIN
4. CHANGE IN PUMP SPEED OR PRESSURE
5. SUDDEN CHANGE IN PROPERTIES OF RETURNED MUD
6. ……………………………………………………………………………
7. ……………………………………………………………………………
8. ……………………………………………………………………………
9. ……………………………………………………………………………
10. ……………………………………………………………………………
LOWER KELLY COCK IS …………………………

1. PICK UP UNTIL ………………………… 2m ABOVE ROTARY
5in PIPE
(Space out to ensure that a tool joint is clear of ………………………… rams)
2. SHUT DOWN THE PUMPS
(Do not flowcheck if 2* or 3* as above have been detected.)
IS THE
YES NO
WELL
FLOWING?
1. OPEN CHOKE LINE VALVE (S) 1. NOTIFY COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE

……………………………………………………………
AND TOOLPUSHER
……………………………………………………………
3. CHECK THAT WELL IS SHUT IN 2. PROCEED AS DIRECTED
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
WEOX02.016
4-13
March 1995
Figure 4.3 Kick while Tripping, Fast Shut-in
STANDING ORDERS TO DRILLER WHILE TRIPPING

ORDERS EFFECTIVE ON ALL TRIPS
DATE 23/7/87 COMPANY REP A.J.N. H.H. TOOLPUSHER
1. HOLE NOT TAKING CORRECT VOLUME DURING THE TRIP

2. THE WELL IS FLOWING
3. ……………………………………………………………………………
4. ……………………………………………………………………………
5. ……………………………………………………………………………
6. ……………………………………………………………………………
7. ……………………………………………………………………………
8. ……………………………………………………………………………
1. STOP TRIPPING OPERATIONS

IS THE
YES NO
WELL
FLOWING?
1. SET THE SLIPS 1. NOTIFY COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE

……………………………………………………………
AND TOOLPUSHER
2. INSTALL OPEN DP SAFETY VALVE
……………………………………………………………
3. CLOSE DP SAFETY VALVE 2. PROCEED AS DIRECTED
……………………………………………………………
4. OPEN CHOKE LINE VALVE (S)
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
6. CHECK THAT WELL IS SHUT IN
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
8. INSTALL KELLY
……………………………………………………………
9. LINE UP STANDPIPE MANIFOLD
……………………………………………………………
10. OPEN DP SAFETY VALVE
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
12. IF IN OPENHOLE: ENGAGE
……………………………………………………………
BUSHINGS, ROTATE THE PIPE
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………
WEOX02.017
4-14
March 1995
4.3 DURING SHUT-IN PERIOD

Paragraph Page
1 General 4-16
2 Record Pressure Data 4-16
3 Record drillpipe pressure with a Float Valve in the string 4-17
4 Trapped Pressure 4-19
5 Identify the Influx Type 4-20
6 Influx Migration 4-21
7 Control Influx Migration 4-24
Illustrations
4.4 Shut-in Pressure Build-up Curve
– showing the effect of influx migration 4-17
4.5 Well Control Operations Log 4-18
4.6 An Example Calculation
– showing how to evaluate the type of influx fluid 4-22
4.7 An Example of the possible increase in wellbore
pressure due to influx migration 4-23
4-15
March 1995
1 General
When a flowing well is shut in by closing the BOPs, the flow will continue until shut-in
pressures have built up to balance the static reservoir pressure. In most cases, this will mean
that the flow will stop almost immediately the BOPs are closed and that the shut-in pressure
will stabilise within a few minutes.
In general, only if the well has been flowing for some time will the kick zone pressure take
time to build up to a maximum after the well has been shut in. In most cases, when a kick is
taken, the inflow into the wellbore occurs for only a short time and the drawdown is relatively
small. As a result, pressure in the wellbore will stabilise quickly after the well is shut in.
However, there have been many cases of surface pressures taking several hours to stabilise.
The reasons for this can be one, or all, of the following:
• The influx originated from a low permeability zone.
• The influx created instability in the wellbore, leading to the hole sloughing and
packing␣of f.
• The influx is migrating up the hole.
• The surface lines or subsea choke line is partially packed off.
This section covers the procedures that may be required during the time the well is shut in
prior to circulation.
2 Record Pressure Data

As soon as the well is shut in, a person must be assigned to record the drillpipe and casing
pressures. The pressures should be recorded initially at 1 minute intervals until the pressures
have stabilised. It is important to record the data frequently in order that any change in the
rate of build-up be clearly identified.
Usually, the rate of build-up is relatively fast until the well begins to stabilise. Once the
pressures have begun to stabilise, any further significant increase in surface pressures can
be indicative of influx migration.
The drillpipe pressure reflects the difference between the kick zone pressure and the effective
hydrostatic pressure of the mud column in the drillpipe, assuming that the influx has not
entered the drillpipe. It can therefore be used to determine the kick zone pressure.
When the surface pressures take a considerable time to stabilise, it is often difficult to
determine the drillpipe pressure that truly reflects the actual bottomhole pressure. There are
no hard and fast rules that apply to determine the correct value for the relevant drillpipe
pressure reading, however, frequent and accurate pressure readings will aid the
interpretation of build-up data.
Figure 4.4 shows a pressure build-up curve which shows signs of influx migration. The kick
zone EMW is determined from the drillpipe pressure during the stabilised period.
4-16
March 1995
INITIAL STABILISED INFLUX

PRESSURE PERIOD MIGRATION
BUILDUP OCCURRING
ANNULUS
PRESSURE
SURFACE PRESSURE (psi)
DRILLPIPE
PRESSURE
TIME ELAPSED AFTER SHUT-IN
WEOX02.018
Figure 4.4 Shut-in Pressure Build-up Curve

– showing the effect of influx migration
Figure 4.5 shows a form that can be used to record the build-up of drillpipe and casing
pressure. This form should also be used to keep a complete record of events during the well
control operation.
3 Record drillpipe pressure with a Float Valve

in the string
If a non-ported float valve is in the string and a kick is taken, the valve will close against the
differential pressure and no pressure will be recorded at the standpipe.
In order to open this valve and allow the pressure to be transmitted to the surface, the
following procedure can be implemented:
1. Line up the pump to the drillpipe.
4-17
March 1995
Figure 4.5 Well Control Operations Log
WELL CONTROL OPERATIONS LOG
WELL NO 28 RIG RIG 9 DATE AND TIME 3/7/87 03.00 SHEET NO 1
FIRST READING AT / INTERVAL BETWEEN READINGS 1 MINUTE UNTIL PRESSURES STABILISE

TIME DRILLPIPE CHOKE PIT LEVEL/
PRESSURE PRESSURE VOLUME REMARKS
(hr min) (psi) (psi) (bbl )
03.00 300 450 120 WELL SHUT IN – 10bbl GAIN

03.01 360 500 ''
03.02 420 560 ''
03.03 460 600 ''
03.04 520 660 ''
03.05 590 730 ''
03.06 630 770 ''
03.07 700 840 ''
03.08 720 860 ''
03.09 740 880 ''
03.10 760 900 ''
03.11 770 910 ''
03.12 775 920 ''
03.13 775 920 ''
03.14 780 925 ''
03.15 780 925 ''
03.16 780 925 ''
03.17 780 925 ''
03.20 780 925 '' INFORM COMPANY REP – PRESSURES STABILISED
03.25 780 925 ''
03.30 780 925 ''
03.45 780 925 '' START MIXING KILL WEIGHT MUD @ 1.75 SG
04.00 780 925 ''
04.30 782 925 ''
05.00 782 925 ''
05.10 782 925 '' 100bbl 1.75 SG MUD MIXED IN TANK No 1
05.15 782 925 '' VERIFY EQUIPMENT CORRECTLY LINED UP – CO REP
AND TOOLPUSHER TO RIG FLOOR
05.20 782 925 '' START CIRCULATION – BRING PUMP UP TO 25 SPM
05.24 1085 925 120 PUMP UP TO SPEED – RETURNS THROUGH DEGASSER
05.30 1010 910
05.40 880 903
05.50 755 930
06.00 630 945
06.10 450 950 KILL WEIGHT MUD TO BIT
WEOX02.019
4-18
March 1995
2. Carefully monitoring both the pump and casing pressure, pump to the hole
at a controlled rate (very slow).
3. Record the increase in pump pressure and the volume of mud pumped.
The relationship between the pump pressure and the volume of mud pumped will be
linear as the mud in the drillpipe is compressed. If pumping is continued after the pressure
equalises across the float valve, the valve will open. As the valve opens, the pump
pressure will increase slower than before; this change should be easily recognisable at
slow pump rates. Stop the pump when this change is noticed. The casing pressure is
also likely to show an indication of the valve opening.
4. Isolate the pump at the standpipe.
5. Record the shut-in drillpipe pressure as the pump pressure recorded

immediately before the float valve opened.
6. If the casing pressure rises at any stage, immediately stop the pump.
Isolate the pump. Bleed off the excess pressure from the casing. As an example, if the
casing pressure rose 50 psi and this extra pressure was considered undesirable, bleed
50␣psi from the casing and record the shut-in drillpipe pressure as 50 psi less than the
final pump pressure.
The utmost care must be taken in carrying out this procedure. As outlined, this procedure
involves pumping into a closed well. The well is pressurised at the start of the operation,
and so any excessive additional pressurisation caused by pumping into the well may
overpressure the openhole section.
4 Trapped Pressure
In some circumstances it is possible that pressure, in excess of that caused by the kick zone,
can be trapped in the well. There are three possible causes of this phenomenon:
• The pumps were left running after the well was shut-in.
• The influx is migrating up the hole.
• Pipe has been stripped into the well without bleeding the correct volume of mud.
Trapped pressure of this kind will result in surface pressures that do not reflect the actual
kick zone pressure. However if the surface pressure built up at any point after the well
was␣shut-in, this is confirmation that there is no trapped pressure in the well. Pressure may
be trapped in the well if the surface pressure appears constant and no pressure build has
been seen.
The drillpipe pressure is used to determine the kick zone pressure and hence the mud weight
used to kill the well. An artificially high drillpipe pressure reading, used to determine the
kill mud weight, will result in overkilling the well.
4-19
March 1995
The following procedure can be used to check for trapped pressure:
1. Ensure that accurate pressure gauges are fitted to the drillpipe and annulus.
Carefully monitor the drillpipe and casing pressure.
2. Using a manual choke, bleed a small volume of mud from the annulus to a
suitable measuring tank. (1/2 barrel is a suitable amount.)
3. Shut in the well. Allow pressure to stabilise.
If pressure has been trapped in the well, the drillpipe pressure and casing pressure will
have fallen.
If the drillpipe pressure does not drop after bleeding mud from the annulus, no pressure
is trapped in the well. Be aware that, if there is no trapped pressure in the well, each
increment of mud bled from the well will cause a further influx into the well. Therefore,
if no reduction in drillpipe pressure is detected after bleeding 2 – 3/bbl from the well,
no more mud should be bled off.
An increase in casing pressure is a sure sign that additional influx has entered the well.
Therefore, if this occurs, no more mud should be bled from the well.
4. If both the drillpipe pressure and casing pressure have decreased, continue
to bleed mud from the well in 1/2 bbl increments.
5. When the drillpipe pressure no longer decreases as mud is bled from the
well, record the drillpipe pressure as the shut-in drillpipe pressure. Stop
bleeding mud from the well.
It should be stressed that bleeding mud from a well that has kicked is an operation that must
be carefully implemented. Whilst it is undesirable to overkill the well, it is potentially
hazardous to increase the size of the influx, which is clearly a possibility if this procedure is
not properly carried out.
A firm recommendation is that the volumes bled from the well at this stage are kept to a
minimum, unless influx migration is obviously occurring. If there is some doubt as to the
true shut-in drillpipe pressure, even after bleeding mud from the annulus, it may be prudent
to use the Driller’s Method to circulate out the kick, rather than continue bleeding mud.
This procedure is not recommended if the kick zone is suspected to have low permeability.
Bleeding even very small quantities of mud from the annulus may reduce the pressure of a
tight kick zone below its final shut-in pressure. The drillpipe pressure will continue to
decrease, giving the false impression at surface that the bottomhole pressure is still greater
than the actual kick zone pressure. A possible consequence is that the operator may
inadvertantly reduce the bottomhole pressure significantly below the kick zone pressure
and cause a further influx into the wellbore.
5 Identify the Influx Type

The shut-in pressures recorded on the drillpipe and the casing after a kick is taken are
generally not equal. This is because the effective hydrostatic pressure of the fluid in the
annulus will be reduced below that in the drillpipe. It is unlikely that any kick fluid will␣enter
the drillpipe, because this is effectively a closed system if the kick was taken while drilling.
4-20
March 1995
The pit gain at surface provides a guide to the volume of the kick. With this information,
together with the annular geometry and the surface pressures, it is possible to estimate
the␣influx density . The type of influx fluid can then be evaluated, using the following as
a␣guide:
Influx fluid Calculated Influx gradient (psi/ft)
Gas 0.05 – 0.2

Oil 0.3 – 0.4
Water > 0.4
Figure 4.6 shows an example of how to determine the influx type. This calculation is only
an approximation, for the following reasons. Firstly, it is assumed that the influx is a discrete
bubble, whereas it is more likely to be eccentric to the hole and contaminated with mud.
Secondly, the effective mud weight in the annulus is not likely to be the same as in the
drillpipe, due to cuttings loading the annulus, and possibly, contamination of the mud with
formation fluid. Thirdly, the hole may be out of gauge. It is important, however, that this
calculation is carried out for the additional reason that it provides a check of the validity of
the kick data.
It is useful to know the type of influx before circulation is initiated. Although most formation
fluids, including formation water, contain some gas, the calculated influx gradient provides
a guide to the proportion of gas in the fluid. The proportion of gas in the influx determines
two important factors, firstly, the well bore pressures during displacement, and secondly,
the pit gain during displacement. If the gas contains sufficient heavy hydrocarbon molecules
at reservoir conditions, condensate fluids may be formed as the gas is displaced from the
hole. This will not occur for a dry gas that does not contain a sufficient proportion of heavy
molecules. Gas will come out of solution from an oil influx when the influx pressure reduces
below the bubble point pressure during displacement. For light oils, a significant quantity
of gas will be produced.
It is recommended that all kicks are assumed to contain a certain proportion of gas. Prior to
circulation therefore, an estimation should be made of the maximum pressures that will be
encountered during circulation, and provision should be made for a pit gain during this
period. (See Chapter 5, Volume 2 for hand calculation techniques.)
6 Influx Migration
After a kick is taken, there is usually a tendency for the influx to migrate up the hole.
This␣tendency is caused by the dif ference in density between the influx fluid and the mud.
Influx migration up a closed-in well can cause excessive pressures within the wellbore if
suitable control procedures are not implemented.
Figure 4.7 shows an example of the potential increase in bottomhole pressure caused by gas
migration.
4-21
March 1995
Figure 4.6 An Example Calculation

– showing how to evaluate the type of influx fluid
HOLE DRILLSTRING DIMENSIONS PRESSURE BALANCE
1. Determine the bottomhole 2. Determine the hydrostatic

855 500 pressure pressure of the influx
DRILLPIPE ANNULUS
SURFACE SURFACE
PRESSURE PRESSURE
1.7SG MUD
+ MUD +
MUD
HYDROSTATIC HYDROSTATIC
PRESSURE PRESSURE
OF MUD IN OF MUD IN
81/2in HOLE THE DRILLPIPE ANNULUS
61/4in COLLARS
+
INFLUX
= HYDROSTATIC
20bbl INFLUX PRESSURE
INFLUX
HEIGHT OF BHA =
= 195m
4000m BOTTOMHOLE BOTTOMHOLE

PRESSURE PRESSURE
Identify the influx fluid as follows:
1. Determine the bottomhole pressure

Bottomhole pressure = Drillpipe pressure + mud hydrostatic pressure
= 500 + (1.7 x 1.421 x 4000)
= 500 + 9663
= 10,163psi
2. Calculate the height of the influx in the annulus
Influx volume = Recorded pit gain = 20bbl
Annular capacity at collars = 0.1058bblm
Height of influx = 20/0.1058 = 189m
3. From pressure balance
Annulus surface pressure + Hydrostatic pressure of the mud + Hydrostatic pressure of
the influx = Bottomhole pressure
855 + 1.7 x 1.421 x (4000 – 189) + Pi = 10,163psi
Pi, hydrostatic pressure of the influx = 10,163 - 855 - 9206

= 102psi
Influx gradient = Pi/height of the influx

= 102/(189 x 3.2808)
= 0.16psi/ft
Therefore the influx is mainly gas
4. The following formula can also be used routinely to calculate the influx density
Density of the influx (SG) = MW – Pa – Pdp
h x 1.421
= 1.7 – 855 – 500
189 x 1.421
= 0.378 SG –
– 0.16psi/ft
WEOX02.020
4-22
March 1995
SURFACE PRESSURE 250psi 3195psi 6180psi

0
GAS @
6180psi
1.4SG
MUD
1500m GAS @
6180psi
2975m
GAS @
3000m 6180psi
BOTTOMHOLE PRESSURE 6180psi 9160psi (12140psi)
BOTTOMHOLE EMW (SG) 1.45 2.15 (2.85)
WEOX02.021
Figure 4.7 An Example of the possible increase in

wellbore pressure due to influx migration
Influx migration does not always occur, but when it does, the rate at which the influx rises
up the hole is dependent on several variables. Experiment has shown that a gas bubble will
migrate up one side of the annulus as mud falls down the opposite side. Bearing this process
in mind, it is clear that the factors that predominantly affect the rate of rise of the influx will
be the following:
• The viscosity of the drilling fluid.
The more viscous the mud, the more difficult it is for the mud to fall down the annulus
to allow the influx to migrate.
• The difference in density between the mud and the influx.
The buoyancy force causes the influx to migrate.
• Any interaction between the mud and the influx fluid.
Migration will be slowed if the viscosity of the mud is increased as a result of

contamination with the influx fluid. In severe cases, migration may be completely
prevented.
4-23
March 1995
7 Control Influx Migration

There are many possible reasons that a well that has kicked may be left shut-in for extended
periods. Procedures for relieving bottomhole pressure, should migration occur during this
period, will depend both on the position of the drillstring in the hole and whether or not the
drillpipe pressure can be used to monitor bottomhole pressure.
In both cases however, it is necessary to control the well using the Volumetric Method. This
technique ensures that the bottomhole pressure is maintained slightly above the kick zone
pressure at all times. This is accomplished by bleeding suitable volumes of mud from the
annulus to allow for expansion of the influx as it migrates up the hole.
This control procedure is greatly simplified if the drillstring is on bottom and in

communication with the annulus. In this case, the bottomhole pressure can be monitored
with the drillpipe pressure gauge. It is simply necessary to ensure that the drillpipe pressure
stays at a suitable value above the final shut-in pressure (that value recorded before migration
started) by bleeding mud from the annulus.
If the drillstring is off bottom, the bit is plugged, or there is a washout in the drillstring, it is
not possible to monitor bottomhole pressure with the drillpipe pressure gauge. In this event,
the annulus pressure is the only reliable guide to subsurface pressures.
The principle behind the control of the annulus is that an increase in annulus pressure caused
by influx migration, must be relieved by an equivalent reduction in the hydrostatic pressure
of the mud in the annulus. Thus, if the annulus pressure rises 100 psi, then a volume of mud
corresponding to a hydrostatic pressure in the annulus (at the top of the influx) of 100 psi
must be bled from the well at constant choke pressure.
The procedure for implementing the Volumetric Method is covered in detail in Chapter 6.
4-24
March 1995
5 WELL KILL DECISION ANALYSIS

Paragraph Page
1 General 5-2
2 Pipe on Bottom 5-2
3 Pipe off Bottom (Drillpipe in the Stack) 5-2
4 Pipe off Bottom (Drillcollar in the Stack) 5-5
5 No Pipe in the Hole 5-5
6 While Running Casing or Liner 5-7
7 Underground Blowout 5-9
Illustrations
5.1 Preparations for the Well Kill 5-3
5.2 Decision Analysis – Pipe off Bottom
(Drillpipe in the Stack) 5-4
5.3 Decision Analysis – Pipe off Bottom
(Drillcollar in the Stack) 5-6
5.4 Decision Analysis – No Pipe in the Hole 5-8
5.5 Decision Analysis – Flow to a Fracture above a
High Pressure Zone 5-10
5.6 Decision Analysis – Flow to a Fracture or Loss
Zone below a High Pressure Zone 5-12
5-1
March 1995
1 General
This Chapter is intended to provide guidelines to the decision making process in the event
that a kick is taken in a variety of different situations.
In reality, the specific conditions prevailing at the rigsite at the time that the kick is taken
will determine the best course of action to take in order to kill the well.
This Chapter should therefore not be used as a guide at the moment that a kick is taken. However,
it is anticipated that general familiarity with the analysis presented in this Chapter will enable
rigsite personnel to be better prepared to deal with a situation in which the well has kicked.
The techniques referred to in this section are covered in detail in Chapter 6, Well Kill
Techniques.
2 Pipe on Bottom
If a kick is taken with the pipe on bottom, the well will be shut-in immediately unless the
decision has previously been made to divert.
Having established that the well is safely closed in, it will be necessary to decide on the
most appropriate method of killing the well. This decision is the responsibility of the
Company Representative.
Having decided on the most appropriate course of action, the Company Representative is
responsible for ensuring that contractor personnel are made aware of the procedures that
will be used to kill the well.
The general procedure that is presented in Figure 5.1 represents the steps that should be
taken in preparation to kill the well. These steps are applicable to any situation in which a
kick is taken.
3 Pipe off Bottom (Drillpipe in the Stack)

If an influx is taken during a trip it will generally be necessary to return the drillstring to
bottom before the well can be killed.
The surface pressure will be a major factor in determining the most suitable method of
returning the pipe to bottom. It must be considered in relation to the string weight and the
pressure rating of the BOPs.
The first option that should be considered is stripping the pipe to bottom with the rig equipment.
Annular stripping is the most satisfactory method, however ram combination stripping may
have to be considered if surface pressures are approaching the pressure rating of the annular. On
a floating rig, ram combination stripping is a particularly difficult operation.
The limitations imposed by the rig BOP system may dictate that stripping the pipe to bottom
is impractical. In this case, snubbing must be considered.
Figure 5.2 represents an analysis of the decision making process in the event the well kicks
with the pipe off bottom.
5-2
March 1995
Figure 5.1 Preparations for the Well Kill
KICK TAKEN
WELL SHUT-IN
MONITOR THE
WELL
CONTINUOUSLY
PREKILL MEETING
• DECISION MADE AS TO
MOST APPROPRIATE
METHOD OF KILLING
THE WELL
• DRILLING
SUPERINTENDENT IN
TOWN SHOULD BE
MADE AWARE OF THE
SITUATION
ALLOCATE INDIVIDUAL
RESPONSIBILITIES
• ESTABLISH THE LINES
OF COMMUNICATION
COMPLETE
PREPARATIONS
• CHECK EQUIPMENT
• ENSURE PERSONNEL
ARE BRIEFED
• VERIFY
COMMUNICATIONS
START UP KILL
PROCEDURE
• COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE
CONTROLS THE
OPERATION THROUGH
THE CONTRACTOR
TOOLPUSHER
WEOX02.022
5-3
March 1995
Figure 5.2 Decision Analysis – Pipe off Bottom

(Drillpipe in the Stack)
WELL KICKS PIPE

OFF BOTTOM
(Drillpipe in stack)
IS IT
POSSIBLE NO WELL IS DROP THE PIPE
TO STAB A SAFETY FLOWING UP AND SECURE
VALVE? THE DRILLSTRING THE WELL
YES
STAB AND CLOSE

FULL OPENING HANG OFF
SAFETY VALVE
OPEN CHOKELINE SHEAR PIPE

VALVE
CLOSE
ANNULAR
INSTALL DP DART
OR INSIDE BOP
THE
SEVERITY OF THE
MONITOR SURFACE SITUATION DICTATES
PRESSURE – CONSIDER
THAT STRIPPING WITH SNUBBING
ROTATE THE PIPE RIG EQUIPMENT
IS IMPRACTICAL
YES ATTEMPT TO
REDUCE SURFACE
PRESSURE – SURFACE
POSSIBLE TO CONSIDER: YES PRESSURE
REDUCE SURFACE • VOLUMETRIC EXCEEDS PRESSURE
PRESSURE? • LUBRICATION RATING OF
• BULLHEADING ANNULAR?
• CIRCULATE OUT
NO INFLUX NO
REDUCE
ANNULAR CLOSING
PRESSURE
ATTEMPT TO
LOWER PIPE
THROUGH STACK
ATTEMPT TO
REDUCE SURFACE
PRESSURE –
CONSIDER: NO POSSIBLE TO
LOWER PIPE
• VOLUMETRIC THROUGH
• LUBRICATION ANNULAR?
• BULLHEADING
• CIRCULATE OUT
INFLUX
YES
YES
ATTEMPT TO
REDUCE SURFACE
POSSIBLE PRESSURE –
YES POSSIBLE TO TO LOWER NO POSSIBLE TO
REDUCE SURFACE CONSIDER:
TOOLJOINT THROUGH REDUCE SURFACE
PRESSURE? ANNULAR?
• VOLUMETRIC PRESSURE ?
• LUBRICATION
• BULLHEADING
• CIRCULATE OUT
NO YES INFLUX NO
CONSIDER CONSIDER
FEASIBILITY IMPLEMENT FEASIBILITY
OF RAM TO RAM CONSIDER OF ANNULAR TO
ANNULAR
STRIPPING SNUBBING RAM STRIPPING
STRIPPING
WEOX02.023
5-4
March 1995
4 Pipe off Bottom (Drillcollar in the Stack)

Every effort should be made to ensure that well control problems are avoided when the
BHA is across the stack. Regaining control from a situation in which the well has kicked
when the BHA is across the stack can present serious complications.
If the kick was swabbed in, it may be possible to bring the well under control by bleeding
gas and lubricating mud into the well. It is however, undesirable to leave the collars in the
stack for an extended period during a well control operation.
In any event, it is likely that the pipe will have to be stripped to bottom before the well can
be killed.
There are considerable operational problems presented by attempting to strip the BHA
through the annular; these include:
• Many BOP stacks, especially on land, have only one annular BOP. The BOP element
will be subject to considerable stress as the spiralled collars are stripped through it. If
the element fails there is no back-up.
• Stabilizers in the BHA may prevent stripping completely.
Further complications that may arise in this situation are numerous, but include the following:
• There is not sufficient weight of collars to strip through the annular BOP.
• Well pressures force the collars out of the hole.
• An internal blowout through the drillstring.
The appropriate course of action required in these situations will depend to a large extent on
the particular conditions and equipment at the rigsite. However Figure 5.3 is intended as a
guide to dealing with such situations.
5 No Pipe in the Hole

Correct tripping procedures will ensure that an influx is detected before the pipe is completely
out of the hole.
Should an influx remain undetected during tripping and the well is shut in with no pipe in
the hole, it may not be possible to re-introduce drillpipe into the hole in order to strip to
bottom.
The limiting factor is the surface pressure in relation to the weight of the drillstring above
the stack. A simple calculation will determine whether it will be possible to overcome the
wellbore pressures with the weight of the string. There is quite clearly a limited weight that
can be applied at a surface stack.
If the influx is immediately below the stack, it may be possible to either kill the well by
lubricating mud into the well, or to reduce the surface pressures such that it becomes possible
to re-introduce pipe into the hole.
5-5
March 1995
Figure 5.3 Decision Analysis – Pipe off Bottom

(Drillcollar in the Stack)
WELL KICKS
(Drillcollar in
the stack)
IS IT
NO WELL IS DROP THE PIPE
POSSIBLE TO
FLOWING UP THE AND SECURE
STAB A SAFETY
DRILLSTRING THE WELL
VALVE?
YES
STAB AND CLOSE

A FULL OPENING
SAFETY VALVE
OPEN CHOKE
LINE VALVE(S)
CLOSE ANNULAR
YES IS THE
INCREASE ANNULAR
ANNULAR
CLOSING PRESSURE
LEAKING?
NO
IS THE INCREASE
PIPE FORCED YES
MINOR LEAK LEAK STOPS ANNULAR
OUT OF THE CLOSING PRESSURE
HOLE?
NO
IS THE
INSTALL INSIDE NO
PIPE FORCED
BOP OUT OF THE
LEAK HOLE?
THREATENS RIG
FLOOR AREA YES
MAKE UP DRILLPIPE
TO COLLARS
ATTEMPT TO
LOWER SURFACE
IS IT PRESSURE CONSIDER
POSSIBLE TO NO LUBRICATING
LOWER PIPE INTO BULLHEADING
THE HOLE?
YES
OPEN
CHOKE LINE IS IT
STRIP IN YES POSSIBLE TO OPEN
UNTIL DRILLPIPE LOWER PIPE INTO CHOKE LINE
IN THE STACK THE HOLE?
NO
CHECK INTEGRITY
OF ANNULAR
PREVENTER
DROP THE PIPE DROP THE PIPE

STRIP IN THE CONSIDER
AND SECURE AND SECURE
HOLE SNUBBING
THE WELL THE WELL
WEOX02.024
5-6
March 1995
However, if the influx is someway down the hole, it may not be possible to reduce the
surface pressure significantly.
If the influx is migrating up the hole, it may be possible to kill the well by implementing the
Volumetric Control Method.
On fixed offshore and land rigs, the only practical method of controlling the well may be
with the use of a snubbing unit. Snubbing units have been used in exceptional circumstances
on floating rigs.
Figure 5.4 represents a full analysis of the decision making process in the event that a kick
is taken with no pipe in the hole.
6 While Running Casing or Liner

Before pulling out of the hole prior to running casing, every effort will be made to ensure
that the mud is conditioned and the well is under control, thereby minimising the possibility
of well control problems during the casing operation.
However, possible causes of well control problems while running casing include the
following:
• A kick that was swabbed in on the last trip of the hole.
• Swabbing in a kick on a connection while running the casing.
• Surge pressures while running casing leading to losses and hence inducing a kick.
• When casing is run to cure a well control problem, such as after drilling with a floating
mud cap or after controlling an underground blowout.
Particular attention should therefore be paid to these aspects.
In critical well sections, consideration should be given to installing casing rams in the BOP
stack prior to running casing; this is only practical in surface stacks. Specialist shear rams
are available that can shear up to 13 3/8 in. casing; these may be considered applicable in
certain situations.
It is impractical to detail the procedure required in the event that a kick is taken while
running casing or a liner. The immediate priority however will be to close in the well, but
the most suitable control technique can only be determined bearing in mind the particular
conditions at the rigsite. The subsequent options available can be summarised as follows:
• Cross over to drillpipe (unless current string weight is too great) and strip to bottom to
kill the well.
• Cross over to drillpipe, strip in until drillpipe is in the stack and kill the well at current
shoe depth.
• Kill the well with the casing across the stack.
• Drop the casing.
• Shear the casing.
5-7
March 1995
Figure 5.4 Decision Analysis – No Pipe in the Hole
WELL SHUT IN – NO
PIPE IN THE HOLE
MONITOR
SURFACE
PRESSURE
IS THE INFLUX NO
IMMEDIATELY BELOW
THE RAMS?
YES
LUBRICATE MUD
INTO THE HOLE AND
BLEED GAS
NO ALL
GAS BLED
FROM RAMS?
YES
IS THERE ANY NO
PRESSURE UNDER
THE RAMS?
YES
ATTEMPT TO REDUCE DO
THE SURFACE SURFACE
PRESSURE NO PRESSURES INDICATE YES
THAT INTRODUCING
BY LUBRICATING PIPE INTO THE HOLE IS
OR BULLHEADING POSSIBLE?
POSSIBLE TO YES
REDUCE SURFACE
PRESSURE?
NO
IMPLEMENT YES IS THERE

VOLUMETRIC EVIDENCE OF INFLUX
CONTROL METHOD MIGRATION?
NO
BULLHEAD KILL
MUD INTO THE WELL
PREPARE NO IS SNUBBING YES FLOWCHECK
A PRACTICAL SNUB IN PIPE STRIP IN THE HOLE
CONTINGENCY TO THE WELL
CONSIDERATION? KILL THE WELL KILL WELL
DEAL WITH THE OPEN THE RAMS
FRACTURED ZONE
KILL WELL
WEOX02.025
5-8
March 1995
The major factors that will determine the most appropriate course of action will include the
following:
• The length and type of casing run.
• The possibility and consequences of the casing becoming stuck.
• The possibility and consequences of collapsing the casing.
• The feasibility of circulating out a kick by conventional means. (The relatively small
annular clearance may cause excessive pressures in the annulus, or may possibly
completely restrict circulation.)
• The feasibility of killing the well by other means such as bullheading or by volumetric
control.
• The BOP stack configuration and ram types.
• The likelihood of the casing being forced out of the hole by the well pressure.
7 Underground Blowout
(a) Flow to a Fracture above a High Pressure Zone
The majority of underground blowouts in the past have been as a result of a fracture to
a weak zone up the hole as high pressure zone is penetrated.
Figure 5.5 shows a decision analysis for identifying and dealing with an underground
blowout of this type.
If an underground blowout is suspected, on no account should attempts be made to

control the well using standard techniques. If the annulus is opened, reservoir fluids
will be allowed to flow up the wellbore to surface, thereby increasing surface pressures.
The first action, after shutting in the well, will be to perform a positive test. The purpose
of this test is to determine whether or not the hole is a closed system. A small displacement
pump is lined up to the drillpipe and a small amount of fluid is pumped. If the drillpipe
and casing pressure increase, there is no indication of fracture in the openhole. If the
drillpipe pressure does not increase, or if any increase is not evident on the casing, then
a fracture in the openhole is indicated.
In order to halt an underground flow, it is necessary to pump fluid at a high rate down
the drillpipe and up the annulus; thus effecting a dynamic kill. The fluid will eventually
have to be at kill weight in order to balance the kick zone EMW. However, it will also
have to be as thin as possible to ensure that it can be pumped at high rate without
excessive surface circulating pressures.
Generally the kill mud must flow at least as fast as the underground flow if it is not to be
dispersed by the flow as it passes out of the bit. The kick zone EMW can at best be
estimated because reliable drillpipe pressure will not be available. The mud weight
required to kill the well will depend on the position of the fracture in the wellbore and
the average weight of the fluid occupying the annulus between the fracture and surface.
5-9
March 1995
Figure 5.5a Decision Analysis – Flow to a Fracture above

a High Pressure Zone
SHUT IN THE WELL
REASSESS THE MONITOR SURFACE NO EVIDENCE IMPLEMENT STANDARD

SITUATION PRESSURES OF UNDERGROUND TECHNIQUES TO KILL
BLOWOUT THE WELL
SUSPECT
UNDERGROUND
BLOWOUT BECAUSE:
1. DRILLPIPE ON VACUUM
2. PRESSURE BUILDUP CLEARLY
INDICATES FORMATION HAS
FRACTURED
3. ANNULUS PRESSURE
FLUCTUATING
RUN POSITIVE TEST
RUN TEMPERATURE
AND/OR NOISE LOG TO
IDENTIFY FLOW IF
NECESSARY
NO UNDERGROUND
BLOWOUT
CONFIRMED ?
YES
1. DO NOT BLEED FLUID

FROM ANNULUS
2. LINE UP ONE PUMP TO
THE ANNULUS. LINE UP
MUD AND IF NECESSARY
WATER SUCTION
IF ANNULUS PRESSURE
IS NOT EXCESSIVE
LEAVE ANNULUS SHUT IN
IF ANNULUS PRESSURE IS
BUILDING, PUMP MUD AT
SLOW RATE DOWN
ANNULUS. IF ANNULUS
CANNOT SUPPORT MUD,
PUMP WATER
CONTINUALLY
MONITOR ANNULUS
CONTINUED ON FOLLOWING PAGE

WEOX02.026
5-10
March 1995
Figure 5.5b Decision Analysis – Flow to a Fracture above

a High Pressure Zone (continued)
PREPARE 2 x ANNULUS
VOLUME OF KILL WEIGHT
MUD (AT MIN PV AND YP –
USE FRICTION REDUCER
IF AVAILABLE). REMOVE
KELLY – INSTALL
HP CIRCULATING LINE
IMPLEMENT DYNAMIC KILL

USING BARYTES PLUG
• PUMP KILL WEIGHT MUD
AT MAXIMUM RATE
• KEEP PUMPING UNTIL
ALL THE MUD IS USED
• STOP ONLY IF SURFACE
PRESSURES BECOME
EXCESSIVE
TAKE STEPS
1. CHECK MUD IS AT KILL
DRILLPIPE AND TO SECURE WELL
WEIGHT
2. REDUCE MUD VISCOSITY ANNULUS PRESSURES OPTIONS:
TRY YES
3. REDUCE DRILLSTRING INDICATE THAT 1. CEMENT BHA IN PLACE
AGAIN
INTERNAL FRICTION UNDERGROUND FLOW 2. POOH TO PLUG
4. PUMP LARGER PLUG HAS CEASED? FRACTURE
3. POOH TO RUN CASING
NO
1. MIX LCM PILL

(100bbl MIN FOR LARGE
ANNULUS)
2. MIX 2 x ANNULUS
VOLUME OF KILL
WEIGHT MUD
3. PUMP LCM PILL DOWN
ANNULUS UNTIL JUST
ABOVE FRACTURED ZONE
IMPLEMENT DYNAMIC KILL

• PUMP KILL MUD AT
MAXIMUM RATE DOWN
DRILLPIPE
• PUMP LCM PILL DOWN
ANNULUS AND INTO
FRACTURE
• KEEP PUMPING UNLESS
SURFACE PRESSURE
LIMITS ARE REACHED
TAKE STEPS
1. CHECK MUD IS AT KILL TO SECURE WELL
DRILLPIPE AND
WEIGHT
2. REDUCE MUD VISCOSITY ANNULUS PRESSURES OPTIONS:
TRY YES
3. REDUCE DRILLSTRING INDICATE THAT 1. CEMENT BHA IN PLACE
AGAIN
UNDERGROUND FLOW 2. POOH TO PLUG
INTERNAL FRICTION
4. PUMP LARGER PLUG HAS CEASED? FRACTURE
3. POOH TO RUN CASING
NO
OPTIONS: OPTIONS:
1. BACK OFF, STRIP UP 1. STRIP UP INTO CASING.
INTO CASING, SQUEEZE HAVING INSTALLED
HIGH FILTER LOSS DART SQUEEZE
CEMENT SLURRY TO YES IS THE PIPE NO HIGH FILTER
PLUG WELL STUCK ? LOSS CEMENT SLURRY
2. IF CIRCULATION IS TO PLUG WELL
POSSIBLE ON BOTTOM, 2. PUMP FRESHWATER AT
PUMP FRESHWATER AT MAXIMUM RATE TO
MAXIMUM RATE TO SLOUGH HOLE
SLOUGH HOLE
WEOX02.027
5-11
March 1995
Figure 5.6 Decision Analysis – Flow to a Fracture or

Loss Zone below a High Pressure Zone
• DRILLING AHEAD
• LOSSES EXPERIENCED
SHUT DOWN ROTARY CURE LOSSES

OR TOP DRIVE DRILL AHEAD
• CANNOT CONTROL
LOSSES
• WELL STARTS TO
FLOW
• SHUT IN WELL
POSSIBLE UNDERGROUND
BLOWOUT INDICATORS:
• NO SURFACE PRESSURE
• ANNULUS AND DRILLPIPE ON
VACUUM (ANNULUS PRESSURE
MAY BUILD UP)
RUN POSITIVE TEST
RUN NOISE AND/OR

TEMPERATURE
LOG IF NECESSARY
UNDERGROUND NO REASSESS THE

BLOWOUT SITUATION
CONFIRMED?
YES
• DO NOT BLEED FLUID

FROM ANNULUS
• LINE UP ONE PUMP TO
THE ANNULUS. SUPPLY
MUD AND IF NECESSARY
WATER SUCTION
CONTINUALLY
MONITOR ANNULUS
OPTIONS TO
CONTROL THE FLOW:
• PUMP LCM PILL
• SET CEMENT PLUG ON
BOTTOM
• CIRCULATE THE HOLE
TO LIGHT MUD. DRILL
UNDER PRESSURE WITH
ROTATING HEAD
SURFACE
PRESSURE LOGS
NO INDICATE THAT
UNDERGROUND
FLOW HAS
CEASED ?
YES
TAKE STEPS TO WEOX02.028
SECURE WELL
5-12
March 1995
The fracture may only support a column of water, in which case it will be necessary to
balance the kick zone pressure with the sum of the hydrostatic pressure of the kill weight
mud from the kick zone to the fracture and the hydrostatic pressure of the water above
the fracture.
If the first attempt to control the flow is unsuccessful, the most likely causes will be␣either
that the volume or the velocity of kill mud was insufficient. Subsequent options therefore
include increasing the volume of the kill mud pumped and pumping at a greater rate.
If the rig pumps have been operating at maximum output there remains the options to
bring more pumps to the rigsite or to reduce the frictional resistance of the drillstring by
such measures as:
• Removing the nozzles of the bit with a charge run on wireline.
• Perforating the BHA close to the bit.
• Pumping a lighter, less viscous mud ahead of the kill weight mud in order to reduce
the velocity of the inflow.
As indicated in Figure 5.5, if these measures do not bring the well under control, there
remains the option to mix an LCM pill or soft plug (See Chapter 2, Section 2.3) and
displace it down the annulus and into the fracture as the kill weight mud is pumped
down the drillpipe. The pump rates on the drillpipe and the annulus should be such as to
ensure that the LCM pill is completely displaced into the fracture over the period of
time that will be required to pump the prepared volume of kill weight mud.
Past experience has shown that in many cases, having halted the underground flow, a
further flow has been initiated by attempts to pull off bottom. If the decision is made to
pull off bottom having halted an underground flow, extreme care should be taken.
The industry has given the term ‘Baryte plug’ to the heavy weight pills required to deal
with underground blowouts. The recommended procedure for mixing and spotting a
baryte plug, to deal with an underground blowout, is covered in Chapter 6.
(b) Flow to a Fracture or Loss Zone below a High Pressure Zone

The most likely cause of an underground blowout that flows down the wellbore from a
high pressure zone is that a naturally fractured or cavernous formation is drilled into.
The resultant losses reduce the hydrostatic head of the drilling fluid to such an extent
that a permeable zone higher up the wellbore begins to flow.
When the well is shut-in, it is unlikely that any pressure will be recorded on either the
drillpipe or the casing. However, the casing pressure may increase if gas migrates up
the casing/drillpipe annulus; this rise in pressure is prevented by pumping mud down
the annulus.
Figure 5.6 shows the decision analysis for identifying and dealing with an underground
blowout of this type.
Having established that the flow is downwards to a loss zone, there are two options that
should be considered for halting the flow:
• Set a plug on bottom.
• Reduce the mud weight and drill ahead under pressure.
5-13
March 1995
Drilling under pressure will however only be used in circumstances in which lost
circulation of this type has been anticipated, the high pressure zone has low permeability
and the correct equipment, including a rotating head, is available onsite.
See Chapter 2, Section 2.3 for LCM and cement plug recipes.
5-14
March 1995
6 WELL KILL TECHNIQUES
Section Page
6.1 STANDARD TECHNIQUES 6-1
6.2 SPECIAL TECHNIQUES 6-31
2.1 Volumetric Method 6-33
2.2 Stripping 6-47
2.3 Bullheading 6-67
2.4 Snubbing 6-75
2.5 Baryte Plugs 6-84
2.6 Emergency Procedure 6-93
6.3 COMPLICATIONS 6-97
March 1995
6.1 STANDARD TECHNIQUES
Paragraph Page
1 General 6-2
2 Kick Circulation Methods 6-2
3 Kick Sheet 6-3
4 Implementation of the Wait & Weight Method 6-5
5 Implementation of the Driller’s Method 6-8
6 Procedures For High Angle or Horizontal Wells 6-11
7 Floating Rig Procedure 6-14
8 Accounting for Choke Line Losses in Deep Water 6-23
Illustrations
6.1 An Example Completed Kick Sheet 6-14
6.2 The Kill Line Monitor 6-21
6.3 Subsea BOP Gas prior to Removing Gas from Below
the Preventers 6-24
6.4 Removing Gas from a Subsea BOP Stack
– Lower pipe rams closed hang off rams opened 6-25
– Kill and choke lines displaced to kill weight mud 6-26
– Kill and choke lines displaced to water 6-27
– Gas pressure bled down, gas occupies choke line 6-28
– Diverter is closed, the annular is opened and the gas
is displaced from the stack 6-29
6.9 The Effect of Choke Line Losses
– Casing pressure greater than choke line pressure 6-30
6.10 The Effect of Choke Line Losses
– Casing pressure after initial circulation is less than
choke line loss 6-31
6-1
Rev 1 March
March 1995
1995
1 General
This section covers the basic steps that are required to implement the Driller’s Method, the
Wait & Weight Method on both a fixed installation as well as a floating rig. Further
discussions on the theories behind the methods are covered in Vol.2, Chapter 5.
Company policy is that a contingency plan must be developed regarding the implementation
of the well control methods for both Company operated rigs and rigs that are under a Company
contract. This section is intended to assist in drawing up these contingency plans.
All the well control techniques are designed to ensure that:
Bottom hole pressure is maintained constant and equal to, or slightly greater than, the
formation pressure.
This is the key to well control practice. These techniques use the principle that:
The drillpipe pressure is used to monitor bottom hole pressure.
In the event of any well control incident it is important that a diary of events is kept. The
Well Control operations log can be used initially for this (See Figure 4.5). A full report
should eventually be issued and submitted to Line Management.
2 Kick Circulation Methods

(a) The Wait & Weight Method
When conditions permit, it is recommended that the Wait & Weight Method
be used in preference to other methods, in particular for vertical and low
angle wells.
With the Wait & Weight Method, the mud is weighted up to the kill weight after the well
is shut in. Then circulation is started and the kick displaced from the hole with kill
weight mud. So the well can be killed with one complete circulation. Circulation can be
started immediately if the rig mud weighting system is able to weight up the mud at a
rate greater than or equal to the mud SCR.
Therefore the advantages of the Wait & Weight Method are as follows:
• The surface pressure will be lower than using other methods if the kill weight mud
enters the annulus before the influx is circulated out. This difference is most
significant for influx containing gas, and for high intensity (large under-balance)
kicks. This is illustrated in Figure 5.5 in Vol.2, Chapter 5.
• The pressure exerted on the casing shoe (or the weak point in the openhole) will be
lower than using other methods if the kill mud starts up the annulus before the top of
the influx is displaced to the shoe (or openhole weak point). This is illustrated in
Figure 5.6 in Vol.2, Chapter 5.
• The well will be under pressure for the least time.
6-2
Rev
March
1 March
1995 1995
(b) The Driller’s Method

In certain circumstances, it may not be practical to implement the Wait & Weight Method.
These include:
• There are insufficient stocks of weighting material at the rigsite.
• The rig mud weighting system is not capable of increasing the active mud weight to
kill weight as the kick is displaced.
• There is some considerable doubt as to the mud weight required to kill the well.
• Impending bad weather dictates that the kick must be displaced from the hole as
quickly as possible.
• Increasing surface pressures indicate the influx is rising rapidly in the annulus
Under the above circumstances, the Driller’s method should be considered. The Driller’s
Method requires that two complete hole circulations are carried out before the well can
be killed. After a kick is taken and the well shut-in, the kick is displaced from the hole
by the first circulation with the original mud. In the mean time the mud is weighted up
to kill weight, and the second circulation carried out to kill the well.
The advantages of the Driller’s Method over the Wait & Weight Method are:
• The kick can be displaced from the hole soon after the well is shut-in.
• The earlier circulation may reduce the risks of stuck pipe and other hole problems.
• Influx fluids can be displaced from the well, even if suitable mud weighting material
is not available.
• It avoids the need to initiate a volumetric control during the waiting period.
3 Kick Sheet
The kick sheet should be used to record all the relevant well and kick data. Figures 6.1a,
6.1b and 6.1c show an example kick sheet. The procedures for completing the kick sheet are
shown in Figure 6.1d.
The general well data, drillstring/annulus contents, circulating times and the mud pump
data should be recorded routinely and available at all times in the kick sheet.
In case a kick is taken, the relevant kick data should be recorded in the kick sheet. The
shut-in procedure and the interpretation of the pressure data are covered in Chapter 4. Based
on the kick data, a decision should be made regarding what method be used to kill the well.
In addition to the standard methods which have been described in the previous paragraphs,
some special techniques should be also considered. These special techniques are discussed
in Section 6.2.
If the decision is made to displace the kick from the hole by using one of the standard
methods, the relevant parameters should be calculated and recorded in the kick sheet.
6-3
Rev 1 March
March 1995
1995
(a) Determine the kill weight mud

Circulation may be initiated with the original weight mud, or with the kill weight mud,
depending on the kill method to be used.
The weight of the mud that would exactly balance the kick zone pressure is calculated
from the shut-in drillpipe pressure as follows
Pdp
Kill Mud Weight, MW2 = MW1 + (SG)
TVD x 1.421
where Pdp = Stabilised shut-in drillpipe pressure (psi)

MW1 = Original mud weight (SG)
TVD = True vertical depth of kick zone (m)
It is not recommended practice to weight the mud any higher than the kill weight during
the well killing operation. After the well has been killed however, the mud weight should
be raised to provide suitable overbalance.
(b) Calculate the baryte quantity required to weight up the mud

This calculation is necessary in order to determine if adequate stocks of baryte are
available on site. The amount of baryte required to weight up the mud can be calculated
from the following formula:
(MW2 - MW1)
Baryte required, Wb = 1490 x (lb/bbl)
(4.25 - MW2)
Total quantity of baryte required (lb) = Wb x Total Active Mud Volume (lb)
Total active mud volume = Drillstring Vol + Annulus Vol + Surface Active Vol (bbl)
The stocks of baryte at the rigsite must be at least 10% greater than the calculated
quantity of baryte required.
(c) Develop annulus pressure profile

It is useful to estimate the maximum pressures that will occur during circulation. The
areas of particular importance will be the maximum pressure that will be exerted at the
shoe (or openhole weak point) and the maximum surface pressure. It is not however
essential to carry out these calculations prior to circulation.
An approximate technique can be used to estimate the maximum pressure at a weak

point in the openhole, as well as the maximum surface pressure during displacement.
This has been presented in Vol.2, Chapter 5. The actual pressures will generally be
lower than those predicted by the technique.
Computer software that utilises the exact technique is also available at the Drilling and
Completions Branch, BP Exploration, Sunbury. The software includes the effects that
the conventional approximate technique has neglected. These include the gas solubility
in oil-based muds, downhole temperature, gas dispersion and slip, etc. So the software
can provide more realistic predictions of pressures and flows in the wellbore than the
approximate techniques. The software can be also used to investigate the impacts of
operational parameters, formation characteristics and human factors on the overall well
control operation. These include the kick detecting volume, the formation permeability
and over-pressure, the time required for the rig crew to shut-in and the mud SCR, etc.
6-4
Rev 1 1995
March March 1995
4 Implementation of the Wait & Weight Method

Prior to implementing the Wait & Weight Method, the relevant sections of the Kick Sheet as
covered in Paragraph 3 should be completed.
The Wait & Weight Method accomplishes the kill operation in one complete circulation. It
requires weight up of the mud after the well is shut in, followed by circulation with the kill
weight mud. So several calculations are necessary prior to initiating circulation. These are
as follows:
(a) Determine the circulation rate

The upper limit for the circulation rate is generally set by the maximum rate that baryte
can be mixed into the mud. The following formula can be used to estimate the maximum
possible circulation rate:
Baryte delivery rate (lb/min)

Maximum circulation rate = (bbl/min)
Baryte required to weight up mud (lb/bbl)
A limiting factor, particularly in the case of oil mud, may be the rate at which viscosity
can be built in the mud. This, and associated problems of building mud weight are
discussed in Chapter 1 in ‘Use of the Mud System’.
Having established the maximum possible circulation rate, the actual circulation rate
will be determined on the basis of several factors. These factors are detailed in Chapter␣1
in ‘Drills and SCRs’. The chosen SCR and the relevant pumping data should be recorded
in the kick sheet.
(b) Calculate the initial circulating pressure

The initial drillpipe circulating pressure, Pic, should be calculated in order to estimate
the circulating pressure that will be required to maintain constant bottom hole pressure
at the start of the circulation.
The initial circulating pressure recorded after the pump has been brought up to
speed␣should be the sum of the shut-in drillpipe pressure and the SCR pressure at the
chosen rate:
P ic = P dp + P scr
where Pic = Initial circulating pressure (psi)

Pdp = Stabilised shut-in drillpipe pressure (psi)
Pscr = Circulating pressure at SCR with MW1 (psi)
(c) Calculate the final circulating pressure

As the drillpipe is displaced with kill weight mud, the standpipe pressure must be reduced
to take into account the increased hydrostatic pressure of the mud in the pipe. The
standpipe pressure must also compensate for the additional friction pressure in the
drillpipe and across the bit as the kill weight mud displaces the original mud.
Once the drillpipe has been completely displaced to kill weight mud, the static drillpipe
pressure required to balance the kick zone will be zero. At this stage therefore
the␣␣circulating pressure can be estimated by determining the SCR pressure for the kill
weight mud.
6-5
Rev 1 March
March 1995
1995
The final circulating pressure can be estimated as follows:
MW2
Pfc = P scr (at MW1) x
MW1
where P fc = Final circulating pressure (psi).
(d) Determine the displacement times and the cumulative pump strokes
At all times during circulation, it is important to know the position of the influx in the
wellbore, as well as the volume of hole that has been circulated to kill weight mud.
The key points during the circulation are as follows:
• When the kill weight mud reaches the bit.
• When the top of the influx is circulated to the casing shoe or openhole weak point.
• When the influx is circulated to the choke.
Before circulation is started, the estimated circulating time and the corresponding total
pump strokes to each point should be calculated.
Volume to be displaced (bbl)

Pumping time to reach point = (min)
Pump rate (bbl/min)
of interest

Total strokes to reach point = (stk)
Pump output per stroke (bbl/stk)
of interest
(e) Plot standpipe pressure schedule

To ensure that the standpipe pressure is adjusted correctly as the kill weight mud is
circulated down the drillpipe, a plot should be made of the required standpipe pressure
(See Figure 6.1b).
The initial circulating pressure should be plotted corresponding to zero strokes. The
final circulating pressure should be plotted corresponding to total strokes equivalent to
complete displacement of the drillpipe. The two points on the graph can be joined up
with a straight line to produce the standpipe pressure schedule. (Note: for high angle or
horizontal wells, the graph is not a straight line. See Paragraph 6.)
In practice standpipe pressure is most easily controlled by reducing the pressure in small
steps, rather than continuously.
(f) Procedure for the displacement of the kick

1 Bring the pump up to kill speed
• Line up the pump to the drillpipe and route returns through the choke manifold to
the mud gas separator.
• Zero the stroke counter on the choke panel.
• Open the remote operated choke at the same time as the pump is started on the hole.
Consider stroking the drillstring up at this point.
6-6
March
Rev 1 1995
March 1995
• Maintain the choke pressure equal to the original shut-in casing pressure as the pump
is slowly brought up to speed. This may take 1/2 to 1 minute.
• Once the pump is up to speed record the initial circulating pressure.
If the actual initial circulating pressure is considerably different from the calculated
value, stop the pump, shut in the well and investigate the cause.
If the actual initial circulating pressure is equal to, or reasonably close to the calculated
value, continue the displacement and adjust the standpipe pressure schedule accordingly.
Any marginal difference between the actual and calculated initial circulating pressure
is most likely to be due to the fact that the SCR pressure used to calculate the initial
circulating pressure was inaccurate. The actual SCR pressure, and hence the corrected
final circulating pressure, Pfc, can be determined from the initial circulating pressure as
follows:
Pscr = Pic – Pdp
The standpipe pressure schedule can therefore be corrected to take into account the
adjusted circulating pressures.
2 Circulate the influx from the well maintaining constant bottom hole
pressure
As the drillpipe is displaced with kill weight mud, the standpipe pressure should be
stepped down according to the standpipe pressure schedule. (The standpipe pressure
will have a natural tendency to drop as the kill weight mud is displaced down the
drillpipe.)
Once the drillpipe has been displaced to kill weight mud, the drillpipe pressure should
be maintained at the final circulating pressure for the rest of the circulation.
The pit gain, drillpipe pressure, choke pressure and all other relevant information
should␣ b e recorded during displacement using the Well Control Operations Log
(See␣Figure 4.5). These will help to determine the down hole condition during all stages
of the kill operation.
As the influx is displaced up the hole, the drillpipe pressure will tend to drop as the
influx expands. (This expansion will not occur if the influx is water or oil.) This effect
will be especially marked if the influx contains a significant quantity of gas. The choke
should therefore be adjusted to compensate for this. For example, if the drillpipe pressure
drops by 70 psi below that required, the choke pressure should be increased by
approximately 70 psi. The pressure on the drillpipe will increase after a lag time which
can typically be 2 seconds per 300m of drillstring depth. This technique will be most
effective at the early stages of displacement; and less so at later stages of the
displacement, if the well contains a significant proportion of gas.
When the influx reaches the choke, the choke pressure will start to decrease due to the
differences in density and viscosity between the influx and the mud. If the influx contains
significant quantities of gas, the drop in choke pressure may be quite substantial, and
the choke will have to be closed down quickly.
As the influx is circulated from the well and mud is circulated to the choke, the choke
pressure will begin to rise rapidly. The choke should therefore be opened to allow the
choke pressure to drop sufficiently to re-establish the final circulating pressure on the
drillpipe, and hence maintain constant bottom hole pressure.
6-7
Rev 1 March 1995
Once the hole has been circulated to kill weight mud, the pump should be stopped, the
well shut-in, and the casing and drillpipe checked for pressure. There should be no
pressure on either the casing or the drillpipe. However, if there is still some pressure on
the casing, circulation should be restarted to clear the contaminated mud from the annulus.
Once the well has been completely killed, a flowcheck on the choke line return should
be carried out before the rams are opened. If this flowcheck indicates no flow, the rams
should be opened and a further flowcheck on the annulus carried out.
In line with Company policy, a further complete hole circulation should be carried out
prior to continuing operations. A suitable overbalance can be added to the mud at
this␣stage.
5 Implementation of the Driller’s Method

Prior to implementing the Wait & Weight Method, the relevant sections of the Kick Sheet as
covered in Paragraph 3 should be completed.
The Driller’s method is a two complete circulation method. The kick is circulated out of the
hole by the first circulation with the original mud. The second circulation is carried out with
the weighted mud to kill the well.
Prior to the first circulation, the following calculations are necessary:
(a) Determine the circulation rate

The circulation rate for the first circulation of the Driller’s Method is not limited by the
baryte mixing capacity of the rig. Limiting factors will include the additional wellbore
pressures due to circulation, and further practicalities as outlined in Chapter 1. Record
the chosen circulating rate SCR and the corresponding pumping data in the kick sheet.

The initial circulating pressure at the start of the first circulation is calculated in the
same manner as the Wait and Weight Method, although the drillstring displacement
volume/time is not significant in this case.
The initial circulating pressure will be maintained constant throughout the first circulation
since the mud weight is not changed.
(c) Determine the displacement times and corresponding pump strokes

These figures are calculated in exactly the same manner as the Wait and Weight Method.
(d) Plot the standpipe pressure schedule

The standpipe pressure is held constant throughout the first complete circulation at the
initial circulating pressure.
6-8
March
Rev 1 1995
March 1995
The following steps can be used as a guide for the procedure for the displacement of
the␣kick:
1 Bring the pump up to speed for the first complete circulation
• Line up the pump to the drillpipe and route returns through the choke manifold to
• Set the stroke counter on the remote choke panel to zero.
• Open the remote operated choke at the same time as the pump is slowly brought up
to speed. Consider stroking the drillstring up at this point.
• Maintain the choke pressure equal to the original shut-in casing pressure as the pump
is slowly brought up to speed. This may take 1/2 to 1 minute.
• Once the pump is up to speed record the initial circulating pressure. If the actual
initial circulating pressure is considerably different from the calculated value, stop
the pump, shut-in the well and investigate the cause.
If the actual initial circulating pressure is equal to, or reasonably close to the calculated
value, continue the displacement, holding the standpipe pressure at the value recorded
when the pump was first brought up to speed.
Any marginal difference between the actual and calculated initial circulating pressure
is most likely to be due to the fact that the SCR pressure used to calculate the initial
circulating pressure was inaccurate. The actual SCR pressure can be determined from
the initial circulating pressure as follows:
Pscr = Pic − Pdp
This adjusted value for the SCR pressure should be used for estimating the circulating
pressures for the second complete circulation.
2 Circulate the influx from the well maintaining constant bottom hole
pressure
Influx behaviour during circulation will be similar to the Wait and Weight Method
requiring similar choke manipulation.
Choke pressures will inevitably be higher than if the Wait and Weight Method had
been␣used. These higher pressures will be reflected downhole, causing greater stress in
the openhole.
Once the influx has been displaced from the hole, the shut-in drillpipe and shut-in casing
pressure should be equal. If the casing pressure is higher than the drillpipe pressure,
this is evidence that there is still some kick fluid in the annulus, or the mud weights are
out of balance.
Prior to circulating kill weight mud into the hole, the calculations as outlined in
Paragraph␣3 “Kick Sheet” should be carried out. The following further calculations are
then worked:
(a) Determine the circulation rate for the second circulation

The circulation rate is determined on the same basis as if the Wait and Weight Method
had been used.
6-9
Rev 1 March 1995

The initial circulating pressure will be the same as for the first circulation.
The initial circulating pressure is therefore calculated as follows:
Pic = P dp + Pscr
where Pic = Second circulation initial circulating pressure (psi)

Pdp = Drillpipe pressure recorded prior to second circulation (psi)
Pscr = Slow circulating rate pressure (psi)
(c) Calculate the final circulating pressure

As with the Wait and Weight Method, the circulating pressure must be adjusted to
compensate for the kill weight mud.
MW2
Pfc = P scr (at MW1) x
MW1
where Pfc = Second circulation final circulating pressure (psi)

MW1 = Original mud weight (SG)
MW2 = Kill mud weight used for second circulation (SG)
(d) Determine the displacement times and corresponding cumulative pump

strokes
These figures will be the same as for the first circulation.
(e) Plot the standpipe pressure schedule

The standpipe pressure schedule for the second circulation is drawn up in the same
manner as for the Wait and Weight Method (Figure 6.1b).
The following can be used as a guide for the procedure of circulating the hole to kill
weight mud:
1 Bring the pump up to speed for the second complete circulation
• Change pump suctions without stopping the mud pump, and begin pumping the kill
weight mud. (An alternative is to stop pumping and then restart using the procedure
for the Wait and Weight Method.)
• Zero the stroke counter on the choke panel.
• Once the pump has been switched to the kill mud, record the initial circulating
pressure.
The initial circulating pressure should be the same with the standpipe pressure during
the first complete circulation. If this is the case, continue the displacement and adjust
the standpipe pressure schedule accordingly.
If the initial circulating pressure has changed considerably, stop the pump, shut in the
well, and investigate the cause.
6-10
Rev 1 1995
March March 1995
2 Circulate the hole to kill weight mud maintaining constant bottom hole
pressure
As the drillpipe is displaced with kill weight mud, the standpipe circulating pressure
should be stepped down according to the standpipe pressure schedule.
Once the drillpipe has been displaced to kill weight mud, the final drillpipe circulating
pressure is held constant by manipulating the choke.
As kill weight mud is circulated up the annulus, the drillpipe pressure will tend to
increase. The choke should be adjusted to ensure that the drillpipe pressure is maintained
at the final circulating pressure; thereby ensuring constant bottom hole pressure.
When the returned mud is at kill weight, the pump should be stopped and the well
shut-in. The well should be checked for pressure.
Once the well has been killed, a flowcheck on the choke line return should be carried
out before the rams are opened. If this flowcheck indicates no flow, the rams should be
opened and a further flowcheck on the annulus carried out.
In line with Company policy, a further complete hole circulation should be carried
out␣prior to continuing operations. A suitable overbalance can be added to the mud at
this stage.
6 Procedures For High Angle or Horizontal Wells

(a) Implementation of Kick Circulation Methods
The procedures for implementing one of the standard kick circulation methods are
essentially the same for both the vertical and high angle or horizontal wells (as covered
in the previous paragraphs). However, there are several points which should be considered
before and during a well killing operation in a high angle or horizontal well.
• The advantages of the Wait & Weight Method over the Driller’s Method are less
important in a high angle or horizontal well. This is because the weighted mud will
not reduce the surface and casing shoe pressures until it has passed the horizontal or
high angle section. By then the kick may have entered into the casing or been out of
the well.
• The circulation should be started using the Driller’s Method once the well has
been␣shut in and the stabilised shut-in pressures are established. In the mean time,
the kill weight mud is prepared in the reserve mud pits. The earlier start of the
circulation will reduce the risks of stuck pipe and other hole problems associated
with the stagnant mud.
• Once the mud weight has been increased to the kill weight, the circulation should be
switched to the kill weight mud, even if the influx is still in the annulus. The
circulation continues until the kick is circulated out and the kill mud returns to surface.
This will minimise the well pressures as well as the time of dealing with the kick.
6-11
Rev 1 March
March 1995
1995
(b) Standpipe Pressure Schedule

When pumping down the kill mud through the drillpipe in a vertical well, the surface
pump pressure should be reduced linearly from the initial circulating pressure (ICP) to
the final circulating pressure (FCP), in order to maintain the bottom hole pressure
constant. Thereafter, the pump pressure is kept constant at FCP until the kill mud returns
to surface. Therefore, the pressure schedule during pumping the kill mud through the
drillpipe can be obtained by simply joining a straight line between ICP and FCP. This
has been covered in the previous paragraphs.
However, this is not the case in a high angle or horizontal well because the change in
the hydrostatic pressure due to the kill mud is not linear. For example, when the front of
the kill mud is going through a horizontal section of the drillpipe, the hydrostatic pressure
at the hole bottom does not change at all. So in this case the pump pressure should be
kept constant (or increased slightly due to friction pressure increase with kill mud).
Therefore, the standpipe pressure schedule should be modified to take into account the
effect of hole angle. To achieve this, the standpipe pressures when the kill mud reaches
several critical depths in the drillpipe should be calculated. These include the depths at
the kick-off, end-build, end-tangent, etc. The calculations can be performed as follows:
i. Calculate the drillpipe size factor and the friction constant. This is necessary in
order to calculate the friction pressure increase due to the kill weight mud.
α1 = L 1 / ID15
where: α1 = Size factor for drillpipe section 1, (m/in 5)

L1 = Length of drillpipe section 1, (m)
ID1 = ID of drillpipe section 1, (inch)
If there is more than one drillpipe section (tapered string), then the size factor should be
calculated for each of the sections. BHA can be treated as part of the drillpipe section.
Pfc - P scr
β=
α 1 + α2
where: β = Drillpipe friction constant, (psi.in 5/m)

α1 α2 = Drillpipe size factors for section 1 and 2, (m/in5)
Pfc = Final circulating pressure (psi)
Pscr = Slow circulating pressure with original mud MW1 , (psi)
ii. Calculate the friction pressure increase when the kill mud reaches each of the critical
depths in the drillpipe (kick-off, end-build, end-tangent, etc.).
• If the critical depth is above/at the drillpipe section cross-over point, then:
MD
∆P friction = β x
ID 1 5
• If the critical depth is below the drillpipe section cross-over point, then:
(MD - L1 )
∆P friction = β x [α 1 + ]
ID 25
where: ∆P friction = Friction pressure increase due to kill weight mud, (psi)
6-12
March
Rev 1 1995
March 1995
MD = Measured depth at the critical depth, (m)
iii. Calculate the static drillpipe pressure when the kill weight mud reaches each of the
critical depths:
TVD
Pstatic = Pdp x (1.0 - )
TVD h
where: Pstatic = Static drillpipe pressure, (psi)

Pdp = Drillpipe pressure before the kill weight mud is circulated, (psi)
TVD = Vertical depth at the critical depth, (m)
TVD h = Vertical depth at the open hole kick zone, (m)
iv. Calculate the standpipe pressure when the kill weight mud reaches each of the
critical␣depths.
Pstand = P scr + ∆Pfriction + Pstatic
where: Pstand = Standpipe pressure, (psi)
The results of the above calculations should be recorded in the Kick Sheet. These
calculations should be carried out if the hole has a maximum angle greater than
30␣de grees.
Figures 6.1a shows an example of a completed kick sheet for a high angle well.
Figure␣6.1b sho ws the standpipe pressure schedule for pumping down the kill weight
mud. It shows that the standpipe pressures required to maintain a constant bottom hole
pressure are lower for a high angle well (with build-hold profile) than if the well was
vertical. So if the standpipe pressure schedule for a vertical well was used (dotted straight
line in Figure 6.1b), excessive high well pressures would result, which would increase
the risk of fracturing the formation at the casing shoe or openhole weak point.
(c) Trapped Gas in Inverted or Horizontal Hole Section

If a kick containing free gas occurs in an inverted hole section (i.e. the hole angle is
greater than 90 degrees), then the free gas will be trapped there unless the mud is
circulated fast enough to flush the gas out of the inverted section. Similar scenarios also
occur in washouts or undulations of a horizontal hole section.
A combination of the following is a possible indication that a kick has occurred in the
inverted or horizontal hole section:
• There is an increased mud return flowrate
• There is a positive pit gain
• When the well is shut in, the drillpipe pressure and the casing pressure are the same
(under-balanced kick) or both are zeros (swabbed kick)
• The casing pressure is stable (no gas migration)
However the kick influx density/type (gas, water or oil) can not be determined based on
the above data (as using the method described in Section 4.3). A gas kick is recognised
when it is being circulated through the low angle or vertical hole section, where gas
expansion causes a continuous increase in the casing pressure. So the first attempt to
kill the well should be using one of the standard techniques.
6-13
Rev 1 March
March 1995
1995
If the kick can not be circulated to surface using the standard techniques, it indicates
that the kick influx is free gas which has been trapped in the inverted or horizontal hole
section. To remove the trapped gas, the mud must be circulated with an annular velocity
above a critical value. This critical annular velocity is about 100 ft/min when the hole
angle is between 90~95 degrees. In an 8-1/2" hole, this corresponds to a critical flow
rate of 4.6 bbl/min, which is higher than the normal range of SCR during a well control
operation. So prior to drilling an inverted or horizontal hole section, the pump pressure
at a SCR corresponding to 100~150 ft/min should be recorded in the kick sheet.
The following procedures may be attempted to remove the trapped gas from the inverted
or horizontal hole section:
• Start circulation with the original mud at a flow rate corresponding to an annular
mud velocity of 100~150 ft/min until the entire horizontal hole section has been
displaced;
• Reduce the flow rate to a normal SCR and proceed using one of the standard well
killing techniques.
• After one complete circulation, stop the pump and shut in the well to check the
pit␣gain.
• If there is still a positive pit gain, that indicates that some gas is still trapped downhole.
Repeat the previous procedures.
In cases where the high flow rate can not be achieved to remove the trapped gas, consider
bullheading the gas back into the formation. As the trapped gas should stay near the
kick formation, bullheading is more likely to succeed in an inverted hole section. The
bullheading technique is described in Section 6.2.
7 Floating Rig Procedure

Well control on a floating rig presents special problems that are not encountered on land
and fixed offshore rigs. The main difficulties stem from the fact that the well must be killed
while circulating through a small diameter choke line. The problems presented can be
summarised as follows:
• The frictional pressure generated by circulating through the choke line may cause
excessive pressures in the wellbore or in the circulating system.
• The entry of the influx into the choke line may cause an uncontrollable drop in bottomhole
pressure.
• As the mud displaces the influx from the choke line the rapid increase in hydrostatic
pressure in the annulus may cause excessive pressures in the openhole.
These problems are particularly acute in deep water. However, well control procedures should
be modified in line with those described here, even in relatively shallow water, to take
account of these problems. The drillpipe pressure is still used to monitor bottomhole
pressure.
6-14
March
Rev 1 1995
March 1995
Figure 6.1a An Example of Completed Kick Sheet
An Example of Completed Kick Sheet
Well No. Well No. Rig Name: Rigname Date: 27-Oct-94 Time: 13:10
Hole Size: 8-1/2" Casing Size: 9-5/8" Shoe Depth (m): TVD= 1535 TD= 4291
MAASP (psi): 1003 Max Eqiv. Mud Weight (sg): 1.44 Casing Burst (psi): 10900
Barytes on Site (MT): 50 On Order (MT): 40 Total Reserved Mud Vol (bbl): 300
DRILLSTRING CONTENTS
DP/DC Section ID Capacity (bbl/m) Length (m) Vol (bbl) Cumulative Volume (bbl)
5" DP 4.276 0.0583 5180 301.82
5" HWDP 3 0.0287 60 1.72 303.5
6-1/4" DC 2.25 0.0161 60 0.97 304.5
ANNULUS CONTENTS
Hole/Casing Section ID Capacity (bbl/m) Length (m) Vol (bbl) Cumulative Volume (bbl)
5"DP - 9-5/8"csg 8.681 0.1605 4291 688.6
5"DP - Hole 8.5 0.1506 949 142.9 831.5
6-1/4" DC - Hole 8.5 0.1058 60 6.3 837.9
Surface Equipment Vol (bbl): 6 Choke Line ID: 3.0 Length (m): 100 Vol (bbl): 2.9
Total Circulating System Vol (bbl): 1151 Surface Active Mud Vol (bbl): 350
Total Active Mud Vol (bbl): 1501
Pump 1 Liner: 5-1/2" Max Pres (psi): 4723 Eff (%): 97 Stroke Vol (bbl/stk): 0.0855
Pump 2 Liner: 5-1/2" Max Pres (psi): 4723 Eff (%): 97 Stroke Vol (bbl/stk): 0.0855
PUMP 1 PUMP 2 TRAVEL TIMES (MIN / STROKES)
SPM bbl/min Pscr SPM bbi/min Pscr Surface to Bit Bit to Shoe Shoe to Choke Total
30 2.565 350 30 2.565 355 119 / 3567 58 / 1746 268 / 8055 445 / 13368
40 3.42 590 40 3.42 600 89 / 3567 44 / 1746 201 / 8055 334 / 13368
50 4.275 890 50 4.275 900 71 / 3567 35 / 1746 161 / 8055 267 / 13368
KICK DATA
Time of Kick: 15:25 Depth (m): TVD= 1667 TD= 5300 Mud Weight (sg), MW1= 0.98
Shut-in DP Pres (psi), Pdp= 400 Annulus Pres (psi), Pa= 460 Pit Gain (bbl): 20
Kill Mud Weight (sg), MW2= 1.15 Barytes Required (lb/bbl): 81.1 Total (MT): 55
Chosen Pump SPM: 30 Stroke Vol (bbl/stk): 0.086 SCR (bbl/min): 2.565 Pscr (at MW1)= 350 psi
Time Started: 15:30 Initial Circ Pres (psi), Pic= 750 Final Circ Pres (psi), Pfc= 410
For High Angle or Horizontal Wells ( > 30 deg)
Drillpipe Size ID Length (m) Size Factor Drillpipe Friction Constant
5" DP + BHA 4.276 5300 3.708 16.27
STANDPIPE PRESSURE WHEN PUMPING DOWN KILL MUD

Section Point MD (m) TVD (m) Vol (bbl) Strokes Pstatic (psi) Pfriction (psi) Standpipe Pressure (psi)
Surface: 0 0 0 0 =Pdp 0 Pic= 750
Kick Off: 350 350 20 239 316 4 670
End Build 1: 1328 1000 77 905 160 15 525
DP Cross-Over:
End Tangent 1:
End Build/Drop 2:
Bit: 5300 1667 309 3612 0 60 Pfc= 410
6-15
March 1995
March 1995
Figure 6.1b An Example of Kick Sheet

STANDPIPE PRESSURE SCHEDULE
0 750 750
800 239 670
905 525
750 3612 410 410
700
Standpipe Pressure (psi)
650 Kick

off
600
If The Well Was Vertical
6-16
550
500 End Build
450
400
Bit
350
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
Pump Strokes
Figure 6.1c An Example of Kick Sheet
Figure 6.1c: An Example of Kick Sheet
SUMMARY OF FORMULAE
1. MAASP = P wp - 1.421 x MW 1 x D wp For High Angle or Horizontal Wells
2. Pipe Internal Capacity (bbl/m) = ID 2 / 313.8 10. Drillpipe 1 Size Factor, 1 = L 1 / ID15
3. Annular Capacity (bbl/m) = (DH 2 - DP 2) / 313.8 Drillpipe 2 Size Factor, = L 2 / ID25

2
Pdp Pfc - Pscr

4. Kill Mud Weight (sg), MW2 = MW 1 +  11. Drillpipe Friction Constant, = 
1.421 x TVDh
1+2
(MW2 - MW1 )
5. Baryte Required (lb/bbl) = 1490 x  12. Static Pressure When Kill Mud at TVD (psi):
(4.25 - MW 2)
Pstatic = P dp x (1.0 - TVD / TVDh )
6. Initial Circulating Pressure (psi), Pic = P dp + P scr
13. Friction Pressure Increase When Kill Mud at
MW 2 MD (psi):
7. Final circulating Pressure (psi), P fc = P scr x 
MW 1
a. When MD above/at DP cross-over point:
8. Pumping Time to Reach Depth of Interest (min): MD
Pfriction = x 
ID 15
= 
Pump output (bbl/min) b. When MD below DP cross-over point:
(MD - L1)
Pfriction = x [ 1 +  ]
9. Pump Strokes to Reach Depth of Interest (stk): ID 25
Volume to be displaced (bbl) 14. Standpipe Pressure at Depth of Interest (psi):

= 
Pump stroke volume (bbl/stk)
Pstand = P scr + Pfriction + Pstatic
SYMBOLS AND UNITS
D wp Vertical depth at openhole weak point (m) Pstand Standpipe pressure (psi)
DH Hole diameter or casing ID (inch) Pstatic Static (drillpipe) pressure (if well was shut
DP Drillpipe OD (inch) in) when pumping kill mud (psi)
ID Drillpipe ID (inch) Pwp Leak off pressure at openhole weak point
L Length of drillpipe with same size (m) (psi)
MAASP TVD True vertical depth at depth of interest (m)
Maxi TVD h True vertical depth of open hole (m)
mum allowable annulus surface pressure Drillpipe size factor
(psi) Drillpipe friction constant
MD Measured depth at depth of interest (m) Pfriction Friction pressure increase with kill mud
MW 1 Original (unweighted) mud weight (sg) (psi)
MW 2 Kill mud weight (sg)
Pdp Shut-in drillpipe pressure (psi) Subscripts for ID, L and :
Pfc Final circulating pressure (psi) 1 Drillpipe size 1
Pic initial circulating pressure (psi) 2. Drillpipe size 2
Pscr Standpipe pressure at solw circulating rate
with original mud (psi)
6-17
March 1995
Figure 6.1d An Example of Kick Sheet
COMPLETION OF KICK SHEET
GENERAL WELL DATA (Routinely Recorded)
These include well No, rig, date, time, hole size, casing size, shoe depths, MAASP, max mud weight, casing
burst pressure, barite quantities and reserved mud volume.
• MAASP [psi] = (Leak-off pressure, psi) − 1.421 x (Mud weight in hole, sg) x (Leak-off TVD, m)
• Max mud weight (Shoe frac grad) [sg] = (Leak-off pressure, psi) / [ 1.421 x (Leak-off TVD, m) ]
DRILLSTRING / ANNULUS CONTENTS (Routinely Recorded)
These include the drillstring, annulus contents, surface volumes and the total active mud volume. The
drillstring contents include OD, ID, capacity, length and volume. The annulus contents include hole/casing
sizes (with drillstring OD), hole/casing ID, capacity, length and volume).
• Drillstring capacity [bbl/m] = (Pipe ID, inch)2 / 313.8

• Annulus capacity [bbl/m] = [ (Hole size, inch) − (Pipe OD, inch) 2 ] / 313.8
2
• Volume [bbl] = (Capacity, bbl/m) x (Length, m)

• Total active mud volume [bbl] = (Total circulating system vol, bbl) + (Surface active mud vol, bbl)
CIRCULATION TIME AND PUMP STROKES (Routinely Recorded)
These include the liner size, rated pressure, volume efficiency and stroke volume. Record at least three slow
circulating rates and the corresponding standpipe pressures.
Calculate circulation times and number of pump strokes:
• Surf → Bit [min] = (Total drillstring volume, bbl) / (Pump output, bbl/min)
[stk] = (Total drillstring volume, bbl) / (Pump stroke volume, bbl/stk)
• Bit → Shoe [min] = (Total open hole annular volume, bbl) / (Pump output, bbl/min)
[stk] = (Total open hole annular volume, bbl) / (Pump stroke volume, bbl/stk)
• Shoe → Choke [min] = (Total casing annular volume, bbl) / (Pump output, bbl/min)
[stk] = (Total casing annular volume, bbl) / (Pump stroke volume, bbl/stk)
KICK DATA
Record all the relevant kick data (time, hole depths, mud weight, shut-in DP & casing pressures, pit gain). All
the kill parameters should be calculated.
• Kill mud weight [sg] = (Mud weight in hole, sg) + [(SIDPP Pdp, psi) / [ 1.421 x (Hole TVD, m)]
(Kill mud weight, sg) − (Mud weight in hole, sg)
• Barite required [lb/bbl] = 1490 x 
4.25 − (Kill mud weight, sg)
• Total quantity of barite required [MT] = (Total active mud volume, bbl) x (Barite required, lb/bbl) / 2205
• Initial circulating pres P ic [psi] = (SIDPP Pdp, psi) + (SCR pres P scr , psi)
• Final circulating pres P fc [psi] = (SCR pres P scr , psi) x (Kill mud weight, sg) / (Mud weight in hole, sg)
6-18
March 1995
Figure 6.1d An Example of Kick Sheet (cont'd)
HIGH ANGLE OR HORIZONTAL WELLS (Angle > 30 deg)
No need to complete this section if the well is vertical (or angle<30 deg). In this case, the standpipe pressure
schedule can be obtained by joining a straight line between the initial and the final circulating pressures.
Otherwise, the standpipe pressures should be calculated for pumping down the weighted kill mud to each of
the depths at kick-off, end-build, drillpipe cross-over, end-tangent, etc. After the kill mud has reached the bit
depth, the standpipe pressure should be maintained constant at the final circulating pressure.
• DP size factor, α = (Drillpipe section length, m) / (Drillpipe ID, inch)5

(Calculate for each of the drillpipe IDs)
(Final circ pres P fc , psi) − (SCR pres P scr , psi)

• DP Friction Const, = 
(DP Size 1 factor α1) + (DP Size 2 factor α2)
Calculate the pump stroke and the corresponding standpipe pressure when the kill mud has reached the
depth at MD/TVD (the point for calculation such as kick off, end-build, etc.):
• Volume [bbl] = (Drillstring capacity, bbl/m) x (Measured depth MD, m)

• Pump stroke [stk] = (Volume, bbl) / (Pump stroke volume, bbl/stk)
(TVD, m)
• Static (shut-in) pressure Pstatic [psi] = (SIDPP Pdp, psi) x [ 1.0 −  ]
(Hole TVD, m)
• Friction pressure increase (due to kill mud) ∆Pfriction :
- If MD (point for calculation) is above or at DP1/DP2 cross-over point:
∆P friction [psi] = (DP Friction Const, β) x (MD, m) / (Top drillpipe ID, inch) 5
- If MD is below DP1/DP2 cross-over point:
[ (MD, m) − (Top DP1 length L 1 , m) ]
∆P friction [psi] = β x [ (DP1 size factor, α1 ) + 
(DP2 ID, inch) 5
• Standpipe Pressure Pstand [psi] = (SCR pres P scr , psi) + (∆Pfriction , psi) + (Pstatic , psi)
STANDPIPE PRESSURE SCHEDULE
Draw up the standpipe pressure schedule on the graph paper by:

1. Choose appropriate scales for the horizontal pump stroke and the vertical standpipe pressure.
2. Mark each of the calculated standpipe pressures against the corresponding pump strokes. The initial
circulating pressure should be plotted corresponding to zero stroke and the final circulating pressure
corresponding to the strokes for the kill mud to reach the bit.
3. Join the marked points with straight lines. From the final point onward (after the kill mud has
reached the bit), draw a horizontal line.
For vertical or low angle wells, there are only two marked points (i.e. the initial & final circulating pressures)
and therefore the pressure schedule is a straight line before the kill mud reaches the bit. For high angle or
horizontal wells, there should be more than two points and the pressure schedule is not be a straight line .
6-19
March 1995
Choke line losses are generally not significant at slow circulating rates in shallow water and
so the calculations required during the implementation of both the Driller’s Method and the
Wait and Weight Method on a floating rig, drilling in shallow water, do not account for
choke line losses. The calculations as covered in Paragraphs 4 to 6 (which cover the normal
implementation of the Wait and Weight Method and the Driller’s Method) are therefore still
applicable.
In deep water, when choke line losses can be significant, it is necessary to assess the effect
of choke line losses on wellbore pressures during circulation. In which case further
calculations, as covered in Paragraph 8, ‘Accounting for Choke Line Losses in Deep Water’,
are required to account for choke line losses.
Standard procedure (as detailed in Paragraphs 4 to 6) should be modified along the following
lines when using either the Wait and Weight Method or the Driller’s Method on a floating␣r ig:
1 Bring the pump up to speed
• Line up to monitor wellhead pressure through the kill line. See Figure 6.2 for a
schematic␣of the kill line monitor . (Bear in mind that the kill line may not contain
mud at this stage.)
• Line up the pump to circulate down the drillpipe and route returns through the choke
manifold to the mud gas separator.
• Set the stroke counter on the choke panel to zero.
• Record the pressure registered on the kill line monitor.
• Open the remote operated choke at the same time as the pump is started on the hole.
• Hold the kill line monitor pressure constant as the pump is brought up to speed.
• Once the pump is up to speed the initial circulating pressure should be checked.
2 Circulate the kick to the wellhead maintaining constant bottomhole pressure
In the case of the Wait and Weight Method the standpipe pressure will be reduced in
line with the standpipe pressure schedule.
In the case of the Driller’s Method the standpipe pressure is maintained at initial
circulating pressure as the kick is displaced from the hole.
When the total strokes pumped indicates that the influx is approaching the wellhead the
kill line monitor should be carefully checked for any sudden drops in pressure. A drop
in pressure registered on this gauge indicates that the influx has entered the choke line,
however this drop may not always be detected.
3 Circulate the influx out of the well maintaining constant bottomhole

pressure
It is recommended that the influx is displaced up the choke line at a considerably reduced
rate in order that the choke does not have to be adjusted at an unrealistic rate. This may
involve shutting in the well at this point and restarting the displacement at the minimum
pump speed.
A considerable increase in choke pressure will generally be required as gas or lightweight

influx displaces mud from the choke line.
6-20
March 1995
Figure 6.2 Use of Kill Line Monitor for Wellhead Pressure

on Floating Rig
DRILLPIPE
PRESSURE
GAUGE
PUMP
CHOKE
KILL LINE PRESSURE
MONITOR GAUGE
VALVE VALVE RETURNS

CLOSED OPEN
SEA
KILL LINE CHOKE LINE

(KILL LINE VALVES
OPEN)
SEABED
KEY
MUD VALVE OPEN
GAS VALVE CLOSED
WEOX02.030
6-21
Rev 1 March
March 1995
1995
An increase in the pressure recorded at the kill line monitor may indicate that the original
mud behind the influx has started up the choke line.
In the case of the Wait and Weight Method, once the returns are at kill weight, the pump
should be stopped and the well checked for pressure.
In the case of the Driller’s Method, the well will be circulated to kill weight mud prior
to step (4).
4 Remove BOP gas
It is quite possible that some gas will have accumulated under the closed BOP
during␣displacement of the kic k. This gas must be removed from the stack before the
BOP is opened.
The recommended technique is to isolate the well, displace the kill and choke lines to
water (maintaining the BOP gas at original pressure), bleed gas up choke line, open the
annular and allow riser to U-tube, displacing the gas up the choke line. Diesel may be
used instead of water if low mud weights have been used to kill the well. (Adequate
facilities should be available to deal with the returned diesel.)
For the example stack shown in Figure 6.4, for which trapped gas has the potential to be
a serious problem, this technique is implemented as follows:
• Isolate the well from the BOP stack by closing the lower pipe rams. (See Figure␣6.4.)
• Circulate kill mud down the kill line, across the stack and up the choke line.
Route␣ r eturns through the degasser. Record the kill line circulating pressure.
(See␣Figure 6.5.)
• Shut the well in. Line up to circulate water down the kill line and up the choke line.
• Slowly displace the kill line to water. As the kill line is displaced to water increase
the kill line circulating pressure by an amount equal to the difference in hydrostatic
pressure between the kill mud and water at the depth of the stack. (This will ensure
that the gas pressure is unchanged.)
• Keep pumping water across the stack and maintain the final circulating
pressure.␣W hen the returns are clear water, stop the pump and shut in at the choke.
(See Figure␣6.6.)
• Close the subsea kill line valve(s).
• Bleed pressure from the choke line. (See Figure 6.7.)
(The pressure that has been trapped in the gas bubble is used to ensure that the gas
bubble expands as the choke is opened to displace all the water from the choke line.
Having bled all the pressure from the choke line the gas bubble should be almost at
atmospheric pressure.)
• Close the diverter. Line up the trip tank/pump to circulate the riser under the diverter.
• Slowly bleed back the upper annular closing pressure. Open the annular.
• Allow the riser to U-tube. Take returns up the choke line. Fill the hole as required.
(See Figure 6.8.) Be prepared to deal with gas in the riser.
• Displace the riser and kill and choke lines to kill weight mud.
6-22
March 1995
• Open the lower pipe rams.
• Open the diverter and flowcheck the well.
8 Accounting for Choke Line Losses in Deep Water

In line with the standard procedure for floating rigs, an attempt will always be made to
compensate for choke line losses with the use of the kill line monitor.
However, the effect of choke line losses should be assessed in any situation in which choke
line losses are considered significant. This is most likely to occur only in deep water. (See
Chapter 1, Section 1.3 for the techniques for measuring choke line pressure losses.)
The following procedure can be used to account for choke line losses for the Wait and
Weight Method (however the same principles are applicable to the Driller’s Method):
1 Assess the effect of choke line losses at pump start up
In order to determine the most suitable circulation rate, the additional pressure acting in
the wellbore due to choke line friction should be estimated at a range of circulating
rates.
The following two cases may be applicable at this point:
Case A: When shut-in casing pressure is greater than the choke line friction pressure at
the desired slow circulating rate. (See Figure 6.9.)
Case B: When the shut-in casing pressure is less than the choke line friction pressure
at the desired slow circulation rate. (See Figure 6.10.)
In Case A the choke line friction pressure will be fully compensated for until such time
during the displacement that the required choke pressure is less than the sum of choke
line friction pressure and the wide open choke pressure. In most cases this will occur
only when the original mud behind the influx is passing the choke, at which time
subsurface pressures are unlikely to be critically high. Therefore, if Case A is applicable,
the choke line losses should not impose a limitation on the circulation rate.
However Case B represents a situation in which part of the choke line frictional pressure
will be applied on the openhole. The choke line frictional pressure can be compensated
for up to the amount equal to the difference between the shut-in annulus pressure and
the wide open choke pressure.
The additional pressures exerted in the wellbore due to choke line losses at pump start-
up can be determined as follows:
For Case A: there should be no additional pressures in the wellbore due to choke line
friction at pump start-up
For Case B: additional wellbore pressure due to choke line friction

= Pcl – Pa + Poc
where: Pa = annulus shut-in pressure (psi)

Poc = choke pressure at SCR recorded with the choke wide open (psi)
Pcl = choke line frictional pressure at SCR (psi)
6-23
March 1995
Figure 6.3 Subsea BOP Stack prior to Removing Gas

from Below the Preventers
MUD UPPER ANNULAR
GAS
VALVE OPEN
VALVE CLOSED
LOWER ANNULAR
BLIND/SHEAR
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WEOX02.031
6-24
March 1995
Figure 6.4 Removing Gas from a Subsea BOP Stack

– Lower pipe rams closed hang off rams opened
MUD UPPER ANNULAR
GAS
VALVE OPEN
VALVE CLOSED
LOWER ANNULAR
BLIND/SHEAR
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WEOX02.032
6-25
March 1995

– Kill and choke lines displaced to kill weight mud
MUD UPPER ANNULAR
GAS
VALVE OPEN
VALVE CLOSED
LOWER ANNULAR
BLIND/SHEAR
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WEOX02.033
6-26
March 1995

– Kill and choke lines displaced to water
MUD
GAS UPPER ANNULAR
WATER (OR DIESEL)
VALVE OPEN
VALVE CLOSED
LOWER ANNULAR
BLIND/SHEAR
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WEOX02.034
6-27
March 1995

– Gas pressure bled down, gas occupies choke line
MUD
GAS UPPER ANNULAR
WATER (OR DIESEL)
VALVE OPEN
VALVE CLOSED
GAS PRESSURE BLEEDS DOWN LOWER ANNULAR

TO DISPLACE WATER FROM
CHOKE LINE RESULTANT GAS
PRESSURE IS CLOSE TO
ATMOSPHERIC
BLIND/SHEAR
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WEOX02.035
6-28
March 1995

– Diverter is closed, the annular is opened and
the gas is displaced from the stack
MUD
GAS UPPER ANNULAR
WATER (OR DIESEL)
VALVE OPEN
VALVE CLOSED
LOWER ANNULAR
BLIND/SHEAR
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WEOX02.036
6-29
March 1995
Figure 6.9 The Effect of Choke Line Losses

– Casing pressure greater than choke line pressure
INITIAL SHUT-IN CIRCULATION STARTED AT 40SPM

CONDITIONS
CHOKE PRESSURE
DRILLPIPE PRESSURE DROPS BY CHOKE
INCREASES BY LINE PRESSURE DROP
SCR PRESSURE
800 400 800 800 1385 430
KILL LINE
PRESSURE HELD
CONSTANT
BOTTOMHOLE PRESSURE
STAYS APPROXIMATELY
CONSTANT
KEY
MUD
GAS
SCRS AND CHOKE LINE LOSSES
SPM 20 30 40
PSCR 400 680 985
PCL 150 250 370
MINIMUM RATE FOR PUMP
WEOX02.037
6-30
March 1995
Figure 6.10 The Effect of Choke Line Losses

– Casing pressure after initial circulation is
less than choke line loss
INITIAL SHUT-IN CIRCULATION STARTED AT 30SPM
CONDITIONS
CHOKE PRESSURE
DRILLPILE PRESSURE DROPS BY CHOKE
INCREASED BY LINE PRESSURE DROP
SCR PRESSURE
400 100 400 400 780 150
KILL LINE
PRESSURE HELD
CONSTANT
BOTTOMHOLE PRESSURE
STAYS APPROXIMATELY
CONSTANT
INFLUX CIRCULATED OUT CIRCULATION STARTED AT

WITH ORIGINAL MUD MINIMUM RATE, 20SPM
WEIGHT
DRILLPIPE PRESSURE
EQUALS THE SUM OF THE ORIGINAL
SHUT-IN DRILLPIPE PRESSURE PLUS
THE SCR PRESSURE PLUS
THE CHOKE LINE LOSS PLUS THE WIDE CHOKE PRESSURE
OPEN CHOKE PRESSURE MINUS THE WITH CHOKE WIDE
SHUT-IN CASING PRESSURE OPEN
100 100 100 200 600 50
UNABLE TO KEEP THE

KILL LINE PRESSURE
CONSTANT. EVEN WITH
THE CHOKE WIDE OPEN
THE KILL LINE PRESSURE
INCREASES BY THE SUM
OF CHOKE LINE LOSS
AND WIDE OPEN CHOKE
PRESSURE MINUS THE
ORIGINAL SHUT-IN
PRESSURE
BOTTOMHOLE PRESSURE
INCREASES
SCRS AND CHOKE LINE LOSSES
SPM 20 30 40 KEY
MUD
PSCR 400 680 985
PCL 150 250 370 GAS
MINIMUM RATE FOR PUMP

WEOX02.038
6-31
March 1995
These pressures as well as the annulus frictional pressure will act at all points in the
wellbore and circulating system. The effect of these additional pressures must therefore
be analysed at all points in the system and in particular at the openhole weak point.
2 Calculate the initial circulating pressure
The initial circulating pressure is calculated to estimate the standpipe pressure once the
pump is up to speed.
For Case A: the initial circulating pressure = Pdp + P scr
For Case B: the initial circulating pressure = Pdp + P scr + P cl + P oc – P a
where: Pscr = show circulating rate pressure (psi)

Pdp = shut-in drillpipe pressure that reflects the kick zone pressure (psi)
Pcl = choke line frictional pressure at SCR (psi)
Pa = annulus shut-in pressure (psi)
Poc = choke pressure recorded while circulating at SCR with the choke wide
open (psi)
3 Calculate the final circulating pressure
The final circulating pressure, when kill weight mud reaches the bit, for each case is
calculated as follows:
For Case A: Final circulating pressure = Pscr X MW2

MW1
For Case B: Final circulating pressure = (Pscr X MW2) + Pcl + Poc – P a

MW1
where MW2 = weight of the kill mud (SG)

MW1 = weight of the original mud (SG)
4 Monitor pressure at the kill line monitor as the pump is brought up to speed
For Case A, the pressure at the kill line monitor is held constant as the pump is brought
up to speed. The choke pressure will decrease by an amount equivalent to the choke line
friction pressure once the pump is up to speed.
For Case B, the pressure at the kill line monitor will be constant as the pump is brought
up to speed. However at some point before the pump is up to the SCR the kill line
monitor pressure will start to increase. Once the pump is up to speed the choke will be
wide open and the pressure at the kill line monitor will have risen by the proportion of
the choke line friction pressure that is not compensated for. (The increase will be
equivalent to Pcl + P oc – P a.)
5 Check the initial circulating pressure once the pump is up to speed
If the initial circulating pressure is significantly different from the calculated value, the
pump should be stopped, the well shut in and the cause for the discrepancy determined.
If the initial circulating pressure is equal to or reasonably close to the calculated value,
the displacement should be continued.
Any marginal difference is likely to be due to the fact that the actual SCR pressure is
different from the value used to calculate the initial circulating pressure. The actual
SCR pressure can be established from the initial circulating pressure recorded when the
pump is up to speed.
6-32
March 1995
For Case A, the actual SCR pressure can be determined from the initial circulating
pressure as follows:
P scr = Pic – P dp
For Case B, the actual SCR pressure can be determined as follows:
P scr = Pic – P dp – P cl – P oc + P a
For the Wait and Weight Method the final circulating pressure must be recalculated as
follows:
For Case A, the final circulating pressure can be determined as follows:
Pfc = Pscr X MW2

MW1
For Case B, the final circulating pressure is determined as follows:
Pfc = (Pscr X MW2)+ Pcl – P a + Poc

MW1
The standpipe pressure should therefore be redrawn to take into account these adjusted
figures.
6 Assess the effect of choke line losses at the latter stages of kick
displacement
For Case A: In the latter stages of the displacement the choke pressure required to
maintain constant bottomhole pressure will drop. This drop will be most
significant once the original mud behind the influx is at the choke.
If the required choke pressure drops below the sum of the choke line
loss and the wide open choke pressure, it will no longer be possible to
completely compensate for the choke line losses.
The resultant increase in wellbore pressure at this stage will be given by:
Increase in pressure = Pcl + P oc – P a
In practice, the choke will be wide open at this stage and the standpipe
pressure will rise above final circulating pressure.
When the hole has been circulated to kill weight mud, the circulating
pressure will have increased by the sum of the choke line losses and the
wide open choke pressure.
For Case B: As the influx expands the choke pressure required at surface will
increase. As the required choke pressure increases it will be possible to
compensate for a greater proportion of the choke line losses.
If the required choke pressure increases to a value equal to the sum of

the choke line loss and the wide open choke pressure it will be possible
to compensate for the complete amount of the choke line losses.
It should be noted that the most critical period in terms of downhole pressures is likely to
occur at early stages in the displacement. In this respect the change in choke line loss
compensation at latter stages in the displacement is unlikely to be a critical factor.
6-33/34
6-33
March 1995
6.2 SPECIAL TECHNIQUES

Subsection Page
2.1 VOLUMETRIC METHOD 6-37
2.2 STRIPPING 6-51
2.3 BULLHEADING 6-71
2.4 SNUBBING 6-79
2.5 BARYTE PLUGS 6-89
2.6 EMERGENCY PROCEDURE 6-97
6-35/36
6-35
March 1995

Subsection 2.1 VOLUMETRIC METHOD
Paragraph Page
1 General 6-38
2 Static Volumetric Method
(Drillpipe pressure used to monitor
bottomhole pressure) 6-38
(Choke pressure used to monitor
bottomhole pressure) 6-40
4 Lubrication 6-46
5 Dynamic Volumetric Control 6-47
Illustrations
6.12 Static Volumetric Method – an example of control
of bottomhole pressure at the choke 6-42
6.13 Static Volumetric Control – illustrating the
consequences of improper procedure 6-43
6.14 Volumetric Control Worksheet – an example for a land rig 6-44
6.15 Static Volumetric Method – choke pressure used
to monitor bottomhole pressure 6-45
6.16 Dynamic Volumetric Method – used to remove
gas from below a stack 6-49
6-37
March 1995
1 General
The Volumetric Method can be used to control the expansion of an influx that is migrating
during shut-in periods. It can therefore only be used if significant migration is
occurring. This may occur only in the case of gas kicks.
This method can be used during shut-in periods prior to displacement, or as a means of
safely venting an influx from a well in which circumstances prevent the implementation of
normal well control techniques.
Situations in which the Volumetric Method may be applicable therefore include:
• During any shut-in period after the well has kicked.
• If the pumps are inoperable.
• If there is a washout in the drillstring that prevents displacement of the kick.
• If the pipe is a considerable distance off bottom, out of the hole or stuck off bottom.
• If the bit is plugged.
• If the pipe has been dropped.
There are four techniques that may be required to deal with an influx that is migrating up
the hole. These are as follows:
• Static Volumetric Control: When the drillpipe is on or near bottom and can be used to
measure bottomhole pressure.
• Static Volumetric Control: When the drillpipe cannot be used to measure bottomhole
pressure.
• Lubrication: When the influx has migrated to the stack this technique is used to replace
the influx with mud as the influx is bled at the choke.
• Dynamic Volumetric Control: This technique may be used as an alternative to the above
but is most applicable as an alternative to lubrication on a floating rig.
The following Paragraphs can be used as guidelines for the implementation of the above
mentioned procedures.

(Drillpipe Pressure used to monitor
bottomhole pressure)
This procedure is the most simple to implement in that the drillpipe pressure is available to
monitor bottomhole pressure.
It may be necessary to implement this procedure during any time that the well is shut-in
after a kick has been taken. This situation may arise while preparations are being made to
kill a well or when operations have to be suspended due to bad weather or equipment failure.
6-38
March 1995
The following guidelines can be used:
1 Record the shut-in drillpipe and choke pressures
After the well has been shut-in the surface pressures can be used to identify the influx
type. These calculations are covered in Chapter 4.
If the influx contains a significant proportion of gas, it will be necessary to allow the
influx to expand considerably as it migrates up the hole.
2 Develop annulus pressure profile
The annular pressures during migration of the influx will be similar to those resulting
from circulation with the Driller’s Method. In this respect, a PC or programmable
calculator can be used to develop the annulus pressure profile as for the Driller’s Method.
The maximum wellbore pressures can therefore be estimated along with the anticipated
pit gain.
3 Determine migration rate
After the surface pressures have built up to values which reflect the kick zone pressure,
further increases will be due to migration. The rate of migration can be estimated from
two pressure readings, recorded either both on the drillpipe or both on the casing, taken
at a known time interval apart.
The distance D (m), migrated up the annulus of constant cross section in the time
interval T (min) is given by:
D= P2 – P1 (m)
MW X 1.421
where P1 = surface pressure at start of interval (psi)

P2 = surface pressure after interval T (psi)
MW = mud weight in the hole (SG)
T = time interval (min)
MR = migration rate (m/hr)
The migration rate can therefore be estimated as follows:
MR = D X 60 (m/hr)
T
4 Allow drillpipe pressure to build by overbalance margin
The drillpipe pressure should be allowed to build by a suitable overbalance margin.

This margin will be registered on the drillpipe as an increase in pressure over and above
the final shut-in pressure.
The overbalance margin may typically be in the range 50 to 200 psi.
5 Allow drillpipe pressure to build up by operating margin
The drillpipe pressure should be allowed to build by a further margin to ensure that the
overbalance is maintained as mud is bled from the well.
The operating margin may also typically be in the range 50 – 200 psi depending on the
resultant wellbore pressures at each stage in the operation.
6-39
March 1995
6 Bleed increment of mud from the annulus to reduce drillpipe pressure
After the drillpipe pressure has built by the sum of the overbalance margin and the
operating margin, the kick zone will be overbalanced by the sum of these two values.
Mud should then be bled from the annulus to reduce the drillpipe pressure to a value
representing the final shut-in pressure plus the overbalance margin.
A manual choke should be used for this operation to ensure adequate control. It is strongly
recommended that small volumes of mud are bled off at a time to allow time for the
drillpipe pressure to respond. There will be a considerable delay time between choke
and drillpipe pressure in a deep well and especially if the influx contains gas.
7 Continue process until influx migrates to the stack
This process should be repeated until the influx migrates to the stack. Arrival of the
influx at the stack may be preceded by bleeding gas cut mud from the well. However, if
gas is observed at the choke, the well should be shut-in and mud lubricated into the
well. If gas is bled from the well the bottomhole pressure will drop and eventually
cause a further influx.
When the influx has migrated to the stack, surface pressures should no longer rise as
migration will cease to occur. This may not be the case on a floating rig when some
migration may occur up the choke line.
Use the Volumetric Control Worksheet to record all the relevant data (See Figure 6.14.)
8 Lubricate mud into the hole or implement the Dynamic Volumetric Method
See Paragraphs 4 and 5 as follows.

(Choke pressure used to monitor
bottomhole pressure)
This technique may be required if the drillstring is stuck off bottom, out of the hole or too
far off bottom to be stripped back or if the bit is plugged.
In these cases, it will not be possible to monitor the bottomhole pressure with the drillpipe
during the control process. The choke pressure is therefore used in conjunction with the
volume of mud bled from the well to infer the bottomhole pressure.
The principle of this procedure is that the bottomhole pressure is maintained slightly over
kick zone pressure by bleeding mud from the annulus to allow the influx to expand as it
migrates up the hole. Mud is bled in increments from the well as the choke pressure rises
due to migration. The amount of mud bled off for each increment is determined from the
increase in choke pressure.
6-40
March 1995
For example, if the choke pressure increases by 100 psi, a volume of mud equivalent to a
hydrostatic pressure in the annulus of 100 psi is bled at the choke at constant choke
pressure. In this manner, control over the bottomhole pressure is achieved. It should be
noted that this method is only applicable if the influx is migrating as the mud
is bled from the well . The rate of influx migration determines the time required to bleed
each increment of mud from the well.
Figure 6.12 illustrates this technique. In this example, the following conditions apply:
Operating margin = 150 psi

Annulus = 8 1/2 in. X 5 in.
Mud weight = 1.85 SG
Hydrostatic equivalent of mud = 445.7 – 1.85 = 17.5 psi/bbl

(72.25 – 25)
Therefore bleed 150 = 8.5 bbl of mud

17.5
As can be seen from Figure 6.12, the influx must migrate (1824 – 133 =) 1691m while the
8.5 bbl of mud is bled from the well. It is clear that this operation will take several hours.
If the operating margin was quickly bled from the well, the original influx would expand by
approximately 0.4 bbl before the bottomhole pressure drops to the original kick zone pressure.
If the remaining 8.1 bbl were bled from the well, this would cause a further influx of 8.1 bbl,
as shown in Figure 6.13.
As the influx migrates further up the hole, the time required to bleed the 8.5 bbl increment
from the well will decrease significantly. In this example, the influx must migrate 570m
(approximately 2 hours) as the next increment is bled from the well. If the rate of influx
migration is maintained, this time will continually reduce until the influx is at surface.
Volumetric control is similar to the Driller’s Method although the influx moves up the hole
under the influence of migration. The resultant wellbore pressures as well as the required pit
gain will be similar for the two techniques.
The following guidelines can be used:
1 Record shut-in choke pressure
2 Develop annulus pressure profile
3 Determine migration rate
The first three steps are carried out in the same manner as for the previous technique.
4 Calculate hydrostatic pressure of mud per barrel
The hydrostatic pressure of the mud per barrel should be calculated at the point in
the annulus directly above the influx. It can be calculated as follows:
Hydrostatic pressure per barrel = 445.7 X MW (psi/barrel)
(d hc 2 – d o2 )
where MW = mud weight in the hole (SG)

do = drillstring OD (in.)
6-41
March 1995
Figure 6.12 Static Volumetric Method

– an example of control of bottomhole
pressure at the choke
1. 2.
AT INITIAL SHUT-IN INCREASE IN SURFACE PRESSURE
FOR OVERBALANCE MARGIN
650psi Pa 850psi Pa
PRESSURE IN VOLUME OF
BUBBLE 10,000psi INFLUX 10bbl
HEIGHT VOLUME OF
OF INFLUX INFLUX 10bbl 76m
66m DEPTH 3615m
BHP = Pf = 10,000psi BHP = 10,200psi

T=0 T = 15 min (assuming migration
rate of 300m/hr)
3. 4.
INCREASE IN SURFACE PRESSURE 8.5bbl BLED OFF WHILST HOLDING
FOR OPERATING MARGIN CHOKE PRESSURE CONSTANT
1000psi Pa 1000psi Pa
PRESSURE IN VOLUME OF
BUBBLE NOW INFLUX 18.5bbl
5405psi
PRESSURE
VOLUME OF
IN BUBBLE
INFLUX 10bbl
10,000psi
KEY
MUD 1824m
133m
GAS
MUD BLED AT
BHP = 10,350psi CONSTANT CHOKE BHP = 10,200psi
PRESSURE
T = 25 min T = 6 hours
WEOX02.039
6-42
March 1995
3a. 4a.
BLEED MUD FROM 8.5bbl BLED OFF INSTANTANEOUSLY,
WELL INSTANTANEOUSLY WELL SHUT-IN
Pa DROPS BELOW Pa > 1000psi

1000psi
VOLUME OF
INFLUX = 10.4bbl
VOLUME OF
INFLUX = 10.4bbl
VOLUME OF
SECONDARY INFLUX
= 8.1bbl
BHP DROPS
BHP = 10,000psi BELOW BHP = 10,000psi
T 25 min 10,000psi T 25 min
KEY
MUD
GAS
WEOX02.040
Figure 6.13 Static Volumetric Control

– illustrating the consequences of
improper procedure
5 Allow choke pressure to build by overbalance margin
The choke pressure should be allowed to build by an overbalance margin that may
typically be in the range 50 – 200 psi.
6 Allow choke pressure to build by operating margin
The choke pressure should be allowed to continue building a further similar amount to
provide an operating margin.
The total margin will depend on the resultant wellbore pressures at each stage in the
operation.
7 Bleed increment of mud from the well at constant choke pressure
A suitable volume of mud should be bled from the well to reduce the bottomhole pressure
by an amount equivalent to the operating margin.
6-43
March 1995
Figure 6.14 Volumetric Control Worksheet

– an example for a land rig
VOLUMETRIC CONTROL WORKSHEET
For worksheet calculation enter information into shaded cells. Units (US/UK): UK Version 1/1 1Q'95 by ODL/C. Weddle
WELL NO 26 RIG Rig 10 DATE AND TIME 15:30 20/08/95 SHEET NO 1
MUD WEIGHT IN THE HOLE, sg 1.85 LUBRICATING MUD WEIGHT, sg 1.85
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE PER BARREL OF 1.85 sg MUD in 5 X 8.5 ANNULUS: 17.46 psi/bbl
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE PER BARREL OF sg MUD in X ANNULUS: psi/bbl
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE PER BARREL OF sg MUD in HOLE: psi/bbl Migration Rate Time (min) 20
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE PER BARREL OF sg MUD in HOLE: psi/bbl P1 2 P2 5
OVERBALANCE MARGIN: 200 psi OPERATING MARGIN: 150 psi Distance, (m) 3.743701 Rate, (mpm) 11.2311
Choke or DP
TIME OPERATION Choke Change in Hydrostatic Overbalance Volume Total
If DP pressure can't be read see page 6-36 Monitor Monitor of Mud Bled/ of Mud Bled/ Volume of
of Vol. 1 of BP Well Control Manual Pressure Pressure Lubricated Lubricated Mud
( hr min) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (bbl) (bbl)
19:00 650 0 0 0 0 100
19:15 Influx Migrating 850 200 0 200 0 100
19:25 / 01.25 Bleed Mud at Choke 1000 0 -150 200 8.5 108.5
1:35 Influx Migrating 1150 150 0 350 0 108.5
1:35 / 3:15 Bleed Mud at Choke 1150 0 -150 200 8.5 117
3:30 / 4:45 Bleed Mud at Choke 1300 0 -150 200 8.5 125.5
4.:55 Influx Migrating 1450 150 0 350 0 125.5
4:55 / 5:30 Bleed Mud at Choke 1450 0 -150 200 8.5 134
+ ve
+ ve increase - ve bled overbalance + ve bled
- ve
- ve decrease + ve lubricated underbalance - ve lubricated
WEOX02.199
6-44
March 1995
The choke pressure must be held constant as the mud is bled from the well.
As an example (refer to Figures 6.12 and 6.13):
Operating margin = 150 psi

Hydrostatic equivalent of mud = 445.7 – 1.85 = 17.5 psi/bbl

(72.25 – 25)
Therefore bleed 150 = 8.5 bbl of mud

17.5
As can be seen from the example in Figure 6.12 the bottom of the influx has had to
migrate from 133m off bottom, to 1824m off bottom, whilst bleeding off 8.5 bbl of
mud. This could take considerable time. If the operating margin, in this case 150 psi
(8.5 bbl), had been quickly bled off and assuming no migration during this period, the
bubble would have expanded by only about 0.36/bbl before bottomhole pressure (BHP)
dropped to kick zone pressure. This would result in a further influx of 8.14 bbl.
Subsequent volumes bled from the well will require less migration distance, ie for an␣increase
of bubble size to 27 bbl (after next bleed off), the distance from bottom will be 2395m.
GAS MIGRATING
2200 TO SURFACE
PRESSURE BUILDUP
2050
INFLUX MIGRATING
1900
1750
MUD BLED AT CHOKE
(at constant choke
1600 pressure until volume
bled off corresponds
to Operating Margin)
CHOKE PRESSURE (psi)
1450
OPERATING MARGIN
1300
1150
OPERATING MARGIN
1000
OPERATING MARGIN
850
OVERBALANCE MARGIN
650
FINAL SHUT-IN ANNULUS PRESSURE
0 8.5 17 25.5 34 42.5 51 59.5 68 76.5
VOLUME OF MUD BLED FROM ANNULUS (bbl)
WEOX02.041
Figure 6.15 Static Volumetric Method

– choke pressure used to monitor
bottomhole pressure
6-45
March 1995
8 Continue the process until the influx migrates to the stack
This process should be repeated until the influx migrates to the stack.
When the influx has migrated to the stack surface pressures should no longer rise as
migration will cease to occur. This may not be the case on a floating rig when some
migration may occur up the choke line.
Use the Volumetric Control Worksheet to record all the relevant data.
Figure 6.14 shows a completed example.
9 Lubricate mud into the hole or implement the Dynamic Volumetric Method
See Paragraphs 4 and 5.
If this process has been implemented because the pipe was off bottom, it may be feasible
to circulate the influx out of the hole when the influx has migrated to the bit.
See Figure 6.15 for a typical choke pressure schedule for the Static Volumetric Method.
4 Lubrication
This technique may be used to vent the influx from below the stack while maintaining constant
bottomhole pressure.
Lubrication is most suited to fixed offshore and land rigs. It can be used to vent gas from the
stack after implementing the Static Volumetric Method, as well as to reduce surface pressures
prior to an operation such as stripping or bullheading.
Lubrication is likely to involve a considerable margin of error when implemented on a

floating rig because of the complication of monitoring the bottomhole pressure through the
choke line. When the influx has migrated to the stack it is quite possible that the choke line
will become full of gas cut mud. In this situation it is impractical to attempt to maintain
control of the bottomhole pressure with the choke.
However lubrication is simpler to implement than the Dynamic Volumetric Method. For
this reason alone, it may be considered for use on a floating rig.
The following guidelines can be used to lubricate mud into a well:
1 Calculate the hydrostatic pressure per barrel of the lubricating mud
This is done in the same manner as for the Volumetric Method.
2 Slowly lubricate a measured quantity of mud into the hole
Line up the pump to the kill line.
Having determined the safe upper limit for the surface pressure, the pump should be
started slowly on the hole.
Mud should be lubricated into the well until pump pressure reaches a predetermined limit. At
this point the pump should be stopped and the well shut in.
The well should be left static for a period while the gas migrates through the mud that has
been lubricated into the well.
6-46
March 1995
The exact amount of mud lubricated into the well should be closely monitored.
3 Bleed gas from the well
Gas should be bled from the well to reduce the surface pressure by an amount equivalent
to the hydrostatic pressure of the mud lubricated into the well.
If the surface pressure increased as the mud was lubricated into the well, the amount
that the pressure increased should be bled back in addition.
Ensure that no significant quantity of mud is bled from the well during this operation. If
mud appears at the choke before the surface pressure has been reduced to its desired
level, shut the well in and let the gas percolate through the mud.
Returns should be lined up through the mud gas separator to the trip tank to ensure that
any volume of mud bled back with the gas is recorded and accounted for.
4 Repeat this procedure until all the influx has been vented from the well
This procedure should be repeated until all the gas has been vented from the well.
It is likely that it will be necessary to reduce the volume of mud lubricated into the well at
each stage during this procedure. This is due to the reduction in volume of gas in the well.
If the influx was swabbed into the well and the mud weight is sufficient to balance formation
pressures, the choke pressure should eventually reduce to zero.
However, if the mud weight in the hole is insufficient, the final choke pressure will reflect
the degree of underbalance. It will then be necessary to kill the well.
5 Dynamic Volumetric Control

This technique can be used as an alternative to the Static Volumetric Method. However, it
should only be used only as a method of safely venting an influx from below a subsea stack,
due to both the complexity of the operation and the level of stress imposed on well control
equipment during circulation.
Experience has shown that the Dynamic Volumetric Method is the most reliable method of
venting gas from a subsea stack, if the drillpipe cannot be used to monitor bottomhole pressure.
The principle of the procedure is identical to the Static Volumetric Control, however the
implementation is considerably different. In this case, circulation is maintained across the
wellhead, whilst the surface pressure and pit gain are controlled with the choke. The kill line
pressure is used to monitor the well.
It is very important that the active tank be a suitable size to resolve very small changes in
level. It should be possible to reliably detect changes of the order of one barrel.
Having identified that the influx is at the stack, the following guidelines can be used to
implement the Dynamic Volumetric Method:
1 Ensure that the kill line is full of mud
If there is any possibility that the kill line contains gas, the well should be isolated and
the kill line circulated to mud. This will ensure that the pressure at the stack is accurately
monitored during the operation.
6-47
March 1995
2 Circulate down the kill line and up the choke line
Ensure that it is possible to monitor the active pit level accurately. Route returns through
3 Bring the pump up to speed
As the pump is brought up to speed, the kill line (or pump pressure) must increase by an
amount equal to the kill line pressure loss. However if it is not possible to compensate
for the choke line pressure loss, the kill line pressure will inevitably increase by more
than the kill line pressure loss.
The kill line circulating pressure will be monitored during the operation to remove gas
from the well.
4 Reduce kill line pressure in line with drop in pit level
As gas is bled from the well, the pit level will drop while the choke operator adjusts the
choke to maintain a constant kill line circulating pressure. This will result in mud being
lubricated into the well.
If the kill line circulating pressure is held constant as mud is lubricated into the well (as
gas is removed), the bottomhole pressure will increase. Therefore, as the pit level
decreases, the kill line pressure should be reduced to account for the greater hydrostatic
pressure in the annulus.
As an example:
Drop in pit level = 10 bbl

Hydrostatic equivalent of mud = 445.7 X 1.85 = 17.5 psi/bbl

(72.25 – 25)
Therefore reduce kill line circulating pressure by 17.5 X 10 = 175 psi
This procedure should be continued until all the influx has been vented from below the
stack. This will be indicated by a constant pit level.
If the well has been completely killed by removing gas from the stack, the final circulating
kill line pressure will be equal to the sum of the kill line pressure loss, the choke line pressure
loss and the wide open choke pressure. If the well is not yet completely killed at this point,
the final circulating kill line pressure will be greater than this value.
See Figure 6.16 for an example kill line pressure schedule for this technique.
6-48
March 1995
Figure 6.16 Dynamic Volumetric Method

– used to remove gas from below a stack
(PIT GAIN TO ALLOW

FOR GAS EXPANSION) GAS IS REMOVED FROM THE WELL,
MUD IS LUBRICATED IN
KILL LINE PRESSURE (psi)
ORIGINAL KILL LINE PRESSURE

ONCE PUMP IS UP TO SPEED
SLOPE OF LINE = HYDROSTATIC

PRESSURE PER
BARREL OF MUD
GAIN IN PIT LEVEL ORIGINAL PIT LEVEL ONCE PUMP IS UP TO SPEED DROP IN PIT LEVEL
CHANGE IN PIT LEVEL (bbl)

WEOX02.042
6-49/50
6-49
March 1995

Subsection 2.2 STRIPPING
Paragraph Page
1 General 6-52
2 Monitoring Well Pressures and Fluid Volumes 6-52
3 Annular Stripping 6-56
4 Annular Stripping Procedure 6-57
5 Ram Combination Stripping 6-59
6 Ram Combination Stripping Procedure 6-61
7 Dynamic Stripping Procedure 6-67
Illustrations
6.17 A Guide to Interpretation of Surface Pressure Changes
during Stripping 6-54
6.18 The Effect of the Pipe/BHA Entering the Influx 6-55
6.19 Surge Dampener Fitted to the Closing Line of an
Annular BOP 6-57
6.20 Example Stripping Worksheet – showing effect of
migration and BHA entering the influx 6-60
6.21 Surface BOP Stack Suitable for Ram
Combination Stripping 6-62
6.22 6-63
to to
6.25 Annular to Ram Stripping 6-66
6.26 Equipment Rig-up for Dynamic Stripping 6-68
6-51
March 1995
1 General
Stripping is a technique that can be used to move the drillstring through the BOP stack
when the well is under pressure. Stripping places high levels of stress on the BOPs and the
closing unit, and requires a particularly high level of co-ordination within the drillcrew.
Company policy is that a contingency plan must be developed regarding stripping procedure
for both Company operated rigs and rigs that are under a Company contract. This Section is
intended to aid in the drawing up of this contingency plan and as such the following are
proposed as the most important considerations:
• How to move the tool joint through the BOP.
• Wear on BOP elements and the control unit.
• The level of redundancy in the BOP and the control system.
• Wellbore pressures in relation to the maximum allowable pressure for equipment and
the formation.
• The monitoring of pressure and fluid volumes.
• The organisation and supervision of the drillcrew.
• Controlling increases in wellbore pressure due to surge pressure.
• The condition of the drillpipe.

(Drillpipe rubbers should be removed and any burrs smoothed out.)
• The possibility of sticking the pipe.
• The control of influx migration.
• Manufacturers’ information regarding minimum closing pressures for annular preventers.

(This information should be available at the rig site.)
• The procedure to be adopted in the event that the surface pressure approaches the
maximum allowable as the pipe is stripped into the influx.
See Figure 5.2 in Chapter 5 for a decision analysis related to stripping operations.
2 Monitoring Well Pressures and Fluid Volumes

During stripping operations, a constant bottomhole pressure is maintained by carefully
controlling the surface pressure and the volume of mud bled from or pumped into the well.
The equipment required for this operation is described in Chapter 1, ’Instrumentation
and Control’.
6-52
March 1995
Accurate monitoring of the well is required for the following reasons:
(a) To compensate for the volume of pipe introduced into the hole
To avoid over pressuring the well, a volume of mud equal to the volume of pipe and tool
joints (the volume of metal plus the capacity) introduced into the well, must be bled off.
Where possible, mud should not be bled from the well while the pipe is stripped in. It is
recommended that mud is bled from the well during each connection. This ensures that
there is a clear indication at surface of the BHA entering the influx.
However it is recognised that there may be situations when it is impractical to bleed

mud from the well at connections. Such situations include:
• If the surface pressures are close to maximum allowable prior to the stripping
operation.
• If a high pressure water kick is taken. In these circumstances the effective

compressibility of the fluid in the hole will be low and as such there may be a very
large pressure rise as pipe is stripped into the well.
• If the pipe has to be stripped out of the hole. In this case, there will be a tendency for
the volume of metal removed from the well to be replaced by influx fluid.
In these circumstances it may be necessary to implement the dynamic stripping technique.
(b) To compensate for influx migration.

To compensate for influx migration, it is necessary to bleed mud from the well. This is
in addition to the volume of mud bled from the well when introducing the pipe into the
hole. Normally, the required volume of mud will be very small in comparison to the
volume bled off to compensate for the introduction of pipe into the hole.
Influx migration is indicated by a gradual increase in surface pressure even though the
correct volume of mud is being bled from the well (however this may be due to the
BHA entering the influx). It is confirmed by increasing surface pressure when the pipe
is stationary (See Figure 6.17). Influx migration is controlled by implementing the
Volumetric Method.
(c) To allow an increase in surface pressure as the BHA enters the influx.
When the BHA is run into the influx, the height of the influx will be considerably
increased. This can cause a significant decrease in hydrostatic pressure in the annulus,
requiring a greater surface pressure to maintain a constant bottomhole pressure (See
Figure 6.18). A potential problem arises if this condition is undetected. The choke
operator may continue to bleed mud from the well to maintain a constant surface pressure
and inadvertantly cause further influx into the wellbore. It is therefore important to
accurately monitor the total volume of mud bled from the well.
It is recommended that the potential increase in surface pressure resulting from entering
the influx should be estimated before stripping into the hole.
6-53
March 1995
Figure 6.17 A Guide to Interpretation of Surface Pressure

Changes during Stripping
START
STRIPPING IN
PRESSURE
CONTINUE
INCREASES AS PIPE
STRIPPING
IS STRIPPED IN
BLEED VOLUME OF
MUD EQUAL TO
VOLUME OF PIPE
STRIPPED
SURFACE NO SURFACE
PRESSURE DROPS TO PRESSURE DROPS TO
ORIGINAL VALUE? VALUE GREATER
THAN ORIGINAL
YES
NO
SURFACE HAS THE

NO CORRECT VOLUME OF
CONTINUE CONTINUE PRESSURE INCREASES
STRIPPING STRIPPING WHILE PIPE IS MUD BEEN BLED
STATIONARY? FROM THE WELL?
YES YES
INFLUX IS PIPE HAS

MIGRATING ENTERED INFLUX
BLEED MUD TO
COMPENSATE FOR
MIGRATION
NO NO SURFACE
IS THE PIPE
PRESSURE LIMIT
ON BOTTOM?
APPROACHED?
YES YES
CIRCULATE OUT
TOP OF GAS BUBBLE
KILL THE WELL
USING THE
DRILLER'S METHOD
WEOX02.043
6-54
March 1995
Figure 6.18 The Effect of the Pipe/BHA Entering the Influx
1. Start stripping 2. BHA has entered influx

• Height of influx in annulus
has increased
• Overall hydrostatic in
annulus decreases
• Surface pressure required
to balance formation
pressure increases
KEY GAS
INFLUX
GAS MUD
INFLUX
GAS
MUD MUD
WEOX02.044
6-55
March 1995
3 Annular Stripping
There are two stripping techniques, Annular and Ram combination stripping. The decision
analysis presented in Chapter 5, ‘Pipe off Bottom – Drillpipe in the Stack’ outlines the
basis upon which the most suitable stripping technique is selected.
Annular stripping is considered to be the most satisfactory technique. It involves less risk
than ram combination stripping for the following reasons:
• Annular stripping is a relatively simple technique.
• During annular stripping the only item of well control equipment that is subject to high
levels of stress is the annular element.
• The control system is not highly stressed during the operation (as is the case during ram
combination stripping).
• The annular element can be changed out on a surface stack when pipe is in the hole by
inserting a split element.
• The upper annular preventer, on a floating rig, is the only stack component that is subject
to wear and this can be changed without pulling the complete BOP stack.
Ram combination stripping is possible on all types of rig but involves significantly more
risk when implemented on a floating rig.
The surface pressure is the overriding factor which determines whether or not it will be
possible to implement annular stripping. However, it is also necessary to consider that the
operating life of an annular element is severely reduced by increased wellbore pressure.
Field tests* carried out on Hydril and Shaffer 5K Annulars, show good performance at 800
psi wellbore pressure, but at 1500 psi and above the performance was severely reduced and
unpredictable.
If surface pressures indicate that annular stripping is not possible, attempts should be made
to reduce the pressures in order to enable annular stripping to be used. The most appropriate
technique will depend on the position of the influx in the hole. The options are; to circulate
out the influx, to lubricate the influx from the well or to bullhead.
To ensure that the annular is not subjected to excessive pressures as the tool joint is stripped
through the element, a surge dampener must be placed in the closing line (See Figure 6.19).
This may not be necessary on a surface stack if the pressure regulator can respond fast
enough to maintain a constant closing pressure as a tool joint is stripped through the annular.
As a word of caution, some drilling contractors have installed check valves in the control
lines to the BOPs; the purpose being to ensure that the BOP stays closed if the hydraulic
supply is lost. However, if a check valve is installed in the closing line to an annular BOP, it
will not be possible to reduce the closing pressure once the annular has been closed. In
order to reduce the annular closing pressure, in this case, it will be necessary to open the
annular having closed another ram to secure the well.
* Tests carried out by Exxon Prod. Research 1977.
6-56
March 1995
OPENING
LINE
SURGE DAMPENER
(precharged to 50%
of required closing
pressure)
CLOSING LINE
WEOX02.045
Figure 6.19 Surge Dampener Fitted to the Closing Line of

an Annular BOP
4 Annular Stripping Procedure

Having shut in the well, the following procedure can be used as a guideline for the
implementation of annular stripping.
1 Install drillpipe dart
Allow the dart to fall until it seats in the dart sub. To check that the dart is functioning
properly, bleed off pressure at the drillpipe (restrict volumes bled off to an absolute
minimum, typically 1/2 – 1 bbl).
If the dart does not hold pressure allow more time for the dart to drop or consider
circulating the dart into place (restrict volumes pumped to a minimum).
If the dart still does not hold pressure, install a Gray valve in the string.
6-57
March 1995
2 Monitor surface pressures
Surface pressures should be monitored after the well has been shut-in to check for influx
migration. If the influx is migrating it will be necessary to implement volumetric control
during the stripping operation.
If the pipe is off bottom, it will not be possible to identify the type of influx in the usual
manner. However, a high surface pressure caused by a relatively small underbalance
usually indicates that the influx contains a significant quantity of gas.
3 Determine the capacity and displacement of the drillpipe
It will be necessary to bleed mud from the well to compensate for the volume of pipe
introduced into the hole.
This volume is equal to the sum of the capacity and the displacement of the pipe. There
are various tables which outline these quantities, but a reasonable estimation can be
made as follows:
Displacement and capacity = do2 X 0.003187 (bbl/m)
where do = outer diameter of the pipe (in.)
Allowance should also be made for the extra volume of metal in the tool joints.
4 Calculate hydrostatic pressure per barrel of mud
Should migration occur, it will be necessary to bleed from the well at constant choke
pressure to allow the influx to expand. The hydrostatic pressure equivalent of the mud
in the hole is calculated as follows:
Hydrostatic pressure equivalent = 445.7 X MW (psi/bbl)

(d hc2 – d o2)

do = drillstring OD (in.)
or if the pipe is above the influx:
Hydrostatic pressure equivalent = 445.7 X MW (psi/bbl)

dhc 2
For more details on this technique, See Sub-section 2.1 ‘Volumetric Method’ in this
chapter.
5 Estimate increase in surface pressure due to BHA entering the influx
It is possible to estimate the maximum possible pressure increase due to the BHA entering
the influx as follows:
Max possible surface = 445.7 X (MW – G i) X V X 1 – 1 (psi)

pressure increase (d hc2 – d o2) dhc 2

Gi = influx gradient, converted to SG (water = 1 SG)
V = volume of influx (bbl)
do = BHA OD (in.)
6-58
March 1995
6 Allow surface pressure to increase by overbalance margin
An overbalance of 50 to 200 psi should be maintained throughout the stripping operation.
If the influx is not migrating, the overbalance margin can be applied by bleeding a
volume of mud that is less than the volume of pipe introduced into the hole, at the start
of the operation.
7 Reduce annular closing pressure
The BOP manufacturers recommend that the closing pressure is reduced, prior to
stripping, until a slight leakage occurs through the BOP. This reduces the wear on the
annular by lubricating the element during stripping.
8 Strip in the hole
The pipe should be slowly lowered through the annular while the surface pressure is
accurately monitored. The running speed should be reduced when a tool joint passes
through the annular.
Mud should be bled from the well at each connection, unless surface pressure limitations
dictate that this should be carried out more frequently.
The pipe should be filled with mud at suitable intervals, typically every 5 stands. Use
original mud weight.
A person should be posted at the Driller’s BOP Control Panel at all times to be ready to
shut-in the well in the event of failure of the annular preventer.
9 Monitor surface pressure
Surface pressures and all relevant data should be recorded on the Stripping Worksheet.
(See Figure 6.20.) Use Figure 6.17 as an aid to the interpretation of changes in surface
pressure.
10 Strip to bottom. Kill the well
The only sure method of killing the well will be to return the string to bottom and
implement standard well kill techniques.
5 Ram Combination Stripping

There are two types of ram combination stripping; annular to ram, and ram to ram. Both
techniques must be considered if either the tool joint cannot be lowered through the annular
or the surface pressure is greater than the rated pressure of the annular and this pressure
cannot be reduced to within safe limits.
Annular to ram stripping is preferable to ram to ram, unless surface pressures indicate that
the annular cannot operate reliably.
For both ram combination techniques there is a requirement that:
• There is sufficient space for the tool joint between the two stripping BOPs.
6-59
March 1995
Figure 6.20 Example Stripping Worksheet

– showing effect of migration and BHA
entering the influx
STRIPPING WORKSHEET
Units (US/UK) uk
For worksheet calculation enter information in shaded cells. Version 1/1 1Q'95 by ODL/C. Weddle
WELL NO 3 RIG Rig 10 DATE AND TIME 10/7/87 10:30 SHEET NO 1
MUD WEIGHT IN HOLE 1.75 LUBRICATING MUD WEIGHT 1.75
INITIAL BIT DEPTH 2000 HOLE DEPTH 2250
STRIPPING DATA
VOLUME OF MUD DISPLACED BY 5 Inch Pipe Drillpipe 0.0797 bbl/m : 2.15 bbl/stand
OVERBALANCE MARGIN 120 psi OPERATING MARGIN 150 psi (Max)
VOLUMETRIC CONTROL DATA
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE PER BARREL OF 1.75 SG MUD IN 5 x 8.5 ANNULUS 16.52 psi/bbl
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE PER BARREL OF 1.75 SG MUD IN 6.5 x 8.5 ANNULUS 26.01 psi/bbl
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE PER BARREL OF 1.75 SG MUD IN 8.5 HOLE 10.80 psi/bbl
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE PER BARREL OF 1.75 SG MUD IN 8.75 HOLE 10.80 psi/bbl
TIME OPERATION Choke or Dp Change in Bit Pipe Stripped Hydrostatic Over- Volume of Total
Choke Monitor Depth of Mud Bled/ balance Mud Bled/ Volume
Monitor Pressure Lubricated Lubricated of Mud
Pressure
( hr min) (psi) (psi) ( ) ( ) bbl (psi) (psi) (bbl) (bbl)
10:05 Well Shut In-Pressures 550 2000 N/A
Stabilized
10:20 Drillpipe Dart Installed 2000
10:30 Strip in Stand No 1 770 120 2027 27 2.2 N/A 120 0 0.0
10:40 Bleed Mud at Connection 770 -120 2054 54 4.4 N/A 120 2.2 2.2
(Assume BHA has entered flux)
11:10 Strip in Stand No6 1080 250 2162 162 13.2 N/A 240 0 8.8
- ve bled +ve + ve bled

+ve increase +ve lubricated overbalance
M M -ve lubricated
-ve decrease NA if bled to - ve
compensate underbalance
for pipe
WEOX02.197
6-60
March 1995
• There is an inlet at the stack between the two BOPs used for stripping.
• There is a suitable level of redundancy in the stack to ensure the lowest BOP is not used
during the stripping operation.
API RP 53 (issued 1984) states:
“The lowermost ram should not be employed in the stripping operation. This ram should
be reserved as a means of shutting in the well if other stack components of the blowout
preventer fail. It should not be subjected to the wear and stress of the stripping operation.”
In a critical situation, it may be possible to modify a surface stack to suit these conditions
after a kick has been taken. An example surface stack that is suitable for ram combination
stripping is shown in Figure 6.21.
The risks involved in ram combination stripping can be assessed by considering the following
points:
• The high level of drillcrew co-ordination required.
• The level of stress placed on the BOP elements.
• The level of stress placed on the BOP control system.
(During ram combination stripping, the accumulators are charged to maximum operating
pressure and isolated from the BOP. The pumps are used for operational functions.)
• The possibility of replacing the worn BOP elements during operation.
• On a floating rig, the reduction in level of redundancy within the subsea BOP stack as
the ram preventer is used.
6 Ram Combination Stripping Procedure

The following procedure can be used as a guideline for the implementation of annular to
ram stripping. The procedure for ram to ram stripping will be similar.
(For details of Steps 1 to 6 See ‘Annular Stripping Procedure’)
4 Calculate hydrostatic pressure per barrel of the mud
5 Estimate the increase in surface pressure due to the BHA entering the influx
6 Check ram spaceout
To confirm the distance BRT of the two preventers that will be used for stripping.
6-61
March 1995
Figure 6.21 Surface BOP Stack Suitable for

Ram Combination Stripping
ANNULAR
BLIND RAM
FLANGED ACCESS POINT
TO STACK FOR USE
DURING RAM
COMBINATION STRIPPING
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WELLHEAD
ACCESS POINT
WEOX02.046
6-62
March 1995
Figure 6.22 Annular to Ram Stripping

– stop stripping in when tool joint is above
the annular
MUD
VALVE OPEN ANNULAR
VALVE CLOSED
BLIND RAM
TO
PUMP
CHOKE
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WEOX02.047
6-63
March 1995

– close pipe ram
– bleed ram cavity pressure
MUD
VALVE OPEN ANNULAR
VALVE CLOSED
BLIND RAM
PRESSURE
BLED OFF
AT CHOKE
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WEOX02.048
6-64
March 1995

– strip in until tool joint is just below annular
MUD
VALVE OPEN ANNULAR
VALVE CLOSED
BLIND RAM
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WEOX02.049
6-65
March 1995

– use rig pump or cement pump to
equalize across pipe ram
MUD
VALVE OPEN ANNULAR
VALVE CLOSED
BLIND RAM
FROM
PUMP
PIPE RAM
PIPE RAM
WEOX02.050
6-66
March 1995
7 Isolate the accumulator bottles at full operating pressure

The accumulators should be kept as back-up in the event of pump failure.
8 Allow the surface pressure to increase by the overbalance margin
9 Reduce annular closing pressure and strip in
10 Stop when tool joint is above annular (See Figure 6.22.)
11 Close pipe ram at normal regulated manifold pressure
12 Bleed ram cavity pressure

Before the annular is opened it will be necessary to bleed down the pressure below it.
(See Figure 6.23).
13 Reduce ram operating pressure
14 Open annular. Lower pipe
15 Stop when tool joint is just below annular (See Figure 6.24.)
16 Close annular at maximum operating pressure
17 Pressurise ram cavity to equalise across ram (See Figure 6.25.)

Do not use wellbore pressure to equalise across the ram.
19 Open pipe ram
20 Continue to strip in according to the above procedure. Kill the well

Fill the pipe as required.
7 Dynamic Stripping Procedure

The situations in which it may be necessary to implement Dynamic Stripping are outlined
in Paragraph 2.
The purpose of this technique is to maintain constant choke pressure as the pipe is stripped
into the hole. This is achieved by circulating at a constant rate across the end of the choke
line. A manual choke should be used and the equipment rigged up as shown in Figure 6.26.
For this technique to be effective the pump output must be considerably greater than the
rate at which the volume of pipe is introduced into the well. If the pump rate is too low,
pressure surges will be caused at the choke as the pipe is stripped in, and the choke pressure
will fluctuate. The same is true for stripping out of the hole, in which case the choke pressure
may drop as pipe is stripped from the well, if the pump rate is too low. This may cause
further influx to occur.
6-67
March 1995
Figure 6.26 Equipment Rig-up for Dynamic Stripping
MUD
VALVE OPEN ANNULAR
VALVE CLOSED
BLIND RAM
PIPE RAM
MONITOR
PRESSURE
GAUGE
MANUAL
CHOKE
PIPE RAM
MUD TANK
PUMP
WEOX02.051
6-68
March 1995
The main problem associated with this technique is that migration and entrance into the gas
bubble may not easily be detected at surface. If no allowance is made for these complications,
further influx may be allowed to occur. To avoid this, the mud tank levels should be closely
monitored to ensure that the levels rise, or drop, in direct relation to the volume of pipe that
has been stripped into, or out of, the well. If any discrepancy is noticed, the well should be
shut-in and the surface pressures verified. Influx migration should be dealt with using the
Volumetric Method.
The Dynamic Stripping technique can be used during either annular or ram combination
stripping. For annular stripping it is implemented along the following lines:
(For details of Steps 1 to 6, See Paragraph 4 ‘Annular Stripping Procedure’)
4 Calculate hydrostatic pressure per barrel of the mud
5 Estimate the increase in surface pressure due to the BHA entering the influx
6 Allow the surface pressure to increase by the overbalance margin
7 Line up the pump to the choke line (See Figure 6.26.)
8 Ensure that the manual choke is fully closed. Open choke line valve(s)
9 Open the manual choke at the same time as the pump is brought up to
speed
10 Maintain final shut-in pressure on the choke
12 Strip in the hole
13 Monitor surface pressures and pit level

If the choke pressure increases significantly as the pipe is stripped into the hole, either
reduce the pipe running speed or increase the circulation rate.
Use the Stripping Worksheet to record all the relevant data. It is very important to
accurately record pressures and mud volumes while stripping.
14 Strip to bottom. Kill the well

Fill the pipe as required.
1-69/70
6-69
March 1995

Subsection 2.3 BULLHEADING
Paragraph Page
1 General 6-72
2 When to Bullhead 6-72
3 The Important Factors 6-72
4 Procedure 6-73
Illustrations
6.27 Well Shut-in after Production
– tubing full of gas prior to bullheading 6-74
6.28 Example Guide to Surface Pressures during
a Bullheading Operation 6-75
6.29 Well during Bullheading Operations 6-76
6.30 Well after Bullheading Operations tubing displaced
to kill weight brine 6-77
6-71
March 1995
1 General
Bullheading is a technique that may be used in certain circumstances during drilling
operations to pump an influx back into the formation.
This technique may or may not result in fracturing the formation.
Bullheading is however a relatively common method of killing a well during workover

operations. This technique is generally used only during workover operations when there is
adequate reservoir permeability.
2 When to Bullhead
During operations, bullheading may be considered in the following situations:
• When a very large influx has been taken.
• When displacement of the influx by conventional methods may cause excessive surface
pressures.
• When displacement of the influx by conventional methods would result in an excessive

volume of gas at surface conditions.
• If the influx in suspected to contain an unacceptable level of H2 S.
• When a kick is taken with the pipe off bottom and it is not considered feasible to strip
back to bottom.
• When an influx is taken with no pipe in the hole.
• To reduce surface pressures prior to implementing further well control operations.
3 The Important Factors

Bullheading during drilling operations will be implemented when standard well control
techniques are considered inappropriate. During such situations, it is unlikely that accurate
information is available regarding the feasibility of bullheading. In most cases therefore,
the likelihood of successfully bullheading an influx will not be known until it is attempted.
However, the major factors that will determine the feasibility of bullheading include the following:
• The characteristics of the openhole.
• The rated pressure of the well control equipment and the casing (making allowance for
wear and deterioration).
• The type of influx and the relative permeability of the formation.
• The quality of the filter cake at the permeable formation.
• The consequences of fracturing a section of the openhole.
• The position of the influx in the hole.
6-72
March 1995
4 Procedure
In general bullheading procedures can only be drawn up bearing in mind the particular
circumstances at the rigsite. For example there may be situations in which it is considered
necessary to cause a fracture downhole to bullhead away an influx containing H2S. In another
situation with shallow casing set, it may be considered totally unacceptable to cause a fracture
in the openhole.
During a workover operation a procedure for bullheading will be drawn up along the
following lines:
1 Calculate surface pressures that will cause formation fracture during

bullheading
Calculate also the tubing burst pressures as well as casing burst (to cover the possibility
of tubing failure during the operation).
2 Calculate static tubing head pressure during bullheading
3 Slowly pump kill fluid down the tubing. Monitor pump and casing pressure
during the operation
As an example consider the following well (See Figure 6.27).
Well information: Depth of formation/perforations at 3100 m

Formation pressure = 1.06 SG
Formation fracture pressure = 1.66 SG
Tubing 4 1/2 in. N80 Vam Internal capacity = 0.0499 bbl/m
Internal yield = 8430 psi
Shut-in tubing pressure = 3650 psi
Gas density = 0.1 psi/ft
• Total internal volume of tubing
= 3100 X 0.0499 (bbl)
= 155 bbl
• Maximum allowable pressure at pump start up
= (1.66 X 3100 X 1.421) – (0.1 X 3.2808 X 3100) (psi)
= 6300 psi
• Maximum allowable pressure when the tubing has been displaced to brine at 1.06 SG
= (1.66 – 1.06) X 3100 X 1.421 (psi)
= 2640 psi
6-73
March 1995
Figure 6.27 Well Shut-in after Production

– tubing full of gas prior to bullheading
3650
psi
4 1/2in N80 TUBING
PACKER
PERFORATIONS @ 3100m
FORMATION PRESSURE – 1.06SG
FORMATION FRACTURE GRADIENT –
– 1.66SG
KEY
BRINE VALVE OPEN
GAS VALVE CLOSED
WEOX02.052
6-74
March 1995
• Static tubing head pressure at initial shut-in.
= 3650 psi
• Static tubing head pressure when tubing has been displaced to brine
= 0 psi (ie the tubing should be killed)
The above values can be represented graphically (as shown in Figure 6.28). This plot can be
used as a guide during the bullheading operation. Figures 6.29 and 6.30 show a schematic
of the well at two stages of the operation.
10000 10000
TUBING BURST
9000 9000
8430
8000 WORKING PRESSURE 8000
RANGE DURING BULLHEADING OPERATION
7000 7000
6300 STATIC TUBING PRESSURE
THAT WOULD FRACTURE FORMATION 6000
5800
INCLUDING 500psi SAFETY
5000 FACTOR (if fracturing is 5000
a consideration)
4000 4000
3650
3000
2640
2000 2140
1000 STATIC TUBING PRESSURE 1000

TO BALANCE FORMATION PRESSURE
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 155
VOLUME OF TUBING DISPLACED (bbl)
WEOX02.053
Figure 6.28 Example Guide to Surface Pressures during

a Bullheading Operation
6-75
March 1995
Figure 6.29 Well during Bullheading Operations
4000psi
60bbl OF THE TUBING DISPLACED
(FROM FIG 6.28, TUBING PRESSURE
WITHIN ACCEPTABLE LIMITS)
BULLHEAD
BRINE
4 1/2in N80 TUBING
PACKER
PERFORATIONS
KEY
BRINE VALVE OPEN
GAS VALVE CLOSED
WEOX02.054
6-76
March 1995
Figure 6.30 Well after Bullheading Operations

– tubing displaced to kill weight brine
0psi
4 1/2in N80 TUBING
PACKER
GAS TRAPPED
UNDER PACKER
PERFORATIONS
KEY
BRINE VALVE OPEN
GAS VALVE CLOSED
WEOX02.055
1-77/78
6-77
March 1995

Subsection 2.4 SNUBBING
Paragraph Page
1 General 6-80
2 Snubbing Units 6-80
3 Selection of a Snubbing Unit 6-82
Illustrations
6.31 Rig Assisted Snubbing Unit 6-81
6.32 Concentric Cylinder Snubbing Unit 6-83
6.33 Multicylinder Snubbing Unit 6-84
6.34 Force Diagram for Snubbing Pipe 6-85
6-79
March 1995
1 General
Snubbing is a technique used to force pipe into a shut-in well when the upthrust due to well
pressure makes it impossible to strip the pipe through the BOP under its own weight.
Snubbing is relatively common in some areas in workover operations, when the well may
be allowed to continue flowing as remedial work is carried out.
Snubbing may be considered during drilling operations for well control purposes, either
when it is impossible to introduce pipe into a well that is under pressure, or if the rig BOP
system is not considered adequate to provide reliable pressure containment during a prolonged
stripping operation.
A snubbing unit can be used to introduce a range of sizes of pipe into the well. It can be
used to snub tubing, drillpipe and even casing in exceptional circumstances.
The lowermost components of the snubbing unit are the snubbing BOPs, which are made up
to the top flange of the annular preventer on the rig’s stack. This flange is often poorly
maintained because it is normally made up to the bell nipple and does not generally need to
form a pressure seal. It must therefore be inspected and, if necessary, repaired before the
snubbing BOPs are nippled up.
The snubbing BOPs are likely to be too tall to fit underneath the rotary table and too wide to
go through it. To overcome this problem, the snubbing company can provide suitable spacer
riser sections to bring the assembly above the rig floor.
The weight of the snubbing unit is supported by the wellhead. Guy lines from the work
platform prevent lateral movement.
Snubbing units can therefore be rigged up on land rigs and fixed offshore installations in a
relatively straightforward manner. Snubbing units are not commonly used on floating rigs,
however they have been used successfully in the past for well control operations.
In order to use a snubbing unit on a floating rig, pressure containment must be established
between the rig BOP and the unit on the rig floor. Drillpipe or tubing may provide this
pressure containment, in which case small diameter tubing may be run into the well through
the drillpipe or tubing. An operation of this type can only be carried out in relatively calm
seas so that the rig heave does not cause excessive movement of the snubbing unit.
2 Snubbing Units
(a) The Rig Assisted Type
The rig assisted unit uses the travelling blocks to generate the snubbing force through a
series of pulleys and cables. (See Figure 6.31.) The rig assisted unit can handle larger
diameter pipes such as casing up to 13 3/8 in. and have snubbing capacities of 80,000 lb
to 400,000 lb.
These were the first snubbing units used and the few that are currently available are
operated by Otis and Cudd Pressure Control.
6-80
March 1995
Figure 6.31 Rig Assisted Snubbing Unit
TRAVELLING BLOCK
BALANCE WEIGHT
TRAVELLING SNUBBERS
SNUB LINE
STATIONARY SNUBBERS
PLATFORM
STRIPPING OR
PUMP SNUBBING
INLET PREVENTERS
SAFETY PREVENTERS
WELL PRESSURE
WEOX02.056
6-81
March 1995
The unit consists of a set of travelling snubbers which are connected to the travelling block.
The travelling snubbers grip the pipe and force it into the well as the blocks are raised.
A set of stationary snubbers grip the pipe while the travelling snubbers are being raised (by
the counter balance weights) for a new bite on the pipe.
Once sufficient pipe has been run to reach the balance point, the travelling snubbers will be
removed and the pipe will be run in by conventional stripping.
(b) The Hydraulic Self Contained Type

Hydraulic snubbing units are the most common type available. They are completely self
contained and can be used either inside the derrick or when there is no rig on location.
There are two different types of hydraulic unit available, these being:
• The concentric cylinder unit (See Figure 6.32) for snubbing capacities up to 30,000
lb and for pipe up to 5 1/2 in. OD.
• The multicylinder type (See Figure 6.33) for snubbing capacity up to 150,000 lb and
for pipe up to 7 5/8 in. OD.
The units are operated from the work platform which is on top of the hydraulic jack
assembly. From this position the speed of the pipe and the slips are controlled as can be
the rotary table, if required.
Stationary and travelling slips are operated in sequence to grip the pipe as it is snubbed
into the well.
One operator will control the BOPs and equalising valves. Another operator will
co-ordinate the pipe handling, using the counter balance system.
3 Selection of a Snubbing Unit

The following are the criteria that should be used to determine the most suitable unit for a
given application:
• Snubbing Force
This is the force that the unit must exert to push the pipe into the hole. The snubbing
force will be a maximum for the first joint of pipe and decrease gradually as the weight
of the pipe in the hole increases in normal conditions.
6-82
March 1995
Figure 6.32 Concentric Cylinder Snubbing Unit
WORKBASKET WITH CONTROLS
TRAVELLING
SLIPS (CLOSED)
PISTON TRAVELLING SLIPS

(OPEN)
STATIONARY SLIPS
(CLOSED)
STATIONARY SLIPS
(OPEN)
ACCESS WINDOW
STATIONARY
SLIPS (OPEN)
SNUBBING UNIT
BLOWOUT
PREVENTER STACK
KEY
HYDRAULIC
CONTROL FLUID
WELL PRESSURE
PISTON EXTENDED AND TRAVELLING PISTON RETRACTED AND TRAVELLING

SLIPS CLOSED PRIOR TO FORCING SLIPS OPEN BEFORE PISTON IS
WEOX02.057
PIPE INTO WELL AGAIN EXTENDED
6-83
March 1995
Figure 6.33 Multicylinder Snubbing Unit
POWER TONGS
BOP CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
COUNTERBALANCE
WORK PLATFORM WINCH
TRAVELLING SLIPS
FOUR OPERATING
CYLINDERS
TELESCOPING
MAST
STATIONARY SLIPS
WINDOW – for stripper

bowl or annular BOP
SPOOL
HANGER FLANGE
PUMP INLET
SNUBBING UNIT
BLOWOUT PREVENTER
STACK
WEOX02.058
6-84
March 1995
The snubbing force is calculated as follows:
– Snubbing force, Fs = F p + Ff – (w a – Ly X 3.281) – (wb X L z X 3.281)
where Fp = Pw – Ao
(See Figure 6.34)
where F s = required snubbing force (lb)

Fp = force due to well pressure (lb)
Ff = frictional force (lb)
wa = weight of pipe (lb/ft)
wb = buoyant weight of pipe (lb/ft)
Ly = length of pipe above BOP to the travelling snubber (m)
Lz = length of pipe in the hole (m)
Ao = outside cross sectional area of pipe (in.2)
COMPRESSION FORCE
Fs Fs
POINT OF
APPLICATION
OF TRAVELLING
SNUBBERS
wa
Ff Ly (SNUBBING
PIPE UNIT STROKE)
SNUBBING
BOP Ff
(wa)(Ly)
wb Pw
Lz
WELLBORE
Fp
Fp
(wb)(Lz)
Equilibrium Equation (from ∑ Forces = 0)
Therefore: Fs = Fp + Ff – (wa) (Ly) – (wb) (Lz)
Where Fs = required snubbing force (lb)

Fp = force due to well pressure (lb)
Ff = frictional force (lb)
wa = weight of pipe (lb ft)
wb = bouyant weight of pipe (lb ft)
Ly = length of pipe above BOP to the travelling snubber (m)
Lz = length of pipe in the hole (m)
WEOX02.059
Figure 6.34 Force Diagram for Snubbing Pipe
6-85
March 1995
– Snubbing force for the first joint of pipe.
In this case, the length of pipe in the hole (Lz) is zero, and the length of pipe above
the BOP is considered insignificant. Consider the following example:
The well is shut in with a wellhead pressure of 5000 psi. 2 7/8 in. tubing produces a
frictional force of 3000 lb at the stripping rams. The area of pipe exposed to the
wellbore pressure therefore equals 6.492 in.
Snubbing force, F s = Fp + F f
= (6.492 X 5000) + 3000 (lb)
= 35,460 lb
– The snubbing force, Fs, if there is already some pipe in the hole.
In this case the length of the pipe above the BOP is again considered insignificant.
As an example:
2 7/8 in. tubing of 6.5 lb/ft is run empty to 1000 metres in 1.2 SG mud. The wellhead
pressure is 5000 psi. Drag in the hole is 2000 lb, friction at the BOPs is 5000 lb.
Ai = internal cross sectional area area of pipe (in.2 )

Ao = outside cross sectional area area of pipe (in.2 )
wi = weight of fluid inside the pipe (SG)
wo = weight of fluid in annulus (SG)
wa = weight of pipe in air (lb/ft)
wb = buoyant weight of pipe (lb/ft)
D = depth of tubing (m)
wb = wa + (w i X Ai) – (wo X Ao)
wb = 6.5 + (O X Ai) – (1.2 X 62.4 X 6.492) (lb/ft)

144
wb = 3.12 lb/ft
Therefore the snubbing force is given by:
Fs = Fp + Ff – (wa X Ly) – (w b X L z)
Fs = (6.492 X 5000) + 2000 + 5000 – (3.12 X 1000 X 3.281) (lb)
= 29,200 lb
• Size of the Unit
The dimensions of the unit must be checked against the internal dimensions of the derrick,
if the unit is to be used with a rig on location.
• Lifting Force
The unit must be able to provide a reasonable overpull, over and above the weight of
the maximum string weight.
6-86
March 1995
• Tubular Selection
If there is already pipe in the hole, this will determine the most suitable type of pipe to
be used.
Drillpipe can be used, however the following points should be considered:
– Drillpipe will require a relatively high snubbing force because of its large cross-
sectional area at the tool joints.
– Drillpipe does not have gas-tight connections.
– The drillpipe must be in good condition and inspected thoroughly before running in.
Tubing is more commonly used for snubbing for the following reasons:
– The force required to snub it in is very much less, and the unit required corresponding
smaller.
– External flush tubing can be run through the stripper rubbers without the need for
sequencing the rams.
The following points must also be considered:
– The limitations imposed by the ID of the tubing on the maximum pump rate.
– External upset tubing will be slower to run, but will be easier to control, if it starts to
be forced out of the well.
– Premium connections are desirable because they are gas tight.
– The collapse strength of the tubing.
– The susceptibility of the tubing to failure due to buckling.
6-87
1-87/88
March 1995

Subsection 2.5 BARYTE PLUGS
Paragraph Page
1 Characteristics of Baryte Plugs 6-90
2 Deflocculation 6-92
3 Pilot Tests 6-92
4 Slurry Volume 6-92
5 Pumping and Displacement Rate 6-93
6 Preparation of a Baryte Plug 6-93
7 After Pumping a Baryte Plug 6-93
8 Baryte Plug Procedure 6-94
Illustrations
6.35 Field Mixing of Baryte Plugs 6-91
6-89
March 1995
1 Characteristics of Baryte Plugs

(a) Hydrostatic Kill
Since baryte settling is inherently slow and since the results of settling are quite
unpredictable, the use of a settling recipe should not be a dominant factor in designing
a well control operation. In general, the goal in using a baryte kill slurry should be the
same as with any other kill weight mud – achieving a hydrostatic kill.
Three factors contribute to achieving a hydrostatic kill: the density of the fluid, the
volume of the fluid, and the rate at which the fluid is pumped. The density and volume
of the kill weight mud must be high enough to control the formation, and the pump rate
during the kill must exceed the influx rate by sufficient margin so that the kill weight
mud is not blown out of the wellbore. The properties of the fluid pumped should be
chosen with these three factors in mind. The ideal kill weight mud would be inexpensive
and simple to mix and handle over a wide range of densities. Deflocculated baryte slurries
fit this description except that the settling of the baryte can be a problem in surface
handling and pumping.
(b) Bridging effect

It has been suggested that a baryte plug can stop unwanted flow by a bridging effect and
that achieving a hydrostatic kill is not necessary. Some field experiences support this
view; there are cases where a well has stopped flowing after being treated with a small
baryte plug. Nonetheless, it is imprudent to rely on baryte bridging when attempting to
kill a well.
Laboratory tests show clearly that even very low gas volumes (0.01 Mcf/d at bottomhole
conditions) can flow through a settling baryte plug. This fact, as well as field experience,
shows that the bridging action of a baryte plug is not dependable. For this reason, the
design of a baryte plug should be based on achieving a hydrostatic kill.
The strength of the settled baryte is another significant factor in well control. Laboratory
tests show that the strength of a settled baryte plug is quite variable. Settled baryte can
appear rock-solid when pushed hard and yet move slowly out of the way of a persistent
gently force. This behaviour is actually a well understood property of deflocculated
cakes. A baryte plug can fail unexpectedly if a hydrostatic kill condition is not maintained.
(c) Settling/Non-settling
Since baryte settling is of little value downhole and troublesome on the surface, it should
be an optional feature of the slurry recipe. Figure 6.35 shows two recipes for baryte
slurries. The recipes are identical except that one contains XC polymer to eliminate
baryte settling. It would seem reasonable to use the settling recipe for small jobs or
where the settling baryte might really be helpful downhole. For large kill operations,
the non-settling recipe would be preferred.
Bentonite or some polymer other than XC could be used to suspend the baryte in a
slurry. The particular recipe in Figure 6.35 was selected because it is prepared easily in
both fresh and seawater and because XC solutions are shear-thinning enough to allow
good pumpability while adequately suspending the baryte in the pits.
6-90
March 1995
Figure 6.35 Field Mixing of Baryte Plugs
(a) For use with water based muds

1. Prepare mix water equal to 54 percent of final volume of slurry required.
Recipes below are for one barrel of mix water:
• Setting recipe
1 bbl water (fresh or sea)

15 lb lignosulphonate
2 lb/bbl of caustic (pH = 10.5 to 11.5)
• Non-setting recipe
1 bbl water (fresh or sea)

15 lb lignosulphonate
1 lb XC polymer
Defoamer (octanol or other)
2 lb/bbl of caustic (pH = 10.5 to 11.5)
2. Add baryte to mix water to prepare final slurry.
For 1 bbl of 2.5 SG slurry, mix
0.54 bbl mix water

700 lb baryte
(b) For use with oil based muds

1. Prepare mix oil equal to 47 percent of final volume of slurry required.
Recipes below are for one barrel of mix oil:
• Setting recipe
1 bbl base oil

1.5 US gal oil wetting agent
• Non-setting recipe
1 bbl base oil

4 lb organophilic clay
1.5 US gal oil wetting agent
2. Add baryte to mix oil to prepare final slurry.
For 1 bbl of 2.5 SG slurry, mix
0.54 bbl mix water

700 lb baryte
6-91
March 1995
Baryte-plug-type slurries can be prepared with all of the baryte substitutes which are now
on the market. In general the recipes in Figure 6.35 do not require change except that, in
some cases, the higher density of the substitue allows higher slurry weights than were possible
with baryte. For example, hematite slurries can be prepared to 3.00 SG using the non-settling
recipe in Figure 6.35. Replace the baryte with 870 lb hematite per final bbl of slurry. The
non-settling recipe is strongly recommended for hematite slurries because of the relatively
coarse grind of oil-field hematite.
2 Deflocculation
For years it has been standard practice to add a thinner to baryte slurries used for well
control. Both lignosulphonates and phosphates have been used, with the phosphate SAPP
having the widest acceptance. Chemicals of either type can deflocculate a baryte slurry to
improve pumpability and allow settling into a firm cake.
The choice of deflocculant will influence the baryte slurry properties as follows:
• Use of SAPP gives a slurry with fairly high fluid loss (50cc). SAPP will not deflocculate
in sea water or in the presence of some contaminants which occur in natural baryte.
• Use of lignosulphonate gives a slurry with low fluid loss (5cc). Lignosulphonate is
effective in sea water and tolerates both contamination and elevated temperatures.
Use of a high fluid loss baryte slurry is advantageous, possibly because it might dehydrate
and plug the wellbore, or promote, perhaps, hole instability. On the other hand, a low fluid
loss slurry would reduce the chances of differential sticking. Faced with this choice, prudence
suggests using the more reliable lignosulphonate rather than the somewhat unpredictable
SAPP. The recipes in Figure 6.35 contain lignosulphonate.
3 Pilot Tests
Because of variation and possible contamination of ingredients throughout the world, it is
always advisable to pilot test a baryte slurry. Prepare a sample of the slurry using the recipe
chosen and the ingredients at the wellsite. After being stirred well, the sample should have
the expected density and be easily pumpable. If the baryte needs to settle in the wellbore,
this should also be checked ahead of time. Reasonable settling is 2 in. in a mud cup after a
15 minute wait. The settled cake should be hard and somewhat sticky rather than soft and
slippery. The settling test is not a guarantee that the baryte pill will form an effective plug
under downhole conditions, but will certainly give an indication of the settling characteristics.
4 Slurry Volume
Slurry volumes depend upon the amount of openhole and the severity of the kick. These
volumes normally range from 40 bbl to 400 bbl.
The slurry volume should be 125 to 150 percent of the annular capacity necessary to give
the height of plug desired, but should not be less than 40 bbl. If a second baryte plug is
required, the slurry volume should be greater than the first.
6-92
March 1995
5 Pumping and Displacement Rate

Baryte plugs should always be pumped with the drillpipe close to the bottom of the hole. If
there is any significant volume of mud under the baryte slurry then the baryte slurry will
mix with the mud because of the large differences in density. If the influx zone is somewhat
above the bottom of the hole, then the baryte slurry should be pumped to bottom and then
above the influx zone far enough to provide the desired hydrostatic kill height.
A baryte plug should be pumped and displaced at a rate somewhat higher than the kick rate.
If the kick rate is unknown, a reasonable rate (5 to 10 bbl/min) should be used for the first
attempt although very large blowouts can ultimately require kill weight mud placement at
greater than 50 bbl/min.
6 Preparation of a Baryte Plug

For field preparation of either a settling or non-settling baryte slurry, it is best to prepare the
mix water first and then add baryte to the desired density. The equipment needed on location
to prepare and pump a baryte plug is a cementing unit equipped with a high pressure jet in
the mixing hopper, a means of delivering the dry baryte to the cementing unit, and sufficent
clean tankage for the mix water so that the lignosulphonate and caustic soda can be mixed
in advance. The non-settling slurry may be recirculated through the mixing hopper several
times if necessary to obtain a particular weight; service companies are reluctant to recirculate
settling baryte slurries through their equipment.
It is possible to weight-up to 2.5 SG in one pass provided the mix water is fed to the hopper␣at
600 to 1000 psi. Hopper nozzles and feed rate should be selected to give this pressure drop.
Settling-type baryte slurries may only be stored in ribbon blenders or similar equipment
which provide continuous, thorough agitation. Non-settling slurries may be stored in
standard␣mud tanks although even these slurries may drop out a few in. of baryte per day if
not stirred.
The baryte slurry may be pumped into the drillpipe either through a cementing head
or␣through the standpipe and kelly . In either case, the pump tie-in to the drillpipe should
contain provisions for hooking up both the cementing unit pump and the rig pump so that
either can be used to displace the slurry. If this is not done, and the cementing unit breaks
down, the baryte may settle in the drillpipe before the mud pump tie-in can be made or the
cementing unit repaired. Blockage of the drillstring by baryte settling will complicate the
well control problem.
7 After Pumping a Baryte Plug

Baryte plugs may be used in a variety of situations, it is not possible to give one
fixed␣procedure which will always work. There will always be a need for local decisions
and good judgement. This is especially true in deciding what to do after a baryte plug has
been pumped.
6-93
March 1995
The decision after placing a baryte plug is whether to pull pipe or not. The goal of pumping
a high-density slurry is to achieve a hydrostatic kill; the decision whether to pull pipe depends
on an assessment of the success of this kill. If a hydrostatic kill was probably achieved then
it is usually best to pull up above the slurry and try circulating mud. If there is doubt about
the hydrostatic kill it may be better to stay on bottom to be ready to pump a larger baryte
plug if needed. The risk in pulling out is that the pipe may become stuck off bottom or may
have to be stripped back to bottom if the baryte plug fails. The risk of staying on bottom is
that the pipe may become stuck or plugged. It is possible to keep the pipe free by moving it
(especially in a non-settling plug) but there is no way to circulate (to avoid plugging) unless
the pipe is pulled above the top of the baryte slurry.
8 Baryte Plug Procedure

(a) Leave Pipe in Place
1 Mix and pump the slurry at the appropriate rate
Monitor the slurry density with a densometer in the discharge line or a pressurised
mud balance. Displace the slurry immediately at the same rate.
2 Overdisplace the slurry by 5 bbl to clear the drillstring
Continue to pump 1/4 bbl at 15 min intervals to keep the drillstring clear.
3 Verify that underground flow has stopped
A noise log may be used. It is more definitive than temperature logs. Temperature
surveys can be used in addition or if the noise log is not available. If temperature
surveys are used, wait 6 to 10 hr for the temperatures to stabilise. The survey will
show a hotter than normal temperature in the zone of lost returns. Wait another 4 hr,
run a second survey. If the underground flow has stopped, the temperature in the lost
returns zone will have decreased.
4 After it has been determined that the flow is stopped, bullhead a cement
slurry through the bit to provide a permanent seal
Observe the annulus during the pumping. If the casing pressure begins varying
appreciably, or if a sudden change in the pumping pressure occurs, the baryte plug
may have been disturbed. Overdisplace the cement to clear the drillstring. Additional
cementing to obtain a squeeze pressure might be desirable.
5 Plug the inside of the drillstring
The cement in step 4 can be underdisplaced, but a wireline bridge plug set near the
top of the collars is preferred. Cement should be dump bailed on the wireline bridge
plug for additional safety.
6 Pressure test the inside plug
6-94
March 1995
7 Perforate the drillstring near the top of the baryte plug. Attempt to
circulate
It may be difficult to tell whether the well is circulating or flowing from charged
formations. Pressure communication between the drillpipe and annulus is one clue;
a pressure increase should have appeared on the drillpipe from annulus pressure or
on the casing from hydrostatic pressure in the drillpipe when the perforation
was␣made.
Consideration should be given to circulating with lighter mud because of the known
lost returns zone.
• Well will circulate:
– Use drillpipe pressure method to circulate annulus clear of formation fluid.
– Run a free-point log.
– Begin fishing operations.
• Well will not circulate:
– Squeeze cement slurry through perforation. Cut displacement short on final

stage to provide an interior plug or set wireline bridge plug. WOC and pressure
test plug.
– Run free-point log.
– Perforate the pipe near the indicated free point.
– Circulate using drillpipe pressure method until annulus is clear.
If well will not circulate, squeeze perforations with cement or set a wireline
bridge plug above perforations and perforate up the hole.
(b) Pull Out of Plug (High Pressure, Low Permeability Formation)

1 Mix and pump the slurry
Monitor the slurry weight with a densometer in the discharge line or a pressurised
mud balance. If mixing is interrupted for any reason, immediately begin displacement
of the slurry using either the cement unit pumps or the rig pumps. Work the pipe
while pumping and displacing.
2 Displace the slurry with mud at the same rate
Cut the displacement short by 2 or 3 bbl to prevent backflow from the annulus. If a
non-ported, drillpipe float is in the drillstring, overdisplace the slurry.
3 Immediately begin pulling the pipe
It may be necessary to strip the pipe through the annular preventer. Pull at least one
stand above the calculated top of the baryte slurry.
6-95
March 1995
4 Monitor the annulus
• If no pressure is on the annulus, continue working the pipe, and observe annulus
mud level.
– If the annulus is full, begin circulating at a low rate keeping constant watch
on pit levels.
– If the annulus is not full, fill annulus with water and observe. If annulus will
stand full, begin circulating at a slow rate. Consider cutting mud weight, if
feasible.
• If pressure is on the annulus, circulate the annulus using normal well control
techniques. Continue working the pipe.
– If returns become gas-free, the baryte plug was successful and the well is
dead.
– If returns do not become essentially gas-free after circulating two or three

annular volumes, the baryte plug was not effective. A second plug will be
necessary.
5 Trip out of the hole after verifying that the well is dead
If the bottom part of the hole is being abandoned, then a cement plug should be
placed on top of the baryte.
6-96
March 1995

Subsection 2.6 EMERGENCY
PROCEDURE
Paragraph Page
1 Use of Shear Rams 6-98
2 Dropping the Pipe 6-99
6-97
March 1995
1 Use of Shear Rams

Shear rams can be used to cut drillpipe and then act as a blind ram in order to isolate the
drilling rig from the well. Shearing the pipe is a technique that will be required only in
exceptional circumstances.
The use of the shear rams can be considered in the following situations:
• In preference to dropping the pipe in the event of an uncontrollable blowout up the

drillstring (an internal blowout).
• When it becomes necessary to move a floating rig off location at short notice.
• When there is no pipe in the hole, the shear rams can be used as blind rams.
Most shear rams are designed to shear effectively only on the body of the drillpipe. Procedures
for the use of shear rams must therefore ensure that there is no tool joint opposite the ram
prior to shearing. Be aware that many subsea stacks have insufficient clearance between the
top pipe rams and the shear rams to hang off on the top rams and shear the pipe.
Specialist shear rams, such as the Cameron Super Shear Rams, are available that are designed
to shear 7 in. drillcollars and casing up to 13 3/8 in. OD. It is clearly important however,
that rigsite personnel are aware of the capabilities and operating parameters of the shear
rams installed in the rig’s BOP stack.
Optimum shearing characteristics are obtained when the pipe is stationary and under tension.
It is therefore recommended practice that the pipe weight is partially hung off prior to
shearing. Hanging the pipe off also ensures that there is no tool joint opposite the shear
rams. Maximum operating pressure should be used to shear the pipe.
The following procedure can be used as a guideline for shearing the pipe in the case of an
internal blowout:
1 Space out to ensure that there is no tool joint opposite the shear rams
2 Close the hang-off ram
3 Hang off on the rams
Ensure that the pipe above the hang-off rams remains in tension.
4 Prepare to operate the shear rams
5 Close the shear rams at maximum accumulator pressure
6 Monitor the well. Implement appropriate control procedures
6-98
March 1995
2 Dropping the Pipe

Situations in which it will be necessary to drop the pipe will be extremely rare.
Dropping the pipe is an emergency procedure and as such it is a procedure that will only be
required as a last resort when the safety of the rig and personnel is threatened.
Situations that may require the pipe to be dropped include:
• If an internal blowout occurs on a rig that has no shear rams.
• If an internal blowout occurs when the drillcollars are in the stack.
• As an alternative to the use of shear rams in the event of an internal blowout when
drillpipe is in the stack.
• If the pipe is pushed out of the hole under the influence of wellbore pressure.
• If a BOP develops a leak and there is no back-up available.
Once the pipe has been dropped the well is shut-in with the blind/shear rams. However,
re-establishing control of the well in this situation will be time consuming and costly.
It is clearly important to be sure that the pipe will clear the stack once it has been dropped
(especially on a floating rig in deep water). The possibility of damaging the ram packings
must also be considered.
There are two techniques that can be used to drop the string:
(a) Unlatch the elevators

1 Lower the string until the elevators are at a manageable distance from
the␣floor
2 Ensure that the BOP is closed at maximum operating pressure
3 Attach a tugger line to the elevators
4 Clear the floor
5 Open the choke line to bleed down surface pressure
6 Open the elevators
7 Open the BOP. Allow the string to drop
8 Close the blind/shear ram
9 Close the choke
6-99
March 1995
(b) Back off a tool joint

1 Set the slips
2 Break a tool joint. Ensure that the joint can support the weight of the
string
3 Pull the slips
4 Run the joint below the rotary
5 Set the slips
6 Ensure the BOP is closed at maximum closing pressure
7 Open the choke line to reduce the surface pressure
8 Turn the rotary to the left to back off the joint
9 Open the BOP and allow the pipe to drop
10 Close the blind/shear ram
11 Close the choke
Both of these techniques involve a certain amount of risk. The most suitable method in each
case will depend on the particular conditions at the rigsite.
6-100
March 1995
6.3 COMPLICATIONS
Paragraph Page
1 Plugged Bit Nozzle 6-102
2 Plugged Choke 6-102
3 Cut Out Choke 6-102
4 Pump Failure 6-103
5 Pressure Gauge Failure 6-103
6 String Washout 6-103
7 Stuck Pipe 6-104
8 Well Control Considerations in Horizontal Wellbores 6-104
9 Hydrates 6-105
10 Surface Pressures Approach the MAASP 6-109
11 Impending Bad Weather 6-110
12 Loss of Control 6-111
13 Well Control Considerations in Slim Hole Well 6-111
Illustrations
6.36 Temperature at which Gas Hydrates will Freeze (Katz) 6-106
6.37 Natural gas expansion – Temperature reduction
curve (NATCO) 6-107
6.38 Height of 10 bbl Gas Influx in Annulus 6-113
6.39 Reduction in Bottom Hole Pressure Due to 10 bbl Gas Influx 6-114
6.40 Annular Friction Pressure Drop 6-115
6.41 Swab Pressure in a 1000 m Hole 6-116
6-101
March 1995
1 Plugged Bit Nozzle

A plugged nozzle in the bit is indicated by an unexpected increase in drillpipe pressure with
little or no change in the choke pressure.
The choke operator may be tempted to open the choke in an attempt to reduce the drillpipe
pressure to the original circulating pressure. This will result in a drop in choke pressure and
a corresponding drop in bottomhole pressure.
Therefore should a plugged bit nozzle be suspected, the pump should be stopped, the well
shut-in and the pump restarted to establish the increased standpipe pressure that will maintain
a suitable bottomhole pressure.
An increase in drillpipe pressure could also be caused by the hole packing off around the
BHA. This would be likely to cause increased, though fluctuating, circulating pressures.
The drillstring should be reciprocated in order to clear this problem.
If the bit becomes totally plugged, this will cause an abrupt and continually increasing
drillpipe pressure, with little or no change in choke pressure. In this event, if increased
drillpipe pressure does not clear the problem, the string must be perforated as close as possible
to the bit in order to re-establish circulation.
It is good practice, especially in critical hole sections, to run a circulating sub above the bit
or above a core barrel.
2 Plugged Choke
A plugged choke is indicated by an unexpected increase in choke pressure accompanied by
an equal increase in drillpipe pressure. Some plugging of the choke is to be expected if the
annulus is loaded with cuttings.
Clearly the first course of action is to open the choke in an attempt to both clear the restriction
in the choke and to avoid overpressuring the well. If this action is not successful the pump
should be stopped immediately. After switching to an alternate choke the excess pressure in
the well should be bled at the choke and the displacement restarted in the usual manner.
One of the reasons for displacing a kick at slow circulation rates is to avoid overpressuring
the well if cuttings plug the choke. In this respect, circulation rates should be minimised in
critical conditions if the annulus is likely to contain a substantial volume of cuttings.
3 Cut Out Choke

A choke is unlikely to suddenly cut out. In this respect, there will not be any dramatic
indication that this problem is occurring.
As a choke wears it will become necessary to gradually close it in to maintain circulating

pressure. If the operator finds that he has to gradually close in the choke to maintain
circulating pressure, the first reaction should be to check the pit volume to ensure that lost
circulation is not occurring.
6-102
March 1995
Having established that there is no loss of circulation a worn out choke should be suspected.
There may come a stage when it is no longer possible to maintain a suitable circulating
pressure even with the choke apparently fully closed. At, or preferably before this stage, the
flow should be switched to another choke and repairs effected to the worn choke.
4 Pump Failure
The most obvious indicator of failure at the fluid end is likely to be erratic standpipe pressure
together with irregular rotary hose movement. This may be preceded by an unexplained
drop in circulating pressure.
If pump failure is suspected, the pump should be stopped and the well shut-in. The
displacement should be continued with the second rig pump, or if necessary, the cement
pump. The faulty pump should be repaired immediately.
5 Pressure Gauge Failure

Every effort should be made to ensure that all pressure gauges are working correctly, and
that back-up gauges are available in the event of failure of a pressure gauge during a well
control operation.
Should gauge failure occur during a well control operation it is important that the defective
gauge be replaced as quickly as possible. If no back-up gauge is immediately available,
stop the operation and shut in the well.
6 String Washout
A washout in the drillstring may be indicated by an unexpected drop in standpipe pressure,
while the choke pressure remains unchanged.
The recommended procedure in the event of a drillstring washout is to stop the pump and
shut the well in.
Every effort must be made to ensure that the washout is not enlarged by extended circulation
and drillstring manipulation.
The most critical situation would be in the event of a washout close to the surface. Should
this occur, it is unlikely that it will be possible to displace the influx from the hole effectively,
unless the influx is above the washout.
If the washout is identified as being near the bottom of the well, it may be possible to
displace the kick from the well effectively. In this case, there will of course be the risk of
parting the drillstring with continued circulation.
Regardless of the depth of the washout, it will be necessary to re-establish the correct
circulating pressure if the pump is restarted. Excessive downhole pressures may be caused
if the original circulating pressure is maintained at the standpipe. It is advisable to periodically
re-establish the circulating pressure, if the circulation is contained for prolonged periods
through a washout.
6-103
March 1995
7 Stuck Pipe
The complication of stuck pipe during a well control operation can cause serious problems,
most especially if the pipe is stuck off bottom.
Unfortunately, the likelihood of the pipe becoming stuck during a well control operation is
increased if the pipe is off bottom. The pipe should be rotated, to minimise the risk of
sticking the pipe, if the well is shut-in with the pipe off bottom and the BHA in openhole.
Due to the relatively high wellbore pressures during a well control operation, the most likely
cause of stuck pipe is differential sticking. However, mechanical sticking may result if the
hole sloughs and packs-off as a result of the contact with the influx fluids.
If the pipe is differentially stuck with the bit on bottom, continue the operation because it is
most likely that circulation can still be carried out in order to kill the well. Efforts to free the
pipe can be made once the well has been killed.
Should the pipe be differentially stuck with the bit off bottom, the situation is complicated
in that it will generally not be possible to reduce the wellbore pressure at that depth by
circulation. It may be possible to free the pipe by spotting a freeing agent. However, if the
influx was swabbed in, it may be possible to regain control of the well by volumetric control.
If the pipe is mechanically stuck, a combination of working the pipe and spotting a freeing
agent can be used in attempting to free the pipe.
8 Well Control Considerations in

Horizontal Wellbore
Well control procedures in horizontal wellbores use the same basic principles as those for
vertical or deviated holes. Downhole equivalent mud weights are calculated using the true
vertical depth, as always.
There are however several additional points to consider, these are as follows:
• The purposes of drilling a horizontal well are to improve hydrocarbon recovery and to
maximise the area of reservoir exposed at the wellbore, in order to maximise production
rates. It must therefore be considered that influx flowrates, in the event of a kick, will
be considerably greater than for a well drilled vertically through the reservoir.
Particular attention must be paid to tripping procedures when the reservoir is exposed.
• It is possible that shut-in pressures in the event of a kick will be identical on both drillpipe
and annulus, although a large influx has been taken; this would depend on the length of
the horizontal openhole section.
This is not a problem, however it does mean that it is not possible to check the validity
of kick data.
The possibility that the wellbore contains a large influx should therefore be addressed
in such circumstances.
6-104
March 1995
• There is a greater potential for swabbing when a large surface area of reservoir is exposed.
Correct tripping procedure must be rigorously adhered to.
It is quite feasible, in a horizontal well, that the horizontal section is full of reservoir
fluid and yet the well be dead. It is therefore recommended that extreme caution be paid
when tripping back into such a reservoir after a round trip. When back on bottom it is
recommended to circulate bottoms up through the choke manifold.
In the event of a kick whilst tripping it may not be possible to drop or pump down the
dart. This will depend on the hole angle at the dart sub position. If it is not possible to
install the dart into the dart sub, the ‘Gray’ valve can be used.
9 Hydrates
Natural gas hydrates have the appearance of hard snow and consist of chemical compounds
of light hydrocarbons and liquid water. They are formed at temperatures above the normal
freezing point of water at certain conditions of temperature and pressure (See Figure 6.36).
This formation process is accelerated when there are high gas velocities, pressure pulsations
or other agitations, such as downstream of a choke and at elbows, which cause the mixing
of hydrocarbon components.
During well control operations, gas hydrates may cause the following serious problems:
• Plugging of subsea choke/kill lines, preventing opening and closing of subsea BOPs,
sealing off wellbore annuli and immobilising the drillstring. There have been recorded
incidences of such occurrences with subsea stacks in water depths of 350m and deeper.
• Plugging of surface lines at and downstream of the choke or restriction. This is

particularly hazardous when high gas flowrates are experienced through low pressure
equipment (such as the poorboy separator and gas vent line). The formation of hydrate
plugs under these conditions can rapidly overpressure low pressure well control
equipment.
The major factors which determine the potential for hydrate formation are gas composition,
liquid content and pressure and temperature. The formation of hydrates can be predicted
using Figure 6.36. It should be noted that the conditions for hydrate formation can be created
at a subsea stack operating in a cold water environment.
Figure 6.37 can be used to predict the temperature drop associated with a pressure drop
(across a choke, for example). As an example, if gas at 3000 psi and 90°F was choked to
1800 psi, the temperature would be expected to drop to 55°F, in which case, hydrate formation
could be expected.
6-105
March 1995
Figure 6.36 Temperature at which Gas Hydrates

will Freeze (Katz)
The purpose of this chart is to determine the temperature below which hydrates will form,
when sufficient liquid water is present.
4000
3000
2000
1000
PRESSURE FOR HYDRATE FORMATION (psia)
NE
900 HA
ET
800 M
700
600
500
400
AV
R
G
6
0.
300
7
0.
8
0.
200
9
0.
0
1.
100
90
80
70
60
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
TEMPERATURE (°F)
Example: With 0.7 specific gravity gas at 1000psia, hydrates may be expected at 64°F.
At 200psia this would be 44°F.
WEOX02.061
6-106
March 1995
NATURAL GAS EXPANSION – TEMP REDUCTION CURVE
BASED ON 7 SP GR GAS
(From NATCO)
00
160 70 160
0
150 650 150
00
60
140 140
00
55 R OP
130 R ED 130
00 SU
50 R ES
OP
120 ET 120
00 DU
45 P
D RO
110 110
00 MP
40 TE
100 00 100
35
00
RISE
90 30 90
6-107
INITIAL TEMP
105° - 80° = 25°
0
80 250 HYDRATE EXPECTANCY DEGREES FAHRENHEIT 80
00
20
70 BASE LINE 70
00
reduction curve (NATCO)
15
GAS TEMPERATURE (°F)

60 00 60
10
50 0 50
50
0 S
40 R VE 40
CU S
L PY GA
30 A T 30
TH U F EXAMPLE
EN 0 C
T
N 0 0 REQUIRED: REDUCE GAS PRESSURE
20 TA U/1 FROM 2400 # PSI AT 80°F TO 1500 # 20
Figure 6.37 Natural Gas Expansion – Temperature
NS BT PSI DETERMINE INITIAL TEMPERATURE

CO RISE NECESSARY SO THAT AFTER
10 EXPANSION TO 1500 # PSI THE FINAL 10
TEMPERATURE WILL BE 75°F
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
2
PRESSURE (lb/in )
WEOX02.062
March 1995
Hydrates can be combated by one or a combination of the following:
• Injecting antifreeze agents such as methanol into the gas flow; this has the effect of
dissolving liquid water deposits, and thus lowering the temperature at which hydrates
would be expected to form.
Methanol is often injected at the subsea test tree during well testing operations from a
floating rig.
The most appropriate place to inject methanol at surface is at the choke manifold. The
point of injection should be upstream of the choke. High pressure chemical injection
pumps (as manufactured by Texsteam) are suitable for this application.
• Heating the gas above the temperature at which hydrate will form.
During gas well testing operations, a steam exchanger will usually be provided for this
purpose. Experience has shown that this is the most effective and reliable method of
preventing the formation of hydrates. The combination of heating and antifreeze injection
is ideal.
• Reducing line pressure in order to allow the hydrates to melt. This is a temporary measure
and not always practical. Once hydrates have formed, it often takes a considerable length
of time to clear the line.
It is important that adequate contingency is provided, along the above lines, to deal with
hydrates, if it is suspected that the potential exists for hydrate formation. Subsea water
temperatures and pressures should be checked as well as the potential for hydrate formation
at surface in the event of a gas kick.
10 Surface Pressures Approach the MAASP

The MAASP is defined as the maximum allowable annular surface pressure. Bearing in
mind the method that is used to calculate its value (i.e. assuming that MAASP is calculated
from LO Test result), it is clear that the MAASP is a consideration only when there is a full
column of mud from the openhole weak point to the surface. Surface pressures in excess of
the MAASP therefore may not cause downhole failure if lighter fluids (such as a hydrocarbon
influx) occupy the annulus above the openhole weak point.
Consequently, during a well control operation, from the moment that the top of an influx is
displaced past and above the openhole weak point, the MAASP is no longer a consideration
and may be exceeded.
In the event that surface pressures exceed the MAASP when the kick is still below the
openhole weak point, consequently causing excessive downhole pressures, there are two
distinct options:
• Hold the choke pressure so as to maintain bottomhole pressure equal to, or slightly
greater than, the kick zone pore pressure.
• Reduce the choke pressure and limit it to the MAASP.
6-108
March 1995
The consequences of overpressuring the openhole weak point as in the first option can be
assessed, bearing in mind the following factors:
• The depth of the casing shoe.
• The quality of the cement job.
• By how much the openhole weak point will be overpressured.
• The length of time that the openhole weak point will be overpressured.
• The characteristics of the openhole weak point.
• Any safety factor included in the calculation of the MAASP.
• The possibility of broaching around the casing.
The consequences of underbalancing the formation as in the second option can be assessed,
bearing in mind the following factors:
• The type of kick zone fluid.
• The permeability of the kick zone.
• The degree of underbalance.
• The length of time that the kick zone will be underbalanced.
The appropriate course of action should therefore be selected on the basis of these factors.
However, in general, a kick zone should only be underbalanced in exceptional
circumstances such as when the zone is known to have low permeability. This
can often be assessed from the rate of pressure build after shutting in a well that has kicked.
11 Impending Bad Weather

Bad weather is most likely to cause serious problems as regards well control on offshore␣rigs.
For example, it may not be possible to offload baryte supplies or remove excess personnel
in bad weather.
On a floating rig, a critical situation is reached should it become necessary to unlatch the
riser during a well control operation. In this situation it will not be possible to monitor the
well and hence control the migration of the influx, should this occur.
Should weather conditions deteriorate with very little warning, the following procedure can
be implemented:
1 Attempt to bullhead the influx back to the formation
2 Displace the drillstring to kill weight mud
3 Close lowermost pipe rams (in addition to the hang-off rams). Shear the
pipe rams
4 Prepare to unlatch, monitoring wellbore pressures until it becomes

necessary to unlatch
6-109
March 1995
If additional time is available, consideration should be given to spotting a heavy pill or plug
on bottom to either kill the well hydrostatically or provide a barrier to migration.
Bad weather may cause problems regarding the supply of chemicals and barytes to all types
of rigs. In this respect, it may be necessary to implement the Driller’s Method, should there
not be adequate chemical stocks at the rigsite.
In certain areas of the world, severe cold may cause operational problems. Points of particular
concern are, BOP operating fluid, manifolds and flowlines.
12 Loss of Control
Loss of control during a well control operation may result from excessive loading of pressure
control equipment or exposed formations.
However there are recorded incidents of equipment failure at pressures significantly below
rated values. These failures have been attributed to faulty manufacture, lack of proper
maintenance, or corrosion. High pressure equipment is considered particularly susceptible
to failure when exposed to corrosive fluids such as H2 S.
It is not possible to detail specific procedures in the event of loss of control during a well
control operation. However, in critical situations, action should be taken bearing in mind
that the absolute priority is the safety of rigsite personnel.
13 Well Control Considerations in Slim Hole Well

A slim hole is commonly defined as one in which 90% or more of the length of the well is
drilled with drill bits less than 7" in diameter. A well with hole sizes smaller than those in a
conventional well is also broadly considered as a slim hole well.
Whilst the immediate difference between a conventional well and a slim hole well is their
hole sizes, other major characteristics of a slim hole include the practice of long sections of
continuous coring and the requirements of higher drillpipe rotary speeds, lower weights on
bit, lower mud flow rates and special mud systems. So a slim hole well requires significant
changes in the well design, well operation and the well control procedures.
(a) Slim Hole Characteristics

In terms of well control, a slim hole well has the following characteristics when compared
with a conventional well:
• Greater Influx Length
Due to the reduced annular size in a slim hole, the same volume of formation influx
will occupy a longer section of the annulus in a slim hole well than in a conventional
well. As shown in Fig.6.38, a 10 bbl influx occupies 66 m long annulus in a
conventional 8.5"x5" well and 523 m long in a 3.5"x2.5" slim hole well.
6-110
Rev 1 March
March 1995 1995
• Greater Bottom Hole Pressure Reduction
As the result of the greater influx length, the same volume of formation influx will
result in a greater reduction in the bottom hole pressure in a slim hole well. As␣shown
in Fig.6.39, a 10 bbl gas influx will reduce the bottom hole pressure by about 743 psi
in a 3.5"x2.5" slim hole well and only 94 psi in a conventional 8.5"x5" well.
• Higher Annular Friction Pressure
Also due to the reduced annular size, the annular friction pressure drop can be many
times higher in a slim hole well than in a conventional well, as shown in Fig.6.40.
Therefore the friction pressure drop can become significant during well control
operations in a slim hole well whereas it is all but ignored in the case of a conventional
well.
• Higher Swab and Surge Pressures
Fig.6.41 compares the swabbing pressure in both slim hole and conventional wells.
It can be seen that the swabbing pressure is much higher in a slim hole well than in
a conventional well. Also the swabbing pressure increases more rapidly in a slim
hole well with increasing the trip speed.
• Effect of High Drillpipe Rotational Speed
During a slim hole drilling operation, the drillpipe is often rotated at a much higher
rate than that during a conventional drilling operation. Due to the high rotational
speed together with the small annular size, the drillpipe rotation can result in a
significant increase in the annular friction pressure and the ECD. This effect must be
taken into account in the well control procedures. Otherwise, the weak formation
may be broken down when the drillpipe starts to rotate, or a kick influx be induced
when rotation stops (whilst still maintaining circulation).
(b) Kick Detection System

As described above, a small volume of influx can occupy a long section of the annulus
in a slim hole well and thus greatly reduce the bottom hole pressure. This will cause the
influx flow to intensify continuously. As the result, a kick can develop more rapidly in
a slim hole well than in a conventional well. Therefore it is important to be able to
detect a kick at a very early stage during a slim hole well operation.
Although the basic principles in the kick detection technique remain the same for slim
holes, the sensitivity of the detection system must be enhanced. The basic requirements
for a slim hole kick detection system are:
• The system must be able to detect a small volume of pit gain (typically 1 or 2 bbl).
This technique is most reliable when the influx flow is slow (low kick intensity).
• The system must be able to detect the difference between the mud flow in and out of
the well (typically 25 gpm). When the influx flow is fast, this technique is more
sensitive and reliable than the pit volume detection technique.
• The system must be able to detect a kick whilst making a connection. The high
annular friction pressure creates a high ECD during drilling ahead. So the most likely
time for a kick to occur will be when the pumps are shut down to make a connection.
6-111
Rev 1 March
March 1995
1995
(c) Well Kill Technique

As the annular friction pressure is small in a conventional well, it is used as a safety
factor during the well kill operation to ensure that the bottom hole pressure stays slightly
above the formation pressure. So the annular friction pressure is usually ignored in the
conventional well control calculations. In a slim hole well however, the annular friction
pressure may be so high that when used as a safety factor, it will break down the formation
at the weak point and cause lost circulation.
Therefore a decision that must be made when drilling a slim hole is whether
the␣ c onventional well kill technique can be applied. This can be made in the
following␣steps:
• Estimate the annular friction pressure at the slow circulating rates and add this to the
maximum static pressure (i.e. the sum of the mud hydrostatic pressure and the surface
casing pressure) at the weak point in the wellbore.
• Compare the total wellbore pressure with the breakdown pressure at the weak point.
Will lost circulation be likely?
• If lost circulation is unlikely, the conventional well control technique can be applied.
Otherwise the slim hole well control technique must to be used.
(d) Slim Hole Well Control Manual

This section briefly summarises the key differences in well control for slim holes. A BP
Slim Hole Well Control Manual is available that details the principles and procedures
for kick prevention, kick detection, well shut-in and the well kill technique for slim
holes. The manual can be obtained from the Drilling and Completions Branch, BP
Exploration, Sunbury.
6-112
Rev 1 March
March 1995 1995
Figure 6.38 Height of 10 bbl Gas Influx in Annulus
Figure 6.38a: Height of 10 bbl Gas Influx in Annulus
Gas Influx Annular Gas Influx Reduction In Friction
Volume 600 Size Height BHP (osi) Pressure
(bbl) (inch) (m) 1.0 sg Mud (psi)
Height of Gas Influx

Brine: 4.0 cPMud: PV=15/YP=10
1 0 400 8.5 x 5 66 94 8.5 x 5 13.8 31.2
(m)
6-113
10 6 x 4.5 199 283 6 x 4.5 41 128.6

523 m
200
10 3.5 x 2.5 523 743 3.5 x 2.5 68.9 254.3
199 m
0 66 m
8.5 x 5 6 x 4.5 3.5 x 2.5
Size of Annulus (inch)
Rev 1 March
March 1995
1995
March
Rev
Figure 6.39 Reduction in Bottom Hole Pressure Due

1 March
1995 1995
to 10 bbl Gas Influx

Figure 6.38b: Reduction in Bottom Hole Pressure
Due to 10 bbl Gas Influx
(1.0 SG Density Difference Between Mud and Gas)
800

Mud: PV=15/YP=10
Reduction in BHP
31.2 600
6-114
(psi)
128.6
400 743 psi
254.3
200
283 psi
94 psi
0
8.5 x 5 6 x 4.5 3.5 x 2.5
Size of Annulus (inch)
Height of Ga
(m)
Figure 6.40 Annular Friction Pressure Drop

Figure 6.38c: Annular Friction Pressure Drop
(Mud Annular Velocity = 150 ft/min)
300
254
250
Friction Pressure Drop

swab pressures
(psi/1000m)
Swab Pressure
200
(psi/1000m)
Brine: 4.0 cP sec/std 8.5/5 6/4.5 3.5/2.5
150
6-115
Mud: PV=15/YP=10 129 300 40.9 45.8 90

250 41 46 90.8
100
200 41.3 46.3 92.1
68.9
150 41.7 48.8 94.2
50 41
31.2 100 42.5 47.8 98.5
13.8 50 44.8 50.9 110
0
40 46.2 52.5 117.7
8.5 x 5 6 x 4.5 30 3.5 x 2.5
48.3 55.1 128.4
Size of Annulus (inch) 25 55 66.4 168
20 58.8 92.2 238
15 64.8 147 368
Rev 1 March
March 1995
1995
Reduction in
(psi)
Rev
March
Figure 6.41 Swab Pressure in a 1000 m Hole

1 March
1995 1995
Figure 6.38d: Swab Pressure in a 1000 m Hole

(Mud: 1.0 SG, PV=15 cP, YP=10 lbf/100sqft)
300
3.5"x2.5"
240

Swab Pressure
(psi/1000m)
3.5/2.5 1 8 08 . 5 / 5
6-116
90 6.0"x4.5"
90.8 120
92.1
94.2 8.5"x5.0"
60
98.5 Annulus
110
0
117.7
128.4 90 60 30 0
168 Trip Speed (sec/30m std.)
238
368
Volume 2 – Contents
Nomenclature
Abbreviations
1 THE ORIGINS OF FORMATION PRESSURE

Section Page
1.1 INTRODUCTION 1-1
1.2 NORMAL FORMATION PRESSURE 1-9
1.3 SUBNORMAL FORMATION PRESSURE 1-11
1.4 ABNORMALLY HIGH FORMATION PRESSURE 1-17
1.5 SHALLOW GAS 1-33
2 FORMATION PRESSURE EVALUATION

Section
2.2 FORMATION PRESSURE EVALUATION
DURING WELL PLANNING 2-5
WHILST DRILLING 2-25
AFTER DRILLING 2-69
March 1995
3 PRIMARY WELL CONTROL

Paragraph
1 GENERAL 3-2
2 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE 3-2
3 EQUIVALENT MUD WEIGHT, EMW 3-2
4 CIRCULATING PRESSURES AND ECD 3-4
5 CALCULATING THE CIRCULATING
PRESSURE LOSSES 3-7
6 SWAB AND SURGE PRESSURES 3-10
7 SWAB AND SURGE CALCULATIONS 3-12
4 FRACTURE GRADIENT
Paragraph
1 GENERAL 4-2
2 STRESSES IN THE EARTH 4-2
3 FRACTURE ORIENTATION 4-3
4 FRACTURE GRADIENT PREDICTION 4-4
5 DAINES’ METHOD OF FRACTURE
GRADIENT PREDICTION 4-4
6 AN EXAMPLE PRESSURE EVALUATION LOG 4-7
7 LEAK OFF TESTS 4-9
8 LEAK OFF TEST PROCEDURE 4-10
9 INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS 4-11
March 1995
5 BASICS OF WELL CONTROL

Paragraph
1 GENERAL 5-4
2 DISPLACING A KICK FROM THE HOLE 5-4
3 FACTORS THAT AFFECT WELLBORE PRESSURES 5-9
4 SUBSEA CONSIDERATIONS 5-20
5 SAFETY FACTORS 5-25
6 CALCULATING ANNULUS PRESSURE PROFILES 5-29
6 WELL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

Section
6.1 WELLHEADS 6-1
6.2 BLOWOUT PREVENTER EQUIPMENT 6-5
6.3 CONTROL SYSTEMS 6-43
6.4 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 6-57
6.5 EQUIPMENT TESTING 6-67
March 1995
NOMENCLATURE
A Cross sectional area in.2
a Constant –
An Total nozzle area in.2
b Constant –
c Constant –
C Annular capacity bbl/m
Cp Pipe capacity bbl/m
Ca Cuttings concentration %
CL Clinging constant –
CR Closing ratio –
D Depth m
Dshoe Shoe depth m
Dwp Depth of openhole weak point m
dbit Bit diameter in.
dh Hole diameter in.
dhc Hole/casing ID in.
do Pipe OD in.
di Pipe ID in.
dcut Average cuttings diameter in.
dc Drilling exponent (corrected) –
F Force lb
Fsh Shale formation factor –
FPG Formation Pressure Gradient SG
g Gravity acceleration –
G Pressure gradient psi/ft
psi/m
SG
Gi Influx gradient psi/ft
H Height m
Hi Height of influx m
Hp Height of plug m
ITT Interval Transit Time µsec/m
K Bulk modulus of elasticity
L Length m
λ Rotary exponent –
MR Migration rate m/hr
M Matrix stress psi
m Threshold bit weight lb
MW Mud weight SG
March 1995

N Rotary speed rpm
OPG Overburden Pressure Gradient SG
P Pressure psi/SG
(The units of subsurface pressure
may be either psi or SG)
∆P Adjustment pressure psi
Pa Annulus pressure psi
∆Pbit Bit pressure drop psi
Pcl Choke line pressure loss psi
Pdp Drillpipe pressure psi
Pf Formation pressure psi/SG
Pfrac Fracture pressure psi/SG
Pfc Final circulating pressure psi
Pi Hydrostatic pressure of influx psi
Pic Initial circulating pressure psi
Plo Leak off pressure psi/SG
Pmax Maximum allowable pressure
at the openhole weak point psi/SG
Poc Wide open choke pressure psi
Pp Pore pressure psi/SG
Pscr Slow circulating rate pressure psi
PV Plastic Viscosity cP
Q Flowrate gal/min
Qmud Mud flowrate gal/min
Qgas Gas flowrate gal/min
Re Reynolds number –
R Resistivity ohm-m
Rw Resistivity of water ohm-m
ROP Rate of Penetration m/hr
Shale factor meq/100g
S Overburden pressure psi
Sg Gas saturation Fractional
Sw Water saturation Fractional
t Time seconds
min
TR Transport Ratio –
T Temperature degrees
C, F, R
TD Total Depth m
TVD True Vertical Depth m
V Kick tolerance bbl
March 1995

V Volume bbl
cc
ml
l
v Velocity m/min
m/s
vmud Mud velocity m/min
vp Average pipe running speed m/min
vs Slip velocity m/min
W Weight gm
kg
lb
w Weight lb/ft
lb/bbl
SG
w Weight of pipe lb/ft
wb Baryte required for weighting up lb/bbl
wcut Average cuttings weight SG
WOB Weight on Bit lb
x Offset ()
YP Yield Point lb/100ft2
Z Compressibility factor –
µ Viscosity cP
ν Poissons’s Ratio –
σ’1 Maximum effective principle stress psi/SG
σ’t Tectonic stress psi/SG
Ø Porosity Fractional
Ø600 Fann reading lb/100ft2
β Tectonic stress coefficient –
ρ Density SG
ρb Bulk density SG
March 1995
ABBREVIATIONS
ASN Amplified Short Normal

BHA Bottomhole Assembly
BHC Borehole Compensated Tool
BHT Bottomhole Temperature
BGG Background Gas
BRT Below Rotary Table
CDP Common Depth Plot
CEG Cation Exchange Capacity
CG Connection Gas
DE Drilling Engineer
DIL Dual Induction Laterolog
DRG Designated Resident Geologist
DST Drillstem Test
ECD Equivalent Circulating Density
EMW Equivalent Mud Weight
ES Electrical Survey
FDC Formation Density Compensated Tool
FIT Formation Interval Tester
HCR High Closing Ratio
ID Internal Diameter
ITT Interval Transit Time
LMRP Lower Marine Riser Package
MWD Measurement while Drilling
OD Outside Diameter
PV Plastic Viscosity
RFT Repeat Formation Tester
RMS Root Mean Squared
ROP Rate of Penetration
SLS Long Spacing Sonic Tool
TD Total Depth
TG Trip Gas
UV Ultra Violet
WOB Weight of Bit
YP Yield Point
March 1995
1 THE ORIGINS OF FORMATION PRESSURE

Section Page
1.2 NORMAL FORMATION PRESSURE 1-9
1.3 SUBNORMAL FORMATION PRESSURE 1-11
1.4 ABNORMALLY HIGH FORMATION PRESSURE 1-17
1.5 SHALLOW GAS 1-33
March 1995
1.1 INTRODUCTION
Paragraph Page
1 General 1-2
2 Subsurface Pressures 1-2
3 Pressure Seals 1-6
4 Pressure Gradients 1-7
Illustrations
1.1 Composite Overburden Load for Normally
Compacted Formations 1-4
1.2 Schematic Diagram of Subsurface Pressure Concepts 1-5
Tables
1.1 Types of Formation Pressure Seals 1-6
1-1
March 1995
1 General
All formations penetrated whilst drilling a well exert pressures of varying magnitudes. To
gain an understanding of the origins of these pressures, it is neccesary to define and explain
certain subsurface pressure concepts. These are explained in this Section.
2 Subsurface Pressures
(a) Hydrostatic Pressure
Hydrostatic pressure is defined as the pressure due to the unit weight and vertical height
of a fluid column. The size and shape of the fluid column do not affect the magnitude of
this pressure. Mathematically:
P=rXgXD (1-1)
where P = hydrostatic pressure

ρ = average fluid density
g = gravitational acceleration
D = vertical height of fluid column
Relating this to drilling operations and commonly used oilfield units gives:
P = C X MW X D (1-2)
where P = hydrostatic pressure (psi)

MW = fluid density or mud weight (lb/gal or ppg)
D = vertical depth (ft)
C = conversion constant (psi/ft per lb/gal)
The constant, C, is necessary to allow the use of oilfield imperial units (psi, ft, lb/gal).
It has a value of 0.052 psi/ft per lb/gal and is derived as follows:
Using consistent units (pressure in lb/sq.ft, length in ft, density in lb/cu.ft) and rearranging
equation 1-2, C would be numerically equal to 1:
C= P = 1 lb/sq.ft/ft per lb/cu.ft

D X MW
Substituting the standard conversion constants of 144 sq.in/sq.ft and 7.48/gal/cu.ft gives:
C=1 X 7.48 lb/sq.ft X sq.ft/sq.in

144 ft X lb/cu.ft cu.ft/gal
C = 0.052 lb/sq.in
ft X lb/gal
C = 0.052 psi/ft per lb/gal
1-2
March 1995
So in imperial oilfield units (psi, ft, lb/gal), equation 1-2 becomes:
P = 0.052 X MW – D (1-3)
For the Company’s system of units (psi, SG, m):
P = C' X SG X D (1-4)
where SG = specific gravity of the fluid (no units)

D = vertical depth (metres)
C' = conversion constant (psi/m)
NOTE: Specific gravity (SG) is not a unit of density. It is the ratio of the density of
a␣fluid to the density of fresh water at a specified temperature, and hence has
no units.
The constant, C', has a value of 1.421 psi/m and is derived as follows:
To express equation 1-2 in terms of SG (as in equation 1-4), the constant C' must be
related to the density of fresh water, which is 8.33 lb/gal. Hence for fresh water:
C' = C X 8.33 psi/ft/lb/gal X lb/gal
C' = 0.052 X 8.33 psi/ft
C' = 0.433 psi/ft (1-5)
Expressing this in terms of metres using 3.2808 ft/m gives:
C' = 0.433 X 3.2808 psi/ft X ft/m
C' = 1.421 psi/m
Equation 1-4 thus becomes:
P = 1.421 X SG X D (1-6)
(b) Overburden Pressure

Overburden pressure is the result of the combined weight of the formation matrix (rock)
and the fluids (water, oil and gas) in the pore space overlying the formation of interest.
It was originally assumed that overburden pressure increases uniformly with depth. The
average density of a thick sedimentary sequence is equivalent to an SG of 2.3. Hence,
the overburden pressure (S) is given by:
S = 0.433 X SG X D (1-7)
where D = vertical depth (ft).
The overburden pressure gradient (OPG) is given by:
OPG = S = 0.433 X SG
D
OPG = 0.433 X 2.3 = 1.0 psi/ft
1-3
March 1995
Figure 1.1 Composite Overburden Load for Normally

Compacted Formations
1. Constant gradient 1.0psi/ft

2. Gulf of Mexico, Texas and Louisiana, USA
3. Santa Barbara Channel, California, USA
4. North Sea area
4 2 3 1
2
DEPTH 1000m
0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.05
OVERBURDEN GRADIENT psi/ft
WEOX02.063
1-4
March 1995
However, because the degree of compaction of sediments varies with depth, the overburden
pressure gradient is not constant. Worldwide experience indicates that the probable maximum
overburden gradient in clastic rocks (fragmental sedimentary rocks ie sandstone, shale) may
be as high as 1.35 psi/ft.
Onshore, with more compact sediments, the overburden pressure gradient may be assumed
to be close to 1 psi/ft. Offshore however, overburden gradients at shallow depths will be
much less than 1 psi/ft due to the effect of the depth of sea water and large thickness of
unconsolidated sediment. Figure 1.1 shows average overburden gradient for various areas.
PRESSURE
NO
RM
AL
HY
DR
O
OS
VE
R
DEPTH
TA
B
U
TIC
R
D
EN
GR
G
R
AD
A
D
IE
IEN
N
T
T
SUBNORMAL
PRESSURES
(Subpressures)
ABNORMALLY
HIGH PRESSURES
(Surpressures)
Formation
Pressure, Pf Matrix Stress, M
Overburden Pressure, S = Pf + M
WEOX02.064
Figure 1.2 Schematic Diagram of Subsurface

Pressure Concepts
1-5
March 1995
(c) Pore Pressure

Pore pressure is the pressure acting on the fluids contained in the pore space of the rock.
This is the strict meaning of what is generally referred to as formation pressure. Formation
pressure is related to overburden pressure as follows:
S = Pf + M (1-8)
where S = overburden pressure (total vertical stress)

Pf = formation pressure (pore pressure)
M = grain-to-grain pressure (matrix stress)
All sedimentary rocks have porosity to some extent. If the pore spaces of the rocks are
freely connected from surface, then the formation pressure at any depth will be equal to
the hydrostatic pressure exerted by the fluid occupying the pore spaces. In this ‘normal’
pressure situation, the matrix stress (grain-to-grain contact pressure) supports the
overburden load. Any departure from this situation will give rise to ‘abnormal’ formation
pressures. Formation pressures less than hydrostatic are called subnormal (subpressures)
and formation pressures greater than hydrostatic are termed abnormally high formation
pressures (surpressures) (See Figure 1.2).
3 Pressure Seals
For abnormal pressures to exist, there must be a permeability barrier which acts as a pressure
seal. This seal restricts or prevents the movement of pore fluids and thus separates normally
pressured formations from abnormally pressured formations.
The origins of a pressure seal may be physical, chemical or a combination of the two. The
types of formation pressure seals are listed below in Table 1.1.
Type of Seal Nature of Seal Examples
Vertical Massive siltstones Gulf Coast, USA,

Shales Zechstein in North Germany,
Massive salts North Sea, Middle East,
Anhydrite USA, USSR.
Gypsum
Limestone, marl, chalk
Dolomite
Transverse Faults Worldwide

Salt and shale diapirs
Combination Worldwide
Table 1.1 Types of Formation Pressure Seals
1-6
March 1995
4 Pressure Gradients
As indicated previously in Paragraph 2(b) under ‘Overburden Pressure’, it is common
practice to express subsurface pressures in terms of pressure gradients, or pressure per unit
depth, psi/ft or psi/m. It should be realised that densities such as mud weights in lb/gal
or␣SG, also express pressure gradients. These units can easily be converted to psi/ft or psi/m
using the conversion constants derived earlier in Paragraph 2(a). Rearranging equation
1-3 gives:
PG = P = 0.052 X MW (1-9)
D
where PG = pressure gradient (psi/ft) at depth D (ft), and rearranging equation 1-6 gives:
PG = P = 1.421 X SG (1-10)
D
where PG = pressure gradient (psi/m) at depth D (m).
Or,
PG = P = 0.433 X SG (1-11)
D
where PG = pressure gradient (psi/ft) at depth D (ft).
By converting subsurface pressures to gradients relative to a fixed datum, it is possible to

directly compare formation pressures, fracture pressures, overburden pressures, mud weights
and equivalent circulating densities (ECDs) on the same basis (See Chapter 3). The datum
chosen is usually sea/ground level for initial planning purposes. Once a rig has been allocated
for the well, then the datum chosen for final well planning and whilst drilling is the rotary
table level (since mud hydrostatic pressure starts from just below this level).
During drilling operations, it is standard practice to express all pressure gradients in terms
of equivalent mud weight (EMW) either in lb/gal or SG. This allows direct comparison of
downhole pressures to the weight (density) of the mud in use. EMWs can be calculated
from rearrangements of equations 1-9 to 1-11:
EMW (lb/gal) = P (psi) (1-12)

0.052 X D (ft)
EMW (SG) = P (psi) (1-13)

1.421 X D (m)
EMW (SG) = P (psi) (1-14)

0.433 X D (ft)
NOTE: From this point on ppg will be used instead of lb/gal as the abbreviated version
of pounds per gallon.
Example: For a formation pressure of 5970 psi at 3500m BRT, what is the
formation␣pressure gradient in psi/ft? What is the equivalent mud weight
in ppg and SG?
1-7
March 1995
Formation pressure gradient, FPG = pressure

depth
FPG = 5970 = 0.52 psi/ft

3500 X 3.2808
Equivalent mud weight from equation 1-12
EMW = 5970 (ppg)

0.052 X 3500 X 3.2808
EMW = 10.0 ppg
From equation 1-13
EMW = 5970 = 1.20 SG

1.421 X 3500
1-8
March 1995
1.2 NORMAL FORMATION PRESSURE

Paragraph Page
1 General 1-10
2 Magnitude and Examples 1-10
Tables
1.2 Average Normal Formation Pressure Gradients 1-10
1-9
March 1995
1 General
Normal formation pressure is equal to the hydrostatic pressure of water extending from the
surface to the subsurface formation. Thus, the normal formation pressure gradient in any
area will be equal to the hydrostatic pressure gradient of the water occupying the pore spaces
of the subsurface formations in that area.
2 Magnitude and Examples

The magnitude of the hydrostatic pressure gradient is affected by the concentration of
dissolved solids (salts) and gases in the formation water. Increasing the dissolved solids
(higher salt concentration) increases the formation pressure gradient whilst an increase in
the level of gases in solution will decrease the pressure gradient.
For example, formation water with a salinity of 80,000 ppm sodium chloride (salt) at a
temperature of 25°C, has a pressure gradient of 0.465 psi/ft. Freshwater (zero salinity) has
a pressure gradient of 0.433 psi/ft.
Temperature also has an effect as hydrostatic pressure gradients will decrease at higher
temperatures due to fluid expansion.
In formations deposited in an offshore environment, formation water density may vary from
slightly saline (1.02 SG, 0.44 psi/ft) to saturated saline (1.19 SG, 0.515 psi/ft). Salinity
varies with depth and formation type. Therefore, the average value of normal formation
pressure gradient may not be valid for all depths. For instance, it is possible that local
normal pressure gradients as high as 0.515 psi/ft may exist in formations adjacent to salt
formations where the formation water is completely salt saturated.
The following table gives examples of the magnitude of the normal formation pressure
gradient for various areas. However, in the absence of accurate data, 0.465 psi/ft is often
taken to be the normal pressure gradient.
Formation Water Pressure Gradient Example Area

(psi/ft) (SG)
Fresh water 0.433 1.00 Rocky Mountains and

Mid-continent, USA
Brackish water 0.438 1.01
Salt water 0.442 1.02 Most sedimentary basins

worldwide
Salt water 0.452 1.04 North Sea, South

China Sea
Salt water 0.465 1.07 Gulf of Mexico, USA
Salt water 0.478 1.10 Some areas of Gulf

of Mexico
Table 1.2 Average Normal Formation Pressure Gradients
1-10
March 1995
1.3 SUBNORMAL FORMATION PRESSURE

Paragraph Page
1 General 1-12
2 Causes of Subnormal Formation Pressure 1-12
3 Magnitude of Subnormal Formation Pressures 1-15
4 Summary 1-16
Illustrations
1.3 Relationship between Piezometric Surface and
Ground Level for an Aquifer System 1-13
1.4 Temperature-pressure-density diagram for Water
illustrating Subnormal Pressures caused by Cooling
an Isolated Fluid 1-14
1.5 Formation Foreshortening 1-15
1-11
March 1995
1 General
Subnormal formation pressure is defined as any formation pressure that is less than the
corresponding pore fluid hydrostatic pressure. A subnormal formation pressure gradient is
thus any gradient less than the pore fluid hydrostatic gradient.
Subnormal formation pressures are often termed subpressures.
2 Causes of Subnormal Formation Pressure

Subnormal formation pressures occur less frequently than abnormally high formation
pressures. They may have natural causes related to the stratigraphic, tectonic and geochemical
history of an area, or may be caused artificially by producing reservoir fluids.
(a) Depleted Reservoirs

Producing large volumes of reservoir fluids causes a decline in pore fluid pressure unless
compensated for by a strong water drive. Depleted reservoirs may thus have pore
pressures less than hydrostatic.
For example, the original reservoir formation pressure in BP’s Forties Field was 3215␣psi
at a depth of 2175m subsea. This equates to a formation pressure gradient of 0.451␣psi/ft,
which is the normal hydrostatic gradient. After twelve years production from the field
and even with pressure boosting by water injection, the reservoir formation pressure
dropped to approximately 2750 psi. This gives a subnormal pressure gradient of
0.385␣psi/ft.
(b) Piezometric Surface

A piezometric or potentiometric surface is an imaginary surface that represents the static
head of ground water and is defined by the level to which the ground water will rise in
a well. For example, the water table is a particular potentiometric surface.
In very arid areas such as the Middle East, the water table may be deep. The hydrostatic
pressure gradient commences at the water table giving a subnormal pressure gradient
from the surface.
A piezometric surface is dependent on the structural relief of a formation and can result
in subnormal or abnormally high formation pressures. The piezometric surface for an
aquifer system is shown in Figure 1.3.
Drilling in mountainous areas may thus encounter subnormal pressure gradients due to
the surface elevation being higher than the water table elevation or formation water
potentiometric surface.
(c) Temperature Reduction

A reduction in subsurface temperature will reduce the pore pressure in an isolated fluid
system where the pore volumes (and thus fluid density) remains constant. This may
cause subnormal pressures.
1-12
March 1995
ABNORMALLY HIGH SUBNORMAL

INTAKE PRESSURES PRESSURES
AREA
PIEZOMETRIC GROUND
SURFACE LEVEL
HYDROSTATIC
HEAD
AQUIFER
DISCHARGE
AREA
RESERVOIRS
WEOX02.065
Figure 1.3 Relationship between Piezometric Surface

and Ground Level for an Aquifer System
The temperature-pressure-density diagram for water shown in Figure 1.4 illustrates this
concept.
Both temperature and pressure are dependent on depth. For a normal fluid (non-isolated)
which is allowed to expand and contract freely, a temperature reduction associated with
a depth change would follow the path indicated (which in this example corresponds to a
temperature gradient of 2.5°C/100m). A lower pressure would result but it would still
be equal to the normal hydrostatic pressure. In an isolated fluid system (ie/completely
sealed shales), cooling must take place along a constant density path as shown. The
pressure corresponding to the lower temperature is thus subnormal.
If gas is present in the pores, the effects of temperature reduction will be greater as gas
pressure is much more sensitive to temperature changes than water.
Mechanisms which may create a reduction in subsurface temperature include uplift,

erosion or a combination of uplift and erosion.
(d) Decompressional Expansion

Decompressional expansion is the term used to describe the combined effects of uplift
and erosion. In shales, uplift and overburden removal by erosion may cause a reduction
in pore fluid pressure. This reduction may be due to an increase in pore volume and
removal of free water from the pore space by adsorption in clay minerals as the
overburden pressure decreases. Water adsorption due to mineral transformations (eg/illite
to montmorillonite) may also occur due to the decrease in temperature. (This is the
reverse of ‘Clay diagenesis’ as described in Section 1.4 of this Chapter.)
1-13
March 1995
Figure 1.4 Temperature-pressure-density diagram for

Water illustrating Subnormal Pressures
caused by Cooling an Isolated Fluid
1 = Initial conditions at depth 1
2 = Conditions at depth 2
11
1.0gm/cc
0.962
0.933
0.909
0.877
0.98
DENSITY
10
m
100
°C/
8 2.5
7
PRESSURE 1000psi
PRESSURE AT
DEPTH 1 1
5
PRESSURE AT DEPTH 2
2
FOR NORMAL FLUIDS
4
NORMAL ISOLATED
FLUIDS FLUIDS
1 PRESSURE AT DEPTH 2
2
FOR ISOLATED FLUIDS
T2 T1
0 50 100 150 200 250

TEMPERATURE °C
WEOX02.066
1-14
March 1995
OVERPRESSURED
A
SUBNORMAL
BED A
PRESSURE
P BED B P P B P OVERPRESSURED
BED C
WEOX02.067
Figure 1.5 Formation Foreshortening
This pressure reduction may be sufficient to cause subnormal pressures which would be
transmitted to any reservoir rocks associated with the shales.
(e) Formation Foreshortening

This is a tectonic compression mechanism. It is suggested that during a lateral
compression process acting on sedimentary beds, upwarping of the upper beds and
downwarping of the lower beds may occur. The intermediate beds must expand to fill
the voids left by this process, as shown in Figure 1.5. It is then possible for more
competent intermediate beds, such as shales, to have subnormal pressures due to the
increase in pore volume.
This mechanism is thought to occur in areas of recent tectonic activity, such as along
the flanks of the Rocky Mountains.
(f) Osmosis
Osmosis is the spontaneous flow of water from a more dilute to a more concentrated
solution when the two are separated by a semi-permeable membrane.
In the subsurface environment, clays and clayey siltstones can act as semi-permeable
membranes. If salinity differences exist between the fluids in the sediments on either
side of clay beds, then osmotic flow can occur. If the flow is from a closed volume, the
pressure will decrease and may become subnormal. Likewise, if the flow is into a closed
volume, abnormally high pressures may result.
Osmosis is discussed in more detail in Section 1.4 of this Chapter.
1-15
March 1995
3 Magnitude of Subnormal Formation Pressures

By definition, subnormal formation pressures must be lower than the normal hydrostatic
pressure for the location. In terms of pressure gradients, subnormal pressures will have
gradients less than normal (0.433 to 0.465 psi/ft depending on the particular area).
As previously discussed, the Forties Field reservoir is now subnormally pressured at

0.385␣psi/ft. Subnormal gradients of 0.36 to 0.39 psi/ft have been quoted for areas of the
Texas Panhandle (NW Texas) with one case as low as about 0.23 psi/ft thought to be the
result of a low piezometric surface.
One of the lowest formation pressure gradients encountered is 0.188 psi/ft which was recorded
in the Keyes gas field in Oklahoma.
4 Summary
The various suggested causes of subnormal formation pressures can be classed as ‘artifically
caused’ or ‘naturally caused’.
‘Depleted reservoirs’ and ‘piezometric surface’ (where pressure regime depends on the
surface location of the well) may be classed as artificial causes, since these subnormal
pressures do not originate in the subsurface formation, but are externally influenced.
Conversely, the other causes of subnormal pressure discussed have origins in the formations
themselves and can be thought of as being naturally caused. It is unlikely that any one of
these processes may be the sole cause of subnormal pressures in any particular area. It is
probable that a number of processes have contributed to produce the subnormal pressures,
particularly in the light of the dependency of the processes on depth and temperature.
1-16
March 1995
1.4 ABNORMALLY HIGH

FORMATION PRESSURE
Paragraph Page
1 General 1-18
2 Causes of Abnormally High Formation Pressure 1-18
3 Magnitude of Abnormally High Formation Pressures 1-30
4 Summary 1-31
Illustrations
1.6 Typical Formation Pressures caused by
Compaction Disequilibrium 1-19
1.7 Interlayer Water and Cations between Clay Platelets 1-20
1.8 Schematic of Reaction of Montmorillonite to Illite 1-21
1.9 Water Distribution Curves for Shale Dehydration 1-23
1.10 Diagenetic Stages in the alteration of Montmorillonite to Illite 1-23
1.11 Abnormal Formation Pressures caused by
Tectonic Compressional Folding 1-24
1.12 Abnormal Pressure Distribution around a Piercement
Salt Dome 1-26
1.13 Schematic Diagram of a Mud Volcano 1-26
1.14 Abnormally High Pressure due to Reservoir Structure 1-28
1.15 Schematic Diagram illustrating Osmotic Flow 1-30
1-17
March 1995
1 General
Abnormally high formation pressure is defined as any formation pressure that is greater
than the hydrostatic pressure of the water occupying the formation pore spaces. Abnormally
high formation pressure gradients are thus any formation pressure gradient higher than the
pore fluid hydrostatic pressure gradient.
Abnormally high formation pressures are also termed surpressures, overpressures and
sometimes geopressures. More often, they are simply called abnormal pressures.
2 Causes of Abnormally High

Formation Pressure
Abnormally high formation pressures are found worldwide in formations ranging in age␣from
the Pleistocene age (approximately 1 million years) to the Cambrian age (500 to 600␣million
years). They may occur at depths as shallow as only a few hundred feet or exceeding 20,000␣ft
(6100m) and may be present in shale/sand sequences and/or massive evaporite-carbonate
sequences.
The causes of abnormally high formation pressures are related to a combination of geological,
physical, geochemical and mechanical processes, as discussed in the following paragraphs.
(a) Depositional Causes

• Compaction Disequilibrium
Compaction disequilibrium is also known as ‘undercompaction’ or ‘sedimentary

loading’. It is the process whereby abnormal formation pressures are caused by a
disruption in the balance between the rate of sedimentation of clays and the rate of
expulsion of the pore fluids, as the clays compact with burial.
Freshly deposited clays have adsorbed water layers and the solid clay particles do
not have direct physical contact. The pore pressure is hydrostatic as the pore fluid is
continuous with the overlying sea water. As sedimentation proceeds, a gradual
compaction occurs and as the clay particles are pressed closer together, pore water is
expelled. The clay sediment has high porosity and is permeable in this initial state.
So as long as the expelled water can escape to surface or through a porous sand
layer, pore pressures will remain hydrostatic.
For this equilibrium to be maintained, a balance is required between the rate of

sedimentation and burial, and the rate of expulsion and removal of pore fluids. If the
rate of sedimentation is very slow, then hydrostatic pressures will be maintained.
The initial porosity of clays is 60 to 90%, depending on the type of clay, whereas
compacted clay/shale has a porosity of less than 15%. Thus a vast amount of water
must be removed from clay sediments during burial. If the equilibrium between rate
of sedimentation and rate of fluid expulsion is disrupted, such that fluid removal is
impeded, then an increase in pore pressure will result. This could occur either by an
increase in the rate of sedimentation or by a reduction in the rate of fluid removal
(caused by a reduction in permeability or by the deposition of a permeability barrier
such as limestone).
1-18
March 1995
The ‘excess’ pore fluids help support the increasing overburden load, thereby
retarding compaction further, and resulting in abnormally high pressured formations.
Abnormal pressures resulting from this process will have a gradient no greater than
the overburden gradient. This is because these pressures are produced by the excess
overburden load being supported by the pore fluids.
If beds of permeable sandstone that are hydraulically connected to zones of lower

fluid pressure are present within an overpressured zone, adjacent clays will dewater
to the sand bed. The adjacent clays will compact and decrease in permeability and
porosity thus restricting further dewatering of the clay beds. The local pressure
gradient across these clay/sand boundaries will be significantly higher than the overall
pressure gradient, but are caused purely by ‘leakage’ from the clays to the sand.
Figure 1.6 illustrates typical overpressures caused by compaction disequilibrium.
Areas in which abnormal formation pressures associated with high sedimentation

rates have been encountered include the North Sea, the Gulf of Mexico, and the Gulf
of Papua.
Hydrostatic pore pressure
Overburden pressure
Actual formation pressure
Very high local pressure gradient

adjacent to permeable zones due
to low permeability of the clays
CLAY
DEPTH
Overall formation pressure

SAND parallels the overburden
pressure gradient, but may
CLAY not reach extrapolated
pressure gradient due to
leakage from the clays
SAND
Extrapolated initial
CLAY formation pressure
(parallel to overburden
pressure gradient)
SAND
Overpressured sandstone
(hydrostatic gradient
within sandstone)
CLAY
SAND
PRESSURE
WEOX02.068
Figure 1.6 Typical Formation Pressures caused by

Compaction Disequilibrium
1-19
March 1995
• Rock Salt Deposition
Continuous rock salt deposition over large areas can cause abnormal pressures that
may approach overburden pressure. Salt is totally impermeable to fluids and behaves
plastically at relatively low temperatures and pressures, thereby exerting pressures
equal to the overburden load in all directions. The fluids in the underlying formations
can not escape as there is no communication to the surface and thus the formations
become overpressured.
Massive rock salt deposits are commonly found in the southern North Sea with
abnormally high formation pressures sometimes being encountered in formations
below or within these massive salts. For instance, one BP southern North Sea well
required mud weights up to 1.94 SG (0.84 psi/ft) to control a saturated salt water
flow from an anhydrite formation at the boundary between the Z2 and Z3 Units of
the Zechstein halite formation.
(b) Diagenesis
Diagenesis is the alteration of sediments and their constituent minerals during burial
after deposition. Diagenetic processes include the formation of new minerals, the
redistribution and recrystallisation of the substances within the sediments, and
lithification (sediments turning into rocks).
Negative Charge
CLAY SHEET Imbalance
H H H H
H H H H
Na + H H
O 1 or 2
O O O
O O Layers of
H H H Adsorbed
H Water
H O H
Na +
Ca + + About 4
O Layers of
O Ca + + Structured
H
Water
H H O
O O
Na + O
H H
H H H H
H
O O O
O O
Ca + +
H H H H H H H H H H
CLAY SHEET
WEOX02.069
Figure 1.7 Interlayer Water and Cations between

Clay Platelets
1-20
March 1995
• Clay Diagenesis
The major constituents of marine shales are bentonitic clays of which montmorillonite
is by far the most common. Montmorillonite has a swelling (expanded) lattice
structure and contains approximately 70 to 85% water at initial burial in sea floor
sediments. This water is present in the form of at least four layers of molecules
adsorbed between clay platelets and up to ten layers held on the outside of the platelets.
The clay platelets have a negative charge imbalance due to their structure. This causes
the adsorption of interlayer water together with various cations (positively charged
ions), principally sodium (Na +) and calcium (Ca++). The interlayer water is shown
schematically in Figure 1.7.
The environment at this initial burial stage would be alkaline, rich in calcium and
magnesium (and of course sodium from salt water), but poor in potassium.
After further burial, compaction expels most of the free pore water (non-adsorbed)
and the water content of the sediment is reduced to about 30%. As burial progresses
and the temperature increases, eventually all but the last layer of structured (adsorbed)
water will be desorbed to the pore spaces. This causes the clay lattice to collapse and
with the availability of potassium, montmorillonite diagenesis to illite occurs. This
reaction is shown schematically in Figure 1.8. It involves adsorption of potassium at
the interlayer and surface sites as well as the release of a small amount of silica.
O O
M A 3 LAYER SHEET
O O
A A
Add K
Substitute K INTERLAYER SITES
W + W W + W
Al for Si
W W W W W and Mg A
+ W Charge
W W W W O
Satisfied
A 3 LAYER SHEET
A
O
O
A
A
O ILLITE
Ky AL4 (Si8-y, Aly) O20 (OH)4
= Oxygen M = Magnesium
MONTMORILLONITE
= Silicon W = Water
(Al4-x Mgx)(Si8-y, Aly) O20 (OH)4
Negatively charged plates O = Hydroxyl (OH) K = Potassium
satisfied by interlayer
water and cation adsorption A = Aluminium + = Cation eg Ca ++, Na+
WEOX02.070
Figure 1.8 Schematic of Reaction of Montmorillonite to Illite
1-21
March 1995
The reaction is temperature (and hence depth) dependent. Initial dehydration may
occur at temperatures as low as 6°C. Most of the interlayer water is liberated between
100°C and 250°C, but some of the more structured water remains to about 300°C.
Water distribution curves showing the various shale dehydration stages are shown in
Figure 1.9.
At the second dehydration stage (See Figure 1.9), the water that is released expands
due to a density reduction from the highly structured phase to the pore phase. Thus
abnormally high pressures may result, particularly if the rate of expulsion of free
pore water from the clay body is less than the rate of water release from the clay
interlayers. Figure 1.10 is a schematic diagram showing the stages of alteration of
montmorillonite to illite.
If water escape from the clay body is restricted, the silica released in the diagenetic
process will precipitate in the pore spaces. This may further reduce permeability and
so assist in developing abnormal pressures.
• Sulphate Diagenesis
Diagenesis in sulphate formations (gypsum, anhydrite) may cause abnormal pressures

by creating permeability barriers, a fluid source and/or a rock volume change.
Carbonate reservoirs are commonly overlain by evaporite sections (salt, anhydrite).
Anhydrite (calcium sulphate, CaSO4) is formed by the dehydration of gypsum

(CaSO4.2 H 2O) which liberates large amounts of water. There is a 30% to 40%
shrinkage in formation thickness associated with this process. If this occurs at depth
and in the presence of a permeability barrier, abnormal formation pressures may
result. (The anhydrite itself is totally impermeable and may act as a vertical
permeability barrier.)
This process may have been the cause of the high pressure salt water flow discussed
under ‘Rock Salt Deposition’ in (a) ‘Depositional Causes’. Here, a mud weight of
1.94 SG (0.84 psi/ft) was required to control a saturated salt water flow from an
anhydrite section sandwiched between massive salt sections.
The process is, however, reversible. Anhydrite can take on water to form gypsum.
There is an intermediate semi-hydrate stage (CaSO4.1/2 H2O) in which the rock volume
would increase by 15 to 25%. If such rehydration was to occur at depth in a closed
system, very high abnormal pressures could be developed.
• Diagenesis of Volcanic Ash
Diagenesis of volcanic ash results in three main products: clay minerals, methane
and carbon dioxide. Thus formations that originally contained large amounts of
volcanic ash may become overpressured due to the production of gases from the
volcanic ash.
Areas in which this process has occurred include the NW coast of the USA and areas
of the South China Sea region (Java, etc).
1-22
March 1995
WATER ESCAPE CURVE WATER CONTENT OF SHALES

(SCHEMATIC)
WATER AVAILABLE % WATER

FOR MIGRATION
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 SEDIMENT SURFACE
PORE WATER
PORE AND
INTERLAYER WATER
EXPULSION
1st DEHYDRATION
BURIAL DEPTH
(SCHEMATIC)
AND LATTICE WATER

STABILITY ZONE
LATTICE WATER
STABILITY ZONE
INTERLAYER
WATER
2nd INTERLAYER WATER

DEHYD'N ISOPLETH
STAGE
3rd DEHYDRATION
DEEP BURIAL
STAGE
WATER LOSS
'NO MIGRATION LEVEL'
WEOX02.071
Figure 1.9 Water Distribution Curves for Shale Dehydration
STAGE 1
Before diagenesis
MOST WATER
(about 3000 – 6000ft,
IS BOUND WATER
below 60°C)
porosity = 20 to 35%
clay is LOW POROSITY
70% montmorillonite
10 mixed layer
20% other
STAGE 2
FREE PORE WATER
During alteration FROM DESORBED
to illite (100 – 200°C) INTERLAYER WATER
high porosity = 30 to 40%
clay is CLAY RELEASES
20% montmorillonite SILICA, ADSORBS
60% illite POTASSIUM
20% other
NOTE PARTICLE COLLAPSE

STAGE 3
LOW POROSITY
After diagenesis and VERY LITTLE
compaction BOUND WATER
(over 200°C)
porosity = 10 to 20%
clay is
70% illite VOLUME LOST
10% montmorillonite
20% other
WEOX02.072
Figure 1.10 Diagenetic Stages in the alteration

of Montmorillonite to Illite
1-23
March 1995
(c) Tectonic Causes

• Compressional Folding
Tectonic compression is a compacting force that is applied horizontally in subsurface

formations. In normal pressure environments, clays compact and dewater in
equilibrium with increasing overburden pressures. However, in a tectonic
environment, the additional horizontal compacting force (tectonic stress) squeezes
the clays laterally. If conditions are such that the pore fluids can still escape, then
pore fluid pressures will remain normal. However, it is more likely that the increase
in stress will cause disequilibrium. The pore fluids will not be able to escape at a
rate equal to the reduction in pore volume, resulting in an increase in pore pressure.
Abnormal pressure distribution within a series of compressional folds is shown in

Figure 1.11. Abnormally high pressures occur initially within the hinge portion of
each compressional fold in a thick clay sequence.
EXTENSION
EXTENSION
COMPRESSION COMPRESSION
COMPRESSION
COMPRESSION
AMOUNT OF
SHORTENING
POSSIBLE
OVERPRESSURED
ZONES
WEOX02.073
Figure 1.11 Abnormal Formation Pressures caused by

Tectonic Compressional Folding
An example of overpressures associated with steep tectonic folding is the oilfields
of Southern Iran where local pressure gradients as high as 1.00 psi/ft can be
encountered. Also, one of the highest formation pressures reported of 1.3 psi/ft was
recorded in the tectonically folded Himalayan foothills in Pakistan.
1-24
March 1995
• Faulting
Faults may cause abnormally high formation pressures in the following ways:
– Slippage of formations along a fault may bring a permeable formation, eg a sand

bed, laterally against an impermeable formation such as a clay. Thus, the flow of
pore fluids through the permeable zone will be inhibited and abnormally high
formation pressures may result.
– Non-sealing faults may transmit fluids from a deeper permeable formation to

a␣ s hallower formation. If this shallower formation is sealed, then it will
be␣ p ressured up by the deeper formation. (See ‘Char ged Formations’ in (d)
‘Structural Courses’).
• Uplift
If a normally pressured formation is suddently uplifted, abnormally high pressures

may be generated. Uplift is not a unique cause of abnormal pressure as the process
that uplifts a buried formation will also uplift the overburden. For abnormal pressures
to occur, there must be a concurrent geological process that reduces the relief between
the buried formation and the surface. Such processes may be piercement salt domes,
shale diapirs, faulting or erosion.
Note that uplift and erosion may also cause subnormal formation pressures, depending
on the type of formation and the amount of cooling that the formation undergoes.
(See ‘Temperature Reduction’ and ‘Decompressional Expansion’ in Section
1.3 of this Chapter.)
• Salt Diapirism
Diapirism is the piercement of a formation by a less dense underlying formation.

Salt will behave plastically at elevated temperatures and pressures and due to its
lower density, will move upwards to form piercement salt domes in overlying
formations. This upward movement disturbs the normal layering of sediments and
overpressures can often occur due to the associated faulting and folding action.
Additionally, the salt may act as an impermeable seal and inhibit lateral dewatering
of clays thereby further contributing to the generation of abnormal pressures.
The typical distribution of abnormal pressure zones around a piercement salt dome
is shown in Figure 1.12.
Abnormally high formation pressures associated with salt domes have been
encountered worldwide, both onshore and offshore.
• Shale Diapirism
As with salt diapirism, this mechanism refers to the upward movement of a less
dense plastic formation. In this case, high porosity (high water content) shales
behave␣plastically causing the formation of shale diapirs called ‘mud volcanoes’
(See Figure 1.13).
In practice, wherever mud volcanoes occur, there has been rapid Tertiary and/or late
Cretaceous sedimentation. This rapidly loads underlying shales of low shear strength
causing the formation of mud volcanoes. Formation pressures are abnormally high.
For example, pressure gradients of 0.9 psi/ft have been measured around mud
volcanoes on Aspsheron Peninsula in Azerbaidzhan, USSR.
1-25
March 1995
SAND BASIN WARD
HORIZON A
A HORIZON
B
C
B
C
D
E D
SALT ABNORMAL
PRESSURE
WEOX02.074
Figure 1.12 Abnormal Pressure Distribution around a

Piercement Salt Dome
MUD VOLCANO
UPPER MIOCENE
SEA LEVEL
MIDDLE MIOCENE
LOWER MIOCENE 5000ft
0 Mile 1
WEOX02.075
Figure 1.13 Schematic Diagram of a Mud Volcano
1-26
March 1995
• Earthquakes
Earthquakes may cause compression in subsurface formations which causes a sudden

increase in pore fluid pressures. For example, the 1953 earthquake in California
caused production in the nearby Mountain View oil field to double over a period of
several weeks after the earthquake.
(d) Structural Causes

• Piezometric Surface
This is defined in Section 1.3. A regionally high piezometric surface, such as that
caused by artesian water systems, will result in abnormally high pressures as shown
in Figure 1.3. Artesian systems require a porous and permeable aquifer sandwiched
between impermeable beds. The aquifer intake area must be high enough for the
abnormal pressure to be caused by the hydrostatic head.
Examples of areas where abnormally high pressures are caused by artesian systems
are the Artesian Basin in Florida and the Great Artesian Basin in Queensland,
Australia.
• Reservoir Structure
In sealed reservoir formations containing fluids of differing densities (ie water, oil,
gas), formation pressures which are normal for the deepest part of the zone will be
transmitted to the shallower end where they will cause abnormally high pressures.
Examples of such formation are lenticular reservoirs, dipping formations and
anticlines.
Abnormal formation pressures will only be generated if fluids less dense than the
pore water are present, such as in oil/gas reservoirs. The pressure at the top of a fluid
zone is given by:
P fT = PfB – [Gf X (DB X D T)] (1-15)
where P fT = formation pressure at top of zone (psi)

P fB = formation pressure at bottom of zone (psi)
Gf = pressure gradient of fluid in zone (psi/ft or psi/m)
DT = vertical depth to top of zone (ft or m)
DB = vertical depth to bottom of zone (ft or m)
In the example shown in Figure 1.14, the formation pressure at the oil/water contact
is normal hydrostatic pressure with a gradient of 0.452 psi/ft. Using equation 1-15,
the pressure at the gas/oil contact is 4850 psi which gives an abnormally high
formation pressure gradient of 0.462 psi/ft. Similarly, the pressure at the top of the
reservoir is 4784 psi giving an abnormal gradient of 0.486 psi/ft.
Obviously, in very large structures, especially in gas/water systems with long gas
columns, the overpressures developed at the top of the gas column may be very
high. Indeed one documented example in Iran quotes a pressure gradient of 0.9 psi/ft
(approaching overburden gradient) at a depth of only 640 ft (195m).
1-27
March 1995
DEPTH
At top of reservoir:
CAP ROCK Pf = 4850 – 0.1 x
(10500 – 9842)
TOP OF Pf = 4784psi
.
GAS CAP . . FPG = 4784 = 0.486psi/ft
D = 3000m GAS 9842
(D = 9842ft) (Gf = 0.1psi/ft) At gas/oil contact:
GAS/OIL Pf = 5116 – 0.325 x
CONTACT (11319 – 10500)
D = 3200m OIL
Pf = 4850psi
(D = 10500ft) (Gf = 0.325psi/ft) .
. . FPG = 4850 = 0.462psi/ft
10500
OIL/WATER
CONTACT At oil/water contact:
D = 3450m NORMAL HYDROSTATIC
WATER PRESSURE GRADIENT OF
(D = 11319ft) (Gf = 0.452psi/ft) 0.452psi/ft
Pf = 11319 x 0.452
Pf = 5116psi
WEOX02.076
Figure 1.14 Abnormally High Pressure due to

Reservoir Structure
• Charged Formations
Normally pressured, or low pressured porous and permeable formations at shallow

depths, may be pressured up by communication with deeper higher pressured
formations. This ‘charging’ of the shallower formations may take place by fluid
communication along non-sealing faults behind casing in old wells, or wells with
faulty cement jobs, and whilst drilling a sequence of permeable formations with
very large differences in pore fluid pressures (causing recharge salt water flows).
Abnormal pressures caused by recharge can be very high, especially if gas is the
medium that transmits the pressure (same mechanics as gas reservoir in ‘Reservoir
Structure’, but over greater depth differences). Mud weights as high as 19 ppg
(2.28␣SG, 0.988 psi/ft) have been quoted as sometimes required for drilling through
shallow charged zones.
(e) Thermodynamic Effects

Thermodynamic processes may be considered as contributing factors in most of the
causes of abnormally high formation pressure already discussed. Formation temperature
increases with depth in any geological system and if the system is essentially closed,
thermodynamic effects will add to the build up of abnormal pressures.
• Aquathermal Pressuring
Referring to the temperature-pressure-density diagram for water (Figure 1.4), a

temperature increase in an isolated fluid system must take place along a constant
density path. The increase in pressure is thus very rapid and only small increases in
temperature are required to produce large overpressures.
1-28
March 1995
However, shales are not totally impermeable and the time taken to heat the shales
during burial should be sufficient to allow most of the excess pressures developed to
leak away. The main effect of heating during burial is to retard compaction, and
aquathermal pressuring is not thought to be a major cause of abnormally high
formation pressures.
• Thermal Cracking
At high temperatures and pressures caused by deep burial, complex hydrocarbon

molecules will break down into simpler compounds. Thermal cracking of
hydrocarbons will increase the volume of the hydrocarbons in the order of two to
three times the original volume. If contained in an isolated system, this would result
in high overpressures being developed. However, there is no conclusive evidence
that thermal cracking is a significant cause of abnormal formation pressures.
• Permafrost
In arctic regions, drilling and production operations may cause extensive thawing of
the permafrost. If this thawed permafrost refreezes later in the life of the well,
‘freezeback’ pressures, high enough to damage the casing, may result. Obviously,
this situation may be avoided by proper well planning and casing design.
Freezeback pressure gradients ranging from 0.66 psi/ft to as high as 1.44 psi/ft have
been recorded in Alaska.
• Osmosis
As defined in Section 1.3, osmosis is the spontaneous flow of water from a more
dilute to a more concentrated solution when the two are separated by a suitable
semi-permeable membrane. This action is represented schematically in Figure 1.15.
For a given solution, the osmotic pressure (differential pressure across the membrane)
is almost directly proportional to the concentration differential; and for
a␣given␣concentration dif ferential the osmotic pressure increases with temperature.
Theoretically, osmotic pressures of up to 4500 psi can be produced across a
semi-permeable membrane with solutions of 1.02 gm/cc NaCl in water and saturated
NaCl␣brine.
Clay and clayey siltstone beds can act as semi-permeable membranes. If salinity
differences exist in the sediments above and below such beds, then osmotic flow can
occur. If the flow is into an isolated system, then a pressure increase will occur in
this system. Alternatively, the osmotic pressure developed across these beds may
inhibit the vertical flow of water from compacting shales, thereby contributing to
the development of abnormal pressures.
However, the efficiency of clay beds as semi-permeable membranes in the sub-surface

environment is unknown. It is thus currently believed that osmosis is a minor cause
of abnormal formation pressures.
1-29
March 1995
LIQUID PRESSURE LIQUID PRESSURE

DECREASES INCREASES
0 0
3 1 3 1
2 2
H2O
H2O
CI-
CLAY MEMBRANE
Na+
SALINE WATER
FRESH WATER
H2O
H2O
CI-
H2O Na+
H2O
OSMOTIC
H2O
FLOW
WEOX02.077
Figure 1.15 Schematic Diagram illustrating Osmotic Flow
3 Magnitude of Abnormally High

Formation Pressures
As defined, the magnitude of abnormally high formation pressures must be greater than the
normal hydrostatic pressure for the location, and may be as high as the overburden pressure.
Abnormally high pressure gradients will thus be between the normal hydrostatic gradient
(0.433 to 0.465 psi/ft) and the overburden gradient (generally 1.0 psi/ft).
However, locally confined pore pressure gradients exceeding the overburden gradient by up
to 40% are known in areas such as Pakistan, Iran, Papua New Guinea, and the USSR. These
superpressures can only exist because the internal strength of the rock overlying the
superpressured zone assists the overburden load in containing the pressure. The overlying
rock can be considered to be in tension.
In the Himalayan foothills in Pakistan, formation pressure gradients of 1.3 psi/ft have been
encountered. In Iran, gradients of 1.0 psi/ft are common and in Papua New Guinea, a gradient
of 1.04 psi/ft has been reported. In one area of Russia, local formation pressures in the
range of 5870 to 7350 psi at 5250 ft (1600m) were reported. This equates to a formation
pressure gradient of 1.12 to 1.4 psi/ft.
1-30
March 1995
In the North Sea abnormal pressures occur with widely varying magnitudes in many
geological formations.
The Tertiary sediments are mainly clays and may be overpressured for much of their thickness.
Pressure gradients of 0.52 psi/ft are common with locally occurring gradients of 0.8 psi/ft
being encountered. An expandable clay (gumbo) also occurs which is of volcanic origin and
is still undergoing compaction. The consequent decrease in clay density would normally
indicate an abnormal pressure zone but this is not the case. However, in some areas, mud
weights of the order of 0.62 psi/ft (1.43 SG) or higher are required to keep the wellbore
open because of the swelling nature of these clays. This is almost equal to the low overburden
gradients in these areas.
In the Mesozoic clays of the Central Graben, overpressures of 0.9 psi/ft have been recorded.
One BP well encountered a formation pressure gradient of 0.91 psi/ft in the Jurassic section.
In the Jurassic of the Viking Graben, abnormal formation pressure gradients up to 0.69␣psi/ft
have been recorded.
In Triassic sediments, abnormally high formation pressures have been found in gas bearing
zones of the Bunter Sandstone in the southern North Sea. Also in the southern North Sea,
overpressures are often found in Permian carbonates, evaporates and sandstones sandwiched
between massive Zechstein salts.
4 Summary
Of all the processes that may be responsible for causing abnormally high formation pressures,
it is unlikely that any one will be the sole cause in any particular area. The effects of several
processes will probably combine to cause the observed abnormal pressure.
Certain processes are thought to be either ineffective or uncommon as causes of abnormal

pressures. These include uplift (as a sole mechanism), osmosis, thermal cracking, permafrost
and earthquakes. A recent report(6) has found that the most significant cause of abnormally
high formation pressures in depositional basins is compaction disequilibrium, with
aquathermal pressuring contributing to a small extent. Clay dewatering (diagenesis) was
found to have little effect. However conditions within clays during dewatering are very
similar to these developed during undercompaction; and the two processes probably occur
concurrently, while undercompaction is recognised as the primary mechanism.
The significance of aquathermal pressuring as a cause of abnormal pressure is temperature

and hence depth dependent. This is also true of the diagenetic process.
With increasing depth aquathermal pressuring is thought to be a contributory factor in all

cases of abnormal pressure generation.
1-31
1-31/32
March 1995
1.5 SHALLOW GAS

Paragraph Page
1 General 1-34
2 Definition 1-34
3 Origins of Shallow Gas 1-34
4 Characteristics of Shallow Gas 1-35
1-33
March 1995
1 General
Shallow gas accumulations present a major hazard to drilling operations. Gas influxes taken
at shallow depths cannot generally be shut-in for fear that the pressures involved will fracture
the formation at the previous casing shoe, thereby causing an underground blowout, or flow
around the casing to the seabed.
2 Definition
For the purposes of drilling operations, shallow gas can be defined as any gas accumulation
encountered at any depth before the first pressure containment casing string is set.
For well planning purposes, possible gas bearing zones at shallow depths may be identified
from shallow seismic sections (‘bright spot’ technique – See Section 2.2 of Chapter 2).
These are normally used down to a depth of about 1000m below surface or mudline.
3 Origins of Shallow Gas

There are two potential origins of shallow gas:
(a) Biogenic Generation

This is the production of gas at shallow depths of burial from the degradation of organic
matter within the sediment. An example of this would be the Pleistocene section of the
North Sea which contains some organic rich clays and occasional peat/lignite formations.
Thus a biogenic origin is considered likely for shallow gas accumulations in the
North␣Sea.
(b) Petrogenic Generation

This is the thermocatalytic degradation of kerogen which occurs under conditions of
elevated temperature and pressure at greater depths. (Kerogen is a complex hydrocarbon
formed from the biogenic degradation of organic matter which also gives gas as stated
above.) Sufficient depth of burial to produce the heat necessary for this process to operate
is probably not reached in the shallow depths considered here ie down to 1000m.
However, migration of gas from deeper petrogenic sources may be possible. This could
occur naturally, along non-sealing faults for example, or even through the natural
permeability of clays at shallow depths. Alternatively, artificial migration paths may be
produced in poorly cemented casing annuli allowing gas from petrogenic sources to
accumulate in shallower formations. This could result in shallow gas accumulations
forming later in the life of a producing field when early wells showed no indication of
shallow gas.
1-34
March 1995
4 Characteristics of Shallow Gas

(a) Composition
Shallow (biogenic) gas has the following typical composition (provided by BP/Sunbury):
99% + methane (CH 4)

0.5% carbon dioxide (CO2 )
less than 0.5% nitrogen (N2 )
less than 0.1% ethane (C 2H6 ) and higher hydrocarbons.
Hydrogen sulphide (H 2S) may also be present.
Petrogenic gas associated with the generation of oil should contain a larger proportion
of ethane and higher hydrocarbons.
(b) Configuration of Shallow Gas Accumulations

Shallow gas accumulations are commonly found in sand lenses which are inferred to
have been deposited in a shallow marine shelf environment with tidal influence. In this
environment, the sands would tend to be in the form of sand waves, sand patches and
ridges resulting in a discontinuous and patchy distribution. These sand lenses could
thus be sealed by the surrounding clay sediments.
This patchy distribution of shallow gas is very important. It must not be assumed that
because several wells have penetrated a potential shallow gas zone successfully, then
all future wells will also be free of shallow gas hazards.
(c) Pressures and Volumes

Most shallow gas accumulations tend to be normally pressured. However, the classic
area where overpressured shallow gas sands are encountered is the Gulf of Mexico,
USA. In this area, overpressuring is thought to be the result of undercompaction of
shales due to rapid deposition (See ‘Compaction Disequilibrium’, Section 1.4 of this
Chapter.)
One instance of overpressured shallow gas in the North Sea was reported for a well in
the SE Forties area where a gas kick from a sand at about 800m subsea gave a calculated
formation pressure gradient of at least 1.20 SG (0.52 psi/ft). Shallow gas accumulations
resulting from migration of petrogenic gas may well be overpressured (See ‘Charged
Formations’, Section 1.4). Also, overpressured shallow gas may result from long ‘tilted’
sand lenses, in an identical manner to that described under ’Reservoir Structure’, also
in Section 1.4.
It is difficult to estimate the volumes of gas present in shallow gas accumulations.

However, estimates have been made from shallow gas discharges. In one North Sea
incident, it has been estimated that 8 mmscf of gas was vented. At a depth of about
410m subsea and 600 psi pressure, this corresponds to a bulk rock volume of 20,000
cubic metres, assuming a porosity of 30%. For a 5m thick sand, this corresponds to an
area of only 70m in diameter.
The flowrate of gas in the above incident was estimated at 40 to 50 mmscfd. Flowrates
of over 100 mmscfd have been reported for shallow gas blowouts in the Gulf of Mexico.
These high flowrates are as a result of the high porosity and permeability in shallow
large grain sand deposits.
1-35
March 1995
Suggestions for further reading:
1. ‘EXLOG’, 1981. Theory and Evaluation of Formation Pressures. Exploration Logging

Inc., USA.
2. ‘EXXON’, 1975 Abnormal Pressure Technology. Exxon Company, USA.
3. FERTL, W.H., 1976. Abnormal Formation Pressures. Elsevier Scientific Publishing

Company, Amsterdam.
4. FERTL, W.H. and CHILINGARIAN, G.V., 1976. Importance of Abnormal Pressures to

the Oil Industry. Soc. Petrol. Eng., Paper 5946.
5. ‘GEARHART’, 1986. Overpressure. Gearhart Geodata Services Ltd., Aberdeen.
6. MANN, D.M., 1985. The Generation of Overpressures During Sedimentation and Their
Effects on the Primary Migration of Petroleum. Report GCB/156/85. BP Research Centre,
Sunbury.
7. SELLEY, R.C., 1985. Elements of Petroleum Geology. W.H. Freeman and Company,
New York.
8. SHEPHERD, M., 1984. Forties Field: Shallow Gas Hazards in the Main Field Area.
Report GL/AB/1880. BPPD Aberdeen.
1-36
March 1995
2 FORMATION PRESSURE EVALUATION

Section

DURING WELL PLANNING 2-5

WHILST DRILLING 2-23

AFTER DRILLING 2-65
March 1995
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Paragraph Page
1 General 2-2
2 The Transition Zone 2-2
Table
2.1 Techniques used to Predict, Detect and Evaluate
Formation Pore Pressures 2-3
2-1
March 1995
1 General
Knowledge of formation pore pressure is of prime importance in the planning, drilling and
evaluation of a well. Good estimates of formation pore pressures and fracture pressures are
required to optimise casing and mud weight programmes, and to minimise the risk of well
kicks, stuck pipe, lost circulation and other costly drilling problems.
The following sections describe the techniques used to predict, detect and evaluate formation
pore pressures at the various stages of drilling a well. Table 2.1 summarises these techniques.
Methods for predicting and evaluating fracture pressure are covered separately in a later
section of this Manual.
Abnormally high pressured zones are by far the most common encountered, and the most
important, in drilling operations. This Chapter is therefore mainly concerned with methods
of predicting, detecting and evaluating abnormally high formation pressures.
2 The Transition Zone

Formation pressure gradients are considered to be the normal hydrostatic gradient for the
area until a depth is reached where various pressure indicators suggest the onset of either a
subnormally or an abnormally high pressured zone. The zone in which the formation pressure
gradient changes from normal to subnormal or abnormally high gradient is known as the
transition zone.
In shales, the transition zone is the equivalent of the pressure seal discussed in Section 1.1
of Chapter 1. Since perfect seals of zero permeability rarely occur (except, for example,
salt and anhydrite), transition zones are normally present. The differential pressure across a
transition zone causes pore fluid flow through the transition zone. However, the flow rate
through the zone will be extremely low, due to the very low permeability within the zone.
The thickness of the transition zone depends on the permeabilities within and adjacent to
the overpressured formation and the age of the overpressure ie, the time available for fluid
flow and pressure depletion since the overpressure developed.
The presence of the transition zone is very important in formation pressure evaluation.
Formation properties in this zone often show a change away from normally pressured depth
related trends. The magnitude of the change in the trend can sometimes be used to estimate
the change in the formation pressure gradient. The parameters used to monitor the trends in
formation properties are listed in Table 2.1. It must be realised that the start of the transition
zone marks the onset of abnormal pressures. Every effort must be made to recognise the
start of this zone both in well planning and during drilling.
2-2
March 1995
Table 2.1 Techniques used to Predict, Detect and

Evaluate Formation Pore Pressures
Data Source Pressure Data/Indicators Stage of Well
Offset wells Mudloggers reports Planning (also used for

Mud weights used comparisons whilst drilling)
Kick data
Wireline log data
Wireline formation test data
Drillstem test data
Geophysics Seismic (interval velocity) Planning
Drilling Drilling rate While drilling

parameters Drilling exponents
Other drilling rate methods
Torque
Drag
MWD logs
Drilling mud Gas levels While drilling (delayed by

parameters Flowline mud weight the time required for mud
Flowline temperature return)
Resistivity, salinity and
other mud properties
Well kicks
Pit levels
Hole fill-up
Mud flow rate
Cuttings Bulk density While drilling (delayed by

parameters Shale factor the time required for mud
Volume, shape and size return)
Miscellaneous methods
Wireline logs Sonic (int. transit time) After drilling

Resistivity log
Density log
Other logs
Direct pressure Wireline tests (RFT/FIT) Well testing or completion

measurements Drillstem tests
2-3/4
2-3
March 1995
2.2 FORMATION PRESSURE

EVALUATION DURING WELL PLANNING
Paragraph Page
1 General 2-6
2 Offset Well Data 2-6
3 Seismic Data 2-8
3.1 Abnormal Pressure Evaluation from Seismic Data 2-9
3.2 Identifying Shallow Gas Hazards 2-20
4 Summary 2-21
Illustrations
2.1 Pressure/Depth Plot 2-7
2.2 Schematic Diagram illustrating Seismic Reflection System
and Seismic Traces 2-9
2.3 Schematic Diagram showing Common Depth Point
(CDP) Seismic Ray Paths 2-10
2.4 Schematic Plot of Offset versus Two Way Travel Time
for Common Depth Point System 2-11
2.5 Example Seismic Velocity Analysis Plot 2-13
2.6 Example of Stacking Velocity Data on a Seismic Section 2-14
2.7 Seismic and Sonic ITT versus Depth Plots for
Abnormally Pressured Well 2-17
2.8 Log-log Plot of Seismic Interval Transit Time 2-18
2.9 ITT Departure versus Formation Pressure Gradient 2-19
2.10 ITT Ratio versus Formation Pressure Gradient 2-20
2.11 Example of Drilling Hazard Log over Shallow Section 2-22
Table
2.2 Calculation of Depths and Interval Transit Times 2-16
2-5
March 1995
1 General
At the planning stage of a well, several early decisions are made that are directly influenced
by the predicted formation pore pressure profile for the well. The magnitude of the expected
formation pressure influences the pressure rating of the casing and wellhead/BOP equipment
to be used, and can ultimately influence drilling rig selection. Casing programme design
and mud weight programmes should be tailored to the predicted formation pressures for
the␣well.
Other related aspects of well planning that are influenced include, cement programmes,
completion equipment, contingency stocks of casing, and mud chemicals/baryte stocks to
be held.
Thus, accurate formation pressure predictions are required in order to optimise well planning.
Good well planning will, in turn, help to minimise the risk of costly problems whilst drilling.
There are normally (but not always) two sources of formation pressure information for the
well location being considered. The first and most widely used is offset well data. However,
in areas where there are no offset wells or they are considered to be too far away to give
reasonable data, then seismic data may be used to predict formation pore pressures. Seismic
analysis may also be useful in validating offset well data for the location being considered.
2 Offset Well Data

Pressure data from nearby wells are commonly used to predict the pore pressure profile.
The data are often direct measurements which will give accurate pressures for the particular
offset well location. Pressures can also be calculated or inferred from other well data available
in well reports. The most commonly used sources of pressure data from offset wells are
listed at the top of Table 2.1. The methods used to calculate formation pressures from other
well data, such as wireline logs, are described in Sections 2.3 and 2.4.
The measured and calculated/inferred formation pressures are then applied to the same
formations in the well being planned. Additional information, such as the pressure gradient
of the expected reservoir fluid, is also used to finally arrive at a predicted formation pressure
profile for the well. This information is presented as a pressure depth plot, an example of
which is shown in Figure 2.1. (Fracture pressure information is also presented in the form
of formation leak off tests from offset wells.)
The accuracy of the pore pressure prediction from offset well data will depend on the type
of well that is to be drilled. The following two cases can be considered:
• Appraisal/development wells
The offset well data should usually be reliable as the offset wells will normally be fairly
close to the proposed well location and usually drilled on the same structure. For
development wells, the pore pressure profile should be accurately defined from data
from the appraisal wells.
2-6
March 1995
Figure 2.1 Pressure/Depth Plot
WELL No: 3/10b-a

AREA: UKCS North
0
Leak Off Test 30/4–1

Leak Off Test 30/4–2
500
Predicted Formation Pressure 3/10b-a
Holocene to Eocene
TERTIARY TO RECENT
1000
1500
Palaeocene
2000
2500
DEPTH (m)
Upper
CRETACEOUS
3000
SG EQUIVALENT
3500
psi ft
Lower
2.61
1.128
2.51
4000 1.085
2.41
1.042
2.31
0.998
2.21
4500
Upper
0.955
2.1
0.911
JURASSIC
5000
Middle Lower
SG EQUIVALENT 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
0.477 0.564 0.651 0.738
psi ft
0.434 0.521 0.607 0.694 0.781
5500
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 11000 12000 13000 14000 15000
PRESSURE (psi) WEOX02.078
2-7
March 1995
• Exploration wells
In well explored regions, such as certain areas of the North Sea, the offset well data
should be reliable enough for a good estimate to be made of the pore pressure profile
for the proposed exploration well. However, if the nearest offset wells are far away,
then the pressure data should be treated with caution when applying it to the proposed
well. If there are insufficient pressure data available for any one profile to be predicted,
then the alternatives should be considered and the ‘worst case’ evaluated for each
particular aspect of well planning.
Analysis of seismic data may be required to back-up the pressure profile predicted from
offset wells. In areas where there is no offset well information or they are too far away
to be of any use, then seismic data analysis may be the only method available to predict
the pore pressure profile (See Paragraph 3, ‘Seismic Data’).
In exploration areas where there is a well established Company office, the predicted pressure
profile is usually compiled by the Designated Resident Geologist (DRG) for the well. The
pressure depth plot should be obtained as soon as possible and the data must be checked
immediately by the Drilling Engineer responsible for planning the well. The DE must ensure
that the pressure data is the best available, whilst also accepting that the accuracy of the
data will vary depending on the number and proximity of nearby wells.
In areas where there is no established exploration office, or where the pressure profile is
required prior to compilation by the DRG, then the well planning DE will have to predict
the formation pressure profile. The DRG or Area Geology Group must be consulted. The
DRG or Area Geology Group will determine which offset wells are most ‘geologically
similar’ to the proposed well and hence the best source of formation pressure data. Also,
geological features such as faults and unconformities in the area will be identified. These
may affect the way in which the pressure data are applied to the proposed well.
Notes on formation pressures from offset wells are often given in the ‘Drilling Proposal’
document, together with the lithological prognosis and other pertinent data (well location,
target depths, total depth etc). Petroleum Engineers should also be consulted, as they may
have additional pressure information, especially regarding expected reservoir pressures.
3 Seismic Data
In hydrocarbon exploration, seismic data are mainly used to identify and map prospective
reservoir traps and to estimate the depths of formation tops in the lithological column. Seismic
data can also be used to predict formation pressures quantitatively, or at least to give an
indication of the entrance into abnormally high pressures. In new or relatively unexplored
areas, seismic data are often the only information available from which pore pressure data
can be derived.
Seismic data can also be used to indicate the possible presence of shallow gas bearing sands.
This is done using data from high resolution shallow seismic surveys which are normally
used down to a maximum depth of about 1000m below surface or the mudline.
2-8
March 1995
3.1 Abnormal Pressure Evaluation from Seismic Data
(a) Basic Theory

A seismic wave is an acoustic wave propagated in a solid material - normally a rock.
The velocity at which the wave travels depends upon the density and elasticity of the
rock, and the type of fluid occupying the pore spaces of the rock. Thus the formation
type, formation fluid type, and degree of compaction (ie depth) will determine the seismic
velocity in an particular formation.
Knowledge of seismic velocities in particular formations over a range of depths enables

geophysicists to make fairly reliable formation lithology predictions from seismic data.
It is also the seismic velocity of shale sequences that permits the use of seismic data for
predicting the presence of overpressured formations, and to estimate the magnitude of
the overpressure.
Refl
C
Time
Refl
B
Refl
A
Up hole time
First breaks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Shot
Moment
Geophones Shot Point Geophones
V1
V2
Interval Reflecting
Velocities Beds
B
V3
C WEOX02.079
Figure 2.2 Schematic Diagram illustrating Seismic

Reflection System and Seismic Traces
2-9
March 1995
With increasing depth and compaction, the density and elasticity of shales increases
which results in increasing seismic velocity with depth. Overpressured shales are
undercompacted. This results in lower density and elasticity for that depth. The seismic
velocity in overpressured shales is thus lower than in normally pressured shales at similar
depths. Thus we need formation interval seismic velocity data to detect and evaluate
overpressured shales. These data are readily available from seismic surveys.
Seismic data are acquired by creating acoustic waves, by some form of explosion
(or␣implosion), and measuring the time taken for the wave to travel down to subsurface
reflecting beds and back to the surface. The surface point of origin of the wave is
called␣the shot point and the reflected waves are detected at surface by a series of
geophone (or hydrophones if offshore) placed at known distances from the shot point.
The system is shown schematically in Figure 2.2, together with the seismic traces
recorded by the geophones. The whole system is moved across the surface and the
measurements are repeated from a new shot point. The process is continued along a
pre-determined ‘seismic line’.
By using the geometric relationships between the shot points and geophone positions, it
is possible to identify a series of seismic traces that have approximately the same
reflection point on a reflecting bed. This point is known as a common depth point (CDP),
and the seismic paths associated with this point are shown in Figure 2.3. For clarity,
only the first reflecting bed is shown, but obviously the deeper reflecting beds will also
have corresponding CDPs vertically below, the reflections from which will appear on
the series of seismic traces. The distance between the shot point and any particular
geophone is termed the ‘offset’.
Offset
Shot Points Geophones

Surface
Reflecting bed A
COMMON DEPTH
POINT (CDP)
Figure 2.3 Schematic Diagram showing Common Depth

Point (CDP) Seismic Ray Paths
2-10
March 1995
Figure 2.4 Schematic Plot of Offset versus Two Way Travel

Time for Common Depth Point System
Offset, x
to
A
Time, t
Reflecting Beds
C
The equations of the dashed lines through the seismic reflections are of the form:
x = V √ t2 - to2
where to = vertical two way reflection time to reflecting beds (ie offset, x = o)
V = stacking velocity (average velocity)
Thus the stacking velocity, V, is the variable defining the hyperbolae which best fit
the seismic reflections.
WEOX02.081
2-11
March 1995
In practice, the seismic traces from the same CDP are collected together to form a ‘gather’
in which seismic traces at the various offsets are plotted against the reflection time. A
simplified schematic plot of offset versus reflection time is shown in Figure 2.4. With
greater offset, the path length of the wave is longer (See Figure 2.3) and the reflection
time for the same reflecting bed increases. Curves can be drawn through the peaks on
the seismic traces, corresponding to the same reflecting beds, as shown by the dashed
lines in Figure 2.4.
The geometry of the CDP seismic system is such that the equation of the curve through
the seismic peaks (known as a ‘seismic event’) from a horizontal reflector should be a
hyperbola. The variable defining the shape of the hyperbola is called the ‘stacking
velocity’ or the ‘normal moveout velocity’. In practice, the peaks on the seismic traces
do not lie exactly on a hyperbola. Velocity analyses are performed to determine the
velocity value that gives a ‘best fit’ hyperbola to the data. This is done by investigating
the hyperbolic function with a range of stacking velocities at increasing time increments,
and comparing the result to the actual data from the seismic traces on the gather.
The results from the velocity analysis are output in the form of a plot of stacking velocity
versus reflection times. A typical example plot from an actual analysis is shown in
Figure 2.5. The plot appears as a series of ‘contours’ defining a number of ‘peaks’. Due
to the mathematical computations involved in the analysis, the peaks represent the ‘best
fit’ stacking velocity values and the corresponding vertical two-way reflection times
for each reflecting bed.
The stacking velocities obtained are not the true average velocities from the surface to
the reflecting bed. However, the stacking velocity is usually considered to approximate
to the root mean square (RMS) velocity (as indicated on the horizontal axis in Figure␣2.5).
The RMS velocity is the average velocity along the actual path of the seismic wave. In
many cases, this is also considered to be equal to the vertical average velocity from the
surface to the subsurface reflecting bed. Thus, the velocity-time pairs (as they are called)
from the velocity analysis can be used to calculate the depths of the reflecting beds.
The stacking velocities are used to compute the vertical two-way reflection times for
each of the seismic traces on the seismic gather. The seismic gather can then be ‘stacked’
to form one ‘complete’ seismic trace for that particular CDP. A seismic section is then
produced by displaying the stacked traces for each CDP along a seismic line.
The stacking or RMS velocities are also used to calculate the interval velocities between
reflecting beds, which is the property that we require to detect and evaluate abnormal
pressure.
(b) The Method

Before attempting to predict a formation pore pressure profile from seismic data, the
Drilling Engineer must discuss the seismic data and velocity analyses with the Area
Geophysicist and Geologist. This will help to identify potential problems such as poor
seismic data, lithology complications, errors introduced by formation dip, etc. The DE
should then have a better understanding of the problems involved in predicting a pore
pressure profile for the well being planned.
2-12
March 1995
Figure 2.5 Example Seismic Velocity Analysis Plot
RMS VELOCITY (ft/sec)
10000
11000
12000
13000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
TWO-WAY TRAVEL TIME (millisecs)
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
WEOX02.082
2-13
March 1995
Figure 2.6 Example of Stacking Velocity Data on a

Seismic Section
SP 561
TIME VRMS VINT

0 1470 1470
200 1470 1635
300 1527 1809
650 1685 2320
1150 1986 2942
1450 2218 3098
1700 2368 4923
1850 2668 3416
2050 2750 3972
2200 2850 2866
2350 2851 3165
3100 2930 3479
5000 3150
LINE CB-82-39
LINE CB-82-41
SP 870 202
140 146
550 600
WEOX02.083
2-14
March 1995
The first step in the method is to obtain the stacking velocity data for a range of CDPs
near to the proposed well location. The stacking velocities used for these CDPs should
be given in panels displayed above the surface line on the seismic section. An example
is shown in Figure 2.6.
At this point, it is worth checking the stacking velocities given in the panels against the
velocities obtained from the CDP velocity analyses. This is because stacking velocities
are chosen to produce a good CDP stack (‘clean’ appearance) and may not be equal to
the values that would be obtained from a velocity analysis such as that in Figure 2.5. A
geophysicist should be consulted to decide which stacking velocities should be used,
although more often than not, the velocities given in the panel on the seismic section
will suffice.
The interval velocities are then calculated from the two-way time and stacking velocity
(average velocity) using Dix’s formula:
(V i12)2 = t 2(V 2)2 – t 1(V 1)2

t 2 – t1 (2-1)
where Vi12 = interval velocity between reflecting beds 1 and 2 (m/s)

t1 = two-way travel time for reflecting bed 1 (s)
t2 = two-way travel time for reflecting bed 2 (s)
V1 = average velocity to reflecting bed 1 (m/s)
V2 = average velocity to reflecting bed 2 (m/s)
In the example shown in Figure 2.6, the interval velocities have already been computed
using Dix’s formula. The depths to the reflecting beds are calculated from:
D = t.V (2-2)
2
where D = depth of the reflecting bed (m)

t = two-way travel time for the reflecting bed (s)
V = average velocity to reflecting bed (m/s)
Note that the two-way time in the panel in Figure 2.6 is given in milliseconds (ms). This
needs to be converted to seconds for use in equation (2-2) (1ms = 10 3 sec).
A table should be drawn up as shown in Table 2.2. The final step in the calculations is to
convert interval velocities, a term used by geophysicists, into interval transit times which
is a term more familiar to drilling engineers. This is done by simply taking the reciprocal
of the interval velocity. Note that interval transit times are expressed in micro-seconds
per metre (µsec/m) (1µsec = 10-6 sec).
A plot of interval transit time (ITT) versus depth can then be constructed. The interval
transit time is plotted as a vertical line over the depth interval, for which it was calculated.
This results in a plot similar to a sonic log plot but in which the data are averaged over
long sections and not, as with the wireline sonic log, over a few feet only. A plot of the
data from Table 2.2 is shown in Figure 2.7. The corresponding wireline sonic log plot is
also shown for comparison. Note that ITT is plotted on a logarithmic scale and depth on
a linear scale. The types of scales that are used are discussed further in (c)
‘Interpretation’.
2-15
March 1995
Two-way Average Depth Int. velocity Int. transit

time (stacking) (Dix’s formula) time
velocity
t V D Vi ∆ti
(millisecs) (m/s) (m) (m/s) (µsec/m)
0 1470 0 1470 680
200 1470 147 1635 612
300 1527 229 1809 553
650 1685 548 2320 431
1150 1986 1142 2942 340
1450 2218 1608 3098 324
1700 2368 2013 4923 203
1850 2668 2468 3416 293
2050 2750 2819 3972 252
2200 2850 3135 2866 349
2350 2851 3350 3165 316
3100 2930 4542 3479 287
5000 3150 7875
Table 2.2 Calculation of Depths and Interval Transit Times
(c) Interpretation
As stated, overpressured shales have lower interval velocities, and therefore higher
interval transit times than normally pressured shales at the same depth. The normal
shale compaction trend line on the ITT depth plot decreases with depth. Thus an increase
in interval transit time away from the normal trend line indicates the presence of abnormal
pressures. This is shown by the shaded section in Figure 2.7. From the seismic ITT plot
(‘stepped’ profile), the top of the abnormal pressures would probably be estimated to be
at 2300m to 2500m. When the well was drilled the top of the abnormal pressures was
found to be at about 2000m.
There is a certain amount of conflict surrounding the types of scale that should be used
for plotting ITT data. The format used in Figure 2.7 assumes that the normal compaction
trend is a straight line on semi-logarithmic scales. This method is recommended by
Fertl(17), as it enables ITT data to be directly compared with other pressure indicators
that are plotted using the same linear depth scale (composite plots). Alternatively,
Pennebaker(25) suggested that the normal compaction trend should be a straight line on
log-log scales. An example plot of this format is shown in Figure 2.8.
2-16
March 1995
Figure 2.7 Seismic and Sonic ITT versus Depth Plots for
Abnormally Pressured Well
LITHOLOGY
500
SEISMIC
DATA
1000 siltstone with
mudstone
SONIC
LOG
1500
calcareous
mudstone
Overpressure
and siltstone
Top:
Actual
2000
sandstone
DEPTH (metres)
limestone
Predicted
2500
3000
mudstone and
siltstone
3500
e
d lin
tren
tion
pac
com
4000
mal
sandstone
Nor
4500
mudstone and
siltstone
100 200 300 400 500 600 800
INTERVAL TRANSIT TIME (µsec/m)
WEOX02.084
2-17
March 1995
NORMAL TREND
DEPTH
TOP OF OVERPRESSURE
T, Interval Transit Time

WEOX02.085
Figure 2.8 Log-log Plot of Seismic Interval Transit Time
Both the semi-log and log-log plots of ITT versus depth will show approximately the
same top of abnormal pressures. However, a major difference between the two methods
arises when the plots are used to estimate the magnitude of the abnormal pressures.
Charts relating the magnitude of formation pressures to some function of the ‘departure’
of the observed ITT values from the extrapolated normal ITT values are available for
both methods. For the semi-log plot, the difference between the observed and normal
ITT values is used to estimate formation pressures from a chart such as the one shown
in Figure 2.9. For the log-log plot, Pennebaker(25) presented a chart that required the
ratio of observed ITT to normal ITT in order to estimate the magnitude of the abnormal
pressures, as shown in Figure 2.10.
Thus, the two methods of plotting ITT data require entirely separate empirically derived
charts to estimate the magnitude of abnormal pressures. It is most important that the
correct chart is used when estimating formation pressures. The chart from one
method should never be used with an ITT plot from the other method.
It should also be noted that different geological areas have vastly different correlations
between ITT departure and formation pressure (See Figure 2.9). Hence, it is most
important to obtain the correct correlation for the area that is being investigated. It may
be necessary to determine a new correlation for the area of interest. This can only be
done using actual well data on a regional basis and with the assistance of the geologists
and geophysicists. In completely unexplored areas, this may not be possible at all.
2-18
March 1995
Another major problem in interpreting seismic ITT plots is the placing of the normal
compaction trend line. Referring to Figure 2.7, it would be most difficult to determine
the exact position and gradient of the normal compaction trend line from the seismic
data alone. The various non-shale lithologies affect the data quite considerably and
even with the actual sonic log from the well overplotted, the correct position of the
normal compaction trend line is still open to debate. One possible solution to this problem
is to make numerous seismic ITT (and sonic log ITT, if available) plots for the region
being investigated. It may then be possible to determine the position and gradient of an
average normal compaction trend line for the region.
A full discussion of other problems associated with the interpretation of seismic ITT␣plots
is given by Barr (2) and are further discussed in relation to sonic log plots in Section 2.4
of this Chapter.
1.0
ST 2.25
COA
GULF
0.9 OX
ILC BASIN
W WARE 2.00
DELA
EQUIVALENT MUD WEIGHT SG

XAS
ST TE
PRESSURE GRADIENT psi/ft
WE
0.8
RG 1.75
SBU IO
CK FR
VI EA
2
T
0.7 S
AS
I NA
CO
CH
H
LF
UT A 1.50
GU
SO H SE (FRIO, VICKSBURG,
0.6 RT AND WILCOX – SOUTH
NO
TEXAS GULF COAST
AREAS)
1.25
0.5
1.00
0.4
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
abnormal normal
SONIC LOG DEPARTURE t pressured – t pressured , u sec/ft
shale shale
WEOX02.086
Figure 2.9 ITT Departure versus Formation

Pressure Gradient
To summarise, seismic ITT data may be of use in determining the possible existence of
overpressures at the planned well location. Depending on the degree of knowledge of
compaction trends/formation pressure relationships for the area, it may be possible to
use the seismic ITT data to estimate the magnitude of formation pressures. However, it
must not be assumed that abnormal pressures do not exist because of a lack of indications
from the seismic ITT data. The construction and interpretation of seismic ITT plots
should always be done in conjunction with the local geophysicists and geologists.
2-19
March 1995
0.4
0.5
1.25
0.6
1.50
PORE EQUIVALENT
PRESSURE 0.7 MUD DENSITY
GRADIENT SG
psi/ft
1.75
0.8
2.00
0.9
2.25
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6
T/ Tn
Note: See warning in (c) Interpretation.
WEOX02.087
Figure 2.10 ITT Ratio versus Formation Pressure Gradient
3.2 Identifying Shallow Gas Hazards
Detailed high resolution seismic surveys as well as conventional seismic data are used to
identify potential gas bearing zones at shallow depths by using a technique known as ‘bright
spot’ analysis. The high resolution seismic data are acquired over a survey grid with perhaps
only 150m between seismic lines, the grid covering an area of only a few square kilometres
around a proposed well location. The data are processed to produce detailed seismic sections
usually down to a maximum depth of about 1000m.
2-20
March 1995
Gas bearing formations may produce high amplitude ‘anomalies’ on the seismic reflection
traces of the seismic section. These high amplitudes (relative to the other seismic reflections)
are caused by strong seismic reflections due to the velocity impedance contrast between the
gas bearing formation and the overlying formations. These amplitude anomalies appear
visually on the seismic section as bright areas. The lateral extent of the bright spots can be
mapped on a horizontal section, or sections, and the area of the proposed well location
examined in detail. It may be necessary to move the well location to avoid drilling into a
possible shallow gas zone as indicated by a bright spot.
It must be noted that the high resolution seismic technique cannot usually detect a gas sand
that is less than 2 to 3 metres thick, although such a thickness of gas accumulation may be
enough to cause a shallow gas blowout. Also, the absence of bright spots does not mean that
there will be no shallow gas and conversely, bright spots do not always contain gas. However,
it is wise to avoid drilling through any bright spots if possible.
Ideally, the Geophysicists must be responsible for analysing the shallow seismic data at the
proposed well location. Once the well location has been finalised, the Drilling Engineer
should liaise closely with the Geophysicists and Geologists to produce a drilling engineering
hazard log over the depths covered by the shallow seismic survey. An example hazard log is
shown in Figure 2.11. It will not be possible to predict formation pressures for shallow gas
formations from the seismic data. However, drilling personnel should always be aware that
shallow gas bearing formations may be overpressured, though this is not normally the case.
4 Summary
The importance of reliable formation pressure data must be stressed. It is the responsibility
of the well planning DE to ensure that the pressure data used are the most accurate available.
Whenever possible, pressure data from offset wells should be used to predict the pore pressure
profile for well planning. Direct pressure measurements such as those from RFTs, drillstem
tests and well kicks should give more accurate data than pressures derived from well logs.
Seismic methods of pressure prediction should only be used in the absence of offset well
data. Occasionally, seismic analysis may be necessary to endorse the data from offset wells,
although there is no guarantee that this will be successful.
A recent development by Geochemistry Branch at Company Research Centre, Sunbury is

worthy of note. A compaction model has been developed that may have an application for
predicting formation pressures. This model may be useful for pressure prediction in areas
with very few or no offset wells, especially if used in conjunction with seismic data. At
present, the model is being validated against actual well data.
2-21
March 1995
Figure 2.11 Example of Drilling Hazard Log

over Shallow Section
CASING DEPTH DRILLING

(m) HAZARD
RTE 0
SEABED 100
200
210 BASE OF NEAR SURFACE SEDIMENT
230 POSSIBLE SHALLOW GAS
30in
(320m)
350 FAULT
400
SAND, LENSES, POSSIBLE GAS
470
18 5/8in
(580m)
600
620
SAND AND SHALE
800
850 FAULT
1000 BASE OF SHALLOW SURVEY WEOX02.088
2-22
March 1995

WHILST DRILLING
Paragraph Page
1 General 2-25
2 Drilling Parameters 2-25
2.1 Rate of Penetration 2-25
2.2 Drilling Exponents 2-27
2.3 Other Drilling Rate Methods 2-38
2.4 Hole Characteristics 2-42
3 Drilling Mud Parameters 2-43
3.1 Gas Levels 2-43
3.2 Temperature 2-52
3.3 Resistivity/Conductivity/Chlorides 2-53
3.4 Flowline Mud Weight 2-53
4 Cutting Parameters 2-53
5 Measurement While Drilling (MWD) Techniques 2-60
6 Mud Logging Service 2-61
7 Summary 2-64
Illustrations
2.12 Example showing Increase in Penetration Rate
on Entering an Abnormally High Pressure Zone 2-26
2.13 Effect of Lithology Variation on Penetration Rate 2-27
2.14 Effect of Bit Condition on Penetration Rate when Drilling
into an Overpressured Zone 2-28
2.15 Schematic Diagram showing Typical response of
Corrected d-exponent in Transition and
Overpressured Zones 2-30
2.16 Schematic Diagrams showing Various Typical
d c-exponent Responses 2-31
2.17 Schematic Diagram showing dc-exponent Response
to Overcompaction caused by Ice Sheet Loading 2-33
2.18 Example of Formation Pressure Determination from the
d c-exponent plot using the ‘Ratio Method’ 2-34
2-23
March 1995
Illustrations
2.19 Example showing the ‘Equivalent Depth Method’ for
Formation Pressure Determination from dc-exponent Plots 2-36
2.20 Example showing Formation Pressure Determination
from the dc-exponent Plot using Lines Constructed
from the ‘Eaton Equation’ 2-49
2.21 Example showing the ‘Normalized Penetration Rate’
Method for Determination of Formation Pressures 2-40
2.22 Schematic Diagram showing Mud Gas Levels as an
Indicator of Formation Pressures 2-45
2.23 Example of Mud Gas Levels showing Trip Gas,
Kelly Gas (Kelly Cut), and Recycled Trip Gas 2-46
2.24 Schematic Diagram showing Theoretical Geothermal
Gradients and Temperature Profile through an
Overpressured Zone 2-49
2.25 Schematic Diagram showing Expected Flowline
Temperature Response on Drilling through
an Overpressured Zone 2-49
2.26 Example Flowline Temperature Plots showing Raw
Data Plot, End-to-end Plot and Trend-to-trend Plot 2-50
2.27 Example ‘Horner’ Temperature Plot for Estimation
of True Bottomhole Temperature (BHT) 2-51
2.28 Example of Typical Response of Differential Mud
Conductivity/Delta Chlorides 2-53
2.29 Schematic Shale Bulk Density/Depth Plot 2-54
2.30 Variable Density Column for Measuring Shale Bulk Density 2-55
2.31 Response of Shale Bulk Density/Depth Plots in
Overpressures caused by Various Mechanisms 2-56
2.32 Shale Factor/Depth Response to Overpressure caused
by Compaction Disequilibrium and Clay Diagenesis 2-58
2.33 Characterisation of Shale Cavings Caused by
Underbalanced Conditions and Stress Relief 2-59
2.34 Mud Logging Unit Functions and Information Flow Diagram 2-62
Table
2.3 General Mud Logging Sensor Specifications 2-63
2-24
March 1995
1 General
The aim of formation pressure evaluation whilst drilling is to determine the optimum mud
weight to contain any formation pore pressures encountered, whilst maximising rates of
penetration and minimising the hazards of lost circulation and drillstring differential sticking.
To achieve this, formation properties have to be closely monitored in order to detect any
changes that may indicate the transition from a normally pressured zone to an abnormally
pressured zone or vice versa.
Abnormally pressured zones may exhibit several of the following properties when compared
to normally pressured zones at the same depths.
• Higher porosities
• Higher temperatures
• Lower formation water salinity
• Lower bulk densities
• Lower shale resistivities
• Higher interval velocities
• Hydrocarbon saturations may be different (ie higher saturation)
Any measureable parameter which reflects the changes in these properties may be used as a
means of evaluating formation pressures. The parameters commonly used to evaluate
formation pressures while drilling are listed in Table 2.1. It should be remembered however,
that the above properties also vary with differing lithologies. Lithological variations should
always be taken into account when interpreting changes in drilling and mud parameters.
As the aim of formation pressure evaluation whilst drilling is to reduce the risk of taking
well kicks, this section concentrates on the techniques used to achieve this. The pressure
evaluation techniques in Table 2.1 that are associated with kicks are not discussed here.
2 Drilling Parameters
2.1 Rate of Penetration
Rate of penetration varies with the weight on the bit, rotary speed, bit type and size,
hydraulics, drilling fluid properties and formation characteristics. If the weight on bit, rotary
speed, bit type, mud density and hydraulics are held constant, then the rate of penetration
(ROP) in shales will decrease uniformly with depth. This is due to the normal compaction
increase in shales with depth. However, the undercompaction present in transition and
abnormally pressured zones, together with the reduction in differential pressures across the
bottom of the hole, result in an increase in penetration rate. It should also be noted that
slower penetration rates have often been observed in the ‘cap rock’ (pressure seal) overlying
transition zones.
2-25
March 1995
The increase in ROP on drilling into a transition zone can be best seen on a plot of ROP
versus depth. The average ROP over 0.5 to 2m depth increments (depending on whether
the␣drilling is slow or fast) is plotted as shown in Figure 2.12. A normal compaction trend
can be established in shales as shown. A new trendline must be established for each new
bit␣ r un. An increase in penetration rate away from the normal compaction trend may
indicate␣abnormal pressures provided that the drilling and mud parameters, and lithology ,
remain constant.
ROP
NORMAL SHALE
TREND LINE
DEPTH
NEW BIT
TOP OF
OVERPRESSURES
WEOX02.089
Figure 2.12 Example showing Increase in Penetration

Rate on Entering an Abnormally High
Pressure Zone
Complications arise due to lithology changes and bit dulling. Sandstone usually drills much
faster than shales. This is normally shown by a sharp increase in ROP as the sandstone is
penetrated. This effect, known as a ‘drilling break’ is shown schematically in Figure 2.13.
The normal compaction trend must be established over the shale sections only.
Drilling breaks must always be flow checked regardless of whether the current estimated
pore pressure gradient is less that the mud weight. Occasionally, the transition zone may be
only a few metres thick if there is a very good pressure seal. This may make it very difficult
to identify an increase in ROP as being one due to increased pore pressure, because it may
be masked by a drilling break.
2-26
March 1995
ROP
sand
shale
NORMAL SHALE
COMPACTION
TREND LINE
DEPTH
WEOX02.090
Figure 2.13 Effect of Lithology Variation

on Penetration Rate
Bit dulling can also mask penetration rate changes due to pore pressure increases. A
comparison of ROP curves in an overpressured section for a dull bit and a sharp bit are
shown in Figure 2.14. The dull bit continues to show the normal compaction trend in the
transition zone whilst the sharp bit clearly shows a gradual increase in ROP. The dull bit
ROP may even show a decrease in the overpressured zone if the bit is very worn and close
to being pulled.
In practice, drilling parameters are rarely held constant, as they are purposefully varied in
order to maximise the penetration rate. Thus, ROP curves alone tend to be of limited use in
identifying overpressured zones. They may, however, provide additional information when
used in conjunction with other abnormal pressure indicators.
2.2 Drilling Exponents
From the preceding discussion on ROP curves, it is clear that a method of accounting for
the effect of drilling parameters is desirable in order to make ROP a better indicator of
abnormal pressures. The ‘d-exponent’ attempts to achieve this.
2-27
March 1995
SHARP BIT DULL BIT

ROP ROP
sand
shale
DEPTH
TOP TRANSITION ZONE
WEOX02.091
Figure 2.14 Effect of Bit Condition on Penetration Rate

when Drilling into an Overpressured Zone
(a) d-Exponent
In 1965, Bingham(4) proposed a generalised drilling rate equation to relate all the relevant
drilling parameters:
d
ROP = a WOB (2-3)
N B
where ROP = penetration rate (ft/min)
N = rotary speed (rpm)
B = bit diameter (ft)
WOB = weight on bit (lb)
a = rock matrix strength constant (dimensionless)
d = formation drillability exponent (dimensionless)
2-28
March 1995
Jorden and Shirley (21) rewrote equation 2-3 for ‘d’, the drillability exponent. They inserted
constants to allow the use of more common oilfield units and let the matrix strength
constant, ‘a’, equal 1. This removed the need to derive values for the matrix strength
constant, but made d-exponent lithology dependent:
log ROP
d= 60N
log 12WOB
106 B
where d = drillability exponent (d-exponent) (dimensionless)

ROP = penetration rate (ft/hr)
B = bit diameter (in.)
WOB = weight on bit (lb)
NOTE: The constant 106 is simply a scaling factor inserted in the equation in order to
give values of d in a convenient workable range, normally about 1.0 to 3.0.
In constant lithology, d-exponent will increase with depth as the ROP decreases due to
the increased compaction and differential pressures across the bottom of the hole.
However, when an overpressured zone is penetrated, compaction and differential pressure
will decrease and will result in a decrease in d-exponent. Hence d-exponent is, in general,
related to the differential pressure at the bottom of the hole which in turn is dependent
on pore pressure.
(b) Corrected d-Exponent

Since the differential pressure across the bottom of the hole is affected by the mud␣weight
also, then changes in the mud weight will produce unwanted changes in d-exponent.
Hence Rehm and McClendon (27) proposed the following correction to the d-exponent to
account for mud weight variations:
dc = d X FPG N (2-5)
ECD
where dc = corrected or modified d-exponent (dimensionless)

FPGN = normal formation pressure gradient (ppg, SG)
ECD = equivalent circulating density (ppg, SG)
This correction has no theoretical basis but has been successfully used worldwide. ECD
should be used whenever possible but use of the actual mud density has been found to
be acceptable. The response of d-exponent in overpressure is shown schematically in
Figure 2.15.
The dc-exponent may be plotted with either semi-log or linear co-ordinate axes. Either
system will produce an approximately linear, normal compaction trendline, as indicated
in Figure 2.15. In practice, the semi-log co-ordinate system gives a more efficient data
display (values of dc are normally in the range 0.5 to 2.0) and is a more suitable format
for making formation pressure estimates from dc-exponent.
A d c-exponent plot should be commenced as soon as drilling begins. Values should be

calculated at 0.5 to 2m intervals, depending on penetration rate. This is normally done
automatically by the Mud Logger’s computer and displayed as required. The values
may also be plotted up automatically to enable trends to be spotted as early as possible.
2-29
March 1995
NORMAL
CONCEPTION
TREND UNE
NORMAL
PRESSURE
DEPTH
TRANSITION
ZONE
OVERPRESSURED
ZONE
dc WEOX02.092
Figure 2.15 Schematic Diagram showing Typical response

of Corrected d-exponent in Transition and
Overpressured Zones
The ‘normal’ dc trendline should be established as soon as possible in order that transition
zones to abnormal pressures can be recognised as they are being drilled. However, it is
often difficult to precisely establish the normal dc trendline due to scatter in the dc
values calculated. This variation in d c values is mainly caused by:
• Lithology
As previously stated, d-exponent increases with depth and compaction in constant

lithology. This implies that d-exponent is mainly applicable to shales. Changes
in␣lithology will thus cause changes in the value of d c. If the lithology change is
relatively minor, such as silty shales, then a slight decrease in dc values may be
observed which may not affect the overall trend significantly. Cuttings analysis should
help to identify ‘true’ shale points for use in establishing the normal trend if the dc
values show a large␣scatter .
2-30
March 1995
Figure 2.16 Schematic Diagrams showing Various Typical

dc-exponent Responses
(a) (b)
MUDSTONE
SOFT CLAY
NORMAL PRESSURE
NORMAL PRESSURE
SAND
SILTY MUDSTONE
CALCITIC MUDSTONE
MUDSTONE
DEPTH
DEPTH
MUDSTONE SAND
MUDSTONE
CALCITIC MUDSTONE
OVERPRESSURE
OVERPRESSURE
MUDSTONE
MUDSTONE
SAND
MUDSTONE
CALCITIC MUDSTONE
dc dc
(c) (d)
ROCK BIT
12 1/4in / 25 000 lb
W/B = 2040 lb/in
SMOOTHED CURVE SMOOTHED
RAW DATA CURVE
DEPTH
DEPTH
INSERT
BIT
12 1/2in / 10 000 lb
W/B = 1178 lb/in
ROCK BIT
RAW DATA
dc dc
(e) (f)
NEW BIT
NORMAL PRESSURE
DEPTH
DEPTH
NEW BIT
OVERPRESSURE
NEW BIT
FRESH BIT DULL BIT
dc dc
WEOX02.093
2-31
March 1995
For major lithological variations, such as interbedded sandstone/shale, the normal

trend must be developed through the shale sections only. The increased ROP in sand
sections will give sharply decreased dc values. (It may be possible to develop normal
trendlines for the various other lithologies but these are of little use in overpressure
evaluation and may only serve to confuse matters.) The important message here is
that lithology variations must be taken into account when interpreting dc-exponent
plots. The response of d c in various lithologies is shown schematically in Figure␣2.16
(a) and (b).
• Hydraulics
Changes in drilling hydraulics may produce changes in dc-exponent. This also applies
to formations that are susceptible to jetting. Therefore, it is often impossible to
establish a normal dc trend in soft, unconsolidated sediments, such as those commonly
drilled in offshore top hole sections.
• Bits
The different drilling actions of different types of bits, ie mill tooth or insert, can
cause variations and trend shifts in dc.
It is sometimes necessary to plot a ‘smoothed’ curve to account for trend shifts as

shown schematically in Figures 2.16 (c) and (d). Changes in hole size will also
produce a trend shift in dc.
The effect of bit wear is to produce an increase in dc values towards the end of the
bit run, as indicated in Figure 2.16(e). The new bit should give a new dc trend that
continues along the previous trend provided that it is the same type of bit and none
of the other parameters have varied significantly.
The effect of drilling into an overpressured zone as the bit dulls is shown schematically
in Figure 2.16 (f). A dull bit may mask the decrease in dc which would be expected
if the bit was fresh. In extreme cases, bit dulling may totally mask or even produce
an increase in dc values even though an overpressured zone has been penetrated.
Thus it can be seen that the position of normal trends should be established with great
care, as should the practice of shifting trends from raw data to produce smoothed curves.
Two further noteworthy phenomena that may cause difficulty in interpreting the plots␣are:
• Unconformities/Disconformities
The presence of an unconformity/disconformity in the geological age of formations

being drilled will often change the character of the normal trendline. The different
compaction histories and sedimentary conditions of the formations above and below
an unconformity/disconformity may result in not only a shifted normal dc trendline,
but also a change in slope. A new trendline should be established after drilling through
an unconformity/disconformity.
2-32
March 1995
dc – EXPONENT
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
1.2
1.
SG
1S
1.3
G
SG
OVERCOMPACTED
DEPTH
NORMAL
COMPACTION
TREND
NORMALLY COMPACTED
OVERPRESSURED
WEOX02.094
Figure 2.17 Schematic Diagram showing dc-exponent

Response to Overcompaction caused by Ice
Sheet Loading
• Ice Sheet Compaction
Ice sheet compaction can often cause a good normal compaction trend to be
established at shallow depths in top hole sections. This is due to the increased
compaction of the near surface sediments caused by the weight of a once present
overlying ice sheet. This may lead to a normal d c trend being developed through dc
values that are too high. The compacting influence of the ice sheet is often dissipated
after the first few hundred metres and the d c-exponent then appears to decrease to a
new normal trend, falsely indicating an increase in pore pressure. This effect is shown
schematically in Figure 2.17.
(c) The Calculation of Formation Pressures using dc

Once the normal compaction trend has been firmly established on the dc-exponent plot,
then d c values that decrease away from this line may indicate abnormal formation
pressures. This is, of course, provided that there have been no significant changes in
lithology or in any of the other relevant parameters.
2-33
March 1995
• The ratio method
The magnitude of the formation pressure can be related to the dc deviation on the
semi-log plot using the ‘ratio method’:
FPG O = FPGN X dcN

dcO (2-6)
where FPG O = actual formation pressure gradient at depth of interest

(psi/ft, SG or ppg)
FPG N = normal formation pressure gradient (psi/ft, SG or ppg)
dcO = observed corrected d-exponent at depth of interest
dcN = expected corrected d-exponent on normal trendline at
depth of interest
Normal shale trend line

Normal formation pressure
Gradient is 1.08 SG
SANDS
2.04
1.80
SG 1.56
DEPTH
1.44
1.32
1.20
TYPICAL
1.08 SG TRANSITION
ZONE
Maximum formation press

gradient is 1.43 SG
Maximum formation press

gradient is 1.66 SG
dc – EXPONENT (SEMI-LOG SCALE) WEOX02.095
Figure 2.18 Example of Formation Pressure Determination

from the dc-exponent plot using the
‘Ratio Method’
Equation 2-6 is only valid for the semi-log dc plots as it is assumed that dc is an
exponential function of depth. By rearranging the above equation into:
dcO = d cN X FPG N (2-7)

FPG O
2-34
March 1995
and substituting known values of FPG N and dc at various depths, it is possible to

calculate a series of values of dcO , equivalent to various values of formation pressure
gradient, FPGO. These series of values of dcO can be plotted on the semi-log dc plot
as lines parallel to the normal d c trendline. The formation pressure gradient at any
desired depth can then be estimated directly from the dc plot. Figure 2.18 shows an
example d c plot with equivalent formation pressure gradient lines drawn in.
NOTE: Transparent overlays ready marked with equivalent formation pressure

gradient lines are sometimes available for reading formation pressures directly
off the dc plot. As it is never certain exactly what depth and dc scales were
used to construct these overlays, their use should be avoided in making
formation pressure gradient estimates.
The ratio method is a very simple method of making formation pressure estimates
from dc-exponent. However, it ignores the effect of the variable overburden gradient
(See ‘Overburden Pressure’ in Chapter 1, Section 1.1), which controls compaction
trends. This effect is reflected in the d c-exponent trend, but is considered not
accurately defined by it. An alternative method of calculating formation pressures
from the dc plot is the equivalent depth method.
• Equivalent Depth Method
Due to the increase in compaction with depth, the formation matrix stress also
increases, and the formation becomes harder to drill. In overpressured formations
the compaction and matrix stresses are less than would be normally expected at that
depth. The equivalent depth method attempts to relate these values to the depth at
which they would be normal.
The method assumes that the matrix stress (grain to grain contact pressure) is equal
at all depths having the same value of dc. Matrix stress (M) is related to pore pressure
(P f) and the overburden pressure (S) as shown by equation 1-8 (See Chapter 1,
Section 1.1). This equation can be rearranged to give:
Pf = S – M (2-8)
This equation holds at any depth. Therefore, referring to the example dc plot in
Figure 2.19, the actual formation pressure gradient (FPG O) at the depth of interest
(D O) is given by:
FPGO = PfO = SO – M O
DO D O DO
FPGO = OPGO – MO (2-9)

DO
where OPG O = overburden pressure gradient at depth of interest (psi/ft)

MO = matrix stress at depth of interest (psi)
The overburden pressure gradient is known because it is continually estimated by

the Mud Loggers and updated from wireline formation density or sonic logs.
(The␣overburden gradient is required for estimating fracture pressures as well as for
making pore pressure estimates.) However, the value of the matrix stress at the depth
of interest is unknown.
2-35
March 1995
A line is then constructed vertically upwards from the value of dc at the depth of
interest until it crosses the normal dc trendline at ‘the equivalent depth’ (DE), as
shown in Figure 2.19. At this equivalent depth, both the pore pressure and the
overburden pressure are known. Thus, equation 2-8 can be solved for the matrix
stress (ME) at the equivalent depth (DE):
ME = SE – PfE (2-10)
In terms of gradients:
ME = SE = PfE = OPG E – FPG E

DE DE DE
ME = DE (OPGE – FPG E) (2-11)
where OPGE = overburden gradient at equivalent depth (psi/ft)

FPGE = formation pressure gradient at equivalent depth (psi/ft) which also
equals the normal formation pressure gradient at the equivalent
depth FPGNE (psi/ft)
dc – EXPONENT
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
DE
DEPTH
NORMAL
COMPACTION
TREND
DO
WEOX02.096
Figure 2.19 Example showing the ‘Equivalent Depth

Method’ for Formation Pressure Determination
from dc-exponent Plots
2-36
March 1995
Since the matrix stress at the depth of interest and equivalent depth are considered
equal (equal d c values), then substituting equation 2-11 into equation 2-9 gives:
FPGO = OPGO – D E (OPGE – FPG NE) (2-12)

DO
where FPG O = formation pressure gradient at depth of interest (psi/ft)

OPG O = overburden pressure gradient at depth of interest (psi/ft)
OPG E = overburden pressure gradient at equivalent depth (psi/ft)
FPG NE = normal formation pressure gradient at equivalent depth (psi/ft)
DO = depth of interest (ft)
DE = equivalent depth (depth at which dc is equal to value at DO) (ft)
NOTE: Equation 2-12 can be used directly with gradients in SG, lb/gal or psi/ft
and depths in metres or ft.
The equivalent depth method has been successfully used to estimate formation
pressures from both semi-log and linear scale d c plots. However a major flaw in the
theory occurs when the equivalent depth of a particular overpressured formation is
found to be above the rig floor. This will be the case if high overpressures are
developed at relatively shallow depths. Also, the method relies on determining the
intersection point of a vertical line with the normal compaction trendline. It therefore
becomes inaccurate when the normal compaction trendline is very steep, as is usually
the case on the semi-log dc plot.
• The Eaton Method
The most accurate estimates of formation pressure from dc-exponent are considered
to be obtained from the Eaton equation. This empirical equation was again developed
from the basic relationship between pore pressure, overburden pressure, and matrix
stress (equation 2-8). For normal pressure conditions:
MN = S O – PfN (2-13)
Eaton then introduced a term to relate the dc-exponent (drilling rate) response in
overpressures to the reduction in matrix stress:
1.20
MO = MN DcO (2-14)
d cN
Combining equations (2-13) and (2-14) gives:
1.20
MO = (SO – PfN) dcO (2-15)
d cN
Rewriting equation 2-13 for an abnormally pressured situation gives:
MO = S O – PfO (2-16)
Substituting equation 2-16 into equation 2-15 then gives the Eaton equation:
1.20
PfO = SO – (SO – PfN) DcO (2-17)
d cN
2-37
March 1995
Dividing through by the depth (D), gives the equation in terms of gradients:
1.20
PfO = SO – SO – PfN dcO
DO DO DO DO d cN
1.20
FPGO = OPGO (OPGO – FPGN) dcO
d cN
where FPGO, FPGN, OPGO, dcO and dcN are the same terms as explained for equations
2-6 and 2-12.
By rearranging equation 2-18 and substituting known values of FPGN, d cN and OPG,
it is possible to plot a series of d cO lines equivalent to various values of FPG O (in a
similar manner to that previously explained for the Ratio method). An example of
this construction is shown schematically in Figure 2.20. Formation pressure gradients
can then be read directly from the dc plot.
Eaton originally developed the equation for use in estimating formation pressures
from shale resistivity plots (See Section 2.4), but found that it applied equally
to␣corrected d-exponent. The value of the exponent, 1.20, was derived from actual
well data.
All the methods for estimating formation pressures from dc-exponent plots rely on correct
placement of the normal compaction trend. The difficulties in achieving this have
previously been discussed and highlight the fact that identification of overpressured
zones should not be based on dc-exponent calculations alone. Other abnormal pressure
indicators, which are often more basic in nature than dc-exponent calculations, should
always be checked. These indicators must support, as far as possible, any formation
pressure conclusions drawn from the dc plot.
Drilling factors that are not accounted for by dc-exponent are drilling hydraulics, bit
tooth efficiency (bit wear) and matrix strength (lithology dependent). Also, the
relationship between ROP and the various drilling parameters is not so simple as is
implied by the dc-exponent equation.
These factors have led to the development of more refined drilling exponents in which
attempts have been made to model the various drilling/formation interactions more
closely. In particular, mud logging companies have developed their own drilling
exponents from which they make formation pressure estimates. Exlog’s ‘Nx’ (normalised
exponent) and ‘Nxb’, and Anadrill’s ‘A’ exponent are examples of these more refined
drilling exponents.
The theory of these drilling exponent methods will not be discussed in detail here as
their formulae are of a proprietary nature and are not generally available. Suffice it to
say that the methods still rely on estimating a normal compaction trend and spotting
deviations from it caused by pore pressure changes and not by lithology or drilling
changes.
2.3 Other Drilling Rate Methods
There are a number of other drilling rate methods for estimating formation pressures that
are worthy of note. As these methods are generally more complex than d-exponent methods,
they have not gained wide acceptance and thus tend only to be used by their originators.
2-38
March 1995
Figure 2.20 Example showing Formation Pressure

Determination from the dc-exponent Plot
using Lines Constructed from the
‘Eaton Equation’
dc – EXPONENT
0.5 1.0 1.5
1.80 1.68 1.56 1.44 1.33 1.20 1.08 SG
NORMAL
TREND
DEPTH
TOP OF
OVERPRESSURE
WEOX02.097
2-39
March 1995
(a) Normalised Penetration Rate

This method was developed in 1980 by Prentice(26) from work done originally by Vidrine
and Benit(32). The method uses a drilling rate equation to ‘normalise’ the effects of the
variables controlling ROP. The only variable not normalised is differential pressure
across the bottom of the hole. If the ECD is then considered to be fairly constant over
short intervals of the hole, a change in ‘normalised’ penetration rate reflects a change in
formation pressure.
2960
NEW BIT
ECD = 1.25 SG 1.08 SG
2990
NEW BIT
3020
DEPTH (metres)
ECD = 1.25 SG 1.08 SG
8.53m/hr 4.11m/hr
3050
CIRCULATED 1.38
1.28 SG ECD ALL AROUND
ECD = 1.38 SG NEW BIT
1.28 SG 3080
8.23m/hr 6.1m/hr
4100
1.37 SG CIRCULATED 1.5
ECD ALL AROUND
12 8 4 0
NORMALIZED PENETRATION RATE (m/hr)
WEOX02.098
Figure 2.21 Example showing ‘Normalized Penetration

Rate’ Method for Determination of
Formation Pressures
2-40
March 1995
As drilling proceeds, a plot of normalised penetration rate against depth is constructed.

The observed penetration rate is mathematically corrected to the normalised penetration
rate by applying arbitrarily chosen normal parameters according to the equation:
λ
WN – m NN ∆PbitN QN
ROPN = ROPO X X X (2-19)
WO – m NO ∆PbitO QO
where ROP = penetration rate (ft/hr or m/hr)

W = weight on bit (lb)
∆Pbit = bit pressure drop (psi)
Q = mud flow rate (gpm)
m = ‘threshold’ bit weight (weight necessary to initiate formation failure) (lb)
λ = rotary exponent
and the subscripts
N = ‘normal’ values
O = observed values
Values of λ and m are given by Prentice(26). If the ‘normal’ conditions are chosen so that
most of a bit run can be drilled at these conditions, then no corrections will be necessary and
ROPN will equal ROPO. Each bit run is treated as an individual unit and is plotted up as
shown in the example in Figure 2.21. Changes in mud weight are also plotted separately.
Drilling trends are fitted to each bit run, or part bit run, at constant ECD, as shown in
the example. Provided that the ECD and formation pressure remain constant, the bit
will dull and the ROPN will follow the dulling trend. If a deviation from the dulling
trend is noted at constant ECD, this then indicates either a lithology change or a change
in formation pressure. Lithology changes are generally abrupt, and easily identified.
Formation pressure changes show a more gradual deviation from the dulling trend, as
shown in the example plot at about 9950 ft and 10,100 ft.
Vidrine and Benit (32) developed a graphical relationship between differential pressure
across the bottom of the hole and the percentage decrease in ROP caused by this
overbalance. Using this relationship, the extrapolated dulling trend ROP N and the
observed ROPN at a particular depth are used to estimate the actual formation pressure
at that depth. The method is detailed in full by Prentice(26) together with worked examples
and a comprehensive discussion of the theory behind the method. The method is quoted
as being the most responsive of all methods used to indicate the changes in formation
pressure, but no data are presented to support this claim.
(b) Sigmalog
This method was developed by AGIP and Geoservices(3). Basically, it is a plot of a
calculated rock strength parameter versus depth. The method is based on the following
drilling rate equation (developed by AGIP):
0.5 0.25
√σ t = WOB . N (2-20)
B . ROP0.25
where √σt = ‘raw’ rock strength parameter and WOB, N, B and ROP are as previously
defined. The ‘raw’ rock strength is then corrected to the rock strength parameter, √σo, using
experimentally derived relationships to account for depth and bottomhole differential pressure
(assuming a normal formation pressure gradient). The Sigmalog is then constructed by plotting
√σo versus depth.
2-41
March 1995
In normally pressured formations, √σo will increase with increasing depth and
compaction. A normal compaction trend can be established and a decrease in √σo away
from the normal trend will indicate an increase in formation pressure. When this occurs,
the relationship used to correct √σt to √σo is reworked to determine the true bottomhole
differential pressure (not the assumed one). The formation pressure can then be calculated
from the differential pressure and the ECD for the mud weight in use.
Various factors such as faults, unconformities/disconformities, poor bit efficiency, coring

etc, cause ‘shifts’ in the normal trend. However all the normal trends have the same
slope, and the shifts of the trendlines are proportional to the shifts in the values of √σo.
Correct shifting of the normal trendlines is thus of prime importance in calculating
formation pressures from the Sigmalog. Despite this problem, it is claimed that the
Sigmalog is an excellent formation pressure evaluation tool and can be applied both in
shale and non-shale lithologies. The Sigmalog is commonly used by Geoservices to
estimate formation pressures.
(c) Other Methods

Several other methods of formation pressure evaluation from drilling rate equations
have been put forward. These include methods by Combs (10) , Zoeller (33) , and
Bourgoyne (5). These are not discussed here but are referenced in case of interest to
the␣reader .
2.4 Hole Characteristics
(a) Drag and Torque

Drag is the excess hook load over the free hanging load required to move the drillstring
up the hole. Drag may be caused by bit and stabiliser balling, dog legs, insufficient hole
cleaning, etc, and also by overpressure effects in shales. Overpressured shales often
behave plastically and creep into the borehole. This reduces the wellbore diameter and
will cause an increase in drag as the bit/stabilisers are moved up through the section.
In an underbalanced drilling situation, an increased volume of cuttings may come into

the wellbore. This may result in an increase in drag when picking up the drillstring to
make a connection, especially if the cuttings are not circulated above the drillcollars
prior to picking up. Normal drag after drilling new hole is usually of the order of 10,000
to 20,000 lb, depending on the hole and BHA geometries. Consistent drag values much
higher than this may indicate borehole instability caused by abnormal pressures. In
deviated holes however, consistently higher drag will invariably be seen.
Torque usually increases gradually with depth due to the increase in wall-to-wall contact
between the drillstring and borehole. If underbalanced conditions exist then an increase
in torque may be observed due to excess cuttings entering the hole. A reduced wellbore
diameter caused by overpressured shales may also result in an increased torque, especially
if full gauge stabilisers are being used.
However, increased torque resulting from underbalanced conditions is virtually unseen

when the pressure differential into the wellbore is less than 1 ppg (0.12 SG) equivalent
pressure gradient. If an increase in torque is taken to indicate underbalanced conditions,
then concurrent increases in drag and hole fill (see below) should also be expected.
2-42
March 1995
Torque can be useful in detecting large increases in pore pressures, for example when
crossing a fault line into overpressured formations. However, sudden large increases in
torque can also be caused by a locked cone on the bit, a sudden change in formation
type, and by stabilisers ‘hanging up’ on hard stringers.
Both torque and drag are not considered to be valid overpressure indicators when drilling
high angle deviated holes. Also, increases in torque due to abnormal pressures are difficult
to distinguish from the normal torque increase with depth. When drilling from a floating
rig the vessel motion and varying offset from the wellhead tend to produce significant
torque fluctuations that make interpretation very difficult.
(b) Hole Fill

Hole fill after making a connection or after a trip out of the hole may indicate abnormal
pressures. As discussed above, overpressured shales may squeeze into the wellbore and
reduce its diameter. Then, as the bit is run in the hole to bottom after a connection or
trip, it removes the shale which is pushed to the bottom of the hole. Cavings caused by
underbalance conditions may also enter the wellbore during a connection or a trip and
cause hole fill.
Hole fill may also be the result of insufficient hole cleaning caused by poor mud
properties, or by not circulating all the cuttings out of the hole prior to tripping. However,
any excessive hole fill after making a connection or a trip should be noted and other
abnormal pressure indicators evaluated to determine if overpressures are actually being
encountered.
3 Drilling Mud Parameters
3.1 Gas Levels
Hydrocarbon gases enter the mud system from various sources during the drilling of a well.
The gases in the return mud stream are extracted from the mud for analysis in the mud
logging unit. There is no quantitative correlation between measured gas levels and formation
pressure. However, changes in gas levels can be accounted for by relating them to the actual
drilling operation in progress (drilling, tripping etc) and the mud weight in use. Tentative
pore pressure estimates may then be made.
The main sources of gas in the mud system are:
• Gas liberated from drilled cuttings.
• Gas flowing into the wellbore due to underbalanced conditions.
The gas levels from these sources are dependent upon the formation gas saturations, the
mud weight and the particular drilling operation.
2-43
March 1995
Gas levels are categorised as follows:
(a) Background Gas (BGG)

This is the total level of gas extracted from the return mud stream whilst drilling ahead.
It originates primarily from the unit volume of formation cut by the bit. Hydrocarbons
are often generated within shales and migrate to more porous formations such as
sandstones where they may be trapped. Gas in shale cuttings is released into the mud
stream due to the reduction in pressure as the cuttings are circulated up the hole.
If hydrocarbons are present in any porous formations drilled, there will be relatively
high levels of background gas in the mud stream. However, if the mud weight in use
causes a high overbalance, there may be little, if any, entry of gas into the mud. The
high overbalance will cause the mud filtrate to ‘flush’ the gas away from the wellbore.
In underbalanced drilling conditions, gas may enter the mud at a rate that depends on
the permeability of the formations being drilled. Shales may shown an increase in
background gas levels, due to an increase in cavings caused by the underbalanced
conditions. Background gas levels normally show a gradual increase as a transition
zone to abnormal pressures is drilled.
Background gas can not be used quantitatively to estimate formation pressures since
the levels depend on mud circulation rate, efficiency of gas extraction from the return
mud stream (gas trap efficiency) and also on the gas composition. However, if mud
properties, drilling conditions, and lithology remain fairly constant, then increasing
background gas levels may well indicate that the formation pressure gradient is
approaching, or possibly exceeding the mud weight gradient.
(b) Connection Gas (CG)

When circulation is stopped to make a connection, the bottomhole pressure of the mud
column is reduced by an amount equal to the annulus pressure loss i.e. the effective
mud weight is reduced from the ECD to the static mud weight. This reduction in pressure
may be enough to allow a small amount of gas to be produced into the mud column.
This is known as connection gas. Also, connection gas may also be caused by ‘swabbing’
when picking up the drillstring to make a connection.
When this gas reaches the surface, it appears as a peak above the background gas level
on the total gas trace recorded in the mud logging unit. Connection gas peaks are generally
short and sharp depending on the ‘bottoms up’ time, i.e. the longer the bottoms up time,
the wider the peak will be.
It is possible to correlate connection and background gas levels with the mud weight to
give a fairly accurate estimate of the formation pressure. This is shown schematically in
Figure 2.22. As the pore pressure approaches the bottomhole dynamic pressure,
connection gas peaks begin to appear, probably due to swabbing. As the pore pressure
increases further, the background gas level also begins to increase and the connection
gas peaks become higher. It is reasonable to assume at this point that the pore pressure
slightly exceeds the dynamic bottomhole pressure (ECD). A slight increase in the mud
weight at this point then causes a sudden decrease in the background gas and the
connection gas peaks disappear, indicating that a slight static overbalance has been
established.
2-44
March 1995
MUD WEIGHT PRESSURE PROFILES GAS LEVELS
C
Connection
C
C Bottomhole Background
Dynamic Pressure Gas
Pore
C
DEPTH
Pressure
C Connection
Gases
C
Increase in
BGG Level
C
C – Indicates connection
WEOX02.099
Figure 2.22 Schematic Diagram showing Mud Gas Levels

as an Indicator of Formation Pressures
One major problem with this type of interpretation is to distinguish connection gas
peaks caused by effective mud weight reduction due to stopping circulating, from gas
swabbed into the wellbore when the drillstring is picked up. Swabbing effects are much
more difficult to quantify than simple reductions from the ECD to static mud weight.
This may result in higher than actual pore pressure estimates being made, especially if
the connection gases observed are entirely due to swabbing. Clearly, it is good practice
to use connection procedures that minimise swabbing. If used consistently, this will aid
in the interpretation of connection gas levels.
(c) Trip Gas (TG)

This gas is produced by the same mechanism as connection gas, but the effect of swabbing
due to pulling the drillstring from the hole will generally be greater. This is because the
cuttings will have been circulated from the annulus and pipe speeds will be greater.
A trip gas peak will be observed on circulating bottoms up after a round trip or
non-drilling operation.
Swabbing, due to pulling the drillstring out of the hole, may cause the whole of the
openhole section to be underbalanced. Thus the observed trip gas may not come from
the bottom of the hole but from somewhere higher in the openhole section, and two or
more gas peaks may be observed. This effect may also appear for connections if there is
a high degree of swabbing or the hole is underbalanced. Lag time calculations should
locate the depths/formations causing the gas peaks.
2-45
March 1995
Due to the complex causes of trip gas, it may only be used qualitatively in estimating
formation pressures. The early onset of trip gas after circulation is resumed may indicate
that much of the openhole is slightly underbalanced. Other abnormal pressure indicators
must be consulted to confirm this.
(d) Miscellaneous Gases

These are mainly ‘kelly gas’, recirculated trip gas and carbide gas.
GAS LEVEL
TOTAL GAS MUD WEIGHT
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
RECYCLED TRIP GAS
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
TIME
KELLY CUT
TRIP GAS
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
CIRCULATION STARTED
WEOX02.100
Figure 2.23 Example of Mud Gas Levels showing Trip Gas,

Kelly Gas (Kelly Cut), and Recycled Trip Gas
2-46
March 1995
Kelly gas (also known as ‘kelly cut’) is caused by air being circulated around the system
from a partly empty drillstring or kelly after a trip or connection. The air is pumped into
the borehole as a slug of mud aerated with compressed air. This enhances any gas
diffusion effects from formations to the borehole and may result in enrichment of the
aerated mud with the hydrocarbon gases. A gas peak will thus be recorded when this
mud is circulated back to the surface.
Kelly gas due to connections is rarely seen as the kelly is usually kept full of mud
during connections by closing the lower kelly cock. Kelly gas after a trip is sometimes
observed (as shown in Figure 2.23) but should be easily distinguishable from other gas
peaks by experienced Mud Loggers. Although indicating the presence of hydrocarbon
gases, kelly gas is of no value for formation pressure evaluation.
Recirculated trip gas (or any other recirculated gas) behaves in a similar way to kelly
gas, and should be anticipated by the Mud Loggers from knowledge of the mud system
total circulation time. An example is shown in Figure 2.23.
Carbide gas is used to check the calculated total circulation time and is caused by the Mud
Loggers putting calcium carbide down the drillpipe at a connection. The carbide reacts with
the water in the mud to produce acetylene, a hydrocarbon gas that is detected as a large
sharp gas peak when circulated round to surface. The circulation time can then be used to
back calculate the openhole volume and thus to check for hole enlargement.
It must be noted that evaluation of formation pressures from gas levels relies entirely on
hydrocarbon gases being present to some extent in the well being drilled. Occasionally,
very ‘dry’ holes are drilled which may be overpressured, but show very low background
gas levels. In these wells, it is very difficult to use gas levels as a reliable formation
pressure indicator.
3.2 Temperature
Due to the radial flow of heat from the earth’s core to the surface, the subsurface temperature
increases with increasing depth. The geothermal gradient is the rate at which the temperature
increases with depth and is usually assumed to be constant for any given area. However, it
has been found that the temperature gradient across abnormally pressured formations is
generally higher than that found across normally pressured formations in the same area.
This phenomenon can be explained by considering the thermal conductivity of the formations.
Since water has a thermal conductivity of about one-third to one-sixth that of most formation
matrix materials, then formations with a higher water content (higher porosity) will have a
lower thermal conductivity. These formations will thus have a higher geothermal gradient
across them. Overpressured shales usually have a higher water content than normal and will
thus have higher than normal geothermal gradients across them.
The top of an overpressured shale should therefore be marked by a sharp increase in

geothermal gradient. This may often be reflected by an increase in the temperature of the
return mud in the flowline. Also, the caprock immediately above a pressure transition zone
often shows a reduced geothermal gradient due to increased compaction (higher thermal
conductivity) and a lower than normal temperature at the top of the transition zone. This
effect is shown schematically in Figure 2.24. Again, this may be reflected in the flowline
mud temperature by a reduced flowline temperature gradient. In some cases, the flowline
temperature may even fall (negative gradient) and be then followed by a large increase as
the overpressured zone is penetrated, as shown schematically in the plot of flowline
temperature versus depth in Figure 2.25.
2-47
March 1995
The example in Figure 2.25 is, of course, an idealised case. The flowline temperature very
clearly reflects the changes in formation temperature and there are no other influences on
the mud temperature. In practice, there are many other factors that affect the flowline
temperature and make the interpretation of flowline temperature plots very difficult,
especially offshore. Such factors include:
• Circulation rate.
• Rate of penetration.
• Time elapsed since the last trip (the mud in the hole heats up during a trip).
• Volume of the mud system.
• Surface treatments such as adding water, mud chemicals or weighting material.
• Ambient temperature (diurnal temperature changes, such as those encountered in desert

regions, may cause large fluctuations in flowline temperatures).
• Lithology effects (sandstones and limestones generally have higher thermal

conductivities than shales).
• Cooling effect of the sea around long marine risers.
Various methods are used to improve the interpretation of temperature-depth plots. Surface
effects can be minimised by measuring the temperature of the mud in both the flowline and
the suction pit (mud temperature into the hole), and then plotting lagged differential
temperature. A sharp increase in differential pressures may then indicate entry into a pressure
transition zone. However, the temperature trends (flowline and differential) are still found
to be obscured by discontinuities at bit trips, wiper trips and other periods with no circulation.
These discontinuities split the temperature depth plot into a series of unconnected depth
segments, as shown in the left hand curve in Figure 2.26.
Since overpressure indications are based on temperature gradient changes rather than on the
magnitude of the flowline temperature, each depth segment on the temperature-depth plot
can be investigated separately for gradient changes. It may, however, be helpful to plot the
segments end to end, disregarding the absolute temperatures, to produce a ‘smoothed curve’.
Also, end to end plotting of the individual segment trendlines may be of value, but care is
required to ensure that this technique does not smooth out obvious gradient changes within
an individual segment. The three techniques for plotting flowline temperature are shown in
Figure 2.26.
2-48
March 1995
GEOTHERMAL GRADIENT
GEOTEMPERATURE
DEPTH
OVERPRESSURE
WEOX02.101
Figure 2.24 Schematic Diagram showing Theoretical

Geothermal Gradients and Temperature
Profile through an Overpressured Zone
DEPTH
TOP OF
OVERPRESSURED
ZONE
WEOX02.102
FLOWLINE TEMPERATURE
Figure 2.25 Schematic Diagram showing Expected

Flowline Temperature Response on Drilling
through an Overpressured Zone
2-49
March 1995
NEW
BITS
NB
NB
NB
NB
DEPTH
NB
NB
NB
NOTE
TEMPERATURE REDUCTION GRADIENT
NB
NB
NB
TOP OF OVERPRESSURE
NB
NB
RAW DATA
END-TO-END PLOT TREND-TO-TREND PLOT
FLOWLINE TEMPERATURE WEOX02.103
Figure 2.26 Example Flowline Temperature Plots showing

Raw Data Plot, End-to-end Plot and
Trend-to-trend Plot
Due to the many factors affecting the flowline mud temperature, it is very difficult to interpret
temperature-depth plots to evaluate formation pressures. At least, changes in the gradient of
the plots may suggest that an overpressured zone has been penetrated. It is unlikely that
flowline temperature will be the primary indication of abnormal pressures, though it may
well be useful to support other pressure indicators.
(a) Bottomhole Formation Temperature (BHT)

The actual formation geothermal gradient can not be estimated from surface mud
temperature measurements. Downhole formation temperatures are required. However,
it is only possible to measure the downhole mud temperature. This is normally done
during wireline logging runs as most logging tools contain a maximum recording
thermometer. Mud temperatures recorded from consecutive logging runs are used to
predict the actual bottomhole formation temperature, assuming that the maximum
temperature is at the bottom of the hole.
2-50
March 1995
T tL LOG tc + tL
300
tL
241 4.25 0.260

257 7.00 0.178
262 9.50 0.133
290
TRUE BHT
IS 288°F
280
RECORDED TEMPERATURE, T (°F)
270
260
250
240
230
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
LOG tc + tL
tL WEOX02.104
Figure 2.27 Example ‘Horner’ Temperature Plot for

Estimation of True Bottomhole
Temperature (BHT)
When drilling, the formations in the lower section of the hole are cooled by the mud in
circulation. When circulation stops, the mud temperature begins to rise and gradually
approaches the formation temperature. It is estimated that about four days are required
for the mud temperature to reach equilibrium with the formation temperature. A modified
Horner expression is used to model the temperature increase with time. By extrapolating
2-51
March 1995
the temperature increases to infinite time, it is possible to estimate the formation

temperature. The Horner temperature expression is:
tC + t L (2-21)
T = Tf – c.log
tL
where T = measured temperature (°F or °C) (from each wireline logging run)
Tf = actual formation temperature (°F or °C)
c = constant
tC = circulation time at TD
tL = time since circulation stopped
A plot of T versus log ((tC + tL)/tL) should thus give a straight line, as shown in
Figure␣2.27.
At ‘infinite time’ after circulation was stopped (i.e. tL = infinity), the value of log
(t C ␣+␣t L)/tL) equals zero. Hence, extrapolating the plot to intercept the temperature axis
gives the estimated actual formation temperature, as shown in Figure 2.27. The
geothermal gradients between the logging run end points can then be calculated. Increases
in the geothermal gradient may indicate the presence of abnormal pressures.
Unfortunately the actual formation temperature can only be estimated at logging points.
Thus, only three or four formation temperatures can be estimated from which geothermal
gradients can be established. These gradients are thus average gradients over significant
depth intervals and they can only be established after each hole section has been drilled.
Hence, they are generally of little use in pressure evaluation while drilling, but may
confirm any flowline temperature trends that were noticed earlier.
3.3 Resistivity/Conductivity/Chlorides
The resistivity of a formation depends on the porosity and the dissolved salts concentration
in the formation pore water. Due to their higher pore water content, overpressured shales
generally have lower resistivities than normally pressured shales at the same depths. When
using water base muds, an attempt can be made to monitor this formation property by
measuring the mud conductivity (conductivity is simply the inverse of resistivity).
The mud conductivity at the flowline and suction pit can be measured and a conversion
made to chlorides. An increase in the differential chlorides, known as ‘delta-chlorides’,
may then indicate abnormal pressures. It is doubtful whether an increase in mud conductivity
due to the release of pore water from drilled cuttings would be measurable. This is due to
the volume of pore water released being minute compared to the volume of mud.
However, pore water influxes from more permeable formations may be seen as changes in
mud conductivity or delta-cholrides. Hence, a warning of underbalanced conditions may be
given. The system is best suited to situations where there is a large difference between pore
water and mud salinity. In these situations, the response of differential mud conductivity is
similar to that of mud gas levels showing influx peaks at connections or a gradual increase
due to underbalanced conditions. This is shown schematically in Figure 2.28.
Obviously, mud conductivity as an abnormal pressure indicator has many limitations. A

large salinity contrast between mud filtrate and formation fluids is required. Thus, the method
is of little use in saline mud systems, unless of course, the mud filtrate salinity is much
greater than the formation water salinity. This could be the case with saturated salt and
potassium chloride (KCl) mud systems, and may well result in a mirror image plot to that
shown in Figure 2.28.
2-52
March 1995
ZERO
LOSS GAIN
MUD CONDUCTIVITY
MUD CHLORIDE
DEPTH
INFLUX AT CONNECTION
CONTINUOUS INFLUX
INCREASE MUD DENSITY
MUD CONDUCTIVITY
MUD CHLORIDE
WEOX02.105
Figure 2.28 Example of Typical Response of Differential Mud

Conductivity/Delta Chlorides
3.4 Flowline Mud Weight
Continuous recording of the flowline mud weight will show mud density changes due to gas
cutting or formation influxes. Some influxes are not always picked up by an increase in
return mud flow or by an increase in mud pit level, especially if the influx occurs gradually
due to a very low permeability formation. Thus, an underbalanced situation due to abnormal
pressures may be indicated by a slight reduction in the flowline mud weight.
4 Cuttings Parameters
(a) Shale Bulk Density
The bulk density of normally compacted shales increases with depth. Overpressured
shales are generally undercompacted and thus have higher porosities and lower bulk
densities than would be expected. If shale bulk density is plotted against depth as drilling
progresses, then a normal compaction trendline can be established. A decrease in shale
bulk density away from the normal compaction trendline may then indicate the presence
of an overpressured zone. A schematic shale bulk density plot is shown in Figure 2.29.
2-53
March 1995
The magnitude of abnormal pressures can be calculated from shale bulk density plots
using the equivalent depth method (as described previously for d-exponent plots).
NORMAL SHALE
TREND LINE
DEPTH
TOP OF
OVERPRESSURES
2.4 2.5 2.6

SHALE DENSITY (gm/cc)
WEOX02.106
Figure 2.29 Schematic Shale Bulk Density/Depth Plot
Alternatively empirical curves, relating observed bulk density deviation from the normal
trend to formation pressure gradient, can be used. However, such curves are area
dependent, so can only be used if the appropriate area curve is available. Hence it will
usually be necessary to use the equivalent depth method if formation pressure magnitudes
are required from shale bulk density plots.
2-54
March 1995
The most common methods of measuring shale bulk density at the rigsite are:
• Mud Balance
Shale cuttings are added to the mud balance cup until the balance reads 1.0 SG
(8.33␣ppg) with the cap on. The cup is then topped up with fresh water and re-weighed
(W). The shale bulk density is then given by:
Bulk density (SG) = 1 (2-22)

2–W
• Density Column
A graduated column of fluid is prepared from a mixture of two fluids of different

densities such that the density of the mixture varies with column height. The column
is calibrated using beads of known density which settle at different heights in the
column. Selected shale cuttings are then dropped into the column and the height at
which they settle is converted to shale density using the calibration curve. The method
is illustrated in Figure 2.30.
250
SG 200
2.2
150
2.3
Shale
2.38
100
FLUID LEVEL cc
Shale Density
2.48
50
2.65
0
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8
DENSITY (gm/cc or SG)
WEOX02.107
Figure 2.30 Variable Density Column for Measuring Shale

Bulk Density
The mud balance method has the advantage of being fast and simple and uses a good
quantity of cuttings to obtain a good average bulk density. The density column, however,
requires selection of individual cuttings and multiple determinations to obtain an average
density value. The mud balance method is probably the more representative method.
2-55
March 1995
Use of shale bulk densities for the detection and evaluation of formation pressures
frequently has the following limitations:
• Presence of shale gas in the cuttings decreases the bulk density values determined.
• Cavings from higher up the hole may be part of the sample.
• The reliability of the data depends on the consistency and care taken by personnel,
when carrying out the density determinations.
• Formation age boundaries and unconformities may cause shifts in the normal
compaction trendline. It may be necessary to determine individual normal compaction
trends for each geological age unit.
• Variations in the lithology, such as high carbonate content, silty/sandy shales etc,
may cause significant variations in the bulk density determinations. Only good clean
shales should be plotted. The presence of high density minerals, such as pyrite, will
increase bulk density values and may mask the onset of abnormal pressures.
• Density measurements on cuttings from water base muds are usually low due to the
absorption of water by the cuttings. Less reactive muds, such as oil base muds and
highly inhibited water base muds, will give more accurate cuttings densities.
SHALE DENSITY
NORMAL
PRESSURE
DEPTH
OVERPRESSURE
COMPACTION CLAY AQUATHERMAL TECTONIC

DISEQUILIBRIUM DIAGENESIS PRESSURING PRESSURING
WEOX02.108
Figure 2.31 Response of Shale Bulk Density/Depth Plots

in Overpressures caused by Various
Mechanisms
2-56
March 1995
• The response of shale bulk density values in abnormal pressured zones will vary
with the type of mechanism that caused the overpressure. This is illustrated by the
idealised plots shown in Figure 2.31. However, as most overpressures in shales are
caused by compaction disequilibrium and aquathermal pressuring, the most common
response will be a decrease in shale bulk density at the top of an overpressured zone.
(See Chapter 1 Section 1.4 for explanations of the various causes of abnormal
formation pressures.)
Despite the above limitations, shale bulk density plots can be a very valuable indicator
of abnormal pressures. They should be constructed during the drilling of all exploration
and appraisal wells, and are most useful when long shale sections are encountered.
(b) Shale Factor

Shale factor is a measure of the cation exchange capacity (CEC) of shales. The CEC of
a shale is dependent on the montmorillonite content. This in turn depends on the degree
to which montmorillonite conversion to illite has progressed in the shale since
montmorillonite has a much higher CEC than illite (See ‘Clay Diagenesis’, in Chapter␣1
Section 1.4). The CEC is expressed in milli equivalents per 100 grams of sample
(meq/100gm), and is termed the shale factor.
The shale factor of a sample of shale cuttings is determined using the methylene blue
test. Basically, a suspension of powdered sample (in water) is titrated against a solution
of methylene blue dye of known concentration. The end point of the titration is when
the sample suspension water first turns blue. The shale factor is then calculated from:
shale = 100 X titrant X titrant (2-23)

factor sample wt vol normality
(meq/100gm) (gm) (ml)
Pure montmorillonite clays have a high shale factor of about 100 meq/100gm. This is
due to the presence of many loosely bound cations (Na+ , Ca++) between the clay platelets.
However, pure illite clays, due to their tightly bound cation (K+ ) between clay patelets,
have low shale factors of 10 to 40 meq/100gm. Thus, shale factor can be used to identify
the montmorillonite/illite content of shale samples.
For abnormal pressure evaluation, however, the use of shale factor is limited as it is
dependent on the various mechanisms that may cause overpressures.
Generally, shale factor decreases with depth as montmorillonite is converted to illite.

In␣ o verpressured intervals caused by compaction disequilibrium (see Chapter 1
Section␣1.4 ) clay dewatering has been restricted, which in turn restricts montmorillonite
diagenesis to illite. Thus a larger proportion of montmorillonite will be present in the
overpressured zone, resulting in an increase in shale factor. This is shown schematically
in Figure 2.32␣(a).
However, overpressures caused by clay diagenesis (montmorillonite dehydration) will

show a decrease in shale factor on entering the overpressured zone. The proportion of
montmorillonite has been reduced by conversion to illite, with the release of large
amounts of water. This causes increased pore pressure if water escape is restricted. This
shale factor response is shown schematically in Figure 2.32 (b).
2-57
March 1995
Since compaction disequilibrium is thought to be the major contributing mechanism to

overpressure development in shales, the shale factor response of Figure 2.32 (a) will
probably be the most dominant. However, the contribution of other overpressure
mechanisms will complicate the interpretation of shale factor plots. This often results
in shale factor being of little use in the detection of abnormal pressures.
SHALE FACTOR SHALE FACTOR

DEPTH
DEPTH
MONTMORILLONITE MONTMORILLONITE
CONTENT INCREASE CONTENT DECREASE
OVER OVERPRESSURES
PRESSURES
(a) COMPACTION DISEQUILIBRIUM (b) CLAY DIAGENESIS
WEOX02.109
Figure 2.32 Shale Factor/Depth Response to Overpressure

caused by Compaction Disequilibrium and
Clay Diagenesis
(c) Cuttings Character

The presence of cavings in drilled cuttings samples is an indication that the borehole
wall is unstable. Cavings are much larger than normal drilled cuttings and are readily
seen at the shale shakers. They are thought to be produced by two different mechanisms
which result in cavings of different shapes and sizes, these two mechanisms are:
• Underbalanced drilling
• Borehole stress relief
In underbalanced drilling conditions, the pore pressure in the formation adjacent to the
borehole is greater than the pressure in the borehole. In impermeable formations, such
as shales, the pressure differential due to an underbalance may be high enough to exceed
the tensile strength of the shales. The shale will thus fail in tension and form cavings
which fall into the borehole. These cavings are usually long, splintery, concave and
delicate, as illustrated in Figure 2.33 (a).
2-58
March 1995
The natural stresses that are present in the earth’s crust vary regionally and with depth,
lithology etc. Drilling a hole through formations will relieve some of these stresses
depending on the hole angle and direction in relation to the principal formation stresses.
The result may be that the formation stress at the borehole wall is greater than the stress
(pressure) due to the mud column. The borehole wall may then fail either in compression
from vertical stresses or in tension due to horizontal stresses, or a combination of both.
Cavings produced in this manner tend to be blocky and rectangular in shape, as shown
in Figure 2.33 (b).
Thus, the presence of cavings in cuttings samples will not necessarily mean that the
hole is underbalanced. However, other overpressure indicators should always be
examined in detail to confirm whether abnormal pressures are being encountered. Even
if it can not be confirmed that the hole is underbalanced, it may still be necessary to
increase the mud weight to regain hole stability, and avoid the problems caused by
excessive amounts of cuttings/cavings being present in the hole.
FRONT SIDE FRONT SIDE

MAY BE
STRIATED SCALE
0.5in to 1.5in
TYPICALLY
CRACKED BLOCKY
DELICATE
SPIKY RECTANGULAR
SHAPE SHAPES
PLAN
CONCAVE SURFACE
PLAN
(a) Typical shale caving (b) Typical shale caving

produced by underbalanced produced by stress relief
conditions
WEOX02.110
Figure 2.33 Characterisation of Shale Cavings Caused by

Underbalanced Conditions and Stress Relief
(d) Other Methods

Several other methods of formation pressure evaluation based on measurements on shale
cuttings have been developed. These include shale cuttings resistivity, filtration rate of
shale cuttings slurry, filtrate (shale water) colour index, shale cuttings moisture index,
redox and pH potential of cuttings slurry and slurry filtrate. These methods are fairly
complex and time consuming and thus have not gained wide acceptance as rigsite
techniques. A more detailed discussion of these techniques is given by Fertl(17).
2-59
March 1995
5 Measurement While Drilling

(MWD) Techniques
Measurement While Drilling (MWD) tools are now able to provide continuous downhole
drilling parameter data and electric log data whilst drilling is in progress. The use of MWD
data in formation pressure evaluation follows the same principles as previously discussed
for surface measured drilling parameters, as outlined for wireline log data in Section 2.4 of
this Chapter. The advantage of MWD data is that actual downhole drilling parameters
(weight-on-bit, torque) are measured and the formation log data are obtained very shortly
after the formation has been drilled. Thus, formation log data and conventional ‘whilst
drilling’ techniques can be combined to evaluate formation pressures as drilling progresses.
The downhole drilling parameters of most relevance are:
• Weight-on-bit
The actual downhole weight-on-bit (WOB) is usually less than recorded at surface due
to the drag in the hole. Using the actual downhole WOB will give more accurate values
for d-exponent or the drilling rate method that is being used as a formation pressure
indicator.
• Downhole Torque
Variations in torque at the bit may be used to indicate bit wear. This in turn may be used to
account for bit wear in more complex drilling rate methods for estimating formation pressures.
• Downhole Temperature
The difference between downhole annulus temperature and flowline temperatures will
give an indication of the amount of heat transferred from the formation to the mud. A
similar effect to that described in ‘Differential Temperature’ on Page 2-50, should be
observed on drilling into an overpressured zone.
The MWD formation logs presently available for formation pressure evaluation are gamma
ray, resistivity and most recently, porosity.
The gamma ray log is used to identify lithology. Shales show a high level of radioactivity,
whereas sands and evaporites (except for complex salts) show a low level. Hence the gamma
ray log can be used to pick clean shale sections for overpressure determination by any of the
shale related parameters previously discussed. In particular, the gamma ray log can be used
in conjunction with the MWD resistivity log to plot shale resistivities whilst drilling. The
theory and method of formation pressure evaluation from shale resistivities is discussed
further under ‘Wireline Logs’ in Section 2.4 of this Chapter.
The gamma ray log itself has been used as a formation pressure indicator. A normal depth
related compaction trend was established with departures from this trend indicating the
magnitude of overpressures. However, it would appear that this method may only be valid
for US Gulf Coast shales.
More recently, an MWD porosity log has become available. Thus shale porosities may be
measured whilst drilling and a normal compaction trend established. Again, overpressured
shales will show an increase in porosity away from the decreasing normal trend. The MWD
gamma ray log will also be required to pick clean shales, from which the porosity values
can be plotted.
2-60
March 1995
The combination of MWD logging techniques and downhole/surface measured drilling

parameter techniques should enhance the ability to detect and evaluate formation pressures
whilst drilling is in progress. Developing MWD technology is continually assessed by Drilling
Division, and reports periodically issued.
6 Mud Logging Service

The function of the wellsite mud logging service is twofold:
• Sampling and description of drilled cuttings, and hydrocarbons detection and evaluation.
• Monitoring and interpretation of drilling data for drilling optimisation and formation
pressure evaluation.
These functions, and their relation to information flow through a typical mud logging unit,␣are
illustrated in Figure 2.34. The level to which the latter function is required depends on
the␣ t ype of well being drilled. Usually exploration and appraisal wells require mud
logging␣ s ervices capable of a higher level of formation pressure evaluation than for
development wells.
(a) Pressure Evaluation Service

In most mud logging services, there is a Pressure Evaluation Geologist or Engineer
permanently on duty in the mud logging unit. It is this individual’s responsibility to
closely monitor all the available formation pressure indicators and to communicate this
information to the Company supervisory personnel at the rigsite. He should also make
formation pressure estimates based on all the available pressure indicators (and
discussions with Company personnel), and be able to support these estimates with sound
reasoning.
The Pressure Evaluation Geologist/Engineer holds a very responsible position amongst

the various rigsite personnel and should have many years experience in rigsite mud
logging work. It is important that a good level of communication is established and
maintained with the person(s) concerned in order that reliable formation pressure
estimates are obtained and their implications speedily acted upon.
(b) Composite Logs

As part of the pressure evaluation service, the Pressure Evaluation Geologist/Engineer
will prepare ‘composite logs’ showing well depth versus various selected
overpressure␣indicators. These logs are potentially most useful as they show graphically
the response of the various overpressure indicators to differing lithologies and
formation␣pressure regimes. It is most important that these logs are kept up to date to
enable up-to-the-minute pressure estimates to be made based on the information given
by the logs.
2-61
March 1995
Figure 2.34 Mud Logging Unit Functions and Information

Flow Diagram
KELLY POSITION GAS FROM MUDSTREAM
DEPTH PENETRATION RATE CARBON DIOXIDE
H2S HYDROCARBONS
PUMP RATE MICRO GAS
MUD FLOW TOTAL GAS UV

BOX
CHROMATOGRAPH
COMPUTATION
DISPLAY
DATA STORAGE
MUD pH/PHS
REMOTE DATA DISPLAY

MUD RESISTIVITY
EVALUATION
MUD WEIGHT
MUD TEMPERATURE FORMATION

CUTTINGS
PIT LEVEL/PVT DENSITY
DRILLING PARAMETERS GEOCHEMICAL

ANALYSIS
KELLY HOOK BIT
HEIGHT LOAD REVOLUTIONS
DRILL WEIGHT ROTARY SPEED CEC
RATE ON BIT TORQUE
TOTAL STANDPIPE CASING
DEPTH PRESSURE PRESSURE
MUD PRESS FORMATION LOG
MISC ENGINEERING
PRESSURE LOG
DATA
WIRELINE LOG DATA GEOCHEMICAL LOG
BASIC REMOTE DATA

ADDITIONAL TRANSMISSION
WEOX02.111
2-62
March 1995
(c) Mud Logging Equipment

The equipment contained within a modern mud logging unit is very complex, and there
are numerous differrent types of sensors available for measuring the various drilling
parameters. Different methods are also employed to relay the measured data to the mud
logging unit. It is not the intention of this manual to discuss the equipment used by the
individual mud logging service companies. General sensor specifications are however
given in Table 2.3.
Parameter to Required Preferred Sensor Type

be Measured Accuracy
Mud Logging Service
Total gas +/- 0.1% Flame ionisation

Hydrogen sulphide +/- 1ppm Solid state semi-conductor instrument
Constituent gases +/- 0.5% Flame ionisation
Drilling Data Service
Depth +/- 10 cm Heave and tide compensation

Kelly position +/- 10 cm independent of kelly, for trip monitoring
Hookload +/- 200 lb Pressure transducer (strain gauge)
Rotary speed +/- 1 rpm Proximity switch
Rotary torque +/- 5 amp Hall effect current sensor
Mud weight +/- 0.01 SG Gamma ray
Standpipe pressure +/- 10 psi Strain gauge
Choke pressure +/- 10 psi Strain gauge
Flow rate in +/- 20 gpm Non-intrusive flow meter
Flow rate out +/- 50 gpm Paddle type flow meter
Flow rate out +/- 20 gpm Non-intrusive flow meter
Pump rate +/- 1 SPM Proximity switches
Mud temperatures +/- 1°C Platinum resistance
Pit volumes +/- 5 bbl Ultrasonics
Trip tank volume +/- 0.5 bbl Ultrasonics
Table 2.3 General Mud Logging Sensor Specifications

(d) Mud Logging Unit Suitability
The suitability of a mud logging unit for a Company drilling operation depends essentially
on the level of pressure evaluation service required, which in turn depends on the type
of well that is to be drilled. The basic geological sampling and mud logging service
should not vary significantly with the well type.
Once the required levels of mud logging and pressure evaluation services have been
defined, then the suitability of individual mud logging units can be evaluated. The current
specifications against which the mud logging units/services should be evaluated, are
contained in BP report DTG/D/4/86 (24).These specifications cover the basic mud logging
service (sampling, cuttings description etc), drilling data service (including pressure
evaluation and drilling optimisation), reporting, software, data storage and personnel
requirements.
2-63
March 1995
7 Summary
The majority of the ‘whilst drilling’ formation pressure indicators discussed are only
applicable to massive shale sections interbedded with sandstone/siltstones. However, as
most of our drilling occurs in sedimentary basins containing such sections, then the techniques
discussed are of direct relevance to our drilling operations.
The most reliable abnormal pressure indicators in shales are probably d-exponent (or other
drilling rate method) in combination with gas levels and cuttings character (cavings).
Occasionally, one indicator may be particularly effective in showing the onset of abnormal
pressures, but this will probably not be apparent until drilling has progressed well into the
overpressured zone.
It is stressed that all formation pressure indicators must be carefully examined to confirm
the possible abnormal pressures that may be implied by a particular overpressure indicator.
Also, the possibility of lithological changes should always be borne in mind when sharp
changes in abnormal pressure indicators are observed.
2-64
March 1995

AFTER DRILLING
Paragraph Page
1 General 2-66
2 Formation Pressures from Wireline Logs 2-66
2.1 Sonic Log 2-66
2.2 Resistivity Log 2-70
2.3 Density Log 2-75
2.4 Other Logs 2-77
3 Direct Pressure Measurements 2-77
3.1 RFT/FIT Data 2-77
3.2 Drillstem Test Data 2-82
4 Summary 2-84
Illustrations
2.35 Schematic diagram showing the Operating Principle
of the Sonic (BHC) Logging Tool 2-67
2.36 Schematic diagram showing Shale Sonic Interval
Travel Time Response in Overpressures 2-68
2.37 Schematic Shale Resistivity/Depth Plot showing Response
in Overpressures 2-71
2.38 Shale Resistivity/Depth Plot illustrating the Problems
Associated with Formation Pressure Interpretation 2-73
2.39 Empirical Correlations for Estimation of Formation
Pressures from Shale Resistivity Ratio 2-74
2.40 Log-derived Shale Bulk Density Plot on Semi-logarithmic Scales 2-76
2.41 Schematic diagram showing the RFT Pre-test
and Sampling Principle 2-78
2.42 Diagram showing the Operation of the RFT Sample Probe 2-79
2.43 Example of an RFT Analogue Pressure Recording 2-79
2.44 Example of a Typical Drillstem Test String
(for high pressure gas well) showing Position of Gauges 2-81
2.45 Example of a Typical Pressure Chart from a Mechanical
Gauge placed below the Tester Valve in the DST String 2-83
2-65
March 1995
1 General
After each intermediate and reservoir hole section has been drilled, the formations are
electrically logged to evaluate their physical characteristics and hydrocarbon potential. Some
of these logs can be used to estimate formation pressures to confirm (or otherwise) the
estimates made whilst the hole sections were being drilled. Formation pressures calculated
from wireline logs are estimates only.
Direct formation pressure measurements are normally taken in the reservoir hole section(s)
using a wireline repeat formation test (RFT) tool. Also, formation pressures are directly
measured in the ‘shut-in’ (pressure build-up) periods during drillstem testing (DST) of
potential reservoir formations.
2 Formation Pressures from Wireline Logs

2.1 Sonic Log
The sonic logging tool measures the time, ∆t, required for a compressional sonic wave to
travel through one foot (or metre) of formation. This is known as the interval transit time
(ITT) and is the reciprocal of formation interval velocity. The principle of operation of the
sonic tool (borehole compensated (BHC) tool) is shown in Figure 2.35. Sonic pulses from
two transmitters travel through the formation, and are picked up by two pairs of receivers.
The time difference between sonic arrivals at each pair of receivers is measured. The average
time difference is then recorded to compensate for borehole geometry and tool tilt.
As discussed in Section 2.2 of this Chapter, overpressured shales show a higher sonic ITT
than normally pressured shales at the same depth. Thus, a plot of sonic ITT in shales versus
depth on semi-logarithmic axes should show a straight line compaction trend in normally
pressured shales. Departures from this line towards higher shale ITT values indicates
abnormal pressures. The normal compaction trend and sonic log departure in overpressures
are shown in the schematic sonic log plot in Figure 2.36.
A discussion of the problems associated with the interpretation of ITT depth plots, is given
in relation to seismic ITT data in Section 2.2 of this Chapter. The main problem areas are:
• Scales
Two types of formats have been proposed for plotting ITT-depth data. These are log-log
plots (as suggested by Pennebaker(25)), and semi-log plots, as suggested above. The
semi-log format is recommended as the linear depth scale enables direct comparison of
sonic ITT data with other overpressure indicator plots.
• Normal Trend Line
It is sometimes very difficult to confidently establish the position of the normal

shale␣compaction trend line. The depth interval over which the sonic log data are obtained
in normally pressured upper hole sections is often too small to reliably establish the
normal compaction trend. This is because logs are normally only obtained from below
surface casing.
2-66
March 1995
T UPPER TRANSMITTER
R1
R2
t1
PAIRED RECEIVERS
t = t2 – t1 R1 + R3/R2 + R4
R3
R4
t2
MUD CAKE T LOWER TRANSMITTER
WEOX02.112
Figure 2.35 Schematic diagram showing the Operating

Principle of the Sonic (BHC) Logging Tool
Different lithologies frequently have vastly different sonic ITTs. Care should be taken
to ensure that the normal compaction trend line is established through ITT values in
good clean shale sections only. It may be necessary to make sonic log plots from several
wells (if data are available) in the area of interest. These may then be used to determine
the position and gradient of an average regional normal compaction trend line.
• The BHC sonic tool has a ‘depth of investigation’ of only a few inches into the borehole
wall. Hence, reactive shales that absorb water from the drilling mud, may exhibit higher
ITT values (higher porosity) than would be recorded if the shales were non-reactive.
These higher ITT values may falsely indicate the presence of abnormal formation
pressures. A deeper reading ‘long spacing sonic’ (SLS) tool is sometimes run. When
available, the sonic log data from this deeper reading tool should be used in preference
to those from the BHC sonic tool.
2-67
March 1995
Figure 2.36 Schematic diagram showing Shale Sonic

Interval Travel Time Response in
Overpressures
NORMAL COMPACTION
TREND LINE
DEPTH
TOP OF
OVERPRESSURES
SHALE INTERVAL TRAVEL TIME, t
WEOX02.113
2-68
March 1995
• Unconformities/disconformities may produce a marked sudden shift in sonic ITT values

and may require a second separate normal compaction trend line to be established.
Once the position of the normal compaction trend lines has been firmly established on the
semi-log sonic ITT-depth plot, then the depths and magnitudes of suspected abnormal
pressures may be calculated. Several methods are available for estimating the magnitude of
abnormal pressures from sonic log plots:
(a) Empirical Correlations

Charts relating the magnitude of formation pressures to the difference between the
observed shale ITT value and the extrapolated normal ITT value are available. These
empirical correlations are area dependent, as shown by the examples in Figure 2.9.
Note that the correlation developed by Pennebaker (25) (Figure 2.10) should not be used
with semi-log ITT plots. This was developed for use in conjunction with log-log seismic
ITT plots and is probably only valid for the US Gulf Coast.
The empirical correlations are quick and easy to use as formation pressure gradients are
read directly from the charts. However, the correlations are area dependent, so their use
is limited to areas for which correlations are available.
(b) Equivalent Depth Method

When no empirical correlation is available, the equivalent depth method may be used.
A full discussion of the method is given in connection with d c-exponent plots, in
Section␣ 2 .3 of this Chapter. Equation 2-12 is also used for formation pressure
calculations from sonic ITT plots:
FPGO = OPGO – DE (OPGE – FPGNE) (2-12)

DO
where FPG O = formation pressure gradient at depth of interest (psi/ft)

OPG O = overburden pressure gradient at depth of interest (psi/ft)
OPG E = overburden pressure gradient at equivalent depth (psi/ft)
FPG NE = normal formation pressure gradient at equivalent depth (psi/ft)
DO = depth of interest (ft)
DE = equivalent depth (depth at which sonic ITT is equal to value at DO) (ft)
NOTE: Equation 2-12 can be used directly with gradients in SG, ppg or psi/ft and
depths in metres or feet.
It is necessary to obtain overburden pressure gradient data for the well being investigated
in order to use the equivalent depth method. These data should be available in the form
of an overburden gradient-depth plot in the Mud Logger’s report for the well.
The advantages and disadvantages of this method are discussed in Section 2.3 of
this␣Chapter .
2-69
March 1995
(c) Eaton Equation
The following equation was presented by Eaton(12) for calculation of formation pressures
from sonic ITT plots, the derivation of which is exactly analogous to equation 2-18,
which was developed for dc-exponent plots:
∆t N 3.0
FPGO = OPGO – (OPGO – FPGN) (2-24)
∆t O
where FPGO and OPGO are as defined above and,
FPG N = normal formation pressure gradient (psi/ft)

∆t N = extrapolated normal trend sonic ITT at depth of interest (µsec/ft)
∆t O = observed sonic ITT at depth of interest (µsec/ft)
The value of the ITT ratio exponent, 3.0, was derived from actual well data.
Despite the problems outlined earlier, it is considered that the use of sonic ITT data
provides the most reliable method of formation pressure evaluation from well logs. The
use of an empirical correlation provides the quickest method of estimating the magnitude
of abnormal pressures from sonic ITT plots. However, if a correlation is not available
for the area of interest, it will be necessary to use either the equivalent depth method or
the Eaton equation (or both). These latter methods require overburden pressure gradient
data which should be readily available in Mud Loggers’ reports for the well(s) under
investigation.
2.2 Resistivity Log
The resistivity of shales depends on the following factors:
• Porosity
• Salinity of pore water
• Temperature
Temperature varies approximately linearly with depth and hence formation resistivities can
be corrected for temperature. Also, the salinity of the pore water should not vary significantly
with depth. Porosity is thus the major factor controlling shale resistivity.
Under normal compaction (i.e. in normal pressure environments), shale resistivity increases
with depth since porosity decreases. A plot of shale resistivity versus depth will thus show
an increasing trend with depth. In clean shale sections, any departure from this normal trend
towards lower shale resistivities may indicate an increase in porosity and hence overpressures.
Shale resistivity (Rsh) is plotted on a log scale versus depth on a linear scale. The shape and
slope of the normal trend line will vary with the age and type of shales present. This will
lead to individual normal compaction trends being developed for each area investigated. It
is unlikely that any two areas will have identical normal compaction trends. A schematic
shale resistivity-depth plot is shown in Figure 2.37. The normal compaction trend line may
be a curve or may approximate to a straight line over certain depth intervals, depending on
the area under investigation.
2-70
March 1995
Figure 2.37 Schematic Shale Resistivity/Depth Plot

showing Response in Overpressures
NORMAL
COMPACTION
TREND LINE
DEPTH
CAP ROCK
TOP OF
OVERPRESSURE
0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0

SHALE RESISTIVITY, Rsh (ohm-m)
WEOX02.114
2-71
March 1995
Originally, shale resistivities were plotted from the amplified short normal (ASN) curve of
the now absolute ES (electrical survey) logging suite. Today, a variety of resistivity logging
tools are run, from which shale resistivity plots may be made. The tools are designed for
various depths of investigation from shallow to very deep. The deep reading tools record
the true resistivity of virgin formation and thus near borehole effects (shale hydration, mud
filtrate invasion in permeable zones) do not affect the resistivity values recorded.
The deep reading logs that should be used for resistivity plots are the ILd curve from the
dual induction laterolog (DIL) tool and the LLd curve from the dual laterolog (DLL) tool.
The dual laterolog tool requires a conductive mud, so it will not work in oil base muds. The
dual induction laterolog will work in oil base or water base muds and tends to be the resistivity
log that is normally run.
Possible problems that may be encountered with shale resistivity plots are:
• Only shale resistivities in thick clean shales must be plotted. It may be necessary to
consult a geologist in order to pick good clean shales from the well logs. Use the deepest
reading resistivity curve available to plot true shale resistivities.
• It may be very difficult to firmly establish the shape and position of the normal
compaction trend line from the resistivity plot for just one well. An average regional
trend may have to be established from the resistivity plots of many wells in the area of
interest. Unconformities/disconformities and variations in geological age may show
sudden changes in shale resistivities which will affect the position of the normal trend
line.
• Changes in formation water salinity may give false pressure indications. For example,
shales in the proximity of large salt masses (e.g. salt domes) have very low resistivities
due to increased pore water salinity. This may indicate higher-than-actual formation
pressures. Also, shales at depths less than 1000m below surface or the mudline, usually
contain formation water fresher than sea water. This results in high resistivity values
that may indicate lower-than-actual formation pressures.
The problems associated with interpreting shale resistivity plots are illustrated in Figure␣2.38.
Once the normal compaction trend has been firmly established, it is possible to estimate the
magnitude of any abnormal formation pressures indicated by the shale resistivity plot. Again,
there are several methods available:
(a) Empirical Correlations

At depths where the observed shale resistivity values (Rsh(O)) diverge from the normal
trend value (Rsh(N) ), the ratio of normal to observed shale resistivity (Rsh(O)/R sh(N)) is
calculated. The corresponding formation pressure gradient is then read from a chart
such as the one shown in Figure 2.39. As can be seen from this chart, the correlations
are area-dependent and the appropriate chart is required for the particular area under
investigation.
2-72
March 1995
Fresh water
shales
Normal
pressure
environment
Region 'A'
limey shales
Err
o
DEPTH
ne
Pressure
ou
top
s tr
en
No
d
rma
Abnormally
l tre
high
nd
pressure
environment
Region 'B'
Lithology, not
pressure,
change
0.1 0.5 1.0 5.0

Rsh (ohm-m)
WEOX02.115
Figure 2.38 Shale Resistivity/Depth Plot illustrating the

Problems Associated with Formation
Pressure Interpretation
(b) Equivalent Depth Method

This method is identical to that previously discussed for dc-exponent plots (Section␣2.3 )
and sonic log plots (earlier this Section). Again, equation 2-12 is valid for use with
shale resistivity plots:
FPGO = OPGO – DE (OPGE – FPGNE) (2-12)

DO
where DE = equivalent depth (depth at which shale resistivity is equal to the value at
the depth of interest, DO) (ft)
and FPG O, OPG O, DO, OPGE, and FPGNE are as previously defined in connection with
dc-exponent plots and sonic ITT plots. As explained previously, overburden gradient
data must be obtained (from Mud Loggers’ report) in order to use this method.
2-73
March 1995
0.4
0.5
E Riverton area, Wyo (Timko, 1972)
1.25
Equivalent mud weight, SG

0.6
Reservoir FPG, psi/ft
North Sea (limited data)

(Timko, 1972)
1.50
0.7 South China Sea

Hottman-
(Limited data)
Johnson,
Timko, 1972
1965 1.75
0.8
East Cameron
Timko-Fertl, 1970 2.00
0.9
Eaton, 1972 (Range)

2.25
1.0
10 15 20 30 40 50
Normal R(sh)/observed R(sh)
WEOX02.116
Figure 2.39 Empirical Correlations for Estimation of

Formation Pressures from Shale
Resistivity Ratio
(c) Eaton equation

Equation 2-25 was proposed by Eaton (12) for calculating formation pressures
from␣ s hale resistivity plots (derivation analogous to equation 2-18, developed for
dc-exponent plots):
1.20
Rsh(N)
FPG O = OPGO – (OPG O – FPGN)
R sh(O)
where FPGO, OPGO and FPGN are as defined for equation 2-24 (sonic log plots), and
Rsh(N) = extrapolated normal trend shale resistivity at depth of interest (ohm-m)
Rsh(O) = observed shale resistivity at depth of interest (ohm-m)
Again, the value of the shale resistivity ratio exponent, 1.20, was derived from actual
well data. Overburden pressure gradients for the well are also required (from Mud
Loggers’ well report) in order to use equation 2-25.
2-74
March 1995
(d) Formation Factor Method

This method was proposed by Foster and Whalen,(18) and is based on the equation:
Fsh = Rsh (2-26)

Rw
where F sh = shale formation factor (dimensionless)

Rsh = shale resistivity (ohm-m)
Rw = formation water resistivity (ohm-m)
Basically, the method involves computing a formation water resistivity (Rw) depth profile
from the SP (spontaneous potential) curve in clean, shale free water sands. Values of
Rsh are then obtained from thick, clean shales from whichever resistivity log is available
(ILd or LLd curve). Values of Fsh at depths corresponding to the Rsh values are then
calculated from equation 2-26.
A plot of Fsh versus depth on semi-log scales (linear depth scale) then shows a straight
line trend in normally pressured formations, F sh increasing with depth. Departure from
the normal trend towards decreasing Fsh values then indicates abnormal pressures. The
magnitude of any abnormal pressures can then be calculated using the equivalent depth
method (as discussed in (b) above).
The major drawback with this method is the calculation of R w values from the SP curve.
The method is subject to inaccuracies, is difficult and is very time consuming. The
advantage of this method is that it takes into account changes in formation water
resistivity, R w. Other methods rely on the assumption that formation water resistivity
remains relatively constant with depth.
The method is detailed in full by Foster and Whalen(18) and Fertl(17).
All the pressure evaluation methods using resistivity logs were developed for the US Gulf
Coast and would appear to work quite well for this region. However, they have been found
to be of limited use in the North Sea. Formation water salinity variations cause erratic tool
responses which make it virtually impossible to construct a normal compaction trend.
2.3 Density Log
The formation density logging tool consists of a radioactive source which bombards the
formations with medium-energy gamma rays. The gamma rays collide with electrons in the
formation which cause the gamma rays to scatter. The degree of scattering is directly related
to the electron density and therefore the bulk density of the formation. The scattered gamma
rays that return to the borehole are picked up by detectors in the logging tool.
In the FDC (formation density compensated) logging tool, the gamma ray source and two
detectors are mounted on a skid that is pushed against the borehole wall by an eccentering
arm. The skid has a plough shaped leading edge to cut through any mud cake present on the
borehall wall. Any mud cake that is not removed will effect the tool reading. The dual
detectors of the FDC tool automatically compensate for mud cake effects. The corrected
bulk density (Pb) and the correction made (∆ρ) are recorded on the FDC log.
2-75
March 1995
Figure 2.40 Log-derived Shale Bulk Density Plot on

Semi-logarithmic Scales
NORMAL
COMPACTION
TREND LINE
DEPTH
CAP ROCK
TOP OF
OVERPRESSURES
2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.7

SHALE BULK DENSITY (gm/cc)
WEOX02.117
2-76
March 1995
A plot of shale bulk density versus depth on either linear or semi-log scales will show a
straight line normal compaction trend. Since the bulk density of shales is inversely
proportional to porosity, and an increase in shale porosity indicates abnormal pressures,
then a decrease in shale bulk density from the normal compaction trend line will indicate
abnormal pressures. The semi-log type plot is shown schematically in Figure 2.40.
The densities from non-washed-out pure shale sections should be plotted. After the normal
compaction trend line has been established, the equivalent depth method (See ‘Sonic’ and
‘Resistivity Logs’) may be used to estimate the magnitude of formation pressures.
The use of shale bulk density trends from the formation density log should be a fairly reliable
overpressure indicator. However, it has been found that unless borehole conditions are ideal
(uniform gauge hole), the formation density log will not be as accurate or reliable for pressure
evaluation as other techniques based on sonic or resistivity logs.
2.4 Other Logs
Other wireline logs that have been used to evaluate formation pressures include the
spontaneous potential (SP) log, the neutron porosity log (CNL), the thermal neutron decay
time log (TDT), and also downhole gravity and nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) logs.
These techniques are discussed further by Fertl(17).
Also, the use of an MWD gamma ray log for formation pressure evaluation of US Gulf
Coast shales, has been discussed by Zoeller(34).
3 Direct Pressure Measurements

3.1 RFT/FIT Data
The repeat formation tester (RFT) is an electric wireline tool designed to measure formation
pressures and to obtain fluid samples from permeable formations. After it has been run in
the hole, the tool can be ‘set’ any number of times. This enables a series of pressure readings
to be taken and permits the Logging Engineer to ‘pre-test’, or ‘probe’ the formation for
permeable zones before attempting to take a fluid sample or a pressure recording.
The RFT was developed from the formation interval tester (FIT) which is only able to take
one, less accurate, pressure measurement whilst taking a sample. However, the FIT is able
to take a pressure measurement/sample in cased hole by using a shaped charge to perforate
the casing.
A schematic diagram of the RFT pre-test and sampling principle is shown in Figure 2.41.
2-77
March 1995
FILTER PROBE
PACKER
FLOWLINE
PRESSURE GAUGE
EQUALIZING VALVE CHAMBER No 1

(TO MUD COLUMN)
CHAMBER No 2
PRETEST
CHAMBER
SEAL VALVE SEAL VALVE

(TO LOWER SAMPLE (TO UPPER SAMPLE
CHAMBER) CHAMBER)
WEOX02.118
Figure 2.41 Schematic diagram showing the RFT Pre-test

and Sampling Principle
When the tool is set, a packer moves out on one side and back-up pistons move out on the
opposite side. This forces the packer against the borehole wall and holds the body of the
tool away from the wall to reduce the chances of differential sticking. The probe is then
forced into the formation and opened by retracting the filter probe piston. This operation is
shown in Figure 2.42.
The two pre-test chambers are then operated sequentially, each sampling a small volume
(10cc) of the formation fluid at different rates (assuming that the formation is permeable).
A filter in the flowline probe prevents sand entry into the tool and the piston cleans the filter
when the tool is retracted. A strain gauge pressure transducer monitors the pressure during
the pre-test. The pressure is continuously recorded at surface in both analogue and digital
form. An analogue pressure recording from a typical pre-test is shown in Figure 2.43.
2-78
March 1995
MUD CAKE
PACKER
PROBE
UNCONSOLIDATED
PISTON
SAND
FLOWLINE
FILTER
PROBE CLOSED PROBE OPEN

DURING AND SAMPLING
INITIAL SET
WEOX02.119
Figure 2.42 Diagram showing the Operation of the

RFT Sample Probe
FLOWRATE, Q
q2
q1 SHUT-IN
TIME, t
t=0 t1 t2
HYDROSTATIC
PRESSURE, P
PRESSURE FORMATION
PRESSURE
P1
P2
TIME, t
WEOX02.120
Figure 2.43 Example of an RFT Analogue

Pressure Recording
2-79
March 1995
The initial pressure (See Figure 2.43) before the tool is set is the hydrostatic pressure of the
mud column. When the tool is set, the pressure rises slightly due to the compression of the
mud cake by the packer. The probe piston then retracts giving a drop in pressure due to the
flowline volume expansion and communication with the formation. When the piston stops
retracting, there is a slight pressure rise because the packer continues to compress the mud
cake until the tool is fully set.
The pressure then drops again as the first 10cc pre-test piston starts to retract (at time tO).
After about 15 seconds, the first pre-test chamber is full (at time t1) and the second piston
begins moving at a rate 2.5 times faster than the first piston. The pressure thus drops further
until the second pre-test chamber is full (at time t2 ). The pressure then builds up towards a
final pressure, which is usually that of the original formation pressure(30). Finally, the probe
and packer are retracted and the mud hydrostatic pressure is again measured.
Thus, the RFT provides three distinct pieces of pressure data:
• The mud column hydrostatic pressure (two readings).
• The formation pressure.
• The pressure transient induced by the withdrawal of a small sample of formation fluid
(2 x 10cc).
The two mud hydrostatic pressure readings are compared to verify the stability of the tool’s
recording system. The two values should be within a few psi of each other.
The formation pressure is used to verify estimates made whilst drilling the well and to
construct a reservoir pressure profile. This will yield data on the pressure gradients and
nature of the reservoir fluids.
The pressure/flowrate/time data from the pre-test sample withdrawal can be used to calculate
reservoir characteristics, such as permeability.
Hence, the RFT provides accurate data on formation pressures. However, formation pressure
data can only be obtained from permeable formations such as reservoir sandstones. These
formations may or may not be at the same pressure as adjacent shales.
RFTs are normally run at the request of the Geologists/Petroleum Engineers to seek
information on potential reservoir formations. However, in deep high pressure wells, the
RFT is being increasingly run to obtain accurate formation pressures before potentially
troublesome drilling operations (such as coring) are commenced. Accurate knowledge of
formation pressures in such wells allows fine mud weight adjustments to be made to minimise
the risk of swab/surge pressure problems.
2-80
March 1995
Figure 2.44 Example of a Typical Drillstem Test String

(for a high pressure gas well) showing
Position of Gauges
DESCRIPTION
Flowhead
Tubing
Lubricator Valve
Tubing
5in PIPE RAMS 5in Slick Joint
Tubing
5in Slick Joint
Tubing
MUD LINE
Downhole Safety Valve (surface controlled)
Tubing
Annulus pressure operated Downhole Shut-in Tool

(including tubing reverse-out facilities)
Tubing
Nipple
Tubing (2 joints)
Crossover
Pressure Gauge Carrier + 2 Gauges
Drill Collar (1 joint)
Drill Collar (1 joint)
No-Go Shoulder of Seal Assembly
Permanent Packer
Millout Extension
Seal Assembly
Seal Bore Extension

Liner
WEOX02.121
2-81
March 1995
3.2 Drillstem Test Data
Whenever drillstem tests are carried out on potential reservoir formations, various pressure
gauges are run in the hole with the test string. The purpose of these pressure gauges is to
record the downhole pressure during the sequence of flow and shut-in periods that comprise
the drillstem test (DST). The pressures recorded during the test are used to calculate reservoir
characteristics such as formation pressure, permeability, skin damage and productivity index.
Various types of pressure gauges are available. These are run in conjunction with clocks
and recorders, and include:
• Mechanical gauges – normally bourdon tube (BT) type pressure gauges with mechanical
clocks and recorders.
• Electronic gauges – strain gauge, quartz crystal or bourdon tube type pressure gauges
with electronic clocks. Data are recorded on various types of electronic memories and
read from the gauge on surface after the test by a special reader.
• Electronic surface read out (SRO) gauges – strain gauge or quartz crystal type pressure
gauges linked by cable to the surface where downhole pressures are continuously
monitored and recorded.
The mechanical and electronic gauges can be run in various ways/positions in the test string:
• Set in a wireline nipple (hence retrievable during or after a test).
• Hung off in the tailpipe (below the packer) using a DST hanging kit.
• Placed in a ‘bundle carrier ’ or ‘gauge carrier’ in various positions in the string.
The SRO gauges are always placed above the tester valve (above the packer) as they are
connected to surface equipment by a cable. A typical DST string is shown in Figure 2.44
(for a gas well test). This illustrates the various positions of the pressure gauges in the
DST␣string.
After a DST has been successfully completed, the test string is pulled and the pressure
gauges are retrieved for the pressure charts to be read. A typical valid pressure chart from a
mechanical gauge placed below the tester valve is shown in Figure 2.45. Note that a linear
plot of the pressures recorded by an electronic gauge should have the same general form,
without the baseline.
The significant events during the test (marked by capital letters) on Figure 2.45 are as follows:
A: Atmospheric pressure at surface.
A-B: The gauge is run in the hole with the test string and records increasing hydrostatic
pressure. The early ‘steps’ effect is the result of pauses to pump the water cushion
into the test string.
B: At test interval depth, the gauge records the hydrostatic pressure of the mud column.
C: The packer is set, squeezing the sump below the packer and causing an increase in
pressure.
D-E: The tester valve is opened and the gauge is suddenly subjected to the reduced
hydrostatic pressure of the water cushion alone.
2-82
March 1995
C D
B M N
G
L
PRESSURE
E F
H J
BASE
A O LINE
TIME
WEOX02.122
Figure 2.45 Example of a Typical Pressure Chart from a

Mechanical Gauge placed below the Tester
Valve in the DST String
E-F: The influx of reservoir fluid into the test string adds to the pressure of the partial
water cushion.
F: The tester valve is shut after an initial 5 to 10 minute short flow period.
F-G: The reservoir pressure slowly builds up. After 30 minutes, no more build up is seen.
The gauge now gives an estimate of the virgin reservoir pressure (G).
G-H: The tester valve is now opened again and the reservoir is exposed to hydrostatic
pressure of the fluids in the test string.
H-I: The reservoir flows again and the gauge pressure increases until the water cushion
reaches the surface.
I-J: As the reservoir fluid replaces the water cushion in the test string, the gauge pressure
decreases until all the water cushion has been unloaded (J).
J-K: The pressure continues to fall due to wellbore effects before steadying out as the
flow into the wellbore becomes radial.
K: The tester valve is closed at the end of the second flow period.
K-L: The reservoir pressure starts to build up again as it returns to equilibrium.
L-M: The packer is unset at the end of the second build up period and the pressure gauge
again reads the pressure of the annulus mud column.
N-O: The test string is pulled out of the hole and the gauge pressures reduces.
O: Finally, the gauge is back on surface and reads atmospheric pressure.
2-83
March 1995
Analysis of the pressure build up data from the shut-in periods can then give accurate
estimates of the reservoir formation pressure. An example of this analysis is given in the BP
Guide to Testing Operations.
Thus, data from drillstem tests can give accurate estimates of formation pressures. However,
the pressure data can only be obtained from permeable reservoir formations that are
considered to have sufficient hydrocarbon potential to warrant the expense of a drillstem
test. As with RFT pressure data, the reservoir pressure calculated from DST data may or
may not be the same as the pressures in adjacent shales.
4 Summary
The most accurate estimates of formation pressures are obtained from wireline RFT
measurements and drillstem test pressure data. However, these direct measurements are
only possible in permeable formations such as sandstones and limestones. These methods
are clearly not applicable to impermeable shale sections (where the majority of overpressures
are developed).
Conversely, estimates of formation pressures from wireline logs are restricted to

shale␣sections, with assumptions made as to the pressures in any adjacent permeable sections.
The recognition of a normal shale compaction trend line is of vital importance
when␣estimating formation pressures from log-derived shale properties. Of the various logs
available, the sonic log is usually the best log for quantitative pressure evaluation as it
is␣ r elatively unaf fected by changes in hole size, formation temperature, and formation
water␣salinity .
Section 2 References
1. ANSTEY, N.A., 1976. the New Seismic Interpreter – Videotape Manual, International
Human Resources Development Corporation, Boston, Massachusetts, USA.
2. BARR, M.V., 1983. An Appraisal of Seismic Reflection Techniques for the Recognition
and Prediction of Abnormal Formation Pressures. Report PEB/55/83. BP Research
Centre, Sunbury.
3. BELLOTTI, P. and GERARD, R.E., 1976. Instantaneous Log Indicates Porosity and
Pore Pressure. World Oil, Oct. 1976.
4. BINGHAM, M.G., 1965. A New Approach to Interpreting Rock Drillability. Oil and
Gas Journal, Nov. 2 1964?Apr. 5 1965.
5. BOURGOYNE, A.T., 1971. A Graphic Approach to Overpressure Detection While

Drilling. Pet. Eng. 43(9): 76?78.
6. “BP”, 1985. A Guide to Testing Operations. BP Exploration Co. Ltd., Operations Support
Division, London. June 1985.
7. “BP”, 1986. A Wellsite Guide to Logging Operations. BP Exploration Co.Ltd., Logging

Operations Branch, London. January 1986.
8. “BP”, 1985. Resident Geologists Manual. BPPD Aberdeen. 2nd Edition, Sept. 1985.
9. COCHRANE, D.F. and HARDMAN, P., 1986. Shallow Gas Hazards in Drilling
Operations. Report DTG/L/1/1986. BPPD London.
2-84
March 1995
10. COMBS, G.D., 1968. Prediction of Pore Pressure from Penetration Rate. SPE Paper␣2162.
11. DIX, C.H., 1955. Seismic Velocities from Surface Measurements. Geophysics, 20: 68?86.
12. EATON, B.A., 1975. The Equation of Geopressure Prediction from Well Logs.
SPE␣Paper␣5544.
13. “EXLOG”, 1980. Field Geologist’s Training Guide. Exploration Logging Inc., USA.
14. “EXLOG”, 1979. Mud Logging: Principles and Interpretations. Exploration Logging
Inc., USA.
15. “EXLOG”, 1981. Theory and Evaluation of Formation Pressures. Exploration Logging
Inc., USA.
16. “EXXON”, 1975. Abnormal Pressure Technology, Exxon Company, USA.
17. FERTL, W.H., 1976. Abnormal Formation Pressures. Elsevier Scientific Publishing
Company, Amsterdam.
18. FOSTER, J.B., amd WHALEN, H.E., 1966. Estimation of Formation Pressures from
Electrical Surveys – Offshore Louisiana. SPE Paper 1200.
19. “GEARHART”, 1986. Overpressure. Gearhart Geodata Services Ltd., Aberdeen.
20. HOTTMAN, C.E., and JOHNSON, R.K., 1965. Estimation of Formation Pressures from
Log-derived Shale Properties. Journal of Petroleum Technology, 17: 717-723.
21. JORDEN, J.R., and SHIRLEY, O.J., 1966. Application of Drilling Performance Data to
Overpressure Detection. Journal of Petroleum Technology, 18: 1387-1394.
22. LESSO, W.G. and BURGESS, T.M., 1986. Pore Pressure and Porosity from MWD
Measurements. IADC/SPE Paper 14801.
23. MANN, D.M., 1985. The Generation of Overpressures During Sedimentation and
their␣Ef fects on the Primary Migration of Petroleum. Report GCB/156/85. BP Research
Centre, Sunbury.
24. MINTON, R.C., 1986. Technical Specification for Drilling Mud Logging Service.
Report␣DTG/D/4/86. BPPD Aberdeen.
25. PENNEBAKER, E.S., 1968. An Engineering Interpretation of Seismic Data. SPE

Paper␣2165.
26. PRENTICE, C.M., 1980. Formation Pressures from Normalized Penetration Rate Plots.
Prentice and Records Enterprises, Inc., Lafayette, Louisiana, USA.
27. REHM, W.A., and McCLENDON, R., 1971. Measurement of Formation Pressure from
Drilling Data. SPE Paper 3601.
28. ROESLER, R.F., BARNETT, W.C., and PASKE, W.C., 1986. Theory and Applications
of an MWD Neutron Porosity Sensor. SPE/IADC Paper 16057.
29. “SCHLUMBERGER”, 1972. Log Interpretation Volume 1 – Principles. Schlumberger

Ltd., New York, USA.
30. “SCHLUMBERGER”, 1981. RFT – Essentials of Pressure Test Interpretation.

Schlumberger Ltd.,
2-85
March 1995
31. SINGH, J., 1987. A Review of Measurement-While-Drilling Systems. Report DTG/L3.

BPPD London.
32. VIDRINE, D.J., and BENIT, E.J., 1967. Field Verification of the Effect of Differential
Pressure on Drilling Rate. SPE Paper 1859.
33. ZOELLER, W.A., 1970. The Drilling Porosity Log “DPL”. SPE Paper 3066.
34. ZOELLER, W.A., 1983. Pore Pressure Detection from the MWD Gamma Ray.
SPE␣Paper␣12166.
2-86
March 1995
3 PRIMARY WELL CONTROL

Paragraph Page
1 General 3-2
2 Hydrostatic Pressure 3-2
3 Equivalent Mud Weight, EMW 3-2
4 Circulating Pressures and ECD 3-4
5 Calculating the Circulating Pressure Losses 3-7
6 Swab and Surge Pressures 3-10
7 Swab and Surge Calculations 3-12
Illustrations
3.1 Hydrostatic Pressure 3-3
3.2 The Effect of Flowline Elevation – shown in relation
to calculation of formation pressure 3-5
3.3 Example Calculation of the Equivalent Circulating
Density (ECD) 3-6
3.4 Theoretical Variation in Swab/Surge Pressure
– when tripping pipe at constant speed 3-11
3.5 Pressure Surges associated with Lowering Pipe into
a Borehole 3-12
3-1
March 1995
1 General
Primary well control is maintained by controlling formation pore pressures with the
hydrostatic pressure of the drilling fluid.
Primary well control is exercised between two distinct limits; these being the maximum
formation pore pressure gradient and the minimum fracture pressure gradient in a section of
openhole.
This Chapter is intended to outline the various factors that can influence the actual pressure
exerted by the drilling fluid in the wellbore during routine drilling operations.
The effect of the following is considered:
• Flowline elevation.
• Circulation.
• Tripping pipe.
Easy to use formulae are presented to predict the effects of these factors.
2 Hydrostatic Pressure
The hydrostatic pressure of a column of drilling fluid is determined, in theory, by the density,
and vertical height of the fluid above a point of interest.
The density of the drilling fluid and the height of the fluid column are related to the hydrostatic
pressure as follows:
Hydrostatic pressure (psi) = MW (SG) X D (m) X 1.421
Figure 3.1 shows a sample calculation.
3 Equivalent Mud Weight, EMW

The most convenient method of describing downhole pressure is in terms of an equivalent
mud weight (EMW).
EMW is used in order that downhole pressure can easily, and without confusion, be related
to the density of a mud column. EMW can therefore be used to describe a formation pressure
as well as a pressure applied by a column of mud.
The hydrostatic pressure of the mud column acts as a result of the height of fluid between
the flowline and the point of interest in the wellbore. The EMW must therefore be referenced
to the flowline.
3-2
March 1995
Figure 3.1 Hydrostatic Pressure
A B
VERTICAL DEPTH
= 1000m
MEASURED DEPTH
= 1200m
MUD @ 1.5 SG
The hydrostatic pressure at total depth in well A and well B

= Density of the (SG) x vertical depth (m) x 1.421
= 1.5 x 1000 x 1.421 = 2130 psi
WEOX02.123
3-3
March 1995
It is important therefore that the effect of flowline elevation be considered when describing
formation pressures in terms of an equivalent mud weight. This is because formation pressures
are originally referred to sea-level, or the surface elevation, depending on whether the well
is offshore or on land.
Figure 3.2 shows an example of the calculation of the EMW of a normally pressured formation
referenced to the flowline of a semi-submersible drilling rig.
4 Circulating Pressures and ECD

When the well is static, the applied pressure at a given point in the well is equal to the
hydrostatic pressure exerted by the head of fluid above that point.
Therefore if the hole is full to the flowline of 1.5 SG fluid, the EMW at any point in the
hole, referenced to the flowline, is 1.5 SG. However, if the pumps are started, the EMW at
every point in the well will no longer be equal to the weight of the mud. The EMW will be
greater than 1.5 SG at every point in the wellbore.
The increase in EMW is due to the frictional pressure resulting from the flow of the mud up
the annulus. At each point in the well the EMW is increased by a factor reflecting the total
frictional pressure above that point.
Consider the example of a land well in Figure 3.3. As shown, when the well is being
circulated, the downhole pressures are described as equivalent circulating density or ECD.
There are many factors that can affect the ECD in a particular well, however the most
fundamental factors are:
• The hole depth.
• The circulation rate.
• The mud weight.
• The rheology of the mud.
• The size of the hole.
• The OD of the drillstring.
• The quantity of cuttings in the annulus.

(The presence of cuttings and drilled solids in the mud will have the effect of increasing
the effective mud weight and changing the mud rheology.)
It is clearly important to be able to estimate circulating pressure losses in order to be able to

predict both the pump pressure and downhole ECD at specified circulating rates.
The next paragraph details the formulae that can be used to estimate circulating
pressure␣losses.
3-4
March 1995
Figure 3.2 The Effect of Flowline Elevation

– shown in relation to calculation of
formation pressure
1 NORMALLY PRESSURED SHOWING 2 SAND EQUIVALENT MUD WEIGHT

SAND @ 300m BELOW SEA LEVEL REFERENCED TO THE FLOWLINE OF A
SEMISUBMERSIBLE DRILLING RIG
FLOWLINE ELEVATION
25m
SEA LEVEL
100m
SEA BED
200m
Formation pressure at 325m BRT

= 1.03 x 1.421 x 300
= 439psi
Normal pore pressure gradient Formation pressure at this point

= 1.03 SG referenced to the flowline, in EMW
= 439
= 1.421 x 325
= 0.95 SG
WEOX02.124
3-5
March 1995
Figure 3.3 Example Calculation of the Equivalent

Circulating Density (ECD)
A HOLE STATIC B HOLE BEING CIRCULATED
PUMP
1.5 SG MUD IN
THE HOLE
2000m Pressure drop = 100psi
Total pressure at shoe

Hydrostatic pressure EMW = (1.5 x 2000 x 1.421) + 100
= 1.5 SG = 4363psi
ECD at shoe = 4363
2000 x 1.421
= 1.54 SG
500m Pressure drop = 150psi
Total pressure at TD
Hydrostatic pressure EMW = (1.5 x 2500 x 1.421) + 250
= 1.5 SG = 5579psi
ECD at TD = 5577
2500 x 1.421
= 1.57 SG
WEOX02.125
3-6
March 1995
5 Calculating the Circulating Pressure Losses

There are various models that attempt to describe the rheology of drilling fluids. The most
widely used are the Bingham, Power Law and Modified Power Law Models.
The best results have been obtained using the Modified Power Law to model the behaviour
of water base drilling fluids.
Very large discrepancies have been recorded between predicted and actual circulating
pressures when using the Modified Power Law to model the behaviour of oil base drilling
fluids. The cause of this discrepancy is considered to be primarily the variation in rheological
characteristics of the oil mud under the influence of downhole conditions.
The Bingham Model is considerably easier to use than the Modified Power Law and, as a
result, it is recommended for field use when the BP Hydraulics Programme is not available.
It is recognised that, at low velocity, the Bingham model may overestimate the friction
pressure of a mud that exhibits low gel strength.
The following procedure can be used to approximate circulating pressure losses using the
Bingham Model.
(a) For use inside the pipe:

1. Calculate PV and YP.
PV = Ø600 – Ø300 and YP = Ø300 – PV
2. Calculate the mud velocity.
v = 7.47 X Q (m/min)
d i2
3. Calculate the pressure loss for the pipe section, assuming laminar flow.
P= L X PV X v + L X YP (psi)
8361.5 X d i2 68.6 X d i
4. Calculate the effective viscosity.
µ = 8361.5 X P X d i2 (centipoise)
LXv
5. Calculate the Reynolds number.
Re = 422.8 X MW X v X d i2
µ
The critical Reynolds number is assumed to be 2000 for Bingham fluids. If Re is␣less
than 2000, the flow is assumed to be laminar and the pressure loss is calculated␣using
the formula in step 3. If Re is greater than 2000, the flow is assumed to be non␣laminar
and the pressure loss must be re-calculated using the formulae in steps 6 and 7:
3-7
March 1995
6. Calculate the Fanning friction factor.
f= 0.079
Re 0.25
7. Calculate the pressure loss for the pipe section in non laminar flow.
P= f X L X MW X v 2 (psi)
315.8 X d i
8. Calculate the critical velocity.

(ie the velocity above which the flow will be non laminar)
1
7.76 X PV + [7.76 X (PV2 + (102.79 X YP X MW X di2 ) )2 ]
vc = (m/min)
MW X di
(b) For use in the annulus:

1. Calculate the mud velocity.
v = 7.47 X Q (m/min)
dhc 2 – d o2
2. Calculate the pressure loss for the section of annulus assuming laminar␣flow .
P= L X PV X v + L X YP (psi)
5574.32 (dhc – d o)2 60.96 (dhc – do )
3. Calculate the effective viscosity.
µ= 5574.32 X P X (dhc – d o)2 (centipoise)

LXv
4. Calculate the Reynolds number.
Re = 422.8 X MW X v X (dhc – d o)
µ
The critical Reynolds number is assumed to be 3000 for Bingham fluids. If Re is

less than 3000, the flow in this section of the annulus is assumed to be laminar and
the pressure loss is calculated using the formula in step 2. If Re is greater than 3000,
the flow is assumed to be non laminar and the pressure loss must be re-calculated
using the formulae in steps 5 and 6:
5. Calculate the Fanning friction factor.
f = 0.079
Re 0.25
6. Calculate the pressure loss for the section of the annulus in non laminar
flow.
P= f X L X MW X v 2 (psi)
315.8 X (dhc – d o)
3-8
March 1995
7. Calculate the critical velocity.

(The velocity above which the flow will be non laminar)
1
11.63 X PV + [11.63 X (PV2 + (51.46 X MW X YP X (dhc – do)2))2 ]
vc =
MW X (dhc – do)
(m/min)
(c) To calculate the pressure drop across the bit:

1. Calculate the nozzle velocity.
vn = Q (m/sec)
An X 10.23
2. Calculate the bit pressure loss.
∆Pbit = vn2 X MW (psi)

12.49
where v = mud velocity (m/min)

vn = nozzle velocity (m/min)
Q = pump output (gal/min)
di = ID of pipe (in.)
dhc = ID of hole/casing (in.)
do = OD of pipe (in.)
L = length of section of pipe/annulus (m)
PV = plastic viscosity (centipiose)
YP = yield point (lb/100ft2)
MW = mud weight (SG)
µ = effective viscosity (centipiose)
Ø600 = Fann viscometer reading at 600 rpm (lb/100ft2)
Ø300 = Fann viscometer reading at 300 rpm (lb/100ft2)
An = total nozzle area (in.2)
P = section pressure loss (psi)
∆Pbit = bit pressure loss (psi)
These formulae can be used to estimate the pressure drop in each section of pipe and annulus.
The standpipe circulating pressure can be estimated from the sum of the pressure losses
across the bit and in all sections of the pipe and the annulus. The ECD at the bottom of the
hole can be estimated from the total annulus pressure loss.
The annulus pressure losses may also be estimated when circulating by subtracting the
calculated pressure drop in the drillstring and the bit from the actual standpipe pressure
(accounting also for surface pressure losses).
This technique is likely to yield a more accurate estimate of the annulus pressure losses for
the following reasons:
• The inside measurements of the drillstring are more accurate than the openhole internal
diameter.
• The pressure drop through the bit is accurately modelled by the formula presented.
• The effect of loading the annulus with cuttings is measured directly.
3-9
March 1995
The main disadvantage of this technique stems from the fact that the majority of the pressure
loss in the system is in the drillstring and across the bit. Therefore, a small error in the
calculated pressure drop will cause a relatively large error in the estimate of the annulus
pressure loss.
6 Swab and Surge Pressures

Swab and surge pressures are caused by the movement of pipe in and out of the wellbore.
Traditionally swab and surge pressures have been calculated using a steady state model that
is based on the assumption that swab and surge pressures are caused by three effects:
• Viscous drag of the mud as the pipe is moved.
• Inertial forces of the mud when the speed of the pipe is changed.
• Breaking the mud gel.
Therefore the factors that determine the magnitude of swab and surge pressures are assumed
to be:
• The annular clearance.
• The viscosity of the mud.
• The gel strength of the mud.
• The speed of the pipe.
• The length of low clearance pipe in the hole.
• The position of the low clearance pipe in the hole in relation to the point of interest.
• The acceleration or deceleration of the pipe.
On the basis of these assumptions, typical variations in wellbore pressure due to swab and
surge pressures whilst tripping pipe are shown in Figures 3.4 and 3.5.
Recent studies however, have shown that steady state models are not adequate to model the
behaviour of the mud while the pipe is tripped. It has been shown that swab and surge
pressures are best modelled as a transient, rather than a steady state phenomenon.
The transient model assumes that a pressure wave is propogated at the instant that the pipe
begins to move; the wave then travels down the well at the speed of sound and is reflected
back up the hole. As a result of this effect, the pressure at a point in the well oscillates. The
oscillations will continue until either the pipe reaches a steady speed, or the pipe has stopped
and the reflected pressure waves have diminished.
3-10
March 1995
Figure 3.4 Theoretical Variation in Swab/Surge Pressure

– when tripping pipe at constant speed
1 RUNNING IN THE HOLE 2 PULLING OUT OF THE HOLE
1 Increase due to 4 Reduction due to

BHA removal of BHA from
the hole
2 Increase due to 3 Reduction due

drillpipe to removal
of drillpipe
from the hole
BIT DEPTH
BIT DEPTH
MAX SURGE MAX SWAB

PRESSURE PRESSURE
A WHEN BIT IS A WHEN BIT IS
AT POINT AT POINT
OF INTEREST OF INTEREST
2 Influence of BHA
3 Decrease as BHA
passes point A
4 Constant stage 1 Constant swab

pressure due to pressure due to
drillpipe in drillpipe in
the casing the casing
SURGE PRESSURE AT A SWAB PRESSURE AT A
WEOX02.126
3-11
March 1995
D
A Negative Surge – Pipe Lifted from
Slips
B Positive Pressure to Break Mud Gel
B C Minimum Pipe Velocity
D Maximum Pipe Velocity
E Negative Surge – Sudden Pipe
Stoppage
PRESSURE
TIME
WEOX02.127
Figure 3.5 Pressure Surges associated with Lowering

Pipe into a Borehole
The latest swab/surge software models the behaviour of the mud as a transient phenomenon
and also accounts for the following factors:
• The compressibility of the mud.
• The elasticity of the wellbore.
• The change in rheological properties of the mud with pressure and temperature.
• The temperature profile in the wellbore.
• The elasticity of the pipe.
7 Swab and Surge Calculations

The swab/surge software that is able to model the transient response of the mud to pipe
movement has been developed by Sunbury.
The software used by mud logging companies currently uses a steady state model. The
swab/surge pressures predicted by this model are subject to inaccuracy; especially in deep
wells when the transient response of the mud is most significant.
3-12
March 1995
The formulae used for the steady state model are relatively easy to use and, as such, may be
used in the field to approximate swab/surge pressures.
The following procedure should be used to calculate swab/surge pressure for either open or
closed pipe:
1. Estimate the velocity of the mud for a given pipe running speed.
do 2
For closed pipe: v = CL + X vp
dhc2 – do 2
do 2 – di 2
For open pipe: v = CL + X vp
dhc2 – do 2 – di 2
where v = velocity of the mud (m/min)

CL = clinging constant
vp = average running speed of the pipe (m/min)
The clinging constant, K, is assumed to equal 0.45 in the absence of detailed formula
that are used to predict this quantity.
2. Determine the maximum mud velocity.
The maximum mud velocity is generally taken to be 1.5 X the average velocity (as
calculated in (1)).
3. Determine the swab/surge pressures due to the pipe movement.
The swab/surge pressure resulting from the pipe movement can be estimated by
substituting the maximum annular mud velocity as calculated in (2) into the formulae
for annular pressure loss (Bingham or Power Law).
The swab/surge pressure is added to the hydrostatic pressure of the mud if the pipe is
being run into the hole and subtracted if the pipe is being pulled. Therefore:
EMW at point of interest = MW ± sumP (SG)

D X 1.421
where sumP = total swab/surge pressure (psi)
D = vertical depth to point of interest (m)
Preston Moore’s method can be used to approximate swab/surge pressures due to the
movement of a drillstring that contains a bit with nozzles. The range of values for the resultant
swab/surge pressure that are predicted by this technique should be treated with some caution,
as it is generally assumed that it will predict low values of swab/surge pressures.
The upper limit for swab/surge pressures for a drillstring with a bit and nozzles will be
represented by the value calculated for closed pipe.
3-13
March 1995
The procedure for calculating swab/surge pressures for a drillstring that contains a bit and
nozzles is as follows:
1. Calculate the velocity of the mud around the drillpipe for open pipe.
Use the formulae as shown for the previous technique.
2. Calculate the swab/surge pressure generated by the drillpipe due to the

pipe movement.
The swab/surge pressure can be calculated by substituting the annular mud velocity in
the formulae for annular pressure loss (Bingham or Power Law).
3. Calculate the velocity of the mud around the collars.

Use the following formulae:
v(drillcollar) = v(drillpipe) X Adp

Adc
where Adp = cross-sectional area of drillpipe annulus (in.2)

Adc = cross-sectional area of drillcollar annulus (in.2 )
4. Calculate the swab/surge pressure generated at the collars due to

pipe␣movement.
Use the formulae for annular pressure loss (Bingham or Power Law) and v(drillcollar) as
calculated in (3).
5. Calculate the total annular swab/surge pressure.

This is equal to the sum of the swab/surge pressures at the drillpipe and the collars, or
the sum of (2) and (3).
6. Calculate the swab/surge pressure inside the drillstring.

Using Preston Moore’s assumption that the fluid level outside the pipe equals the level
inside the pipe, the velocity of the mud inside the pipe equals the velocity outside.
7. Calculate the swab/surge pressure generated inside the drillpipe.

Assuming that the mud velocity outside the pipe equals that inside the pipe, use the
formulae for internal pressure loss (Bingham or Power Law).
8. Calculate the swab/surge pressure generated inside the drillcollar.

Assuming that the mud velocity outside the drillcollar equals that inside the collar, use
the formulae for internal pressure loss (Bingham or Power Law).
9. Calculate the swab/surge pressure generated at the bit.

Using the formulae:
vn = Q (m/sec)
An X 10.23
∆P bit = vn2 X MW (psi)

12.49
where in this case the mud flowrate, Q, is equal to the mud flowrate through the collars.
3-14
March 1995
10. Calculate the total internal swab/surge pressure due to the pipe movement.
This is equal to the sum of the swab/surge pressures inside the drillstring, (6) plus (8),
plus the bit swab/surge pressure as calculated in (9).
11. Estimate the actual swab/surge pressure due to the pipe movement.
It is assumed that the actual swab/surge pressure will be between the values calculated
in (5) and (10).
The resultant swab/surge pressure is added to the hydrostatic pressure of the mud if the
pipe is being run into the hole and subtracted if the pipe is being pulled. Therefore:
EMW at the point of interest = MW ± sumP (SG)

D X 1.421
where sum P = total swab/surge pressure (psi)

D = vertical depth to point of interest (m)
3-15/16
3-15
March 1995
4 FRACTURE GRADIENT
Paragraph Page
1 General 4-2
2 Stresses in the Earth 4-2
3 Fracture Orientation 4-3
4 Fracture Gradient Prediction 4-4
5 Daines’ Method of Fracture Gradient Prediction 4-4
6 An Example Pressure Evaluation Log 4-7
7 Leak Off Tests 4-9
8 Leak Off Test Procedure 4-10
9 Interpretation of Results 4-11
Illustrations
4.1 Principal Stress Orientation 4-3
4.2 Poisson’s Ratio for Different Lithologies 4-5
4.3 An Example Pressure Evaluation Log
4.4 A Typical Fracture Test 4-12
4-1
March 1995
1 General
The absolute upper limit of primary well control is the point at which the wellbore pressure
equals the fracture pressure of the exposed formation. At this point a fracture is initiated
and the wellbore can no longer be considered to be a closed system. This will lead to loss of
mud from the hole and the possibility of the loss of primary control.
In order to drill a well safely therefore, it is useful for the Drilling Engineer to be able to
predict and measure fracture pressures.
At the well planning stage, the fracture gradient can be estimated from offset well data.
If␣this information is not available then Daines’ Method can be used to predict the fracture
gradient.
As the well is drilled, Leak Off Tests are carried out to assess the mud holding capability of
the openhole. It is Company policy that these tests be carried out to leak off point, which in
most cases will represent a pressure that is less than the actual fracture initiation pressure.
The leak off pressure is converted to an equivalent mud weight which determines the upper
limit of primary control for the next hole section.
LO tests are generally carried out once in each openhole section after drilling out of the
shoe. However the test should be repeated when weaker zones are drilled into. It is not
practical to conduct a leak off test at every change in formation and consequently it is useful
to be able to predict the fracture gradient of new formations without conducting further leak
off tests.
Before covering the techniques that are used to predict fracture gradient, it is appropriate to
explain the origins of the stresses that occur naturally below the surface of the earth.
2 Stresses in the Earth

At any point below the earth’s surface, the resultant stress in the rock can be resolved into
three principal stresses that act at right angles to each other; these being:
• The maximum stress.
• The intermediate stress.
• The minimum stress.
In most cases, the maximum stress will be vertical, due to the pressure of the overlying rock
and pore fluid. This is defined as the overburden pressure.
In a tectonically relaxed area the maximum stress will, in most cases, be vertical and the
stresses in the horizontal plane will be equal. At shallow depths however, the horizontal
stress may be greater than the vertical stress, even in a tectonically relaxed area.
Figure 4.1 shows the effect of tectonic forces on the principal stresses. A small tectonic
force ensures that the two principal stresses in the horizontal plane are no longer equal. This
has the effect of creating an actual intermediate stress.
4-2
March 1995
σ'1 = maximum principal stress

σ'2 = intermediate principal stress
σ'3 = minimum principal stress
σ'3
σ'1
σ'1
σ'2
σ'2 σ'3
σ'3 σ'2 σ'1
1 – Tectonically relaxed area 2 – under the influence of a 3 – in an area that is significantly

– σ'1 is vertical small tectonic stress affected by tectonic stress
– σ'2 = σ'3 – σ'1 is vertical – σ'1 is horizontal
– induced fractures will be – σ'2 = σ3 an actual – induced fractures will be
vertical intermediate stress is horizontal
created
WEOX02.128
Figure 4.1 Principal Stress Orientation
In an area where tectonic stresses are particularly high, it is possible that the maximum
principal stress acts horizontally. This may be the case, for example, in a mountainous region
where the formations may be severely folded. However, this is unlikely to occur at great
depths where the overburden pressure is generally the predominant factor.
3 Fracture Orientation
A fracture will be created if wellbore pressures exceed the minimum principal stress at any
point in the openhole.
The fracture will propogate along the path of minimum resistance, which will be at right
angles to the direction of the minimum principal stress.
Fractures will therefore be vertical when the minimum principal stress is horizontal, and
horizontal if the minimum principal stress is vertical. (See Figure 4.1).
Consequently induced fractures will be vertical in areas where tectonic forces are negligible,
except possibly at very shallow depths. However horizontal fractures may be formed in
areas where tectonic forces are significant. In effect, it is necessary for the applied pressure
to lift the weight of the overburden for horizontal fractures to be formed. This is unlikely to
occur at depth when overburden pressure will, in most cases, be greater than pressures due
to tectonic forces.
4-3
March 1995
4 Fracture Gradient Prediction

Many different techniques can be used to estimate fracture gradients. Hubbert and Willis
were the first to derive a method, but they were followed, amongst others, by Ben Eaton
whose technique is currently used by Anadrill, Geoservices and Gearhart.
Eaton’s Method was refined by Daines, in 1982, whose technique has since been used by
Exlog.
Eaton’s Method is most applicable to predicting fracture pressures in areas where a great
deal of data relating to subsurface stress regimes is already available. Eaton’s Method relies
on the availability of accurate locally calculated stress coefficients to predict fracture
pressures. When such information is available, such as in the Gulf Coast, this method has
been shown to be very accurate.
However, in areas where the subsurface stress regime is relatively unknown, it is not possible
to use Eaton’s Method with any degree of accuracy.
Daines’ Method is particularly useful in wildcat areas, because the result of the first LO test
carried out in a competent formation is used to measure the subsurface stress regime directly.
The coefficients that are used to calculate the fracture pressures are specific to each lithology,
but are applicable worldwide. As a result, once the first LO test has been carried out, it is
possible to predict the fracture pressure in subsequent formations with reasonable accuracy.
This technique has proved particularly accurate in wildcat wells in the North Sea.
5 Daines’ Method of Fracture Gradient Prediction

Having conducted the first LO test in a competent formation, Daines’ Method can be used
to predict fracture pressures in all types of formation types, with the use of the values for
Poisson’s ratio as shown in Figure 4.2.
The following procedure can be used after the first LO Test (assuming the maximum effective
stress to be vertical and due to the overburden):
1. Calculate the magnitude of the tectonic stress.
The magnitude of the tectonic stress is calculated at the depth of the first LO test. This
is done using the following formula:
µ
σt = Pfrac – σ'l – Pf
l–µ
where σt = tectonic stress (psi)
Pfrac = fracture pressure (psi)
σ'1 = maximum effective principle stress (psi)
µ = Poisson’s ratio for the rock
Pf = formation pore pressure (psi)
and σ'1 = S – Pf
where S = overburden pressure (psi)
4-4
March 1995
Figure 4.2 Poisson’s Ratio for Different Lithologies
Clay, very wet 0.50
Clay 0.17
Conglomerate 0.20
Dolomite 0.21
Greywacke:
coarse 0.07
fine 0.23
medium 0.24
Limestone:
fine, medium 0.28
medium, calcarenitic 0.31
porous 0.20
stylolitic 0.27
fossiliferous 0.09
bedded fossils 0.17
shaley 0.17
Sandstone:
coarse 0.05
coarse, cemented 0.10
fine 0.03
very fine 0.04
medium 0.06
poorly sorted, clayey 0.24
fossiliferous 0.01
Shale:
Calcereous (<50% CaC03) 0.14
dolomitic 0.28
siliceous 0.12
silty (<70% silt) 0.17
sandy (<70% sand) 0.12
kerogenaceous 0.25
Siltstone 0.08
Slate 0.13
Tuff: Glass 0.13
From Weurker H.G: “Annotated Tables of Strength and Elastic Properties of Rocks,”
Drilling, reprint Series SPE Dallas (1963).
4-5
March 1995
The overburden pressure is determined from density logs, or from bulk densities determined
from the cuttings.
2. Calculate the tectonic stress coefficient.
The tectonic stress coefficient can be calculated as follows:
β = σt / σ'1
where β = tectonic stress coefficient
This value is used to predict the magnitude of the tectonic stress throughout the next␣hole
section until the next LO test can be used to recalculate the figure. It is however generally
the case that σ'1 remains directly proportional to σt throughout the well, if the rock
strata are horizontal and the basin structure does not change significantly with depth.
Having calculated the above figures at the first LO test, the fracture pressure can be calculated
as drilling proceeds in the following manner:
3. Calculate the maximum principal stress at the point of interest.
The magnitude of the maximum principal stress is calculated from the pore pressure
and the overburden pressure as follows:
σ'1 = S – Pf
where S = overburden pressure (psi)

Pf = pore pressure (psi)
The overburden pressure can be calculated from density logs, or from the bulk density
values determined from the cuttings.
4. Calculate the tectonic stress at the point of interest.
The magnitude of the tectonic stress is calculated from the maximum principal stress
and the tectonic stress coefficient as follows:
σ t = σ'1 X β
5. Calculate the fracture pressure at the point of interest.
Using Figure 4.2 to determine a value for the Poisson’s ratio for the rock, the fracture
pressure can be calculated from the following formula:
µ
Pfrac = σt + σ'l + Pf (psi)
l–µ
where P frac = fracture pressure at the point of interest (psi)
This procedure can be repeated as the well is drilled in order to map the trend in fracture
gradient with depth.
4-6
March 1995
6 An Example Pressure Evaluation Log

Figure 4.3 (contained in wallet) shows an example Pressure Evaluation Log produced by
Exlog for a well drilled in the North Sea.
From the 30 in. casing point to the 18 5/8 in. casing point, the formation is mudstone.
From␣the log, the fracture pressure appears to be greater than overburden pressure from the
seabed to approximately 1450m. This is a typical feature of young unconsolidated clays
which can behave as a liquid and as such have relatively high Poisson’s ratio of the order of
0.5. Such clays possess negligible shear strength and, as a result, the formation may only be
fractured by actually lifting the overburden. The calculated fracture gradient at shallow
depths should therefore be greater than the overburden; as shown in the following calculation
using Daines’ formula:
µ
Pfrac = σt + σ'l + Pf (SG)
l–µ
at 600m BRT the fracture pressure is calculated:
Pfrac = 0.4 (1.79 – 1.00) + (1.79 – 1.00) 0.44 + 1.0

l – 0.44
P frac = 1.93 SG
An interesting case would be to estimate the fracture gradient of a sand at these conditions
and at this depth. Using the same formula, but substituting a Poisson’s ratio of 0.01 for a
typical shallow marine sand, the fracture gradient is calculated as follows:
Pfrac = 0.4 (1.79 – 1.00) + (1.79 – 1.00) 0.01 + 1.0

l – 0.01
P frac = 1.32 SG
The possible variation in fracture gradients at these depths is therefore quite significant.
After 1450m, the clays have sufficiently dewatered due to compaction to support a horizontal
stress. As a result, the fracture gradient is reduced to a value that is less than the overburden
gradient. This means that vertical fractures may be formed at pressures lower than the
overburden pressure.
The tectonic stress coefficient is calculated from the result of the LO test carried out at the
18 5/8 in. casing shoe. This is the first point at which the clays are assumed to be adequately
compacted so as to predict a reasonable figure for the tectonic stress coefficient as follows:
µ
σt = Pfrac – σ'l – Pf (SG)
l–µ
4-7
March 1995
from the result of the LO test:
σt = 1.8 – (1.95 – 1.53) 0.2 – 1.53

l – 0.2
= 0.165 SG
therefore the tectonic stress coefficient is given by:
β= σt = 0.165 = 0.39
σ'1 (1.95 – 1.53)
and this value of – is used to calculate the tectonic stress in subsequent rock strata.
From the 18 5/8 in. shoe to 2880m, the fracture gradient increases in line with the overburden
gradient. At 2880m, the pore pressure gradient begins to decrease, causing a reduction in
the calculated fracture gradient to 1.88 SG at 3100m.
At 3120m, the formation changes to a sandstone interbedded with siltstone. A Poisson’s

ratio of 0.06 is chosen for these loose fine grained sands which results in a reduction in the
calculated value of the fracture gradient to approximately 1.72 SG.
At 3220m, the formation changes to limestone, for which a Poisson’s ratio of 0.28 is used.
Therefore at 3400m, the fracture gradient is calculated as follows using Daines’ formula:
µ
Pfrac = σt + σ'l + Pf (SG)
l–µ
where σ'1 = S – Pp = 2.24 – 1.25 = 0.99 SG
σ t = 0.39 – 0.99 = 0.39 SG
Therefore:
Pfrac = 0.39 + 0.99 0.28 + 1.25

l – 0.28
Pfrac = 2.03 SG
The LO test at the 13 3/8 in. shoe shows a fracture gradient of 2.13 SG, which is slightly
higher than the predicted figure.
The fracture pressure then increases with depth and pore pressure throughout the 12 1/4 in.
section to a calculated maximum of 2.23 SG at the 9 5/8 in. casing point. The LO test at this
point confirms a 2.21 SG fracture gradient.
Mud was lost to the sandstone stringers at the base of the limestone (4200m) at an ECD of
2.06 SG. This figure is therefore taken to be the minimum fracture gradient in the 8 1/2 in.
hole. However, the actual fracture gradient of the mudstone increases with depth and in line
with the pore pressure, to 2.205 SG at 4429m.
A Poisson’s ratio of 0.06 is used to calculate the fracture gradient in the sandstone section
after 4429m. The fracture pressure in the sand remains constant at 2.16 SG until the formation
becomes interbedded with mudstone, at which point, the calculated fracture pressure increases
to 2.22 SG.
The underlying mudstone has a calculated fracture gradient of 2.22 SG.
4-8
March 1995
7 Leak Off Tests

The purposes of carrying out a leak off test are:
• To establish the upper limit of primary control for a section of openhole.
• To test the effectiveness of a cement job.
Company policy is that:
“Leak off tests or competency tests will be performed prior to drilling each new hole
section (except for conductors).”
The following guidelines are offered:
“Leak off tests should be performed after drilling 3 to 5m of new hole below any
casing␣shoe.
Leak off tests should be taken to leak off unless:
• The pressure exceeds that to which the casing was tested.
• (On a development well) where the pressure may be limited to that required to drill
safely the next section of hole (competency test).
When drilling through sands, or permeable rock, at any point below the casing shoe,
consideration should be given to carrying out a further LO test to ascertain the new rock
strength, and thus, the ability of the hole to contain a kick. Leak off tests should not be
conducted in brittle formations (eg fractured limestone).’’
Company policy is therefore to restrict applied pressures to a maximum represented by the

LO point. The reason for this is that, in many cases, it is not certain that an induced fracture
will heal completely to withstand the pressure that originally caused it to fracture. Field
evidence, however, suggests that in most cases induced fractures will heal
completely. However it is difficult to predict the circumstances in which fractures will not
heal completely and hence permanently weaken the formation.
It has been suggested that the drilling process locks additional stresses into the rock around
the wellbore, thereby increasing the pressure required to cause a fracture. If a fracture is
created, these additional stresses are released and consequently the pressure required to re-
open the fracture may be less than that originally required.
It is accepted, however, that particularly brittle rocks, such as limestone, will show very
little inelastic behaviour prior to fracture. As a result, there may be no clear leak off before
a fracture occurs. A brittle formation may be permanently weakened by an induced fracture
and consequently it is not recommended to conduct LO tests in such formations.
4-9
March 1995
8 Leak Off Test Procedure

The following general procedure is recommended for conducting LO tests:
1. Ensure that suitable pressure gauges are available.
The gauges should be of a suitable range and have been recently calibrated with a Dead
Weight Tester.
2. Assess the upper limit for the test.
It may not be necessary to conduct a leak off test in a development well when pore and
fracture pressures are well defined; in which case, a limit test will suffice. The absolute
upper limit for all types of test will be the overburden gradient at current depth.
NOTE: This may be lower than 2.31 SG or 1 psi/ft, as is common in deep water offshore.
3. Determine the estimated fracture pressure.
The mud logging company will provide an estimate of the fracture pressure at current
depth. This figure may be used as an upper limit for the test, or to interpret any anomalies
observed during the test.
4. Test the casing prior to drilling out of the shoe.
An estimate of the volume of fluid required to pressurise the hole can be determined
from the bulk modulus of elasticity of the fluid that is in the hole.
∆V = ∆P X V
K
when ∆V = volume required to pressurise hole (bbl)

V = volume to be pressurised (bbl)
∆P = required increase in pressure (psi)
K = bulk modulus of elasticity (psi)
The bulk modulus of elasticity of a drilling fluid is determined by the characteristics

of␣the base fluid as well as the solids content of the fluid. The following figures can
be␣used:
K, water = 290,000 – 335,000 psi

K, BP H3HF Base Oil = 160,000 – 260,000 psi
The bulk modulus of actual drilling fluids will be greater than these figures by an amount
related to solids content.
Plot a graph of pressure versus mud pumped to establish linearity prior to the LO test.
5. Drill out of the shoe and 3 to 5 m of new hole.
6. Circulate and condition the mud.
7. Pull up into the casing.
8. Line up the pump to the annulus and displace all lines to the well to mud.
9. Close the BOP.
4-10
March 1995
10. Run the pump at a constant 0.3 to 0.5 bbl/min.
Monitor the pressure build up, and accurately record the volume of mud pumped. Plot
pressure versus volume of mud pumped.
11. Stop the pump when any deviation from linearity is noticed between pump
pressure and volume pumped.
Record the final pump pressure and calculate LO EMW.
12. Bleed back mud from the well and compare with the volume pumped.
9 Interpretation of Results
Figure 4.4 shows the result of a typical fracture test carried out in a consolidated low
permeability formation in a tectonically relaxed area.
NOTE: It is Company policy that the test is stopped at leak off point.
From points 1 to 2, the exposed rock is deforming elastically as the relationship between
pressure and volume pumped is linear.
At point 2, the pressure in the wellbore at the exposed formation is equal to the sum of the
pore pressure and the minimum horizontal effective stress. In other words, any cracks that
exist at the wellbore and in the vertical plane will be in a state of equilibrium, the applied
pressure exactly counteracting the naturally occurring compressive forces. At point 3, which
represents the leak off point (because it is the first noted deviation from the linear
relationship), the pump would normally be stopped and the pressure bled down in line with
Company policy.
If the pump was left running, the pressure would eventually build to fracture pressure as
shown. From points 2 to 4, the formation is deforming plastically, in that for the same
increment of applied stress (pressure), a greater level of strain (volume) is produced. The
difference between the pressure at point 2 and the pressure at point 4 represents the pressure
required to initiate the fracture.
If the pump was stopped at point 4, as is shown on the diagram, the fracture would not
propogate further into the formation and the pressure will drop to point 5. The pressure at
point 5 should be equal to the pressure at point 2. If the pressure is then bled down, the
returned volume should be equal to the volume pumped into the hole; if it is significantly
less, then the fracture may be still be open.
If the pump was kept running after point 4, the fracture would propogate into the formation
at a pressure slightly lower than point 4, or the fracture propogation pressure.
4-11
March 1995
FRACTURE PRESSURE (pump stopped)

4
3 5
2
LEAK OFF
PRESSURE
(the pump would PRESSURE BLED DOWN
normally be
stopped at this
point)
GAUGE PRESSURE, psi
1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 TIME, MINUTES
bbl PUMPED
WEOX02.130
Figure 4.4 A Typical Fracture Test
4-12
March 1995
5 BASICS OF WELL CONTROL

Paragraph Page
1 General 5-3
2 Displacing a Kick from the Hole 5-3
3 Factors that Affect Wellbore Pressures 5-8
4 Subsea Considerations 5-19
5 Safety Factors 5-24
6 Calculating Annulus Pressure Profiles 5-27
Illustrations
5.1 Choke and Standpipe Pressure – during the first circulation
of the Driller’s Method 5-5
5.2 Pit Gain – during the first circulation of the Driller’s Method 5-5
5.3 Shoe Pressure – during the first circulation of the Driller’s Method 5-6
5.4 Choke and Standpipe Pressure – during the second
circulation of the Driller’s Method 5-6
5.5 Choke and Standpipe Pressure – during the Wait and
Weight Method 5-7
5.6 Shoe Pressure – during the Wait and Weight Method 5-8
5.7 Choke Pressure – during the Driller’s Method for various
influx volumes 5-9
5.8 Choke Pressure – during the Wait and Weight Method
for various influx volumes 5-9
5.9 Shoe Pressure – during the Driller’s Method for various
influx volumes 5-11
5.10 Shoe Pressure – during the Wait and Weight Method
for various influx volumes 5-11
5.11 Choke Pressure – during the Wait and Weight Method
and the Driller’s Method for two different influx volumes 5-12
5.12 Choke Pressure – during displacement of a gas kick
using the Driller’s Method for various kick intensities 5-12
using the Wait and Weight Method for various kick intensities 5-13
5-1
March 1995

using the Wait and Weight Method for various kick intensities 5-13
5.15 A Comparison of the Shoe Pressure – during displacement
using the Driller’s and Wait and Weight Method for two
gas kicks of different intensities 5-14
5.16 A Comparison of Shoe Pressures – during displacement
of a 20 barrel gas kick for various shoe depths 5-15
of a gas kick shoe at 3000m 5-15
5.22 Choke Pressure – during displacement of a water kick
using the Wait and Weight Method 5-19
5.23 Comparison of Choke Pressures – during displacement
of a gas kick on a fixed rig and a floating rig 5-20
5.24 Choke Pressure for various Water Depths – during
displacement of a gas kick 5-21
5.25 Determination of the Required Rate of Choke
Manipulation for a Deep Water Subsea Well 5-22
5.26 Estimated Choke Line Losses (psi) for Various Choke
Line Lengths (3in. ID) 5-24
5.27 Annulus Pressure Loss for various Well Configurations 5-25
with overbalanced mud 5-26
5.29 Shoe Pressure – during displacement of a gas kick
with overbalanced mud 5-26
5.30 Annulus Pressure Worksheet 5-31
5.31 Graph of Pseudo-critical Temperature and Pressure
for Hydrocarbons 5-33
5.32 Compressibility Factors for Natural Gas 5-34
5-2
March 1995
1 General
When a kick is taken with the pipe on bottom, the well can be killed using either the Wait
and Weight Method or the Driller’s Method. The Wait and Weight is the preferred
method. The procedures used to implement these techniques on either a floating or a fixed
rig are detailed in Volume 1.
Both these methods ensure that the bottomhole pressure is maintained constant and equal
to, or slightly greater than, the kick zone pressure.
In order to fully understand the implementation of these methods, it is important to understand

the surface and downhole pressures that are caused by displacing a kick from the hole using
either the Driller’s Method or the Wait and Weight Method.
This chapter is intended to cover the variations in surface and subsurface pressures during these
methods, and to explain the most important factors that affect the magnitude of these pressures.
All the pressure plots shown in this chapter are developed by computer programme. The
pressures are determined by simulating the displacement of a gas kick from a well with the
model of a discrete bubble of gas. The actual pressures seen when a kick is taken may be
different from those predicted by the programme; however the plots can demonstrate the
influence of the major factors that affect the wellbore pressures during circulation.
The pressure plots contained in this chapter are generated on the basis that the bottomhole
pressure is constant and exactly equal to the kick zone pressure.
2 Displacing a Kick from the Hole

(a) Driller’s Method
The Driller’s Method requires that two complete hole circulations are carried out before
the well is killed. The original mud weight is used to displace the kick from the hole and
then the mud is weighted to kill weight for the second circulation.
During the first circulation, the drillpipe circulating pressure is held constant at a value
equal to the shut-in drillpipe pressure plus the circulating pressure loss in the system at the
slow circulating rate.
During the second circulation, the drillpipe circulating pressure is adjusted to account
firstly for the increased circulating pressure due to the heavy mud, and secondly for the
reduction in underbalance as the drillpipe is displaced. Once the drillpipe has been
displaced to kill weight mud, the circulating pressure is held constant.
The pressure at each point in the annulus will vary significantly as the kick is displaced
from the hole. Once the well has been shut-in, the major factors that determine the
pressure at any point in the annulus during displacement of the kick are the height of the
influx in the annulus and the relative position of the influx in the annulus.
5-3
March 1995
Figure 5.1 shows the choke pressure during the displacement of a kick with the Driller’s
Method for a surface BOP. Point A represents the shut-in casing pressure. From point A to
point B, the casing pressure drops as the influx is displaced past the BHA. This drop is
caused by a reduction in height of the influx as the influx is displaced from the BHA annulus
to the drillpipe annulus. The choke operator will open the choke to maintain the appropriate
standpipe pressure.
From point B to point D, the influx is expanding as it is circulated up the hole and hence
the choke pressure required to balance the kick zone pressure is increasing. The choke
operator will therefore close in on the choke to maintain the correct standpipe pressure.
At point C, the gas has expanded to occupy its original height in the annulus when
opposite the BHA.
At point D, the gas arrives at the choke; the choke operator will have to close in on the
choke to ensure that the choke pressure does not drop significantly as the low density
gas passes across the choke. From point D to point E, the gas is passing the choke; the
choke operator will have to open the choke to reduce the choke pressure to maintain the
correct standpipe pressure. The choke pressure required to balance the kick zone pressure
reduces as the gas passes the choke because the column of gas in the annulus is continually
decreasing in height.
At point E, the gas has been displaced from the well and the choke pressure will stabilise
at a value determined by the degree of underbalance.
Figure 5.2 shows the pit gain, or the volume of the kick, as it is displaced to the choke.
Figure 5.3 shows the pressure at the casing shoe as the kick is displaced from the hole.
From point P to point Q, the pressure drops as the influx is displaced past the BHA.
From point Q to point R, the pressure increases as the influx expands as it is circulated
up to the casing shoe. At point R, the top of the influx has arrived at the casing shoe and
from point R to point S the influx is circulated past the casing shoe. Once the influx has
been circulated past the shoe, the pressure at the shoe will remain constant as the influx
is circulated to the choke, as long as the choke is correctly manipulated. It can be seen
from Figure 5.3 that, in this case, the shoe pressure was at maximum when the well was
shut-in. In other words, the influx did not expand to its original height in the annulus
before it arrived at the choke. However, if the shoe was shallower, the maximum shoe
pressure might have been when the influx was circulated to the shoe.
Figure 5.4 shows the standpipe and choke pressure during the second circulation during
which the well is circulated to kill weight mud. Having established the initial circulating
pressure, the standpipe pressure must be reduced as the drillpipe is displaced to kill
weight mud. In practice, very little choke manipulation will be required at this stage
because the standpipe pressure will drop automatically as the kill weight mud is pumped
down the drillpipe. Once the kill weight mud starts up the annulus, the choke size will
have to be increased so that the correct final circulating pressure is maintained.
Once the hole has been displaced to kill weight mud, the choke pressure required to
maintain the final circulating pressure will be zero. In practice therefore, the choke will
be wide open at this point and it may not be possible to keep the standpipe pressure
down to the final circulating pressure.
5-4
March 1995
WELL DEPTH: 3500m BHA: 6 1/4in/180m

SHOE DEPTH: 2000m PIPE: 5in DP
MW1: 1.7SG TECH: DRILLER'S
KICK ZONE EMW: 1.83SG INFLUX: 20bbl GAS
2000
1800
1600
D
1400
1200
STANDPIPE PRESSURE
1000 A
B C
SCR1
800
CHOKE PRESSURE
E
600
400
P DRILLPIPE
200
0
0 200 400 600 800
VOL MUD PUMPED (bbl) WEOX02.131
Figure 5.1 Choke and Standpipe Pressure

– during the first circulation of the Driller’s Method

100
90
80
70
PIT GAIN (bbl)
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 200 400 600 800
Figure 5.2 Pit Gain

– during the first circulation of the Driller’s Method
5-5
March 1995

6600
6400
6200
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
6000
P R
5800
Q
5600
5400
S
5200
5000
4800
0 200 400 600 800
Figure 5.3 Shoe Pressure

– during the first circulation of the
Driller’s Method
KICK ZONE EMW: 1.83SG
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
SCR1
800
600
STANDPIPE PRESSURE
400
P DRILLPIPE CHOKE PRESSURE
SCR2
200
0
DRILLPIPE ANNULUS
0 VOLUME 200 400 VOLUME 600 800

– during the second circulation of the
Driller’s Method
5-6
March 1995
(b) Wait and Weight Method

During the Wait and Weight Method, the kick is displaced from the hole with kill weight
mud. The most significant advantages of the Wait and Weight Method in relation to the
Driller’s Method are: firstly that wellbore pressures during displacement of the kick are
generally lower than for the Driller’s Method, and secondly that the well is under pressure
for a significantly shorter period.
Figure 5.5 shows the choke and standpipe pressure during displacement of the influx
with kill weight mud. The choke pressure during the Driller’s Method is included for
comparison. As can be seen, the choke pressure during both techniques is the same until
the kill weight mud starts up the annulus at point B. (This is because the bottomhole
pressure is kept equal and constant for both methods.) From this point onwards, the
pressure at every point in the annulus will be lower than if the Driller’s Method had
been used.
Between points D and E, the volume of original mud behind the influx is displaced from
the well until, at point E, the kill weight mud arrives at the choke.

MW1: 1.7SG TECH: W+W
2000
1800
1600
1400
C
1200
1000 A
B
SCR1
800 CHOKE PRESSURE
(DRILLER'S METHOD)
600
400 STANDPIPE
P DRILLPIPE
PRESSURE (W + W METHOD)
SCR2 D CHOKE PRESSURE
200
(W + W METHOD)
E
0
DRILLPIPE
0 VOLUME 200 400 600 800

– during the Wait and Weight Method
Figure 5.6 illustrates the pressure at the casing shoe for both the Wait and Weight Method
and in comparison with the Driller’s Method. Between point P and point Q, the shoe
pressure decreases as the influx is displaced past the BHA. The influx expands as it is
circulated to the shoe at point R, after which, the pressure at the shoe decreases. At
point S, the kill weight mud starts up the annulus and hence reduces the choke pressure
below that for the Driller’s Method. Between point T and point U, the original weight
mud is displaced past the shoe until point U, when the kill weight mud arrives at the
shoe. The pressure at point U is equal to the kick zone equivalent mud weight, and thus
represents the minimum pressure that the shoe will see once the well has been killed.
5-7
March 1995
In this case therefore, the maximum shoe pressure is unaffected by the technique used
to kill the well, however, the shoe will be under pressure significantly longer if the
Driller’s Method is used.

MW1: 1.7SG TECH: BOTH
6600
6400
6200
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
6000
P R
5800
S
Q
5600 DRILLER'S
METHOD
5400 T
WAIT AND
WEIGHT METHOD
5200
U
5000
4800
DRILLPIPE
0 VOLUME 200 400 600 800

3 Factors that Affect Wellbore Pressures

(a) Influx Size
The most fundamental factor that affects the wellbore pressures during circulation, is
the volume of the influx. The greater the volume of influx, the greater will be the wellbore
pressures during circulation.
Figure 5.7 shows the choke pressure as various influx volumes are displaced from the
well using the Driller’s Method.
Figure 5.8 shows the choke pressure as the same influx volumes are displaced from the
well using the Wait and Weight Method.
Figures 5.7 and 5.8 quite clearly show that, regardless of the technique used to kill the
well, the wellbore pressures will be lower the smaller the influx volume.
5-8
March 1995

KICK ZONE EMW: 1.83SG INFLUX: 20, 30, 40, 50bbl GAS
2000
1800
1600
1400
50bbl
1200 40bbl
30bbl
1000
20bbl
800
600
400
200
0
0 200 400 600 800
Figure 5.7 Choke Pressure

– during the Driller’s Method for various
influx volumes
2000
1800
1600
1400
50bbl
1200 40bbl
30bbl
1000
20bbl
800
600
400
200
0
0 200 400 600 800

– during the Wait and Weight Method for various
influx volumes
5-9
March 1995
Figure 5.9 shows the shoe pressures as various influx volumes are displaced from the
well using the Driller’s Method. Figure 5.10 shows the shoe pressures as the same influx
volumes are displaced using the Wait and Weight Method.
Figure 5.11 shows a comparison of choke pressure during the Wait and Weight Method
against the Driller’s Method for influx volumes of 20 bbl and 50 bbl.
Influx volume is therefore a variable that has significant influence on wellbore pressure
during the displacement of a kick. However, it is the only variable that the rig crew have
some control over for a given kick situation; it is therefore particularly important that
shut-in procedures are implemented as quickly as possible, even if there is some doubt
as to whether the well is flowing.
(b) Kick Intensity

The intensity of a kick is a measure of the degree of underbalance recorded after the
kick has been shut-in. This can be determined from the drillpipe pressure.
The intensity of the kick will be a major factor in determining the wellbore pressures
during displacement of the kick. Close attention to the indicators of increasing pore
pressure will ensure that kicks of high intensity are avoided.
Figure 5.12 shows the choke pressure during the displacement of a range of high and
low intensity kicks by the Driller’s Method.
Figure 5.13 shows the displacement of the same kicks, using the Wait and Weight Method.
It can therefore be seen that the Wait and Weight Method is more effective in reducing
choke pressures for kicks of relatively high intensity.
Figure 5.14 shows a comparison of the two techniques for a low intensity kick, as well
as a high intensity kick. Figure 5.14 shows clearly that it is especially important to use
the Wait and Weight Method for kicks of relatively high intensity.
Figure 5.15 shows a comparison of the shoe pressures during displacement of the same
two kicks. In this case, the Wait and Weight Method does not reduce the maximum
pressure that the shoe experiences during displacement, but in the case of the high
intensity kick, the shoe pressure is significantly reduced once the kill weight mud starts
up the annulus.
(c) Hole Configuration

The maximum surface pressure during displacement of a kick will always be lower if
the Wait and Weight Method is used, given that kill weight mud will start up the annulus
before the kick arrives at the choke.
The maximum shoe pressure is not necessarily affected by the technique used to displace
the kick (in most cases the maximum shoe pressure will be at initial shut-in and as such
is not dependent on the technique used to kill the well). However in a long openhole
section it is possible that the maximum shoe pressure may occur as the influx is displaced
to the shoe. In this instance, if kill weight mud is to have an effect on the maximum
pressure at the shoe, the hole configuration must be such that the kill weight mud starts
up the annulus before the kick is displaced past the shoe.
5-10
March 1995

6600
6400
6200
50bbl
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
6000 40bbl
30bbl
5800
20bbl
5600
5400
5200
5000
4800
0 200 400 600 800

– during the Driller’s Method for various
influx volumes

6600
6400
6200
50bbl
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
6000 40bbl
30bbl
5800
20bbl
5600
5400
5200
5000
4800
0 200 400 600 800

for various influx volumes
5-11
March 1995

KICK ZONE EMW: 1.83SG INFLUX: 20, 50bbl GAS
2000
1800
1600
1400 50bbl
1200
1000
20bbl
800 DRILLER'S
METHOD
600
400
WAIT AND
WEIGHT METHOD
200
0
0 200 400 600 800

– during the Wait and Weight Method and
the Driller’s Method for two different
influx volumes
KICK ZONE EMW: 1.75, 1.79, 1.83, INFLUX: 20bbl GAS
1.87, 1.91SG
2000
1800
1600
1400
1200
1.91SG
1000
1.87SG
800
1.83SG
600
1.79SG
400
1.75SG
200
0
0 200 400 600 800

– during displacement of a gas kick using
the Driller’s Method for various
kick intensities
5-12
March 1995

KICK ZONE EMW: 1.75, 1.79, 1.83, INFLUX: 20bbl GAS
1.87, 1.91SG
2000
1800
1600
1400 1.9SG
1200 1.87SG
1000 1.83SG
800
1.79SG
600 1.75SG
400
200
0
0 200 400 600 800

the Wait and Weight Method for various
kick intensities
KICK ZONE EMW: 1.75, 1.91SG INFLUX: 20bbl GAS
2000
1800
1600
1400 1.91SG
1200
1000
800
DRILLER'S
600 1.75SG METHOD
400
200 WAIT AND

WEIGHT METHOD
0
0 200 400 600 800

the Wait and Weight Method for various
kick intensities
5-13
March 1995

KICK ZONE EMW: 1.75, 1.91SG INFLUX: 20bbl GAS
6600
6400
6200 1.91SG
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
6000 DRILLER'S
METHOD
5800
5600 WAIT AND

WEIGHT METHOD
5400 1.75SG
5200 DRILLER'S
METHOD
5000
WAIT AND
WEIGHT METHOD
4800
0 200 400 600 800
Figure 5.15 A Comparison of the Shoe Pressure

– during displacement using the Driller’s
and Wait and Weight Method for two
gas kicks of different intensities
Once the kill weight mud starts up the annulus, shoe pressures will be lower than if the
Driller’s Method is used. As discussed in (b), the higher the kick intensity, the more
marked the difference between wellbore pressures during the Wait and Weight Method
and the Driller’s Method. However, for a given kick intensity the significance of the
difference between the two techniques is also influenced by the depth of the shoe. The
shallower the shoe, the more significant is the effect of the kill weight mud on pressure
reduction at the shoe.
The hole configuration therefore can influence the pressures seen at the shoe during
displacement.
Figure 5.16 shows a comparison of the shoe pressures for the same kick, for various
lengths of openhole. A 20 barrel kick is taken at 3500m and is then displaced from the
hole; Figure 5.16 shows the pressure variations at 1000m, 2000m and 3000m. As can be
seen from Figure 5.16, if the shoe had been at 3000m, the maximum pressure at the
shoe is clearly at initial shut-in. However, if the shoe was at 1000m, the shoe pressure is
actually greater than at initial shut-in when the influx is displaced to the shoe. This
situation is brought about when the influx expands to occupy a greater height in the
annulus than it did at initial shut-in before it is displaced to the shoe. This generally
requires a considerable length of openhole.
Figures 5.17 to 5.21 compare the shoe pressures during displacement of a gas kick for a
range of shoe depths, using both the Driller’s and the Wait and Weight Methods.
5-14
March 1995

SHOE DEPTH: 1000m, 2000m, PIPE: 5in DP
3000m TECH: DRILLER'S
MW1: 1.7SG INFLUX: 20bbl GAS
KICK ZONE EMW: 1.83SG
+100
INITIAL
(SHUT IN
PRESSURE) 0
CHANGE IN SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
-100
SHOE AT SHOE AT SHOE AT

-200
3000m 2000m 1000m
-300
-400
0 200 400 600 800
Figure 5.16 A Comparison of Shoe Pressures

– during displacement of a 20 barrel gas
kick for various shoe depths

8300
8200
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
Q
P
8100
8000
S DRILLER'S METHOD
R
7900
WAIT AND
WEIGHT METHOD
7800
0 200 400 600 800

– during displacement of a gas kick shoe
at 3000m
5-15
March 1995

7100
7000
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
6900
6800
DRILLER'S METHOD
6700
6600
WAIT AND WEIGHT
METHOD
6500
6400
0 200 400 600 800

at 2500m

5900
5800
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
5700
5600
5500 DRILLER'S METHOD
R
5400
5300
WAIT AND WEIGHT
METHOD
5200
5100
0 200 400 600 800

at 2000m
5-16
March 1995

4700
4600
P
4500
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
4400
DRILLER'S METHOD
4300
4200
4100
4000 WAIT AND WEIGHT

METHOD
3900
3800
0 200 400 600 800

at 1500m

3500
3400
P
3300
3200
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
3100 DRILLER'S METHOD
3000
2900
2800
2700 WAIT AND WEIGHT

METHOD
2600
2500
0 200 400 600 800

at 1000m
5-17
March 1995
Figure 5.17 shows the shoe pressure for a 20 barrel kick taken at 3500m for the shoe at
3000m. From initial shut-in to point P, the pressure decreases as the influx is displaced
past the BHA; from point P to point Q the pressure increases as the influx expands as it
is displaced up towards the shoe. At point Q, the top of the influx arrives at the shoe and
from point Q to point R the pressure at the shoe drops as the influx is displaced past it.
From point R to point S, the pressure at the shoe remains constant as the original mud
occupies the annulus from the bottom of the hole to the shoe. However, the pressure at
the shoe is further reduced at point S when, in the case of the Wait and Weight Method,
the kill weight mud starts up the annulus.
Figure 5.18 shows the shoe pressure for the shoe at 2500m. A similar pressure profile is
shown to that in Figure 5.17; however in this case the influx expands more before it
arrives at the shoe due to the greater length of openhole.
Figure 5.19 shows the shoe pressure profile for the shoe at 2000m. In this case, the kill
weight mud starts up the annulus at point R, when the tail of the influx is passing the
shoe.
Figure 5.20 shows the shoe pressure profile for the shoe at 1500m. In the case of the
Driller’s Method, the shoe pressure almost reaches its original shut-in value. In the case
of the Wait and Weight Method however, the kill weight mud starts up the annulus at
point P, before the influx arrives at the shoe. The shoe pressure is reduced by the kill
weight mud from this point on.
Figure 5.21 shows the shoe pressure profile for the shoe at 1000m. In the case of the
Driller’s Method, the shoe pressure now increases past the shut-in value as the influx is
circulated to the shoe. However, in the case of the Wait and Weight Method, the kill
weight mud starts up the annulus at point P, and this has the effect of reducing the
maximum pressure that the shoe experiences.
Figures 5.17 to 5.21 show that the Wait and Weight Method has only a small influence
on the maximum shoe pressure for wells of this type, even when the shoe is relatively
shallow.
The most important point however is that the time that the shoe is subject to high pressure
is substantially reduced when the Wait and Weight Method is used. The reduction in
shoe pressure due to the kill weight mud is most significant when there is a long section
of openhole (as is seen in Figures 5.17 to 5.21).
(d) Influx Type

All the pressure profiles in Figures 5.1 to 5.21 represent the displacement of gas kicks.
As can be seen from the pressure profile, the expansion of the gas as it is displaced from
the well significantly affects the resultant wellbore pressures.
A water kick will behave in a different manner. Water is essentially incompressible

and␣consequently will not expand appreciably as it is displaced up the well. This will
mean that the wellbore pressures will not be significantly affected by the displacement
of the influx, unless the water contains a significant quantity of gas. However a water
kick may cause special problems as a result of hole deterioration as it is displaced from
the hole.
5-18
March 1995
Figure 5.22 shows a typical choke pressure profile for a salt water kick displaced from
the hole by the Wait and Weight Method. From point P to point Q, the choke pressure
remains relatively constant as the drillpipe is displaced to kill weight mud. From point
Q to point R, the choke pressure drops as the kill weight mud starts up the annulus. This
is in marked contrast to the gas kick where the expansion of the kick at this stage tends
to increase the choke pressure. From point R to point S, the influx passes the choke with
a corresponding drop in choke pressures. From point S to point T, the choke pressure
drops as the original mud behind the influx passes the choke. At point T, the kill weight
mud arrives at surface.
500
400
300
P Q
200
100
S
T
0
0 200 400 600 800

– during displacement of a water kick using
the Wait and Weight Method
An oil kick is likely to behave in a similar manner to the gas kick when displaced from
the well. The term ‘oil’ covers a large variety of fluids, ranging from viscous black oil
that contains very little gas, to very light oils that have very high gas oil ratios. Most oil
will contain gas at reservoir conditions which will come out of solution and expand as it
is displaced up the hole. Essentially, therefore, the majority of oil kicks will behave
similarly to a gas kick.
4 Subsea Considerations
If a kick is taken from a floating rig, the influx will be displaced to the surface through a
small diamater choke line that is attached to the drilling riser. The fundamental difference
between well control procedures on a fixed and a floating rig originate from the necessity of
having to circulate through this choke line.
5-19
March 1995
The potential problems caused by circulating through the choke line can be summarised
as␣follows:
(a) Choke pressures will be significantly higher than for an equivalent well
drilled from a fixed rig.
This is due to the fact that the height of the influx is considerably increased as it is
displaced from the annulus to the choke line.
Figure 5.23 shows a comparison between the choke pressure during displacement of a
gas kick from a well drilled in 1000m of water and a similar well drilled from a fixed
rig. The influence of the choke line is apparent in that the maximum choke pressure is
increased from 1200 psi to approximately 2600 psi.
FIXED RIG:
MW1: 1.7SG TECH: WAIT AND WEIGHT
KICK ZONE EMW, MW2: 1.83SG INFLUX: 20bbl GAS
FLOATING RIG: CHOKELINE: 1000m/3in ID
2800
2400
FLOATING RIG
2000
1600
1200
FIXED RIG
800
400
0
0 200 400 600 800
VOL MUD PUMPED (bbl)
WEOX02.153
Figure 5.23 Comparison of Choke Pressures

– during displacement of a gas kick on
a fixed rig and a floating rig
5-20
March 1995
Figure 5.24 shows the choke pressures during displacement of the same 20 bbl influx
for a variety of water depths. It can be seen that the choke pressure is not, in this case,
significantly affected by a water depth of 100m.
FIXED RIG:
FLOATING RIG: CHOKELINE: 1000m, 500m, 100m/3in ID
2800
2400 1000m
WATER
2000
500m
WATER
1600
100m
WATER
1200
800
FIXED RIG
400
0
0 200 400 600 800
WEOX02.154
Figure 5.24 Choke Pressure for various Water Depths

– during displacement of a gas kick
(b) The rate of increase of choke pressure required as the gas enters the
choke line may be unrealistically high at normal displacement rates.
As can be seen from Figure 5.25 the increase in choke pressure required as the influx is
displaced up the choke line is equivalent to 64 psi/bbl. This can be converted to a rate of
choke manipulation for various displacement rates as follows:
At 4 bbl/min = 64 x 4 = 256 psi/min

At 0.1 bbl/min = 64 x 0.1 = 6.4 psi/min
5-21
March 1995
It can therefore be seen that normal displacement rates have the potential to require an
unrealistic rate of manipulation of the choke. In this case, the most satisfactory rate of
displacement would be of the order of 1 bbl/min.
As gas invades the choke line:

p = 1800 = 64psi/bbl
bbl/pumped 28
As the mud behind the gas

enters the choke line
p = 2000 = 71psi/bbl
bbl/pumped 28
WELL DEPTH: 3500m CHOKELINE: 1000m/3in ID

SHOE DEPTH: 2000m BHA: 6 1/4in/180m
MW1: 1.7SG PIPE: 5in DP
KICK ZONE EMW: 1.83SG TECH: WAIT AND WEIGHT
INFLUX: 20bbl GAS
2800
2400
2000
1800psi
1600
2000psi
1200
800
400
0
0 200 400 600 800
WEOX02.155
Figure 5.25 Determination of the Required Rate of Choke

Manipulation for a Deep Water Subsea Well
It should be noted however that these calculations are based on the assumption that the
gas influx enters the choke line as a discrete bubble without mixing with the mud ahead
of it. This may not always be the case, however the figures quoted above certainly
indicate that the normal kick displacement rates have the potential to cause such
complications.
A further problem exists in that when the gas enters the choke line, the drillpipe pressure
will only register the drop in bottomhole pressure after the lag time, which can be
substantial in deep wells.
5-22
March 1995
On a fixed rig, the lag time will not be so problematical because the required rate of
choke manipulation is generally lower. In other words, the bottomhole pressure will
drop only very slightly before the drillpipe pressures registers that drop and the choke
operator closes in the choke (to increase the choke pressure and hence the bottomhole
pressure).
The lag time between the choke and the drillpipe pressure gauges is generally considered
to be of the order of 2 seconds per 300m of drillstring length. This lag time, however,
will be significantly affected by the type and size of the influx in the hole. It can be seen
therefore that there may be a lag time of approximately 20 seconds in deep wells. If the
required rate of choke manipulation is 420 psi/min as the influx is displaced up the
choke line, the bottomhole pressure may have dropped 130 psi before the drillpipe
pressure gauge registers this drop. Clearly this is an additional reason for displacing the
influx through the choke line at a rate that is substantially slower than normal slow
circulation rates.
(c) The rate of decrease of choke pressure required as the mud behind the
gas reaches the base of the choke line may be unrealistically high.
In a similar manner, the required rate of choke manipulation as the mud behind the
influx enters the choke line may be unrealistically high at normal slow circulating rates.
In this case, the potential problem is that the well may be overpressured, leading to the
possibility of fracturing the exposed formation.
Figure 5.25 shows that the choke pressure would theoretically have to be reduced at
71␣psi/bbl which corresponds to the following rates for various displacement rates:

At 0.1 bbl/min = 71 x 0.1 = 7.1 psi/min
This is clear indication that normal displacement rates are unsuitable when displacing a
gas influx through a long choke line.
(d) The frictional pressure as a result of circulating through the choke line
may be significant at slow circulating rates.
Choke line frictional pressure may be significant, when added to the wellbore pressures
resulting from the displacement of a kick. In certain circumstances, it may be of a
magnitude such as to cause formation breakdown.
There are special techniques that can be used to eliminate the effect of choke line losses
during displacement of a kick. One such technique, namely the use of the kill line monitor,
is described in Chapter 6 of Volume 1.
Choke line losses are generally insignificant in relatively shallow waters, but can be
significant in waters of 500m or greater. Figure 5.26 shows a table of estimated choke
line losses for various choke line lengths.
When very slow displacement rates are used, (such as 1 bbl/min) choke line losses are
generally insignificant, even in deep water.
5-23
March 1995
3 bbl/min MUD WEIGHT (SG) 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.1
CHOKE LINE LENGTH (m)
1000 m 120 200 220 245
500 m 90 100 110 125
100 m 17 19 22 25
4 bbl/min MUD WEIGHT (SG) 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.1
CHOKE LINE LENGTH (m)
1000 m 260 295 325 360
500 m 130 145 165 180
100 m 26 30 33 36
Figure 5.26 Estimated Choke Line Losses (psi)

for Various Choke Line Lengths (3 in. ID)
5 Safety Factors
During well control operations, it is clearly necessary to maintain the bottomhole pressure
slightly greater than the kick zone pressure. This will provide a margin of error for the
choke operation that will prevent a second influx occurring. However, excessive additional
pressure may needlessly overpressure the wellbore and possibly cause the formation to
fracture.
In general, every effort should be made to ensure that no additional pressures are applied to
the openhole at early stages in the displacement of the kick when downhole pressures will
generally be at a maximum.
The following are possible causes of additional pressures during the displacement of a kick:
(a) Annulus Frictional Pressure

During displacement of a kick, the annulus back pressure will always provide a safety
margin over and above the kick zone pressure. Standard well control techniques do not
take annulus frictional pressure into account, and consequently the use of these techniques
ensures that the bottomhole pressure is maintained at the kick zone pressure plus the
annulus frictional pressure. Figure 5.27 shows a series of estimations of annulus frictional
pressures for various well configurations.
5-24
March 1995
13 3/8in
@ 1500m
12 1/4in hole
180m of 8in
collars
TD 1800m
7in
Annulus pressure loss at @ 3200m
3 to 4bbl/min for mud weight
range 1.3 SG to 1.7 SG 9 5/8in shoe 9 5/8in
= 20 to 25psi @ 3500m @ 3200m
8 1/2in hole
270m of
6 1/2in collars
TD 4000m
3 1/2in
drillpipe
Annulus pressure loss at

3 to 4bbl/min for mud weight
range 1.7 SG to 2.1 SG
= 100 to 125psi
7in
@ 4200m
200m
4 3/4in collars
6in hole
TD 4500m
Annulus pressure loss at

3 to 4bbl/min for
1.5 SG mud = 150 to 180psi
2.1 SG mud = 190 to 240psi
WEOX02.157
Figure 5.27 Annulus Pressure Loss for various

Well Configurations
It can be seen from these figures that the annulus frictional pressure may vary
considerably from well to well in a kick situation. The significance of the annulus friction
pressure must be assessed before a kick is displaced.
(b) Heavier than Kill Weight Mud

The use of heavier than kill weight mud will result in higher wellbore pressures than if
kill weight mud is used, when standard techniques are used to displace a kick. This is
because additional choke pressure must be applied to account for the fact that the drillpipe
and annulus will be out of balance as the hole is circulated to heavier than kill weight
mud. The maximum additional pressure will be applied when the heavier than kill weight
mud arrives at the bit. The use of heavier than kill weight mud is not recommended.
Figure 5.28 shows the choke pressure during displacement of a kick for various mud
weights, in comparison to the Wait and Weight Method. Figure 5.29 shows the equivalent
shoe pressures.
5-25
March 1995

MW1: 1.7SG TECH: OVERBALANCED
KICK ZONE EMW: 1.83SG MUD
MW1: 1.83, 1.85, 1.87, INFLUX: 20bbl GAS
1.9SG
1600
1400
1.9SG
1200
1000
800
1.87SG
1.85SG
600
1.83SG MUD
400 (WAIT AND
WEIGHT)
200
0
0 200 400 600 800

with overbalanced mud

MW1: 1.7SG TECH: OVERBALANCED
KICK ZONE EMW: 1.83SG MUD
MW2: 1.83, 1.85, 1.87, INFLUX: 20bbl GAS
1.9SG
5000
4800
SHOE PRESSURE (psi)
4600
1.9SG MUD
1.87SG MUD
4400
1.85SG MUD
1.83SG MUD
4200
(WAIT AND WEIGHT)
4000
3800
0 200 400 600 800

with overbalanced mud
5-26
March 1995
Heavier than kill weight mud is often considered in order to either add a small overbalance
after the kick has been displaced from well or to kill an underground blowout. From the
examples in Figures 5.28 and 5.29 it can be seen that even a relatively small overbalance
will increase the wellbore pressures during kick displacement. Overbalance should be
added to the mud after the well has been killed.
(c) Additional Choke Pressure

An increase in choke pressure will exert an additional pressure throughout the circulating
system. Therefore if the choke pressure is increased by 100 psi, the pressure at the
casing shoe, at the bottom of the well and at the standpipe will increase by 100 psi. The
choke pressure can therefore be used to apply a safety margin to the kick zone during
displacement of the influx.
However, care should be taken to avoid applying several safety factors while displacing
the kick. Additional choke pressure should therefore only be considered if the annulus
frictional pressure is known to be insignificant. Additional choke pressure should never
be applied to the well at an early stage in the displacement when downhole pressures
will generally be maximum.
The advantage of using additional choke pressure to create a safety margin is that it can
be controlled during displacement. For example, it may be applied only at a late stage in
the displacement, when the influx is in the casing, kill weight mud has started up the
annulus and consequently pressures on the openhole are at a minimum.
6 Calculating Annulus Pressure Profiles

The annulus pressure profiles shown in this Chapter have been developed by computer. The
software used applies Boyle’s Law to the original influx at the bottom of the hole and then
calculates the pressures in the wellbore and at surface in order that bottomhole pressure is
maintained constant and exactly equal to the kick zone pressure.
The benefit of the computer is that it can process a great deal of calculations in a relatively
short time. At the rigsite, it is not essential to have made all these calculations prior to
displacing a kick from the hole. It is however useful to have a simple method of hand-
calculating both the maximum pressures that may be experienced at the openhole weak
point, and at surface, before the kick is displaced from the hole.
The annulus pressure worksheet shown in Figure 5.30a provides a means of determining
these pressures. The techniques for using these sheets are described on the reverse side of
this sheet, in Figure 5.30b. Figures 5.31 and 5.32 should be used in conjunction with the
annulus pressure worksheet. The benefit of using this worksheet is that it can help in
developing an understanding of the pressures involved during the displacement of a kick. It
is not the simplest and quickest method.
5-27
March 1995
The formulae that are presented as follows are recommended for use at the rigsite for quick
estimations of annulus pressures during the displacement of a kick, if a computer is not
available for this purpose:
(a) Wait and Weight Method

Use:
2 1
PD = S + K X 1.421 X MW2 2
–S (psi)
4 C 2
where:
S = (TD – D) MW2 X 1.421 – H1 X 1.421 (MW2 – MW1) + Pi – Pf (psi)
and:
K= PO X VO X Z D X TD
ZO X TO
or:
K = PO X VO (if temperature and compressibility effects are ignored)
and D = depth to the top of the influx (m)

PD = pressure at the top of the influx (psi)
TD = influx temperature for influx at depth, D (°R)
ZD = influx compressiblity factor for influx at depth, D
PO = original influx pressure (psi)
TO = original influx temperature (°R)
ZO = original influx compressibility factor
VO = original inlfux volume (bbl)
MW2 = kill mud weight (SG)
MW1 = original mud weight (SG)
C = annular capacity immediately below the influx (bbl/m)
TD = well total depth (m)
H1 = height of original mud below influx (m)
Pi = hydrostatic pressure influx (psi)
Pf = kick zone pressure (psi)
Therefore to determine the choke pressure at gas to surface, use D = O. To determine

the pressure at the openhole weak point when the top of the influx is at the openhole
weak point, use D = depth of openhole weak point.
The hydrostatic pressure of the influx is assumed to remain constant during displacement.
However it may be adjusted for substantial changes in annular capacity using the
following formula:
Pi1 = P i2 X C2
C1
where Pi1 = hydrostatic pressure of influx at original conditions (psi)

Pi2 = hydrostatic pressure of influx at point of interest (psi)
C1 = original annular capacity (bbl/m)
C2 = annular capacity at point of interest (bbl/m)
5-28
March 1995
(b) Driller’s Method

This formula can be used both for the Driller’s Method and for the Wait and Weight
Method when kill weight mud has not yet been circulated to the bit.
Use:
2 1
P = S + K X MW1 X 1.421 2
–S (psi)
4 C 2
where:
S = (TD – D) MW1 X 1.421 + Pi – Pf (psi)
(c) For a Subsea Well

In order to calculate the choke pressure with gas to surface for a subsea well, it is
necessary to include into the formula the effect of the choke line.
The formulae presented in (a) and (c) are equally applicable for calculating the pressure
at the top of the influx before it is circulated to the subsea wellhead.
The formulae presented as follows are used only to calculate choke pressure at gas to
surface:
Use for the Weight and Wait Method:
2 1
Pchoke = S + K X MW2 X 1.421 2
–S (psi)
4 C 2
where:
S = H1 X 1.421 X MW1 + (TD – H1 – Dwhd + V cl ) MW2 X 1.421 + Pi – Pf

C (psi)
Use for the Driller’s Method:
2 1
–S (psi)
4 C 2
where:
S = (TD – Dwhd +V cl ) MW1 X 1.421 + Pi – Pf (psi)

C
and Pchoke = choke pressure at gas to surface (psi)

Dwhd = wellhead depth below rotary table (m)
Vcl = internal volume of choke line (bbl)
C = annular capacity immediately below the influx (bbl/m)
5-29
March 1995
(d) A completed example

Estimate the maximum choke pressure during displacement of a gas kick taken on a
floating rig for the following conditions:
Volume of influx, VO = 20 bbl gas

Kill mud weight, MW2 = 1.83 SG
Original mud weight, MW1 = 1.7 SG
Annular capacity below the influx, C = 0.1604 bbl/m
Well total depth, TD = 3500m
Hole/Casing ID = 8.68 in.
Drillstring: 5 in. drillpipe, BHA 180m/ 6 1/4 in. OD/ 2 3/4 in. ID
Choke line:1000m/3 in. ID
Capacity of the drillstring = (3370 X 0.05827) + (180 X 0.0239)

= 201 bbl
Height of this volume in the annulus, H1 = 201 = 1253m

0.1604
If the Weight and Wait Method is used:
S = H1 X 1.421 X MW1+ (TD – H1 – D whd +V cl ) MW2 X 1.421 + Pi – Pf

C (psi)
= (1253 X 1.421 X 1.7)

+ (3500 – 1253 – 1000 + 28.5 ) 1.83 X 1.421 + 59 + 9101
0.1604
= -2310 psi
Substituting into:
2 1
–S (psi)
4 C 2
2 1
Pchoke = -2310 + 20 X 9101 X 1.83 X 1.421 2
– -2310 (psi)
4 0.1604 2
= 3225 psi
Therefore the maximum anticipated pressure during displacement is 3225 psi. It would
however be anticipated that this figure represents the maximum possible pressure at
surface and, as such, the actual maximum pressure would be expected to be lower than
this value.
(For derivation of these formulae ref: Blowout Prevention, Theory and Application by
Peter Mills, 1984, D. Reidel Publishing Company.)
5-30
March 1995
Figure 5.30a
Version 1/1 1Q'95 by ODL/C. Weddle
ANNULUS PRESSURE WORKSHEET

Units (US/UK):
Rig Name: Well No: Date:

For worksheet calculation enter information into shaded cells.
Annulus Pressure Worksheet

Drillstring Internal Volume bbl Kick Zone Depth: TVD,ft
Annulus, in. ID X OD length, ft bbl/ft Volume bbl Casing Shoe Depth: TVD,ft Original Mud Weight: ppg
Annulus, in. ID X OD length, ft bbl/ft Volume bbl Kick Zone Pressure: = psi Shut in Drill Pipe Pressure: ppg
Annulus, in. ID X OD length, ft bbl/ft Volume bbl Casing Pressure: = psi Mud Weight to Displace Kick: ppg
Annulus, in. ID X OD length, ft bbl/ft Volume bbl Pit Gain = bbl Surface Temp: °F
Annulus, in. ID X OD length, ft bbl/ft Volume bbl Influx Height = ft Temp Grad: °F/ft
Total Annulus Volume bbl Influx Hydrostatic = psi
Hydro

Original Mud Kill Mud Height of Pressure Original Mud Hydro-
Volume Below Influx Below Original Mud Mud of Mud Influx Influx Influx Temp Influx Size above influx static of Req'd Pressure
of Mud Below Below Hydro- Mid-point Annulus Back at the
Pumped Vol Height Pressure Vol Height Pressure Influx Influx static Pressure Z Vol Height Height Pressure Fluids Pressure Shoe
(bbl) (bbl) ( ) (psi) (bbl) ( ) (psi) ( ) ( psig ) (psi) (psia) °F °R Factor (bbl) ( ) ( ) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21)
5-31
ft ft ft ft ft
WEOX02.196
March 1995
Figure 5.30b Annulus Pressure Worksheet
The worksheet provided can be used to estimate annulus pressures during the displacement of a kick.
The worksheet can be used as follows for the Wait and Weight method:
(if the Drillers method is used (5), (6) and (7) are left out of the calculation)
(1) Barrels (bbl) of kill weight mud
Estimate the volume of kill mud pumped for the gas to arrive at the point of interest.
(2-4) Original mud below gas
This volume is equal to the volume of kill weight mud pumped until the drillpipe is displaced. At this point and subsequently this volume will remain
constant at the drillpipe internal volume.
Convert this volume to height and hydrostatic pressure equivalent, in the annulus.
(5-7) Kill mud below original mud
This volume is zero until the internal volume of the drillstring has been displaced. Once the kill mud starts into the annulus, its height and hydrostatic
pressure should be calculated.
(8) Metres of mud below gas
The total height of mud below the influx.
(9) Pressure of mud below the gas
Equal to (4) + (7).
(10) Gas hydrostatic pressure
In a constant annulus size it is assumed that the gas hydrostatic pressure remains constant as the influx expands. The gas hydrostatic must
however be corrected for substantial changes in annular dimensions using the following relationship:
Annular capacity (2)

Gas hydrostatic (2) = Gas hydrostatic (1) X
Annular capacity (1)
(11) Gas mid point pressure
This is equal to the kick zone pressure minus the total hydrostatic pressure of the mud below the influx and half of the gas hydrostatic pressure.
(12-13) The gas temperature
This is estimated from the surface pressure and the temperature gradient in the well unless more detailed information is available. The temperature
in °F can be converted to °R by adding 460.
Use Figure 5.31 (BP Well Control Manual, Volume 2) to determine the pseudo critical temperature and pressure of the gas (assume gravity is 0.7
unless logging unit has detected presence of CO2 or H 2S or unusually heavy hydrocarbon components). The pseudo reduced values are then
calculated as follows:
P pseudo reduced = P absolute (psia)

P pseudo critical
and T pseudo reduced = T(°R)

T pseudo critical
(14) Z factor
The compressibility factor, Z, can be determined from Figure 5.32 (BP Well Control Manual, Volume 2) using the calculated values of pseudo
reduced pressure and temperature.
(15-16) Influx volume and height
The expanded volume of the influx can be calculated using Gas law relationships as follows:
V2 = T2 X Z2 X P1 X V1
P2 X T1
V = Influx volume (bbl)
T = Influx temperature (°R)
P = Influx pressure (psia)
Z = Compressibility factor
The influx height is determined as follows:
Influx height = Influx volume

Annular capacity
(19) Total hydrostatic pressure of annulus fluids
This equal to (9) + (10) + (18).
(20) Required back pressure
This is the difference between the kick zone pressure and the total hydrostatic pressure of the fluid in the annulus (19).
(21) Pressure at the shoe
The pressure at the shoe is determined by either:
• Subtracting the hydrostatic pressure of the annulus fluids from the bottomhole to the shoe from the bottomhole␣pressure
• Adding the hydrostatic pressure of the fluids from the shoe to the surface to the required back pressure (20)
This procedure will be repeated until the influx is positioned at the appropriate point in the well. For example if the first calculation shows that the top
of the influx is above the shoe (assuming that the point of interest is when the top of the influx arrives at the shoe), the calculation should be
reworked for a smaller volume of mud pumped.
For the first approximations it is a good idea to neglect the effect of temperature and compressibility in order to speed the calculation.
5-32
March 1995
Figure 5.31 Graph of Pseudo-critical Temperature and

Pressure for Hydrocarbons
700
Miscellaneou
s gases
650 Cond
Pseudo Critical Pressure psia
ensat
e well
fluids
600
550
500
es
g as
o us
ne
450 e lla
isc
Pseudo Critical Temperature °R
M
ds
flui
ell
ew
sat
den
Con
400
350
300
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
Gas Gravity (air = 1)
WEOX02.162
5-33
March 1995
Figure 5.32 Compressibility Factors for Natural Gas
PSEUDO REDUCED PRESSURE

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1.1 1.1
PSEUDO REDUCED
TEMPERATURE
3.0 1.05
2.8
1.0 2.6 1.0
2.4
2.2
2.0 0.95
1.5
1.9 1.3
0.9 1.8 1.2
1.1
1.4
1.7
1.6
0.8 1.7
1.5
05
1.
1.45
1
1.
1.4
COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR Z
COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR Z
0.7 1.6
1.35
2
1.
1.3
3
1.
0.6 1.5
1.25
4
1.
1.2 1.5
1.6
0.5 1.8 1.4
1.7
2.0
1.15 1.9
2.2
1
0.4 1. 2.4 1.3
2.6
3.0
0.3 1.2
05
1.
0.25
3.0
2.8
1.1 1.1
2.6 2.4
2.2 1.2
2.0 1.1
1.05
1.9 1.8
1.0 1.0
1.7
January 1, 1941
1.6
1.4
1.3
0.9 0.9
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PSEUDO REDUCED PRESSURE
WEOX02.163
5-34
March 1995
6 WELL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

Section Page
6.1 WELLHEADS 6-1
6.2 BLOWOUT PREVENTER EQUIPMENT 6-5
6.3 CONTROL SYSTEMS 6-43
6.4 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 6-55
6.5 EQUIPMENT TESTING 6-64
Blowout preventers and associated equipment provide the means of controlling a

well after primary control has been lost.
The basic requirements for effective BOP equipment include:
• A properly designed and cemented casing string that can contain pressures
encountered whilst drilling.
• A properly designed and installed wellhead assembly that can support, and seal
between, the casing string and the BOP stack.
• BOPs securely anchored to the wellhead and capable of closing off the annulus
against openhole or any tool that is run into the hole.
• A control system to operate the BOPs which features adequate redundancy and
acceptable closing times.
• A choke system that can maintain a variable back pressure on a well whilst it is
circulated.
• A kill system which gives flexibility to pump to the hole via the annulus or
drillstring.
• Instrumentation that allows control of the well killing operation.
March 1995
6.1 WELLHEADS
Paragraph Page
1 Surface Wellheads 6-2
2 Subsea Wellheads 6-2
6-1
March 1995
1 Surface Wellheads
A conventional wellhead for use on land, platform and jack-up rigs, comprises a series of
spools and is based on a starting head. The starting head is anchored to the surface string of
casing, with the weight of the casing transferred to the cement, or mud line hanger. Additional
support may be provided by the conductor.
The major components of the surface wellhead are as follows:
(a) Spools
Conventional wellhead spools generally incorporate the following features:
• API standard flanges, or hub to suit a clamp, top and bottom. The flange face has a
machined groove, often inlaid with stainless steel, to suit an API gasket.
• A set of seals, sometimes energised with plastic packing, in the base of the spool, to
pack off around the preceding casing stub.
• A bowl to accommodate the next casing string slips.
• Studded or flanged side-arms below the bowl,which provide communication to the casing
annulus. Often the side-arm is threaded to accept a plug to facilitate valve removal.
• Lock down screws are provided in the top flange of most spools, to retain, and
sometimes to energise the pack-off, and also to retain the bore protector.
• Ports are provided to allow the pressure testing of the flange seals (i.e. the void
between the slip and seal assembly, the upper spool seals, and the ring gasket).
(b) Slip and Seal Assembly

The weight of the casing string is transferred onto the preceding spool via casing slips.
The assembly incorporates a packer, which is weight or jack screw energised, and seals
the annulus between casing and spool.
As an alternative to the conventional stack of spools, several manufacturers offer a more

compact system, in which the conventional stack of spools is replaced by wellhead housing
in which successive casing slips/hangers are stacked. Such a system greatly simplifies and
speeds wellhead installation; it can be similar in concept to a subsea wellhead.
2 Subsea Wellheads
A subsea wellhead as used on floating rigs, consists of one or two wellhead housings, casing
hangers/pack-offs and a guide base. It is positioned just above the seabed.
The wellhead housings are normally made up onto the conductor and 13 3/8 in. casing in the
case of a 2 stack system, or onto the conductor and surface casing in the case of a single
stack system. They perform four functions:
• Support of casing strings by means of an internal upset on which the first casing hanger
lands. Subsequent casing hangers land off on the previous seal assembly.
6-2
March 1995
• Pressure isolation of the casing annulus from the wellbore by providing a polished bore
on which the seal assembly packs off.
• Pressure containment between the wellhead housing and the BOP, by provision of a
polished stainless steel inlaid profile for a gasket in the hub bore.
• Support of the stack which lands on the hub and latches onto a profile on the outside of
the hub.
Commonly 21 1/4 in. housings are rated to 2000 or 5000 psi, 16 3/4 in. housings to 5000 or
10,000 psi, 18 3/4 in. and 13 5/8 in. housings to 10,000 psi or 15,000 psi.
The following are the major items of equipment associated with the subsea wellhead:
(a) Casing Hangers

Casing hangers are screwed on to the top of the casing string, and are landed in the
wellhead on a retrievable handling string.
(b) Seal Assembly

The seal assembly provides a means of isolating the casing annulus by sealing between
the hanger and the wellhead housing. In most systems, the packer is energised with
weight or by right hand torque, although some deep water designs are set hydraulically.
Generally, the energised packer is locked into a recess in the housing.
(c) Stack Connector

The BOP stack is connected to the wellhead by means of a hydraulically actuated
connector which clamps on to a profile on the outside of the hub. The connector should
have the same pressure rating as the stack. The connector retains a metal gasket that is
weight and pressure energised, to seal between the wellhead and connector.
(d) Permanent Guide Base

A permanent guide base is locked onto and run with the 30 in. wellhead housing. It acts
as an anchor for the guidelines, and a guide for locating the stack connector precisely
over the wellhead. For deep water guidelineless operations, the standard square four
posted guide base is replaced by a funnel, or petal shaped guide box.
6-3/4
6-3
March 1995
6.2 BLOWOUT PREVENTER EQUIPMENT

Paragraph Page
1 Annular Preventers 6-7
2 Ram Type Preventers 6-15
3 BOP Stack Size and Pressure Rating 6-20
4 Stack Configurations 6-23
5 Choke and Kill Lines 6-29
6 Choke and Standpipe Manifolds 6-36
7 Diverters 6-39
Illustrations
6.1 Annular Preventer Sealing Elements 6-8
6.2 Hydril Annular Preventer Type MSP 6-9
6.3 Hydril Annular Preventer Type GK 6-10
6.4 Hydril Annular Preventer Type GL 6-11
6.5 Shaffer Annular Preventer 6-12
6.6 Cameron Annular Preventer Type D 6-13
6.7 Packing Unit Selection (from Hydril) 6-14
6.8 Secondary Rod Seal – Cameron Type U 6-17
6.9 Ram Preventer Opening and Closing Ratios 6-18
6.10 Approved BOPs for Company Operations 6-21
6.11 Availability and Bore of Blowout Preventers by
Major Manufacturers 6-22
6.12 5M Surface BOP Stack 6-25
6.13 10M/15M Surface BOP Stack 6-26
6.14 Four Inlet/Outlet 10M/15M Subsea BOP Stack 6-27
6.15 Three Inlet/Outlet 10M/15M Subsea BOP Stack 6-28
6.16 Specifications for BOP Flanges, Ring Gaskets,
Flange Bolts and Nuts 6-34
6-5
March 1995
6.17 Hydril Drilling Spool Data 6-35

6.18 Choke Manifold, 10M/15M 6-38
6.19 Standpipe Manifold 6-39
6.20 Subsea Diverter Stack 6-40
6-6
March 1995
1 Annular Preventers
Annular preventers have a doughnut shaped elastic element with bonded steel internal
reinforcing. Extrusion of the element into the wellbore is effected by upwards movement of
a hydraulically actuated piston. The element is designed to seal around any shape or size of
pipe and to close on openhole. (See Figure 6.1.)
An important function of annular preventers is to facilitate the stripping of the drillpipe in

or out of the well, with pressure on the wellhead. Undue wear of the element is avoided by
the use of pilot-operated hydraulic regulator, which controls closing pressure.
The majority of annular preventers currently in use are manufactured by Hydril (Types MSP,
GK, GL, GX), Shaffer (Spherical) and Cameron (Type D), these are illustrated below (See
Figures 6.2 to 6.6) together with a summary of major operating features.
The following are the most important aspects of the operation of annular preventers:
• To obtain maximum sealing element life, hydraulic closing pressures should conform to
the manufacturer’s recommendations for pressure testing and operational use of the
preventers. Excessive closing pressures, when coupled with wellbore pressure sealing
effects, cause high internal stresses in the element and reduce element life.
• Cavities should be flushed out and the element inspected following each well. Preventers
should be stripped and inspected annually. Seals should be replaced and all sealing
surfaces inspected.
• Cap seals should be replaced when changing elements.
• Drilling tools, especially rock bits, should be run cautiously through BOPs to minimise
element damage. Elements of annular preventers do not, on occasions, retract fully.
• The type of elastomer (natural rubber, synthetic rubber, neoprene) used in the
packing␣element should be the most suitable for a particular wellhead environment. See
Figure 6.7.
• Although most models and sizes of annular preventer will seal an openhole in an
emergency operation, it is not recommended as such gross deformation of the elastomer
causes cracking and accelerated wear.
• Closing pressures should be regulated to the pressures specified by the manufacturers.

This information should be available at the rigsite.
• When stripping, the closing pressure should be regulated to the minimum required for a
slight weeping of mud past the element. Closing pressures higher than this will increase
element wear. The pipe should be moved slowly, particularly as tool joints pass through
the element. The manufacturers also provide information regarding recommended closing
pressures during stripping operations. Surge vessels on the closing ports will help to
smooth-out surge pressures as tool joints pass through the element.
6-7
March 1995
Figure 6.1 Annular Preventer Sealing Elements
SPHERICAL SEALING ELEMENT CUTAWAY DRAWING SHOWING HOW RUBBER

(SHAFFER) IS MOULDED AROUND STEEL SEGMENTS
(HYDRIL)
(CAMERON)
OPEN CLOSED ON PIPE CLOSED ON PIPE
WEOX02.164
6-8
March 1995
PACKING UNIT
PISTON
OPENING
CHAMBER
CLOSING
CHAMBER
Operating Features:
1. Will close on open hole and hold 2000psi (but not recommended).
2. Primary usage is in diverter systems.
3. Automatically returns to the open position when closing pressure is released.
4. Sealing assistance is gained from the well pressure.
5. Good stripping capability of the packing unit since (fatigue) wear occurs on the
outside of the packing unit.
Figure 6.2 Hydril Annular Preventer Type MSP

WEOX02.165
• Most annular preventers are designed to use wellbore pressure to assist in maintaining
closure. In some circumstances and depending on the preventer size, the well pressure
can maintain closure without any closing hydraulic pressure being applied. An annular
preventer should never be operated without some closing hydraulic pressure applied.
The reason is that with only well pressure maintaining closure, the packing unit may
suddenly open with only a small surge or reduction in well pressure. Also, the pressure
seal may be lost around the body of the drillpipe after a tool joint passes through the
element during stripping operations.
6-9
March 1995
Figure 6.3 Hydril Annular Preventer Type GK
PISTON TRAVEL
INDICATOR HOLE
PACKING UNIT
PISTON
OPENING PORT
CHAMBER
CLOSING
CHAMBER
Operating Features:
1. Will close on open hole (but not recommended).

2. Sealing assistance is gained from the well pressure.
3. Requires high closing pressures when used in subsea installations.
4. Has provision to measure piston travel to gauge element wear.
5. Available with a bolted top.
WEOX02.166
6-10
March 1995
Figure 6.4 Hydril Annular Preventer Type GL
PACKING UNIT
OPENING
CHAMBER
PISTON
PRIMARY
CLOSING
CHAMBER
SECONDARY
CHAMBER
Operating Features:

2. Some sealing assistance is gained from well pressure.
3. Bolted cover for easier element charge.
4. Primarily designed for subsea operations.
5. Has provision to measure piston travel to gauge element wear.
6. Has a secondary chamber which can be connected four ways to achieve different
effects:
a. Minimise closing/opening fluid volumes;
b. Reduce closing pressure;
c. Automatically compensate (counterbalance) for marine riser hydrostatic pressure
effects in deep water; and
d. Operate as a secondary closing chamber.
WEOX02.167
6-11
March 1995
PACKING UNIT
UPPER ADAPTER
HEAD
OPENING CHAMBER
PISTON
CLOSING CHAMBER
Operating Features:

2. Requires higher closing pressure in subsea applications.
3. Some sealing assistance is gained from the well pressure.
4. No provision for measuring piston travel.
5. Currently the most common annular preventer for subsea use.
6. Important to check seals in upper adapter head when changing
an element and replace if necessary.
WEOX02.168
Figure 6.5 Shaffer Annular Preventer
• Cameron’s Type D annular preventer requires 3000 psi hydraulic closing pressure for
positive closure with no pipe in the preventer. This reqires a bypass arrangement around
the 1500 psi annular regulator on 3000 psi closing units. Hydril’s and Shaffer’s annular
preventers are claimed to provide positive closure with 1500 psi closing unit pressure
when the rubber elements are new.
• If the annular packing element wears out during stripping or well killing operations, the
element can be changed without pulling the pipe. After the pipe rams are closed and
locked below the annular preventer and the hydraulic and well pressure bled off, the
cover of the preventer can be unbolted and the packing element lifted out with a hoist
line. With the element above the preventer, the damaged unit can be split and removed
from the pipe. New packing elements for Hydril and Shaffer annular preventers can be
split in the field and installed in reverse order. Cameron has recently developed a packing
element for their Type D annular preventer which can be split in the field.
6-12
March 1995
• A 1 in. valve can be installed on both the opening and closing lines next to the annular
preventer. These valves must be in the open position at all times except when testing
hydraulic lines and hydraulic chamber seals. These valves can be used to verify seal
leaks between the opening and closing chambers of an annular preventer.
PACKING UNIT
OPENING
CHAMBER
PISTON
CLOSING
CHAMBER
Operating Features:
1. Quick-release top latch for easy element change.

2. Most sizes use less closing fluid than Shaffer and Hydril annular preventers.
3. Overall height is less than Hydril and Shaffer annular preventers.
4. Two piece packing unit.
5. Operational problems have been experienced with this preventer.
6. Requires 3000psi closing pressure to close an openhole.
WEOX02.169
Figure 6.6 Cameron Annular Preventer Type D
6-13
March 1995
PACKING UNIT IDENTIFICATION OPERATING DRILLING FLUID

TYPE Colour Code TEMP RANGE COMPATIBILITY
NATURAL
RUBBER Black NR -30°F – 225°F Waterbase fluid
NITRILE Red Oil base/oil

RUBBER Band NBR -20°F – 190°F additive fluid
NEOPRENE Green
RUBBER Band CR -30°F – 170°F Oil base fluid
Figure 6.7 Packing Unit Selection (from Hydril)
• Only packing elements which are supplied by the manufacturer of the annular preventer
should be used. New or repaired units obtained from other service companies should
not be used since the preventer manufacturers cannot be held responsible for malfunction
of their equipment unless their elements are installed.
Closing pressures must be adjusted when annular preventers are operated subsea. The
manufacturers’ recommendations for the required adjustment pressure are summarised below:
• For Hydril GK and MSP, the adjustment pressure is related to the mud weight, the water
depth, and the water density as follows:
(MW X 1.421 X D) – ρ
(w X D X 1.421)
∆P = (psi)
CR
where ∆P = adjustment pressure (psi)
MW = mud weight in the riser (SG)
ρw = sea water density (SG)
D = water depth (m)
CR = annular closing ratio
and
Closing chamber area

CR =
Closing chamber area – Opening chamber area
For example CR for Hydril 13 5/8 in. 5M GK = 2.56

CR for Hydril 21 1/4 in. 2M MSP = 4.74
and so:
Subsea closing pressure = Surface closing pressure + Adjustment pressure
• For Hydril GL operated subsea (with the secondary chamber connected to the
opening␣line):
Adjustment pressure as for Hydril GK in subsea operation.
6-14
March 1995
• For Hydril GL operated subsea (with the secondary chamber connected to the
closing␣line):
Adjustment pressure = K X Adjustment pressure (as determined for Hydril GK)
where
K = Closing chamber area

Closing chamber area – Secondary chamber area
• For Hydril GL operated subsea (with secondary chamber in hydraulic communication

with the riser):
No adjustment required.
• For the NL Shaffer annular operated subsea, tests carried out by Exxon indicated
that the required adjustment to the closing pressure is given by the following:
For the 16 3/4 in. 5M: ∆P = (0.335MW – 0.335)D
For the 18 3/4 in. 5M: ∆P = (0.339MW – 0.318)D
2 Ram Type Preventers

Ram type BOPs have two hydraulically actuated horizontally opposed rams which are either
designed to seal off an openhole or an annulus against a pipe of specific diameter. Variable
bore pipe rams are also available for most ram preventers.
At least one preventer should be fitted with rams to suit each size of drillpipe in the hole.
However, it is not considered necessary to install casing rams under normal circumstances;
annular preventers suffice for closing on casing, unless conditions are exceptional.
On subsea stacks, pipe rams should be designed to support the string weight, (i.e. to hang-off
on) and at least one set of blind/shear rams installed.
The working pressure of ram preventers should be at least equal to the maximum anticipated
surface pressures, plus a margin for pumping to the well.
There are several different types of ram preventer, as outlined below:
(a) Pipe Rams

Standard pipe rams are designed to centralise and pack-off around one specific size of
drillpipe or casing.
(b) Variable Pipe Rams

Variable pipe rams are available for some models. One set of variable rams will provide
back-up for two different pipe rams, e.g. 3 1/2 in. and 5 in. or 5 in. and 7 in. Some
variable rams have a limited hang-off capacity, which is dependent on relative tool joint
size and ram range.
6-15
March 1995
Cameron offer the following sizes of variable bore rams:
BOP Bore Pipe Size Range
11 in. 5 in. – 2 7/8 in.

11 in. 5 1/2 in. – 3 1/2 in.
13 5/8 in. 7 in. – 4 1/2 in.
13 5/8 in. 5 in. – 2 7/8 in.
16 3/4 in. 7 in. – 3 1/2 in.
16 3/4 in. 5 in. – 2 7/8 in.
18 3/4 in. 7 5/8 in. – 3 1/2 in.
18 3/4 in. 5 in – 2 7/8 in.
(c) Hanging Rams

Pipe rams with enhanced load-bearing capabilities (usually rated to 600,000 lb) can be
furnished for floating operations. Sometimes this involves special hardening of the
bearing area, which might render the ram unsuitable for sour service.
(d) Blind/Shear Rams

These are designed to cut drillpipe and then seal as blind rams. The pipe stub is
accommodated in a recess. Shearing of drillpipe should be carried out with the pipe
stationary, which involves hanging off on floating rigs, and in tension, if practical. Care
should be taken to ensure that the pipe body, not a tool joint, is opposite the rams. On
some preventers, it may be necessary to increase operating pressure above 1500 psi to
shear. Blind/shear rams should be specified when ordering a preventer, as some preventers
require oversized cylinders or other special features. Some models of blind/shear ram
are unsuitable for sour service.
(e) Offset Rams

Offset rams and dual offset rams are available for dual completions, and should be used
where appropriate.
The majority of ram-type preventers in present day use are manufactured by Cameron (Types
U and T), NL Shaffer (Types LWS and SL) and Hydril (Types V and X). Although the
detailed design of products from the three manufacturers varies, most models share the
following basic features:
• Self Feeding Action of Elastomer
The front elements of ram seals have steel plates bonded to the rubber. As the rams
are␣ b rought together , these steel plates meet before the preventer is fully closed.
Further␣movement of the ram bodies causes extrusion of the rubber element, thereby
effecting a seal.
If the rams are used for stripping pipe, the front face of the ram sealing element will
wear. The self-feeding action, brought about by the steel plates, will ensure that rubber
from the packing element moves forwards to replace that which is worn away.
• Ram Locking Devices
Hydraulically operated ram preventers are provided with locking-screw stem extensions
and large diameter hand wheels similar to the operating screws of manually closed
preventers. The main purpose of the locking screws is to manually lock the rams in the
6-16
March 1995
closed position after they are shut hydraulically. In an emergency, the screws can be
used to close the rams if the hydraulic system fails. If the locking screws are used to
close the rams, the hydraulic closing unit valve handle should be turned to the closed
position. This will eliminate the possibility of hydraulic oil being trapped on the opening
side of the actuating pistons.
An optional hydraulic lock mechanism (Cameron’s Wedge Lock, Shaffer’s Poslock and
Hydril’s MPL) can be used in place of locking screws to lock the rams in the closed
position. The hydraulic lock holds the rams closed until unlocking pressure is applied
even though the primary control pressure is released. The hydraulic ram lock was
developed for subsea BOP stacks and can be used on land rigs in place of the manually
operated locking screws.
BACK-UP RINGS PLASTIC INJECTION SCREW

(IN 10000 AND 15000psi
WP PREVENTERS ONLY)
CHECK VALVE
ENERGISING RING
HYCAR LIP SEAL PLASTIC PACKING RING
RETAINER RING AND
LOCKING RING
'O' RING
VENT TO ATMOSPHERE
OPERATING CYLINDER
PREVENTER BODY PREVENTER BONNET
WEOX02.171
Figure 6.8 Secondary Rod Seal – Cameron Type U
• Secondary Shaft Seals
All ram preventers with rated working pressure 5000 psi or higher, should be equipped
with secondary piston rod seals, see Figure 6.8, in case the primary rod seals fail. Due
to routine wear, the primary rod seal may leak under excessive pressure during well
control operations. The secondary seal is plastic which is stored in a cavity until it is
activated by forcing it around the ram rod. This plastic seal is used only during emergency
situations. The secondary seal is designed for static conditions and movement of the rod
causes rapid wear of both the seal and rod. The primary rod seal must always be repaired
when the emergency is over. During the initial pressure testing of a BOP stack, the
secondary seals on each ram preventer should be removed to assure that the main rod
seals are tested. The secondary seal can be removed by unscrewing the energising plug,
removing the check valve and digging out the plastic packing.
6-17
March 1995
Cameron U Shaffer ‘SL’ Hydril Ram

SIZE WP (psi)
Open Close Open Close Open Close
7 1/16 in. 3,000 2.3 6.9 1.5 5.4

5,000 2.3 6.9 1.5 5.4
10,000 2.3 6.9 1.7 8.2
15,000 2.3 6.9 3.37 7.11 6.6 7.6
9 in. 2,000
3,000 2.6 5.3
5,000 2.6 5.3
10,000
11 in. 2,000 2.5 7.3

3,000 2.5 7.3 2.0 6.8
5,000 2.5 7.3 2.0 6.8
10,000 2.5 7.3 7.62 7.11 2.4 7.6
15,000 2.2 9.9 2.8 7.11 3.24 7.6
13 5/8 in. 3,000 2.3 7.0 3.00 5.54 2.1 5.2

5,000 2.3 7.0 3.00 5.54 2.1 5.2
10,000 2.3 7.0 4.29 7.11 3.8 10.6
15,000 5.6 8.4 2.14 7.11 3.56 7.74
16 3/4 in. 2,000

3,000 2.3 6.8
5,000 2.3 6.8 2.03 5.54
10,000 2.3 6.8 2.06 7.11 2.41 10.6
18 3/4 in. 10,000 3.6 7.4 1.83 7.11 1.9 10.6

15,000 4.1 9.7 1.68 10.85 2.15 7.27
21 1/4 in. 2,000 1.3 7.0 0.98 5.23

3,000 1.3 7.0 0.98 5.2
5,000 5.1 6.2 1.9 10.6
10,000 4.1 7.2 1.63 7.11
26 3/4 in. 2,000

3,000 1.0 7.0
Figure 6.9 Ram Preventer Opening and Closing Ratios
• Closing Ratios
Ram-type preventers have specially designed opening and closing ratios, as shown in
Figure 6.9. These are the ratios between the well pressures and the operating pressures
needed to open or close the rams. Closing ratios are generally in the range of six-to-one
to nine-to-one. This means that a preventer having a closing ratio of six-to-one would
require 500 psi closing pressure to close the preventer when the wellbore pressure is
3000 psi. Opening ratios are much lower because the wellbore pressure acts behind the
ram to oppose opening. Opening ratios of two-to-one are common.
6-18
March 1995
It should also be noted that, for high wellbore pressures, pressures greater than 3000 psi
may be required to open some ram preventers.
• Bonnet Seals
Bonnet (or door) seals are exposed to wellbore pressures and fluids. Since they can be
subjected to high pressures and temperatures without being backed-up by another seal,
bonnet seals are critical to the integrity of the BOP system. The seals are generally of
fibrous/rubber construction and require careful handling and installation. Manufacturers’
recommendations should be observed meticulously.
– Bonnet seals should be replaced each time bonnets are opened.
– Bonnet seals should be handled carefully, particularly on installation, and be stored

at controlled temperatures in darkness. They should be discarded after storage for
one year.
– Bonnet bolts should be made up to manufacturers’ recommended torques, which can

be extremely high with some compression-type seals. Due regard should be paid to
the type of lubricant used, eg make-up torque is reduced by approximately 50% if a
molybdenum disulphide lubricant, rather than an API5A lubricant, is used.
– Bonnet faces, preventer faces and seal grooves should be clean and dry before seal
installation and make-up.
– Bonnet seals should be tested after installation.
The following are the most important aspects of the care and maintenance of ram preventers:
• Pipe rams should not be closed on openhole or on mis-matched pipe. This would induce
excessive extrusion of the elastomer and can cause cracking or bonding failures.
• Ram recesses should be washed out and the ram element inspected following each well.
Preventers should be stripped, inspected (particularly all sealing surfaces) and seals
replaced annually.
• When in good operating condition, ram preventers should close with 300 psi or less
hydraulic pressure without wellbore pressure. If high closing pressure is required during
test operations, the preventer should be checked first for debris in the ram cavity and
then inspected for piston rod misalignment or other mechanical problems.
• Wellbore pressure helps close ram preventers. They are designed to hold pressure from
the lower side and will not seal properly if installed upside down. Also, ram preventers
are not designed to be pressure tested from the top side and this can damage the preventer.
Field experience has proven that ram preventers are more likely to leak with a
low␣wellbore pressure than a high pressure. For this reason, they should be tested at
200/300␣psi prior to the rated working pressure test.
• Ram preventers will close faster than annular preventers, especially in the larger sizes.
Usually, ram preventers require only one-third or less of the hydraulic fluid volume to
close compared to an annular. In instances where mechanical problems prevent rapid
closure of the annular preventer, a ram preventer should be closed immediately to
minimise additional well flow.
• The main closing unit control handle for operating blind or blind/shear rams should
always be protected against accidental closure with pipe in the hole. Numerous costly
incidents have resulted from accidentally closing the blind rams and flattening or cutting
6-19
March 1995
the drillpipe during well control or drilling operations. A flip-up cover without locking
device should be used. If the handle is locked in the open position, it prevents closing
the preventer from a remote station. Shear rams are not recommended for land rig
operations.
• When aluminium drillpipe is used, special consideration must be given to ram size
selection. For example, 5 in. aluminium drillpipe has an outside body diameter of 5.150
in., versus a 5.000 in. body diameter for 5 in. steel pipe. Thus, regular 5 in. ram blocks
must be slightly modified to seal and not damage the main tube section of aluminium
pipe. In addition, 5 in. aluminium pipe has a tapered transition zone for a length of 41
in. to 46 in. on both the box and pin ends from 5.150 in. OD up to 5.688 in. OD. Standard
rams will not seal on the tapered end sections. Variable bore rams can be used to seal on
the body and end sections of aluminium drillpipe.
• Ram preventers can be used to strip drillpipe in or out of the hole under pressure, but it
is necessary to use two preventers which have sufficient distance between rams to isolate
a tool joint box. The drilling spool provides this space in a five preventer stack. The
upper and lower rams of a double ram preventer are too close together for this purpose.
Excessive hydraulic pressure should not be applied on the rams when stripping pipe
under pressure because it tends to wear the resilient material of the ram. The lowest ram
in the BOP stack should never be used for stripping since it is always considered the
master valve.
3 BOP Stack Size and Pressure Rating

The following stacks are available:
• Single stack systems
Bore Working Pressure
21 1/4 in. 10M (virtually obsolete)

18 3/4 in. 10M or 15M
16 3/4 in. 5M or 10M
• Multiple stack systems
Bore Working Pressure
21 1/4 in. 2M or 5M
13 5/8 in. 5M, 10M or 15M
11 in. 5M, 10M or 15M
Figure 6.10 shows a summary of approved BOPs. Figure 6.11 shows the availability
and bore of BOPs from the major manufacturers.
6-20
March 1995
OFFSHORE DIVERTER SYSTEMS
Hughes Offshore Type KFDS (Floating)

Hughes Offshore Type KFDJ (Platform)
Hydril C Type FSP (Floating and Platform)

(with Flow Selector)
ANNULAR PREVENTERS ACCEPTABLE RUBBERS*
Cameron – Type D Nitrile – Water and Oil Muds
Hydril – MSP, GK, The following types of Hydril

GKS, GS, GL, GX rubbers are available:
1. Natural rubber (black) –
Water base muds
2. Synthetic rubber (red) – All muds
3. Neoprene rubber (green) – Low
temperature service and oil muds
Shaffer – Spherical The following types of Shaffer rubbers are available:

1. Natural rubber (black) – Water base muds
2. Nitrile (blue) – Oil and water base muds
RAM PREVENTERS ACCEPTABLE RUBBERS*
Cameron – Type QRC Super Wear – Water and oil muds

Cameron – Type U Super Wear – Water and oil muds
Hydril – Type Ram Nitrile – Water and oil muds
Shaffer – Type LWP The following types of Shaffer rubbers are available:
Shaffer – Type LWS 1. Natural rubber (black) – Water base muds
Shaffer – Type SL 2. Nitrile (blue) – Oil and water base muds
Koomey – Type PL PB
* All BOP manufacturers specify their rubber elements and rams as H2S resistant;
however, H 2S exposure reduces the service life of rubber products. The performance
of these products can vary significantly, depending on the extent of exposure and H2S
content.
** Shaffer Type 70 ram blocks are not acceptable because of metallurgical and rubber
packer failures.
Figure 6.10 Approved BOPs for Company Operations
6-21
March 1995
March 1995
Figure 6.11 Availability and Bore of Blowout Preventers Blowout Preventer

Nominal Working
Cameron Cameron Cameron Hydril Hydril Hydril Hydril Hydril Shaffer Shaffer Shaffer Koomey
U QRC D GK GL GX HSP Ram LWS SL Spherical
Size Pressure
7 1/16 in. 3,000 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. – – – 7 1/16 in. – – 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in.
7 1/16 in. 5,000 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. – – – 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. – 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in.
by Major Manufacturers
7 1/16 in. 10,000 7 1/16 in. – 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. – – – 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. – 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in.
7 1/16 in. 15,000 7 1/16 in. – 7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. – – – 7 1/16 in. – 7 1/16 in. – 7 1/16 in.
9 in. 2,000 – – – – – – 9 in. – – – – –

9 in. 3,000 – 9 in. – 9 in. – – – 9 in. – – 9 in. –
9 in. 5,000 – 9 in. – 9 in. – – – 9 in. 9 in. – 9 in. –
9 in. 10,000 – – – 9 in. – – – – – – – –
11 in. 2,000 – – – – – – 11 in. – – – – –

11 in. 3,000 11 in. 11 in. 11 in. 11 in. – – – 11 in. 11 in. – 11 in. 11 in.

11 in. 5,000 11 in. 11 in. 11 in. 11 in. – – – 11 in. 11 in. – 11 in. 11 in.
11 in. 10,000 11 in. – 11 in. 11 in. – 11 in. – 11 in. – 11 in. 11 in. 11 in.
11 in. 15,000 11 in. – 11 in. – – 11 in. – 11 in. – 11 in. – 11 in.
13 5/8 in. 3,000 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. – – – 13 5/8 in. – 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in.
6-22
13 5/8 in. 5,000 13 5/8 in. – 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. – – 13 5/8 in. – 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in.
13 5/8 in. 10,000 13 5/8 in. – 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. – 13 5/8 in. – 13 5/8 in. – 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in.
13 5/8 in. 15,000 13 5/8 in. – – – – 13 5/8 in. – 13 5/8 in. – 13 5/8 in. – 13 5/8 in.
16 3/4 in. 2,000 – 16 3/4 in. – 16 3/4 in. – – – – – – – –

16 3/4 in. 3,000 16 3/4 in. – 16 3/4 in. 16 3/4 in. – – – – – – – –
16 3/4 in. 5,000 16 3/4 in. – 16 3/4 in. 16 3/4 in. 16 3/4 in. – – – – 16 3/4 in. 16 3/4 in. –
16 3/4 in. 10,000 16 3/4 in. – – – – – – 16 3/4 in. – 16 3/4 in. – –
18 3/4 in. 5,000 – – 18 3/4 in. – 18 3/4 in. – – – – – 18 3/4 in. –

18 3/4 in. 10,000 18 3/4 in. – 18 3/4 in. – – 18 3/4 in. – 18 3/4 in. – 18 3/4 in. – 18 3/4 in.
18 3/4 in. 15,000 18 3/4 in. – – – – – – 18 3/4 in. – 18 3/4 in. – 18 3/4 in.
21 1/4 in. 2,000 21 1/4 in. – – – – – 21 1/4 in. 21 1/4 in. 21 1/4 in. – 21 1/4 in. 21 1/4 in.
21 1/4 in. 3,000 20 3/4 in. – 21 1/4 in. – – – – 20 3/4 in. 20 3/4 in. – – 20 3/4 in.
21 1/4 in. 5,000 21 1/4 in. – – – 21 1/4 in. – – 21 1/4 in. – – 21 1/4 in. 21 1/4 in.
21 1/4 in. 10,000 21 1/4 in. – – – – – – – – 21 1/4 in. – 21 1/4 in.
26 3/4 in. 2,000 – – – – – – – – – – – –

26 3/4 in. 3,000 26 3/4 in. – – – – – – – – – – –
29 1/2 in. 500 – – – – – – 29 1/2 in. – – – – –
30 1,000 – – – – – – 30 in. – – – – –
The test pressure rating of BOP equipment is a one off test, conducted on the BOP (or
valve) body at the time of manufacture to a pressure 50% greater than the working pressure.
In service, working pressure ratings should not be exceeded.
It is acceptable to use annular preventers rated at 5000 psi less than the rams for certain
10M and 15M applications.
4 Stack Configurations
Company policy regarding minimum stack configurations for all categories of land and
offshore operations is detailed in the Drilling Policy and Guidelines Manual. Figures 6.12
to 6.15 show examples of acceptable stacks for various applications. The particular details
of each well will however dictate the most suitable stack for each application.
(a) 5M Surface BOP Stack (Figure 6.12)

The following points should be considered regarding this stack:
• Two ram preventers and one annular preventer in line with Company policy.
• Facility for stripping pipe through annular preventer.
• No facility for ram combination stripping is available on this stack.
• If surface pressures exceed the pressure rating of the annular preventer, the pipe
rams are closed and the blind rams changed to pipe. The upper pipe rams are closed,
the lower pipe opened and the kick circulated out through the choke line.
• Annular access below the lowermost ram possible through wellhead outlet.
• Lowermost ram not used for stripping operations and only used when no other ram
available for this purpose (i.e. when changing ram elements and in the event of failure
of rams above).
• If casing rams are required they should be positioned in the top ram preventer cavity.
The rams should be changed out on the trip out of the hole prior to running casing,
before pulling the BHA through the stack. The bonnet seals are tested against the
test plug and the annular prior to running casing.
(b) 10M/15M Surface BOP Stack (Figure 6.13)

• Three ram preventers and one annular preventer in line with Company policy.
• Pipe can be stripped through annular preventer and between annular and upper
pipe␣ram.
• Ram preventer combination stripping is possible if blind rams are replaced with
pipe rams, if suitable space is available between top two ram type preventers.
• A line must be rigged up to the flange between the top two ram preventers to facilitate
ram combination stripping.
• Annular access below the lowermost ram is possible through wellhead outlet.
6-23
March 1995
• Well can be circulated either under the annular preventer or under the upper pipe rams.
• Lowermost rams not used for stripping operations and only used when no other ram
available for this purpose.
• If casing rams are required they should be positioned in the upper pipe ram preventer
cavity. The rams should be changed out on the trip out of the hole prior to running
casing, before pulling the BHA through the stack. The bonnet seals are tested against
the test plug and the annular prior to running casing.
(c) Four Inlet/Outlet 10M/15M Subsea BOP Stack (Figure 6.14)

• Four ram preventers, two annular preventers in line with Company policy for minimum
requirements for high pressure subsea BOP stacks.
• Four inlet/outlets provided in order to maximise flexibility of the stack.
• For normal kill procedure drillstring is hung off on pipe ram no. 2 and well circulated
through upper choke line.
• There should be adequate space between the blind shear and pipe ram no. 2 to shear
on pipe body when the pipe is hung off on pipe ram no. 2. (This may not be possible
if the top two ram type preventers are a double.) It is important to have the facility to
shear the pipe quickly and reliably during a well control operation, especially so on
a dynamically positioned vessel.
• The lower kill line is used as the kill line monitor (See Standard Techniques,
Chapter␣6, Volume 1).
• In the event of failure of pipe ram no. 2, or the upper choke line upstream of the
failsafes, the well can be shut-in on and hung off on pipe ram no. 3 and returns taken
up the lower kill line.
• In the event of failure of the choke line downstream of the failsafes, the well can be
circulated through the kill line.
• The fact that there is an inlet/outlet, that can be used as a choke line, immediately
below pipe ram no. 2 and 3, means that the possibility of trapped gas, after a well
control operation, is minimised.
• Variable bore rams can be fitted in the ram preventers below the blind/shear rams.
The hang off capability of these rams should be checked against maximum anticipated
string weights.
• BOP gas can be removed from this stack using the technique described in Chapter␣6
of Volume 1, taking returns up the lower kill line as the riser is U-tubed.
• The upper (primary) annular preventer can be recovered with lower riser package
for element replacement.
• Lowermost ram only used when no other ram available is for this purpose. The concept
for use of this ram is similar to that of the master valve on a production tree.
• The lower choke line is used primarily for pressure testing and monitoring the well.
In line with Company policy it should not be used for extended periods of circulation.
(If this line fails during the displacement of a kick there is no back-up available.)
6-24
March 1995
Figure 6.12 5M Surface BOP Stack
FLOWLINE
FILL UP
LINE 8
ANNULAR
BOP
BLIND RAMS
5
CHOKE
MANIFOLD
4 3 7 6
PIPE RAMS
SECTION A
CASING SPOOL
1 1
2
1. Flanged gate valves – 2in minimum ID – same working pressure as 'A' section. The outside valve is the
working valve during drilling operation. This valve is removed and reused after completion.
2. Tee with tapped bullplug, needle valve, and pressure gauge.
3. Flanged gate valve – 2in minimum ID – same working pressure as BOP stack.
4. As 3. or flanged spring-loaded type check valve – 2in minimum ID – same working pressure as BOP
stack.
5. Drilling spool – two flanged side outlets – 3in choke and 2in kill line minimum IDs.
6. Flanged hydraulically controlled gate valve – 3in minimum ID – same working pressure as BOP stack.
Top of annular preventer must be equipped with API flange ring gasket. All flange studs must be in place or
8. holes filled in with screw type plugs.
NOTES:
• Unless specified otherwise in the Bid Letter and/or Contract, the contractor will furnish and maintain all
components shown except the 'A' section and items 1 and 2, which will be furnished by the Company.
• The choke line between the drilling spool and choke manifold should not contain any bend or turn in the
pipe body. Any bend or turn required should be made with a running tee with a blind flange or welded
bullplug. All connections should be flanged or welded. All fabrications requiring welding must be done by a
certified welder. Welds should be stress relieved.
WEOX02.175
6-25
March 1995
Figure 6.13 10M/15M Surface BOP Stack
9
FLOWLINE
FILL UP
LINE 8
ANNULAR
BOP
BLIND RAM
OUTLET FLANGE
(USED ONLY FOR
RAM COMBINATION
STRIPPING)
UPPER PIPE RAM
5
DRILLING CHOKE
SPOOL MANIFOLD
4 4 7 6
LOWER PIPE RAM
SECTION
3 3 B
2
SECTION
A
1 1
2
1. Flanged gate valves – 2in minimum ID – same working pressure as 'A' section. The outside valve is the
working valve during drilling operation. This valve is removed and reused after completion.
2. Tee with tapped bullplug, needle valve, and pressure gauge.
3. Flanged gate valve – 2in minimum ID – same working pressure as 'B' section.
5. Drilling spool – two flanged side outlets – 3in choke and 2in kill line minimum IDs.
6. Flanged hydraulically controlled gate valve – 3in minimum ID – same working pressure as BOP stack.
8. Top of annular preventer must be equipped with API flange ring gasket. All flange studs must be in place or
holes filled in with screw type plugs.
9. The ID of the bell nipple must be less than the minimum ID of the BOP stack.
NOTES:
• Unless specified otherwise in the Bid Letter and/or Contract, the contractor will furnish and maintain all
components shown except the 'A' and 'B' sections and items 1 and 2, which will be furnished by the Company.
• The choke line between the drilling spool and choke manifold should not contain any bend or turn in the
pipe body. Any bend or turn required should be made with a running tee with a blind flange or welded
bullplug. All connections should be flanged or welded. All fabrications requiring welding must be done by a
certified welder. Welds should be stress relieved.
WEOX02.176
6-26
March 1995
Figure 6.14 Four Inlet/Outlet 10/15M Subsea BOP Stack
UPPER
ANNULAR
BOP
RISER
CONNECTOR
LOWER
ANNULAR
BOP
BLIND/SHEAR RAMS
PIPE RAM No 2
PIPE RAM No 3
PIPE RAM No 4
WELLHEAD
CONNECTOR
WEOX02.177
6-27
March 1995
Figure 6.15 Three Inlet/Outlet 10/15M Subsea BOP Stack
UPPER
ANNULAR
BOP
RISER
CONNECTOR
LOWER
ANNULAR
BOP
BLIND/SHEAR RAMS
PIPE RAM No 2
PIPE RAM No 3
PIPE RAM No 4
WELLHEAD
CONNECTOR
WEOX02.178
6-28
March 1995
• Annular and ram combination stripping is possible with this stack. Ram combination
stripping is however considered impractical from a floating rig. The lowermost ram
is not used for stripping operations.
Disadvantages:
• Reliance is placed on the annular preventers when running casing.
• Unless variable or suitable sized pipe rams are installed initially, the stack must be
pulled and redressed before using tapered strings. Annular preventers are not to be
considered an adequate substitute for pipe rams when using tapered strings.
• The requirement to have the facility to hang off on pipe ram no. 2 and shear on the
pipe body generally means that it is not possible to use a double preventer for these
two rams.
• If it is not possible to shear on the pipe body when the drillstring is hung off on pipe
ram no. 2, the drillstring should be hung off on pipe ram during well control
operations. This is undesirable and reduces the flexibility of the stack.
(d) Three Inlet/Outlet 10M/15M Subsea Stack

It is recommended that 4 inlets/outlets are provided for high pressure subsea stacks in
order to provide a high level of flexibility/redundancy within the stack.
However it is recognised that many subsea stacks incorporate only 3 inlets/outlets, and
that the cost of conversion to a 4 inlet/outlet configuration may be prohibitive, especially
for short term contracts.
Figure 6.15 shows an acceptable configuration of a 3 inlet/outlet high pressure subsea stack.
The majority of the comments relating to the 4 inlet/outlet stack are applicable in this
case with the obvious exception that there is no line entering the stack below the
lowermost ram.
No inlet/outlet is provided below the lowermost ram because it is considered that the
benefit of such a line is insignificant compared to the reduction in the flexibility of the
stack that this would entail.
5 Choke and Kill Lines

The variations in contractor furnished equipment and the requirements of individual areas
are such that specification of a standard layout is not feasible. However, it is essential that
equipment specifications should suit a particular well, satisfy Company policy and local
legislation. In particular, the choke and kill lines should never be rated to a lower working
pressure than the stack.
It is recommended that ultrasonic testing equipment is held on each rig in order that the wall
thickness of pipework, including choke and kill lines, can be regularly checked.
(a) Surface BOP Stacks

The location of kill and choke outlets on a BOP stack will be influenced primarily by
the number of rams used and their sizes.
6-29
March 1995
• Choke and Kill Outlets
To comply with Company policy, the choke line must have a minimum ID of 3 in.,
the kill line may be as small as 2 in. (but this might restrict operational flexibility
should it be required to substitute for a washed out choke line). During normal
operations, the inner (manual) choke and kill line valves should be open and the
outer (HCR) valves closed.
• Remote Kill Line
On a land rig, a remote kill line can be tied in to the kill line so that it may be used
whichever preventer is closed. The remote kill line should be rated at the pressure
rating of the BOP stack and should terminate at a similarly rated flanged valve, at
least 100 ft from the well. The purpose of this line is to enable a pump truck to be
tied into the well in an emergency situation.
• Wellhead Outlets
It is recommended that wellhead spool outlets are not used for a choke and kill line
tie-ins. Each wellhead spool should have dual valve isolation on one side and valve
removal plugs (VRP) should be installed on the non-active side.
• Check Valves
Traditionally, a check valve has been installed outboard of the stack valves on the
kill line. Now many rigs, particularly jack-ups, have the facility to use the kill line to
augment, or replace, the choke line. In such a hook-up, check valves are omitted.
Company policy is that check valves are not mandatory on the kill line.
Choke and kill lines are generally fabricated in line with the following specifications:
• All connections should be flanged, clamped or welded. Screwed fittings, unions and
chicksans should not be used on the choke lines, although minimal use is acceptable
on kill lines.
• All welding should be carried out under shop conditions with machine cut weld
preparations. All welding should be conducted by certified welders to approved weld
procedures and all welds should be suitably non destructively tested and pressure
tested prior to use.
• Lines, particularly the primary choke line should be installed with the minimum
number of bends. Where bends are required, targeted tees, or block tees should be
used. Swept bends are undesirable.
• Choke lines should be well braced, to withstand severe vibration. Supports should
be fitted as required, but these should not be welded to the choke line.
(b) Subsea BOP Stacks

Subsea choke and kill lines differ from surface systems in that:
• Subsea choke and kill lines require flexible connections at the ball/flex joint, and at
the telescopic joint.
• All subsea choke and kill line valves are fail safe and hydraulically actuated.
• Subsea choke and kill lines are much longer. Depending on water depth, line size
and mud properties, pressure losses in the lines might be significant.
6-30
March 1995
Choke and kill lines are tied into BOP outlets, not to drilling spools or the wellhead. Generally
BOP stacks for exploration wells should have 4 ram, and 2 annular preventers. This provides
some flexibility in case a ram or element fails during a well killing operation.
On some rigs, a hydraulically actuated cement dump valve is provided on the kill line. This
valve may be used to dump cement returns, thereby avoiding long circulation times up the
riser in deep water. It can also be used to flood the riser if it becomes evacuated and in
danger of collapsing. However, the dump valve should be treated with caution. Misuse, or
inadvertent opening, could cause considerable loss of hydrostatic head in the well.
Often dump valves are considered to be unnecessary and are omitted on most rigs.
The following points should be noted regarding the major choke and kill line components:
• All valves should be failsafe. Two valves are required per outlet. Valves should be
installed␣ as close to the BOP outlets as possible, and preferably in line with the outlets.
Side-arms and valves should be well protected by the framework around the stack.
• Targeted tees should be used for all 90 degree bends.
• Choke and kill connections at the lower riser disconnect should be rigidly supported by
the framework, so that they will not part when full working pressure is applied
simultaneously to both lines.
• The choke and kill line across the ball/flex joint should be flexible and not restrict
movement of the joint up to its maximum designed deflection.
• Riser couplings and the LMRP stab plates should be designed to withstand induced
loadings when full working pressure is applied simultaneously to both lines.
• The choke and kill lines across the telescopic joint should be able to accommodate the
maximum designed travel of the joint.
• All surface connections should be flanged, clamped or welded. Screwed fittings,

chicksans and unions should not be used.
• Lines should be installed with the minimum number of bends. Where bends are required,
targeted tees or block tees should be used. Swept bends are not desirable.
• Choke lines should be anchored to withstand vibration. Supports should be fitted as

required, but these should not be welded to the choke line.
• Both the choke and kill line should be tied into the choke manifold to allow one to
replace or augment the other.
(c) Hydraulically Operated Valves

A remotely operated valve is installed on the choke line adjacent to the BOP stack to
rapidly shut off hazardous flow in the event of downstream equipment failure. Another
advantage for remote operation is that this valve is usually located at an elevated working
level in the substructure which makes hand operation difficult and unsafe.
Specifically designed hydraulically controlled gate valves (HCV) are extensively utilised
for this service. The valve must be rated WOGM which means that it is serviceable for
water, oil, gas or mud flow. The hydraulic actuator must be designed for 3000 psi
maximum working pressure; however, the actuator should fully open the valve with
1500 psi control pressure for maximum design conditions. The 3000 and 1500 psi design
6-31
March 1995
pressures are required for compatible operations with standard BOP closing units. The
choke line valve must be operable from both the main and remote closing units. As an
optional feature, hydraulically operated valves are available with stem and handle for
manual operation (to close but not open) in case of hydraulic system failure.
Although numerous companies manufacture HCVs, Cameron Iron Works and NL Shaffer
supply the majority of remotely operated choke line valves since they are initally ordered
as a component of the BOP stack. On most rigs, the hand operated gate valves used for
the choke manifold and kill line are usually the same type as the HCV.
Cameron introduced the HCR (High Closing Ratio) as the first remotely controlled valve
for choke line service. This valve has the same basic design and operational features as
a Cameron QRC preventer. The HCR valve has been used so extensively throughout the
industry that most oil field personnel refer to any make of remotely controlled valve as
the HCR. Because the HCR is limited to 5000 psi working pressure, the advent of 10,000
psi and higher working pressure BOP required additional valve development. Currently,
Cameron’s type F hydraulically operated gate valve is probable the most widely used
and is available with rated working pressures from 3000 psi to 15,000 psi. NL Shaffer’s
choke line valve is the type DB which is rated for 5000, 10,000 and 15,000 psi working
pressures. Other reputable valve manufacturers’ equipment may be acceptable for choke
line service; however, prior well control reliability and experience should be verified.
(d) Subsea Failsafe Valves

These valves are made by a number of companies including Cameron, NL Shaffer, WKM,
Rockwell and Vetco. Generally, these are gate valves closed with a spring operated,
sometimes pressure assisted, closing mechanism.
Two of the more important parameters used in evaluating these valves for floating drilling
operations are their susceptibility to forming hydraulic blocks when used in tandem and
the water depth sensitivity of their operators. The latter is important because when used
subsea, hydrostatic head alone may be sufficient to hold the valves open (in the absence
of closing pressure) if a means is not available to balance the hydrostatic forces acting
on the operator and stem.
• NL Shaffer Valve
The operating characteristics of the NL Shaffer Model CB, bi-directional sealing

valve is governed by the selection of either a short or long sea chest. The Model CB
valve with the short sea chest and a pressure-balancing tail rod will failsafe closed at
rated working pressure regardless of water depth; however, a pressure-assist hydraulic
line is required for normal closure. When equipped with a long sea chest, the valve
requires a single hydraulic line for opening, and closure is obtained by spring action
plus limited line pressure-assist. Line pressure assists the spring closing action
because the pressure balancing tail rod is 1/4 in. smaller in diameter than the stem.
The pressure-assist feature limits the long sea chest valve to a maximum 2400m
water depth for failsafe spring closure.
• Rockwell Valve
The Rockwell (McEvoy) valve has unique features of a split gate, long slip fit seats
to minimise wear in the valve body, and a sealant that is injected to complete the
seal. The seal is always on the downtream side of the gate.
6-32
March 1995
Prior to a modification made in June, 1972, the valve was marginally failsafe in
440m of water; but now a modified version, Model EDU, is available that is
independent of water depth.
• WKM Valve (Model M with D-2-C Operator)
This valve will fail safe closed in 570m water depth. It has no balancing stem;
therefore, the body volume decreases when the valve opens. WKM claims that the
body cavity is so large compared with this change that pressure locking is no problem.
The problem of body lock is solved in the same way as fluid lock when the valves
are in tandem. Basically, flow paths within the body allow redistribution of the small
volume change resulting from valve stem movement.
• Cameron Valves
Cameron has three subsea valve designs: 1) the Type A valve has a solid gate for
uni-directional sealing, 2) The Type AF valve has bi-directional sealing capability
with a ported outlet in the lower body cavity to prevent liquid locking, and 3) the
type DF valve is bi-directional with a balancing stem ported to the sea and a vertical
fluid passageway on the outer surface of the gate to prevent pressure locking. Cameron
rates the Type A and the AF valves for service in water depths to 300m. The Type DF
valve is rated by Cameron for service to a water depth of 1800m.
All valves were originally designed with a dog attached to the gate to rotate the seats
a fraction of a turn when the valve was opened, which reportedly would provide
uniform seat wear. Cameron now recommends removal of the dog since its action
can induce stresses which may cause the seat to fracture if settled baryte and/or
drilled solids prevent seat rotation.
• Vetco Type VS Valve
The Vetco Type VS subsea gate valve is a full-bore, through-conduit gate valve. A
metal-to-metal seat is provided between the moving sealing member (gate) and the
stationary seats. Since the valve lacks a balancing stem, the manufacturer limits the
valve to water depths of 900m to ensure failsafe closure.
(e) BOP Stack Connections

There are three types of connections available for blowout preventer units: flanged,
studded or clamped. Bolted flanges or studs are the most common type of connection
used. The tensile rating of the bolts used in these connections must be sufficient to
withstand the maximum load which may be imposed. The torque applied to the nuts and
bolts must meet API recommended values to maintain the pressure seal.
6-33
March 1995
March 1995
Figure 6.16 Specifications for BOP Flanges, Ring Gaskets,

All blowout preventers, drilling spools, adapter flanges will be furnished with the specific API ring joint flange equipment listed below:
Flange Bolts and Nuts

RATING OF BOP APPROVED FLANGES APPROVED * MAXIMUM BOLT ** MINIMUM NUT
STACK RING GASKETS STRENGTH STRENGTH
2000 psi wp API Type 6B with API Type ASTM Grade ASTM Grade
and 3000 psi wp Type R Flat Bottom RX B-7 2-H
Installations Groove

5000 psi wp API Type 6B with API Type RX or ASTM Grade ASME Grade
Installations Type R Flat Bottom API Type BX w B-7 2-H
Groove or API Type Type 6BX Flange
6-34
6BX w/Type BX Groove
10,000 psi wp API Type 6BX with API Type ASTM Grade ASTM Grade
Installations Type BX Groove BX B-7 2-H
* Acceptable material for flange ring gaskets as per API Spec 6A, ‘Wellhead Equipment’.
Sweet Oil – Low Carbon Steel
Sour Oil or Gas – Type 316 stainless steel preferred but Type 304 stainless steel
acceptable except for high risk H2S wells.
** In some H2S applications, ASTM A-193 Gr B M a maximum Rockwell hardness of 22 may be

acceptable. If used, flanges should be derated per Table 1.4B of API 6A.
Figure 6.17 Hydril Drilling Spool Data
WEOX02.180
(B)
WEIGHT (lb) (A) SPOOL CENTRE
BORE CONNECTIONS SIDE OUTLETS (approx) HEIGHT (in.) LINE TO
FLANGE OR
HUB FACE (in.)
7 1/16 in. 7 1/16 in. 3,000 Flange 3 1/16 in. 3,000 Flange 510 16.50 13.25
9 in. 9 in. 3,000 Flange 3 1/16 in. 3,000 Flange 700 18.12 15.00
11 in. 11 in. 10,000 Hub 3 1/16 in. 10,000 Hub 1285 25.12 18.62
11 in. 11 in. 10,000 Hub 4 1/16 in. 10,000 Hub 1310 25.12 18.62
13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. 5,000 Hub 3 1/16 in. 5,000 Hub 1050 22.38 19.00
13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. 5,000 Hub 4 1/16 in. 5,000 Hub 1075 22.38 19.00
13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. 10,000 Hub 3 1/16 in. 10,000 Hub 1925 27.75 20.88
13 5/8 in. 13 5/8 in. 10,000 Hub 4 1/16 in. 10,000 Hub 1950 27.75 20.88
20 3/4 in. 20 3/4 in. 3,000 Hub 3 1/16 in. 3,000 Hub 2565 27.12 22.52
21 1/4 in. 21 1/4 in. 2,000 Hub 3 1/16 in. 5,000 Hub 1850 23.38 21.75
21 1/4 in. 21 1/4 in. 2,000 Hub 4 1/16 in. 5,000 Hub 1825 23.38 21.75
*29 1/2 in. 29 1/2 in. 500 Flange 7 1/16 in. 500 Flange 2380 31.75 25.25
*29 1/2 in. 29 1/2 in. 500 Flange 12 in. 500 Flange 2320 31.75 25.00
*30 in. 30 in. 1,000 Flange 7 1/16 in. 5,000 Flange 2500 40.00 27.52
*30 in. 30 in. 1,000 Flange 12 in. 1,000 Flange 2450 40.00 27.52
6-35
March 1995
API high-pressure connections are pressure sealed by means of ring-joint gaskets made
of soft iron, low-carbon steel or stainless steel. API Type RX and Type BX ring-joint
gaskets are pressure-energised seals but are not interchangeable. Rings that have been
coated with Teflon, rubber or other resilient materials are not acceptable. All flanges in
the stack and side-outlets should be fitted with new ring-joint gaskets each time they
are assembled. It is important that the ring groove in the flange be clean and dry prior to
flanging up.
API Standard 6A, ‘Wellhead Equipment’, provides specifications for flanged wellhead
fittings. API Type 6B flanges are available in the following pressure ratings: 2000 psi to
5000 psi range. API Type 6BX flanges are available for the 5000 psi to 30,000 psi
range. Figure 6.16 lists specifications for BOP flanges, ring gaskets and bolts. Bolts
must always be the right size – not larger and not smaller than required for the specific
bolt holes.
Hub and clamp connectors are principally used on subsea BOP stacks to reduce the
weight and height. The bolts are designed for easier make-up, especially in cramped
quarters, because the wrench movement is downward instead of horizontal.
When clamp connectors were first used there were numerous problems with the clamp
loosening during drilling operations and creating a hazard in well control situations.
This problem has been greatly reduced by the manufacturer furnishing recommended
bolt torque make-up values and the avialability of power torque wrenches on the rigs.
Cameron Iron Works clamp connections are installed on most major manufacturers’
hub and clamp preventers. When a clamp connected BOP stack is used, recommended
torque requirements should be obtained from the manufacturer and all bolts should be
made up to the required torque with power wrenches.
(f) Drilling Spools

Drilling spools are recommended for choke and kill line outlets on all BOP
stack␣arrangements (subsea BOP stacks and low pressure surface stacks are excluded).
The spool provides space between ram preventers to facilitate stripping operations and
localises possible erosion during well control operations in the less expensive spool
rather than the preventer body. Drilling spools should be designed and fabricated
in␣accordance with API 6A, ‘Specifications for Wellhead Equipment’. Most wellhead
manufacturers can fabricate drilling spools to any dimensions required although lead
time is usually several weeks. Figure 6.17 shows dimensional data for Hydril’s
drilling␣spools.
6 Choke and Standpipe Manifolds

(a) Choke Manifold
A typical choke manifold layout is shown in Figure 6.18. It features inlets for the primary
choke line, the kill or secondary choke line and from the kill pump; two remotely
adjustable chokes, two manually adjustable chokes, a straight choke bypass, a buffer
chamber and outlets to the pits, direct or via the poorboy degasser. Valves upstream of
the chokes should be rated to the working pressure of the BOPs, lower rated valves are
acceptable downstream. Each choke can be isolated by two valves on the high pressure
side. The system offers complete redundancy, (except of the buffer tank) since flow can
be directed via an alternative route whilst a section is repaired.
6-36
March 1995
A bypass line to the poorboy degasser is provided in order to be able to deal with returns
in the event of failure of the buffer tank. It is recognised that the majority of choke
manifolds installed on drilling rigs comprise a buffer tank into which all the lines
downstream of the chokes are tied. Field personnel should be aware that this design
compromise seriously reduces the flexibility/redundancy of the manifold. If the buffer
tank cuts out, the manifold is in effect rendered useless. Consideration should therefore
be given to installing split buffer tanks and separate flare lines or, as previously
mentioned, a bypass line upstream of the buffer tank. All connections should be flanged,
welded, or clamped. Field welding is not acceptable.
Company policy specifies that choke manifolds should incorporate at least two variable
chokes on offshore rigs, one of which must be remotely adjustable.
On some manifolds, mandatory in some areas, an additional outlet from the buffer
chamber is provided, so that hydrocarbons can be directed via a production separator to
a flare. An inlet to facilitate the tying-in of a specialised choke manifold during formation
testing is also provided.
On wells where there is a possibility of encountering hydrogen sulphide, all equipment

and material should be suitable for sour service.
The control panel for the chokes should be near the Driller’s station, and should have
read-outs for standpipe manifold pressure, choke manifold pressure and pump stroke
counters. A pressure gauge reading standpipe pressure should be located at the choke
manifold if manual chokes are used during a well kill operation. The MAASP function,
where fitted, should not be used.
A recording chart for standby pressure and choke manifold pressure, may also be
considered. This chart can be used when testing BOPs, or when handling kicks.
Under normal drilling conditions, valves on the choke line and manifold should be left
open up to the valve immediately upstream of the remotely operated choke that will be
used in the event of a kick. The valves downstream should be open to the poorboy
degasser and mud tanks. The remote adjustable choke(s) should be left closed. The
outer choke (HCR or failsafe) valve on the BOP stack should be closed during drilling.
It must be possible to record choke pressure when the well is shut-in with the choke
manifold lined up in this manner.
(b) Standpipe Manifold

A typical arrangement of standpipe manifold showing connections to the choke manifold
is illustrated in Figure 6.19. This manifold, for example, permits one mud pump to be
lined up on the annulus, (through kill line perhaps via the choke manifold) and the
second to kelly, or circulating head, to facilitate control of severe lost circulation. For
10,000 and 15,000 psi BOP systems, it is acceptable to use 5000 psi standpipe manifolds,
but the isolation valve should be the same pressure rating as the BOP stack, as should
connecting pipework.
6-37
March 1995
Figure 6.18 Choke Manifold, 10M/15M
BYPASS TO TO POORBOY TO MUD

POORBOY DEGASSER PITS
DEGASSER
OR TRIP TANK
2
4
2
3
PRIMARY
BOP
CHOKE 1
STACK
LINE
1 1 1 2
CHOKE BYPASS LINE RESERVE PIT

KILL OR
1 (DERRICK
SECONDARY
FLARE
CHOKE LINE
1 2 OFFSHORE
3 RIGS)
BUFFER
CHAMBER
FROM KILL
PUMP TO GAUGE
2
4
MANUAL CHOKE LINE
1. 10000psi gate valves.

2. 5000psi gate valves. 2
3. Remote controlled chokes. FROM DST
CHOKE MANIFOLD
4. Manually adjusted chokes.
DST LINE
BURNING LINE
(PRODUCTION
GAS SEPARATOR
OFFSHORE RIGS)
WEOX02.181
6-38
March 1995
SECONDARY PRIMARY
STANDPIPE STANDPIPE
ISOLATION VALVE
SAME RATING AS
CHOKE MANIFOLD
TO REMOTE
1 PRESSURE GAUGE 1
2 2
TO HOLE/FILL
LINE OR
1 TRIP TANK 1
AUXILIARY
TIE-IN POINT
TO CHOKE MANIFOLD
OR PRESSURE GAUGE
1. 5000psi gate valves.
2. Gate valve to suit
pressure rating of
MUD PUMP standpipe manifold. MUD PUMP
WEOX02.182
Figure 6.19 Standpipe Manifold
7 Diverters
If a kick is taken when conductor is set in incompetent formation, the well will not be
shut-in, but instead, will be diverted.
A surface diverter system, consisting of an annular preventer and vent lines, allows the flow
to be directed to a safe area, away from the rig and personnel.
Vent lines should be as large (12 in. minimum on offshore rigs) and as straight as practical,
so as to minimise back pressure, erosion and the risk of plugging by well debris. The lines
should be sufficiently braced to absorb severe shock loadings; sections likely to suffer erosion
e.g. bends, should be reinforced. There should be no restriction to the bore, any valves in
the lines should be full opening ball valves. Periodically, the lines should be flushed through
to ensure that they remain unobstructed.
To prevent the well being inadvertently shut in, any valves in the vent line should be designed
to automatically open when the diverter is closed. An acceptable alternative is to elevate the
vent line above the flowline, so that no valves are necessary.
If the BOP stack is installed, the control panels should be clearly marked that the well is not
to be closed in, but that the diverter is to be actuated.
6-39
March 1995
Figure 6.20 Subsea Diverter Stack
21in HST RISER

COUPLING PIN
MUD BOOST LINE

CONNECTION
211/4in – 2000 MSP

ANNU-FLEX
FLEX
JOINT
ANNULAR
BOP
21in HYDRAULIC
CONNECTOR
211/4in – 2000
SHEAR RAM
OUTLET NOZZLE(S)
211/4in – 2000 FSS SPOOL
BLIND FLANGE
C/K VALVE
30in LATCH
WEOX02.183
6-40
March 1995
The working pressures of the diverter and vent lines is not of prime importance (particularly
on floating rigs where the slip joint packing may be the limiting factor); 500 psi is a typical
rating.
Company policy states that subsea wells should be drilled riserless until a pressure
containment string is set. This is to avoid allowing shallow gas flow to the rig. If however it
becomes necessary to drill for surface casing with a riser, Company policy states that the
well will be diverted subsea in the event of a shallow gas flow.
The most likely stack up that will be used to divert subsea will comprise the following:
• Pin connector with subsea dump valves (minimum ID 10 in.).
• LMRP with annular preventer.
This will be a relatively inexpensive stack that will in most cases be made up mainly from
existing rig equipment. In the event of a shallow gas flow the dump valves will be opened
and the annular closed to divert subsea. In order to move the rig the LMRP can be
disconnected and the well allowed to flow at the seabed.
Various stacks have been custom made for diverting subsea in areas of high incidence of
shallow gas. An example is shown in Figure 6.20; the diverter stack comprising:
• Flex joint
• Annular preventer
• Hydraulic connector
• Blind/shear ram
• Spool piece with two outlets with dump valves
• Choke/kill line
• Hydraulic connector
In the event of a shallow gas flow, the dump valves will be opened and the annular closed.
In order to move the rig off location the blind/shear rams can be closed and the connector
released.
6-41/42
6-41
March 1995
6.3 CONTROL SYSTEMS

Paragraph Page
1 General 6-44
2 Power Source 6-44
3 Control Manifolds 6-46
4 Accumulators 6-47
Illustrations
6.21 Subsea Stack Function Schematic 6-45
6.22 Annular Preventers – fluid required to operate 6-48
6.23 Ram Preventers – fluid required to operate 6-50
6.24 Compressibility Factor – Nitrogen 6-51
6-43
March 1995
1 General
The Control System provides the means to individually close and open each BOP and valve,
conveniently, rapidly, repeatedly and at the correct operating pressure. The equipment should
be designed to operate when, in emergencies, primary rig power may not be available.
The essential elements of a control system are:
• Power Source(s)
• Control Manifolds
• Accumulators
• Connecting Pipework/Hose Bundle and Wiring
Detailed specifications for a particular application will be governed by the number, size
and pressure rating of BOPs. Water depth considerations will also influence the design of
subsea BOP control systems.
An example arrangement for subsea BOP systems is shown in Figure 6.21.
2 Power Source
(a) Primary Power Source
The primary power source should be an electrically driven pump (or pumps) located at
the main control manifold. For 3000 psi accumulator systems, the pump(s) should
incorporate a pressure switch set to cut in and out at 2800 psi and 3000 psi respectively.
Diesel driven pumps may be substituted for land rig applications.
The electric pump output should be twice that of the secondary air pumps. The combined
electric and air pumps should be sufficient to charge the accumulator system from
pre-charge to operating pressure in less than 15 minutes, also to close an annular preventer
(without accumulator assistance) in less than 2 minutes.
(b) Secondary Power Source

The secondary power source should be an air power pump system, located at the main
control manifold. For 3000 psi accumulator systems, the pump(s) should incorporate a
pressure switch set to cut in and out at 2750 psi and 3000 psi respectively. A standby
diesel driven air compressor piped to the pumps should be provided at a location away
from the primary rig power source, and where possible, 150 ft from the well axis.
(c) Battery Packs

Where electric panels are used, and for electro-hydraulic systems, a battery pack is
required. This should be located, where possible, 150 ft from the well axis.
6-44
March 1995
DRILLER’S DRILLER’S DRILLER’S

PANEL MINI PANEL MINI PANEL MINI
PANEL PANEL PANEL
OPEN BLOCK CLOSE ACCUMULATORS OPEN BLOCK CLOSE ACCUMULATORS OPEN BLOCK CLOSE ACCUMULATORS
RIG POWER RIG POWER RIG POWER
120V ac 120V ac 120V ac
RESERVOIR RESERVOIR RESERVOIR
SOLENOIDS
RIG AIR 3000psi PUMP RIG AIR 3000psi PUMP RIG AIR 3000psi PUMP
COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR
KR KR POD SELECTOR KR
AIR VALVE
YOUR RIG YOUR RIG YOUR RIG
PILOT
REGULATOR
POD MOUNTED
POD REGULATOR
SELECTOR
SPM
VALVE
KR KR KR
REDUNDANT POD REDUNDANT POD REDUNDANT POD
MALE POD
CONNECTOR
FEMALE POD
CONNECTORS
POD
LATCH
SHUTTLE
VALVE
RAM PREVENTER
CLOSING LINE
RAM PREVENTER
BOP OPENING LINE
WELLHEAD
RAMS CLOSED BLOCK POSITION RAMS OPENED

(RAMS CLOSED, NO PRESSURE)
3000psi Accumulator Fluid Pressure 125psi Rig Air Pressure Vent/or No Pressure Regulated KR Fluid Pressure
WEOX02.184
Figure 6.21 Subsea Stack Function Schematic
6-45
March 1995
(d) Manual Closing of BOPs

For surface BOP installations, extension arms and wheels should be provided for ram
type BOPs.
3 Control Manifolds
The BOP control systems should ideally be equipped with 3 control manifolds or panels.
(a) Central (Main Control) Manifold

This manifold should be located away from the rig floor area and in an accessible location.
It may be all hydraulic, air-hydraulic or electro-hydraulic. The accumulators and charge
pumps are usually located with this manifold.
Required features include:
• A regulator to reduce accumulator pressure to manifold (operating) pressure for the

ram preventers and valves.
• A regulator to reduce accumulator pressure to the variable operating pressure for

annular preventers.
• Control handles, or switches, for all functions. An additional function is required on

subsea stacks to transfer command between hose bundles or pods. A hinged cover
should be placed over critical functions (shear/blind rams, wellhead disconnect). A
locking device should not be used.
• Pressure gauges for accumulator, manifold and annular pressures.
• A valve to bypass the manifold regulator.
• Tie-in points for accumulators, charge pumps, remote panels, and air lines.
• A vent line for bleeding off accumulator fluid to the storage tank.
• A relief valve for the hydraulic and electric pumps.
• A flowmeter to indicate the volume of fluid used in operating a function (essential

on subsea stacks, desirable on surface stacks).
(b) Driller’s Control Panel

The panel should be located on the rig floor within easy access of the Driller’s station.
It should be air or electric operated. Explosion-proofing is required for electric panels.
• Controls for each BOP stack function and to adjust the manifold regulators.
• Read-outs for the accumulator pressure, regulated manifold and annular pressures
and flowmeter.
• Air supply pressure read-out.
• A schematic of the BOP arrangement showing kill and choke line outlets, and having
ram sizes marked.
6-46
March 1995
• Covers, or interlocks, for critical functions, eg shear rams, wellhead disconnect.
• Visual and/or audible warning devices for low accumulator pressure, air pressure, or
fluid levels.
• Where applicable, controls for diverter functions.
(c) Remote Manifold (or Panel)

This panel should be located a safe distance from the well axis. For offshore rigs, it is
normally located in the Toolpusher’s office. It should be air or electric operated.
• Controls for each BOP stack function.
• A schematic of the BOP arrangement showing kill and choke line outlets and having
ram sizes marked.
• Covers, or interlocks, for critical functions.
• Visual and/or audible warning devices for low accumulator pressure, air pressure or
fluid levels.
4 Accumulators
The hydraulic fluid required to operate the BOP functions is stored in accumulators,
pressurised against a nitrogen inflated bladder. The accumulators should be located near the
main control manifold location.
The purpose of the accumulators is to provide a store of hydraulic energy and a high rate
supply of hydraulic fluid to the BOP functions. The response time of the BOP functions is
therefore independent of the output of the pumps.
For subsea installations, at least two accumulators should be isolated from the main bank to
provide pilot line pressure. Also, to ensure acceptable response times, additional accumulators
should be mounted on the BOP stack.
Accumulator bottles should be used as surge dampeners on annular preventers for stripping
operations on both surface and subsea BOP stacks.
(a) Accumulator/Precharge
Operating pressure of accumulators is generally 3000 psi. The optimum bladder inflation,
or precharge pressure, is governed by the minimum acceptable pressure remaining in
the accumulators after operation of the preventers. About 1200 psi is required to hold
some annular preventers closed. A precharge of 1000 psi will retain a small liquid reserve
in the accumulator when pressure in the system falls to 1200 psi.
(b) Sizing of Accumulators

Company policy for surface stacks specifies that the total accumulator volume should
be 1 1/2 times that required to close one pipe ram and one annular preventer and open
one hydraulically activated choke and still retain accumulator pressure equal to 200 psi
above pre-charge pressure, without pump assistance.
6-47
March 1995
The following is an example of the technique that can be used to size accumulators for
a surface stack (comprising one Hydril GL 18 3/4 in. 5M annular and 3 Hydril 18 3/4 in.
10M ram preventers):
Volume to close:
1 Annular = 44 gal
1 Ram = 17.1 gal
1 HCR valve = 0.6 gal (See Figures 6.22 and 6.23)
Total fluid required = 61.7 gal X 1.5 = 92.55 gal
Precharge to 1000 psi, maximum operating pressure = 3000 psi, minimum operating pressure
= 1200 psi
ANNULAR PREVENTERS
GALLONS OF FLUID REQUIRED TO OPERATE AN OPEN HOLE
Hydril NL Shaffer
Size and
Working Pressure GK GL Spherical
Inches psi Close Open Close Open Balancing Close Open
6 3,000 2.9 2.2 4.6 3.2

6 5,000 3.9 3.3 4.6 3.2
7 1/16 10,000 9.4
8 3,000 4.4 3.0 7.2 5.0
8 5,000 6.8 5.8 11.1 8.7
10 3,000 7.5 5.6 11.0 6.8
10 5,000 9.8 8.0 18.7 14.6
11 5,000
11 10,000 25.1
12 3,000 11.4 9.8 23.5 14.7
13 5/8 3,000
13 5/8 5,000 18.0 14.2 19.8 19.8 8.2 23.6 17.4
13 5/8 10,000 34.5 24.3 47.2 37.6
16 2,000 17.5 12.6
16 3,000 21.0 14.8
16 3/4 3,000
16 3/4 5,000 28.7 19.9 33.8 33.8 17.3 33.0 25.6
16 3/4 10,000
18 2,000 21.1 14.4
18 3/4 5,000 44.0 44.0 20.0 48.2 37.6
20 2,000 32.6 17.0
20 3,000
20 5,000
21 1/4 5,000 58.0 58.0 29.5 61.4 47.8
30 1,000
30 2,000
Figure 6.22 Annular Preventer

– fluid required to operate
6-48
March 1995
Figure 6.23 Ram Preventers
RAM PREVENTERS
GALLONS OF FLUID REQUIRED TO OPERATE ONE SET
Size and Cameron NL Shaffer Hydril

Working Pressure QRC LWS Cylinder SL E Manual (a) Auto (a)
U
Size
Inches psi Close Open Close Open Close Open Inches Close Open Close Open Close Open Close Open
– fluid required to operate

4 1/16 10,000 0.59 0.52 6
6 3,000 1.22 1.17 0.81 0.95 6.5 2.75 2.3
6 5,000 1.22 1.17 0.81 0.95 1.19 0.99 6.5 2.75 2.3
7 1/16 10,000 1.22 1.17 6.35 5.89 14 1.9 1.8
7 1/16 15,000 1.22 1.17 6.35 5.89 14 3.7 3.4
8 3,000 2.36 2.70 2.58 2.27 8.5 2.75 2.3
8 5,000 2.36 2.70 2.58 2.27 8.5 2.75 2.3
10 3,000 3.31 3.16 2.77 3.18 1.74 1.45 8.5 3.25 2.7
10 5,000 3.31 3.16 2.77 3.18 2.98 2.62 8.5 3.25 2.7
10 5,000 4.23 4.03(S)

11 10,000 3.31 3.16 10 5.2 5.2
11 10,000 4.23 4.03(S) 8.23 7.00 14 9.45 7.00
11 15,000 5.54 5.42 14 9.40 8.10
12 3,000 5.54 5.20 4.42 5.10 5.50 4.50 8.5 3.55 2.9 5.9
13 5/8 3,000 10 5.44 4.46 5.4 4.9 4.9
6-49
13 5/8 3,000 11.5 11.2(S) 12.0 11.2(S)

13 5/8 5,000 5.54 5.42 10 5.44 4.46 3.55 2.9 5.4 4.9 5.9 4.9
13 5/8 5,000 6.78 6.36(S) 14 11.00 10.52 11.5 11.2(S) 12.0 11.2(S)
13 5/8 10,000 5.54 5.42 14 9.45 7.00 11.8 11.8 12.9 11.8
13 5/8 10,000 6.78 6.36(S) 11.8 11.8(S) 12.9 11.8(S)
13 5/8 15,000 11.70 11.29 14 11.56 10.52
16 2,000 6.00 7.05 8.5 3.65 3.0
16 3/4 3,000 10.16 9.45
16 3/4 5,000 10.16 9.45 10 6.07 4.97
16 3/4 5,000 12.03 11.19(S) 14 11.76 10.67
16 3/4 10,000 12.03 11.19 14 14.47 12.50 15.6 14.1
18 2,000 6.00 7.05
18 3/4 10,000 24.88 23.00 14 14.55 13.21 17.1 15.6
20 2,000 8.11 7.61 5.07 4.46 8.5
20 2,000 7.80 6.68 10
20 3,000 8.11 7.61 5.07 4.46 8.5
20 3,000 9.35 8.77(S) 16.88 15.35 14
21 1/4 2,000 8.11 7.61
21 1/4 2,000 9.35 8.77(S)
21 1/4 7,000 20.41 17.78
21 1/4 7,500 23.19 20.20(S)
21 1/4 10,000 26.54 21.14 14.42 12.65 14
21 1/4 10,000 30.15 27.42(S) 16.05 13.86(P) 14
26 3/4 2,000 10.50 9.84
March 1995
26 3/4 3,000 10.50 9.84

Therefore:
P1 = 1000 + 15 = 1015 psi Z1 = 1.00 T = 80°F

P2 = 1200 + 15 = 1215 psi Z3 = 1.06 V1 = 10 gal (11 gal bottle minus
P3 = 3000 + 15 = 3015 psi Z3 = 1.06 1 gal bladder
replacement)
(See Figure 6.24)
where: P1 = precharge pressure (psi)

P2 = minimum operating pressure (psi)
P3 = maximum operating pressure (psi)
V1 = bladder internal volume at precharge pressure (gal)
V2 = bladder internal volume at P2 (gal)
Z = compressibility factor for nitrogen
Using the gas law:
P X V = constant
TXZ
So in this case:
1015 X 10 = 1215 X V2 = 3015 X V3

1.00 1.02 1.06
V2 = 8.52 gal
V3 = 3.57 gal
The useable volume per bottle is given by:
V2 – V3 = 8.52 – 3.57 = 4.95 gal/bottle
Therefore there is a requirement for:
92.55 = 19 bottles
4.95
(c) Subsea Accumulators

Accumulators can be mounted on subsea BOP stacks to perform three separate functions:
• Response Improvement
With increasing water depths, the speed with which subsea preventers may be operated
decreases. This is caused by expansion of the fluid supply hoses and pressure losses
in the lines. (Note that response time will be a function of the hose length and not
water depth). Response times can be improved by mounting accumulators directly
on the BOP stack.
Space and weight constraints will limit the number of accumulators which can be
stack-mounted.
6-50
March 1995
2.2
AFTER SAGE 6 LACY 0°F

2.1
API PROJECT No 37
2.0
100°F
1.9
200°F
1.8
COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR
300°F
1.7
400°F
500°F
1.6
600°F
700°F
1.5
800°F
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000
PRESSURE
POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH ABSOLUTE WEOX02.187
Figure 6.24 Compressibility Factor – Nitrogen
• Emergency Use
All floating rigs are generally equipped with an acoustic back-up control system.
For dynamically positioned rigs and rigs to be used in hazardous (e.g. ice flow)
areas this is essential equipment. In such installations, stack-mounted accumulators
should be at least capable of closing one set of rams, one annular preventer and
releasing the riser disconnect upon receipt of a command from the acoustic system.
The accumulators should be manifolded at the stack, so that fluid is not lost should
the supply lines from the rig be severed. The acoustic system and accumulator system
should be tailored to the stack configuration.
For subsea stacks, a tie in should be provided for diver or ROV assistance. This will
ideally be for shear ram activation and will also include LMRP disconnect and
wellhead connector disconnect.
6-51
March 1995
• Surge Dampening
Surge vessels should be provided for subsea annular preventers to facilitate stripping,
according to manufacturers’ recommendations. Some preventers require surge vessels
on the opening as well as closing sides. Nominal 10 gal capacity accumulators should
be used.
(d) Sizing of Subsea Accumulators

Company policy for the sizing of the accumulators for a subsea stack is more rigorous
than for a surface stack. The accumulator capacity should be 1.5 times the volume
required to open and close all the well control functions and still retain accumulator
pressure at 200 psi above initial pre-charge pressure.
The majority of the accumulators will be located at surface, however a small quantity
maybe located on the stack in order to speed the response of the system. The total volume
of accumulators required will be determined by Company policy (or local legislation, if
more rigorous). The total volume will be provided by the sum of the fluid available at
surface and subsea, at the stack. The surface located accumulators are sized as previously
described however a different technique is used for subsea accumulators.
The basic difference between designing for surface operation and for subsea operation
is that the precharge pressure must be altered to take account of the hydrostatic pressure
of the fluid in the supply lines. The useable volume from each subsea accumulator bottle
will be lower than the equivalent surface bottle. The deeper the water, the greater will
be the reduction in useable volume from the accumulators.
The following is a technique that can be used to size accumulator bottles for subsea
operation for 500 m water depth (for 18 3/4 in. 10M stack):
Volume to close:
1 Annular = 44 gal
1 Ram = 17.1 gal
4 Failsafes = 2.4 gal (See Figures 6.22 and 6.23)
Total fluid required = 63.5 gal
Precharge to 1000 psi plus the hydrostatic of the control fluid.
Therefore:
P1 = 1000 + 15 + (500 X 1.03 X 1.421)

= 1747 psi Z1 = 1.01 T1 = 80°F
P2 = 1200 + 15 + 732 = 1947 psi Z2 = 1.00 T2 = 40°F
P3 = 3000 + 15 + 732 = 3747 psi Z3 = 1.09 T3 = 40°F
where: P1 = precharge pressure (psi)

P2 = minimum operating pressure (psi)
P3 = maximum operating pressure (psi)
Z = compressibility factor for nitrogen
6-52
March 1995
Using the gas law:
PXV = constant (T in °R)

TXZ
So in this case:
1747 X 10 = 1947 X V2 = 3747 X V3

1.01 X 540 1.02 X 500 1.06 X 500
V2 = 8.23 gal
V3 = 4.66 gal
The useable volume per bottle is given by:
V2 – V3 = 8.23 – 4.66 = 3.57 gal/bottle
Therefore there is a requirement for:
63.5 = 18 bottles
3.57
(e) Pipework/Hose Bundles and Wiring

For surface stacks, the simplest hook-up is to assign a dedicated high capacity conduit
to each individual function. When a particular function is selected, fluid flows from the
acccumulators, through a regulator, directly to the function. Concurrently, the opposite
function is vented and the displaced fluid is returned to the reservoir. When considering
a surface hook-up, the following should be noted:
• Company policy (after API RP53) recommends that the system ensures ram and
small annular preventers (less than 20 in.) close within 30 seconds and larger annular
preventers within 45 seconds.
• Control lines should be seamless steel tubing of 1 in. minimum nominal size and
of␣a pressure rating at least equal to the working pressure of the control system
(usually 3000 psi).
• Unions and swivels should be used in the BOP stack area to preclude stressing of
the␣lines.
• BOP closing and opening lines should be routed so as to minimise the risk of damage
in the event of a fire or falling debris. Flammable hoses should not be used on surface
installations.
A simple hook-up is impractical for subsea applications – too many individual lines to be
handled easily and the pressure drop through the length of line would be too great for
acceptable reaction times. Instead, hose bundles are employed, which contain one high
capacity (1 in.) conduit (to transfer the hydraulic fluid required to operate all functions and
recharge the subsea accumulators) and up to 64 pilot (3/16 in.) lines (to direct and control
the flow of fluid to a particular function). The bulk line is “teed” with the subsea accumulators
and terminates at a regulator which reduces the accumulator pressure to operating pressure.
The output of the regulator is manifolded to the pilot valves. The pilot lines terminate in
function dedicated pilot (SPM) valves which respond to accumulator pressure when a function
is selected. Each then allows regulated fluid to flow, via a shuttle valve, to a particular
function. The displaced fluid from the opposite function is vented at its pilot valve.
6-53
March 1995
The pilot valves and regulators are housed in a wireline retrievable pod, which is
duplicated to provide complete redundancy. A shuttle valve located at each function
allows control by either pod.
When considering a subsea system, the following should be noted:
• Company policy (after API RP53) recommends that the systems ensure ram preventers
close within 45 seconds and annular preventers within 60 seconds of surface actuation.
Electro-hydraulic systems will be required where water depths preclude satisfactory
closing times with all hydraulic systems.
• Systems should be duplicated in all hydraulic and electric lines from the main control
panel to the BOP stack functions, i.e. there should be 100% redundancy. The Driller’s
panel and the remote panel should be designed to select and operate either system.
• Dynamically positioned vessels and rigs operating in hazardous areas should have
an acoustic back-up system to secure the well and release the riser.
• Any unused functions (such as when the low pressure stack in a two stack system is
run) should be blanked off to ensure that fluid is not vented by inadvertent operation
of that function.
(f) Operating Fluids

For subsea systems where the fluid from the main supply line is dumped when it is
vented, the fluid should be potable water, with the recommended percentage of soluble
oil added to prevent corrosion. Control line fluid is in a closed system and hence is not
replaced. It is therefore important to flush out the control lines with the recommended
fluid mix when the pods are pulled, prior to rerun.
In all cases, the fluid mix should be maintained year round such that the fluid will not
freeze at the minimum anticipated temperature for the year. Pure ethylene glycol should
be added to prevent freezing when necessary – under no circumstances should sea water
be used. The reservoir should be self filling, with an automatic mixing system for
additives. Operating fluids must be non-pollutant and bacteria resistant.
Most surface installations employ a simple closed system, with the operating fluid
returned to the reservoir when it is vented. Either a light hydraulic oil or a subsea type
fluid is suitable.
The accumulator fluid reservoir should have a capacity of twice the working liquid
volume of the accumulators.
6-54
March 1995
6.4 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

Paragraph Page
1 Mud Control and Monitoring Equipment 6-56
2 Mud Gas Separator 6-57
3 Drillstring Valves 6-60
4 Rotating Heads 6-62
Illustrations
6.25 Typical Trip Tank Hook-up – on a floating rig 6-57
6.26 An example Mud Gas Separator 6-59
6.27 Grant Rotating Head 6-63
6-55
March 1995
1 Mud Control and Monitoring Equipment

Proper installation and operation of this equipment is fundamental to effective primary and
secondary well control. The following are the most important aspects:
(a) Pit Volume Measurement

A pit volume measurement device (PVT) should be provided. A calibrated read-out and
audio alarm should be installed at the Driller’s station.
The following measurement devices are required for all tanks:
• A float for the PVT system. It should be possible to isolate other floats when the trip
tank is in use.
• An internal calibrated ladder-type scale.
• A remote ladder-type scale, visible from the Driller’s station for the trip tank. A
small wireline can be used to connect a float in the tank to the scale on the rig floor.
(b) Flowline Measurement

A device should be provided for measurement of flowline mud return rate. This (Flo
Show) device should have a read-out and alarm at the Driller’s station.
(c) Trip Tank

Trip tanks are used to fill the hole on trips, measure mud or water into the annulus when
circulation has been lost, monitor the hole when tripping, logging or other similar type
operations. The industry uses two basic types of trip tanks – gravity feed and pump. The
pump type system is recommended because it provides for safer and more expedient
trip operation. The trip tank would be isolated from the surface mud system to prevent
inadvertant loss or gain of mud from the trip tank due to valves being left open.
In the past, most blowouts occurred due to swabbing or not keeping the hole filled
while tripping the drillstring out of the hole. To provide more exact fluid measurements
for pipe displacement, trip tanks were developed to accurately measure within ± 1.0
barrel the influx or efflux of fluid from the wellbore. As the drillstring is pulled from
the hole, the mud level will drop due to the volume of metal being removed. If mud is
not added to the hole as pipe is pulled, it is possible to reduce hydrostatic pressure to
less than formation pressure. When this happens, a kick will occur. Swabbing can occur
when pipe is pulled too fast, and friction between the pipe and the mud column causes
a reduction in hydrostatic pressure to a value less than formation pressure.
To prevent loss of hydrostatic pressure it is necessary to fill the hole on a regular schedule,
or continuously, using a trip tank and to keep track of the fluid volume required. The
metal volume of the pipe being pulled can be calculated, but mud additions necessary to
replace hole seepage losses due to filtration effects can only be predicted by comparison
to the mud volumes required to keep the hole properly filled on previous trips. For this
reason, it is imperative that a record of mud volume required versus number of stands
pulled be maintained on the rig in a trip book for every trip made.
6-56
March 1995
TRIP TANK
LEVEL
REMOTE RIG FLOOR
INDICATOR
CONTROL VALVE
OVERBOARD
ROTARY TABLE
DIVERTER
RETURNS TO HOLE FILL

SHAKERS UP LINE
FLOWLINE
TELESCOPIC
JOINT
FROM
MISSION PUMPS RISER
CHECK
VALVE
DRAIN
TRIP TANK PUMP
WEOX02.188
Figure 6.25 Typical Trip Tank Hook-up

– on a floating rig
As illustrated in Figure 6.25, a centrifugal pump takes suction from the trip tank and
fills the hole through a line into the bell nipple. The pump runs constantly while the
drillstring is pulled from the hole. The hole stays full as each stand of pipe is pulled and
excess mud returns to the trip tank through an outlet on the main flow line. A valve
must be installed in the flow line downstream of this outlet to block all flow to the shale
shakers while making a trip. This closed circulation system can be monitored by a float
system and a digital readout in 1-barrel increments on the Driller’s console.
2 Mud Gas Separator

The separator is installed downstream of the choke manifold to separate gas from the drilling
fluid. This provides a means for safely venting the gas and returning usable liquid mud to
the active system.
6-57
March 1995
Basically, there are two types of mud gas separators: Atmospheric and Pressurised. The
atmospheric type separator is standard equipment on virtually all rigs and is referred to in
the field as a ‘gas buster’ or ‘poorboy’ separator. The main advantage of this type of separator
is its operational simplicity which does not require control valves on either the gas or mud
discharge lines. A pressurised mud gas separator is designed to operate with moderate back
pressure, generally 50 psi or less. Pressurised separators are utilised to overcome line pressure
losses when an excessive length of vent line is required to safely flare and burn the hazardous
gas an extended distance from the rig. The pressurised separator is considered special rig
equipment and is not usually provided by the contractor. This type of separator is installed
on rigs drilling in high risk H2S areas and for drilling underbalanced in areas where high
pressure, low volume gas continually feeds into the circulating fluid.
During well control operations, the main purpose of a mud gas separator is to vent the gas
and save the drilling fluid. This is important not only for economic reasons, but also to
minimise the risk of circulating out a gas kick without having to shut down to mix additional
mud volume. In some situations the amount of mud lost can be critical when surface volume
is marginal and on-site mud supplies are limited. When a gas kick is properly shut in and
circulated out, the mud gas separator should be capable of salvaging most of the mud.
There are a number of design features which affect the volume of gas and fluid that the
separator can safely handle. For production operations, gas oil separators can be sized and
internally designed to efficiently separate gas from the fluid. This is possible because the
fluid and gas characteristics are known and design flow rates can be readily established. It
is apparent that ‘gas busters’ for drilling rigs cannot be designed on the same basis since the
properties of circulated fluids from gas kicks are unpredictable and a wide range of mixing
conditions occur downhole. In addition, mud rheological properties vary widely and have a
strong effect on gas environment. For both practical and cost reasons, rig mud gas separators
are not designed for maximum possible gas release rates which might be needed; however,
they should handle most kicks when recommended shut-in procedures and well control
practices are followed. When gas flow rates exceed the separator capacity, the flow must be
bypassed around the separator directly to the flare line. This will prevent the hazardous
situation of blowing the liquid from the bottom of the separator and discharging gas into the
mud system.
Figure 6.26 illustrates the basic design features for atmospheric mud gas separators. Since
most drilling contractors have their own separator design, the Drilling Foreman must analyse
and compare the contractor’s equipment with the recommended design to ensure the essential
requirements are met.
The atmospheric type separator operates on the gravity or hydrostatic pressure principle.
The essential design features are:
• Height and diameter of separator.
• Internal baffle arrangement to assist in additional gas breakout.
• Diameter and length of gas outlet.
• A target plate to minimise erosion where inlet mud gas mixture contacts the internal
wall of the separator, which provides a method of inspecting plate wear.
• A U-tube arrangement properly sized to maintain a fluid seal in the separator.
6-58
March 1995
GAS OUTLET
8in ID MINIMUM
GAS BACK PRESSURE

REGISTERED AT
THIS GAUGE
(Typically 0 to 20psi)
STEEL TARGET
PLATE
INLET
INSPECTION
APPROX 1/2 OF HEIGHT

COVER
SECTION A-A
30in OD TANGENTIAL INLET
A A
4in ID INLET-TANGENTIAL TO SHELL

FROM CHOKE MANIFOLD
BRACE
10ft MINIMUM INSPECTION

HEIGHT COVER
HALF CIRCLE
BAFFLES ARRANGED
IN A 'SPIRAL'
CONFIGURATION
TO SHAKER HEADER
TANK
MAXIMUM HEAD AVAILABLE

DEVELOPED BY THIS
HEIGHT OF FLUID
eg: 10ft HEAD AT 1.5 SG
GIVES 6.5psi MAXIMUM CAPACITY
10ft APPROX
8in NOMINAL
'U' TUBE
2in DRAIN
4in CLEAN-OUT OR FLUSH LINE WEOX02.189
PLUG
Figure 6.26 An example Mud Gas Separator
The height and diameter of an atmospheric separator are critical dimensions which affect
the volume of gas and fluid the separator can efficiently handle. As the mud and gas mixture
enters the separator, the operating pressure is atmospheric plus pressure due to friction in
the gas vent line. The vertical distance from the inlet to the static fluid level allows time for
additional gas breakout and provides an allowance for the fluid to rise somewhat during
operation to overcome friction loss in the mud outlet lines. As shown on Figure 6.26, the
gas-fluid inlet should be located approximately at the midpoint of the vertical height. This
provides the top half for a gas chamber and the bottom half for gas separation and fluid
retention. The 30 in. diameter and 16 ft minimum vessel height requirements have proven
adequate to handle the majority of gas kicks. The separator inlet should have at least the
same ID as the largest line from the choke manifold, which is usually 4 in. Some separators
use tangential inlet, which creates a small centrifugal effect on the gas-fluid mixture and
causes faster gas breakout.
6-59
March 1995
The baffle system causes the mud to flow in thin sheets which assists the separation process.
There are numerous arrangements and shapes of baffles used. It is important that each plate
be securely welded to the body of the separator with angle braces.
A 6 in. minimum ID gas outlet is recommended to allow a large volume of low pressure gas
to be released from the separator with minimum restriction. Care should be taken to ensure
minimum back pressure in the vent line. On most offshore rigs, the vent line is extended
straight up and supported to a derrick leg. The ideal line would be restricted to 30 ft in
length and the top of the line should be bent outward about 30 degrees to direct gas flow
away from the rig floor. If it is intended that the gas be flared, flame arresters should be
installed at the discharge end of the vent line.
As previously mentioned, when the gas pressures in the separator exceeds the hydrostatic
head of the mud in the U-tube, the fluid seal in the bottom is lost and gas starts flowing into
the mud system. The mud outlet downstream of the U-tube should be designed to maintain a
minimum vessel fluid level of approximately 3 1/2 ft in a 16ft high separator. Assuming a
1.44 SG mud and total U-tube height of 6 ft, the fluid seal would have a hydrostatic pressure
equal to 3.7 psi. This points out the importance for providing a large diameter gas vent line
with the fewest possible turns to minimise line frictional losses.
The mud outlet line must be designed to handle viscous, contaminated mud returns. As
shown in Figure 6.26, an 8 in. line is recommended to minimise frictional losses. This line
usually discharges into the mud ditch in order that good mud can be directed over the shakers
and untreatable mud routed to the waste pit.
In recent years, there have been a number of serious accidents caused by the failure of mud
gas separators during well control situations. Primarily these have resulted from drilling
contractors not updating their separator design and personnel training standards to handle
high pressure gas kicks for deeper drilling operations. It is important that drilling personnel
understand the limitations of all well control equipment and are trained to take remedial
action before pressure or capacity limitations occur. The key initial decision that must be
made is the pump rate at which the kick will be circulated out. Large influx, high pressure
gas kicks should always be pumped out at low rates (generally 1 bbl/minute or less) to
minimise the gas release rate at the surface where rapid gas expansion occurs. Circulating
out at a slow rate reduces the risk of exceeding pressure limitations for the well control
equipment and provides additional decision reaction time.
3 Drillstring Valves
Drillpipe valves are used to close in the well on the drillpipe bore and to protect surface
equipment. The valves may be permanently in place, or installed at surface when required
and may be of a manual shut-off or automatic check valve type.
Drillstring valves should be rated to the same pressure as the BOP and tested at the same
frequency.
Some of the drillstring valves impose restrictions on future operations when installed. For
example, both the inside BOP and drop-in valve, when in place, prevent access below them
to the drillstring bore.
6-60
March 1995
The following are the most commonly used drillstring valves:
(a) Kelly Valves

Kelly valves should be full opening valves to allow running of wireline. Wrenches for
operating the valves should be held on the rig floor. Both upper and lower kelly valve
should be function tested daily.
The upper kelly valve is placed between the swivel and the kelly, the upper kelly valve
provides a means of closing in the drillstring when the kelly is down through the rotary
table and cannot be lifted.
The lower kelly valve, which is placed between the kelly and the drillstring, allows the
closing-in of the drillstring and removal of the kelly if required. The kelly valve provides
a means of isolating the kelly if the drillpipe pressure approaches the pressure rating of
the kelly.
(b) Float Valves

Float valves are frequently used in top hole to prevent backflow during connections and
flow up the drillstring in the event of a kick. Ported floats should be run whilst drilling
below surface casing. When installed, a float valve is a permanent part of the drillstring.
If a float is run while drilling below surface casing, the valve should be ported.
The following points should be considered:
• The valve can be flapper or plunger type with facility to lock open whilst running
in␣hole.
• The valve requires regular inspection to check for damage, due to fluid erosion,
whilst downhole.
• The valve will prevent U-tubing, that may be required to free differentially stuck
pipe. It should not be used whilst drilling highly overbalanced permeable sections
without due consideration.
• Use of the valve may make reading of drillpipe pressures difficult when a kick has
been taken, especially when handling gas migration.
• If a ported float is used when drilling from a floating rig, it will be necessary to
install a further valve in the string when hanging off in the BOP stack.
(c) Drop-in Valves

An automatic check valve that is held on surface until required and can then be dropped
or pumped downhole to a special landing sub. It is Company policy that a landing sub
will be run in all strings. In the event of a kick while the pipe is off bottom, the drop-in
valve can be used to allow the pipe to be stripped to bottom. The following points
should be considered:
• The valve will have limited ID which may plug, preventing further circulation and
continuation of control procedures.
• When in place, prevents access to the drillstring bore below it, but may be retrieved
by wireline with some designs.
• The valve is not subject to erosion prior to use, as would be the case with a
permanently installed flapper valve, as it can be held on surface until required.
6-61
March 1995
• All the items in the drillstring above the landing sub must have sufficient ID to
allow the check valve to pass. This includes kelly cocks, mud savers etc.
(d) Drillpipe Safety Valve

A safety valve to be installed at surface on detection of a kick, allowing the drillstring
to be closed in. The valve should be a fullbore valve, typically a lower kelly valve to
allow easy stab-in wireline access if required. Crossovers between the safety valve and
all other tubulars in hole must be held on the drillfloor. It is Company policy that such
a valve should at all times be available on the rig floor.
(e) Inside BOP

A surface installed check valve to close off the drillstring bore. Commonly called a
Gray valve and in accordance with Company policy, should always be available on the
rig floor as a back-up for the drillpipe safety valve, or the drop-in check valve.
Prevents access to the drillstring bore below it and cannot be removed if below the
rotary, or under pressure (unless a drillpipe safety valve is installed below it).
4 Rotating Heads
When used, rotating heads are installed above the BOP stack. They provide a seal on the
kelly or drillpipe. A drive unit, attached to the kelly, locates in a bearing assembly above the
stripper rubber.
Some applications for rotating heads are:
• Drilling with air or gas, to divert the returns through a “Blooey line”.
• To permit drilling with underbalanced mud, by maintaining a back pressure on the

wellbore.
• As a diverter for surface hole.
• To keep gas away from the rotary table. This is especially important where Hydrogen
Sulphide can be expected.
Realistic working pressures for rotating heads are 500 to 700 psi. It is recommended that
they are not installed for routine gas cap drilling (unless sour gas is expected) since their use
precludes observation from the rig floor of annulus fluid level.
Figure 6.27 shows a schedule of the Grant Rotating Head.
6-62
March 1995
Figure 6.27 Grant Rotating Head
KELLY BUSHING
SWING-BOLT
CLAMP ASSEMBLY
DRIVE BUSHING
ASSEMBLY
SHOCK PAD
DRIVE RING AND

BOWL BEARING ASSEMBLY
STRIPPER RUBBER
OUTLET FLANGE
INLET FLANGE
WEOX02.190
6-63/64
6-63
March 1995
6.5 EQUIPMENT TESTING

Paragraph Page
1 General 6-66
2 BOP Equipment and Wellheads 6-66
3 An Example Test Procedure 6-67
4 Test Frequency 6-71
5 Pressure Tests of Casing 6-71
Illustrations
6.28 Choke Manifold Schematic 6-68
6.29 An example BOP/Choke Manifold Test Procedure 6-69
6.30 Schematic of BOP Pressure Tests 6-70
6.31 An example BOP Equipment Test Report 6-72
6-65
March 1995
1 General
The consequences of a failure of BOP equipment under operating conditions can be far
reaching. Rigorous BOP testing procedures are required in order that problems may be
identified under test conditions, and rectified before an emergency arises.
Equipment should be tested at the time of installation on the wellhead and at regular intervals
thereafter, in accordance with Company standard policies and guidelines (unless contradicted
by local policies). Common causes of failure include:
• Casing wear.
• Plugging of lines with baryte.
• Wellhead or BOP connections working loose through vibration.
• Deterioration of seals in valves and BOPs.
• Leaks and faults occurring in control systems.
The recommended procedures in this section cover BOP stack installations at surface
and␣subsea.
2 BOP Equipment and Wellheads

Preferably, pressure testing should be conducted with water against a solid type plug which
is supported by the wellhead and seals either above or below the pack-off. All high pressure
tests should be preceded by a low pressure test (e.g. 300 psi) and the final test pressure
reached in increments. Normally, a wellhead/BOP test pressure that holds stable for 10 minutes
is considered satisfactory.
The bore of the test string or the casing valve should be open during testing to prevent
pressure being applied to the casing or formation, in the event of the test plug leaking.
The rate of pressure increase due to volume pumped, should be closely monitored to determine
whether the pack-off is leaking, and warn of the possible risk of collapsing the casing.
(a) Initial Pressure Test

If possible, the initial pressure test of all BOP functions should be conducted on a test
stump prior to installation. However, if a stump is not available, the test should be
conducted on the wellhead immediately after installation. It should be conducted to the
working pressure of the wellhead or ram preventers, or the burst pressure of the strongest
casing to be run, whichever is the lowest. Annular preventers should be tested to a
maximum of 70% of their working pressure.
Where possible, the initial sequence of tests should be arranged so as to minimise the
volume of fluid pressurised (e.g. the initial test of the wellhead connector should be
against the lowest pipe rams); thereby minimising the damage caused by fluid cutting,
in the event of a leak.
6-66
March 1995
After latching a subsea stack, a tensile test should be applied to ensure connectors are
properly latched before any pressure testing. A pressure test should be carried out to the
pressure rating of the wellhead or connector, on initial installation of the stack; thereafter,
the connector will be tested during BOP tests to the pressure that the BOPs will be
tested to. Also, the control system should be function tested on both pods.
(b) Routine Pressure Tests

Routine testing of the BOP (pipe rams and valves) and wellhead pack-offs should be
conducted to either the maximum anticipated wellhead pressure, 80% of the casing burst
pressure, the wellhead rated pressure or the BOP rated pressure, whichever is lowest.
Annular preventers should not be tested to more than 70% of their working pressure.
The blind/shear rams are tested on installation and after the 13 3/8 in. and 9 5/8/in.
casing have been run. At subsequent BOP tests, the blind/shear rams should be function
tested according to Company policy. If the hole is open, the BOPs should be tested with
the drillstring at the shoe, suspended from the test plug. Tests should be carried out
using, in rotation, the main control panel, Driller’s panel and remote panel.
(c) Pressure Testing of Associated Equipment

The upper and lower kelly cocks, choke and standpipe manifolds, drillpipe safety valve,
inside BOP and circulating head should all be tested to the lower of the maximum
anticipated wellhead pressure or their rated working pressure.
A test sub is required for testing the string tools from below.
Accumulator pre-charge pressures should be checked according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations. To test whether the accumulator and charge pumps are working correctly,
the procedures as outlined in Chapter 1, ‘Drills and SCRs’ in Volume 1 should be adopted.
3 An Example Test Procedure

The following is an example test procedure for a four ram preventer subsea stack and
associated choke manifold.
All the components of the choke manifold, in this example, are rated to the same pressure as
the stack, and so all the components of the manifold (buffer tank etc) can be tested at the
same time, and to the same pressure, as the stack.
The kill pump is used as the test pump and is tied into the manifold at point A and point B as
shown in Figure 6.28. Test pressure is applied both at point A and point B at all tests other
than 4 and 5, when it is applied at point A only.
The inner and outer choke and kill line failsafes can be tested from the outside before the
stack test is started as these tests do not require a test plug in the stack.
The blind/shear rams are not tested on a routine basis in line with Company policy. This
means that the failsafes on the upper kill line can only be tested from the inside to the test
pressure of the annular, until the blind/shear rams are tested.
6-67
March 1995
Gauge 2in 2202 Gauge

Transmitter Weco Female Transmitter
31 18 5
From Mud
32 30 26 19 13 8 6 3 1 Manifold
4
33
27 23 20 14 9
From Kill Choke
2
Pump B Line
28 24 21 15 10
From Kill
Pump A
Auto Manual Manual Auto Kill Line

Choke Choke Choke Choke
29 25 16 11 2in 1502
Weco Female
35
34
To 22 17 12
36 Production
Test Facility
To To To From
Mud Gas Drain Diverter Cement
Separator Overboard Pump
WEOX02.191
Figure 6.28 Choke Manifold Schematic
Figure 6.29 shows the procedure for the test as well as details of each component tested at
each stage.
Figure 6.30 shows how the stack is lined up for each test. Figure 6.28 shows a schematic of
the choke manifold. As previously stated all the components of this manifold, that are shown
on the diagram, are rated to the full working pressure of the stack. Many other manifolds
incorporate piping and valves downstream of the chokes that are rated at a lower pressure
than the stack; in such cases, it is necessary to conduct a separate test of these components.
The following operational guidelines should also be considered for these tests:
• The test pressures used for each test are determined to be in line with Company policy
for pressure testing of well control equipment.
• On landing the BOP, only one full working pressure test need be made against one pipe
ram. This is to confirm the integrity of the wellhead connector.
• All subsea pressure tests will be conducted using openbore test tools.
6-68
March 1995
• All tests will be carried out using a suitable test plug with only the specified
drillcollar␣weight below; i.e. test plugs will not be run on top of a bottomhole assembly
except when testing the blind/shear rams agains a backed-off test plug, if tested on a
separate run.
• When pressure testing blind/shear rams against casing consideration should be given to
pressure differential that already exists due to any difference in the weight of the mud
inside and outside of the casing.
• All tests should be recorded on a chart.
• When testing blind/shear rams against a backed-off test plug, monitor volumes
pumped␣closely .
TEST CHOKE MANIFOLD VALVES BOP LINE UP FAILSAFES

CLOSED
1 3, 7, 9, 15, 18, 20, 24, 26,

30, 32, 33
2 2, 30 UPPER ANNULAR, UPPER INNER KILL,

LOWER INNER KILL
3 2, 30 LOWER ANNULAR, UPPER OUTER KILL,

LOWER OUTER KILL
4 3, 5, 12, 17, 19, 22, 30, 34 UPPER PIPE RAMS, UPPER OUTER KILL,
UPPER INNER CHOKE, LOWER INNER CHOKE
5 3, 6, 11, 13 UPPER PIPE RAMS, UPPER INNER KILL,

UPPER OUTER CHOKE, LOWER OUTER CHOKE
6 2, 13, 14, 19, 20, 23, 27, 31 MIDDLE PIPE RAMS, LOWER OUTER KILL,
UPPER OUTER CHOKE
7 3, 7, 12, 17, 19, 22, 33, 35, 36
8 4, 7, 8, 10, 16, 19, 21, 25, 29 LOWER PIPE RAMS, LOWER INNER KILL,
UPPER INNER CHOKE
9 1, 7, 8, 26, 28
Figure 6.29 An example BOP/Choke Manifold Test Procedure
6-69
March 1995
Figure 6.30 Schematic of BOP Pressure Tests
2 3 4
KILL CHOKE KILL CHOKE KILL CHOKE

UPPER UPPER
ANNULAR ANNULAR
LOWER LOWER
ANNULAR ANNULAR
TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST
VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE
LMRP LMRP LMRP

CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
BLIND SHEAR BLIND SHEAR BLIND SHEAR

RAM RAM RAM
UPPER UPPER
PIPE PIPE
MIDDLE MIDDLE MIDDLE

PIPE PIPE PIPE
LOWER LOWER LOWER

PIPE PIPE PIPE
5 6 7
KILL CHOKE KILL CHOKE KILL CHOKE

UPPER UPPER UPPER
ANNULAR ANNULAR ANNULAR
LOWER LOWER LOWER

ANNULAR ANNULAR ANNULAR
TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST
VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE
LMRP LMRP LMRP

BLIND SHEAR BLIND SHEAR BLIND SHEAR

RAM RAM RAM
UPPER UPPER
PIPE PIPE
MIDDLE MIDDLE
PIPE PIPE
LOWER LOWER
PIPE PIPE
WEOX02.193
6-70
March 1995
4 Test Frequency
Pressure testing of BOP equipment should be carried out according to Company policy,
however in general:
• After installation of the wellhead component and BOP stack and prior to drilling out
each casing string.
• At intervals not exceeding 14 days.
• At any time requested by the Company Drilling Representative.
Results of pressure tests should be recorded on IADC reports, and on the BOP test form. An
example of a typical BOP test form is presented as Figure 6.31.
The following additional points should be considered:
• Annular and ram (pipe) preventers should be operated on each trip into the hole with
the bit at the shoe (perhaps as part of a kick drill).
• Blind (but not blind/shear) rams should be operated each time the bit is out of the hole.
Choke line pressure should be monitored before re-opening the rams.
• Kelly cocks should be operated daily.
• Choke and kill valves should be operated daily, and lines pumped through.
• Choke manifold line-up should be checked each tour.
5 Pressure Tests of Casing

The integrity of casing strings is fundamental to effective well control. Casing design is
based on maximum anticipated pressures caused by a limited kick volume. Wear or corrosion
of the casing bore will reduce burst and collapse strengths of casing and undermine the basis
for the design. The rate of wear depends on the type and duration of operations, and is
accelerated by rough hardbanded drillpipe, high rotary speeds, and crooked hole. Pressure
testing of casing is required to prove the string’s original integrity and that wear does not
subsequently reduce casing strength below an acceptable level.
• Initial Test
Normally, the casing should be tested to prove the string’s integrity when bumping the
top plug, following cementing. Applied test pressure should be the maximum wellhead
pressure anticipated before the next casing string is set (i.e. casing design pressure).
However, if the additional tensile loading caused by the pressure test risks parting the
string, the plug should be bumped with a nominal pressure and the full test pressure
applied after the string has gained support from the cement prior to drilling out the shoe
track.
• Subsequent Tests
Where significant casing wear is possible, a ditch magnet should be installed to monitor
metal returns. If severe casing wear is suspected, actual wear should be measured by wireline
calliper tools and then the casing tested to the minimum acceptable pressure.
6-71
March 1995
Figure 6.31 An example BOP Equipment Test Report
1 BOP STACK Unit Type Size WP Pressure applied Remaining Pressure Test Duration
PRESSURE TEST Annular
Annular
Blind Shear Ram
Pipe Ram
Pipe Ram
Pipe Ram
UL Choke Line
CL Inner Valve
CL Outer Valve
UL Kill Line
KL Inner Valve
KL Outer Valve
Remote Kill Line
Diverter
2 CASING Casing in hole: Pressure Applied
PRESSURE TEST Pressure Remaining
Test Duration
Mud Weight: Packer Depth: Date Previous Test:
3 CHOKE MANIFOLD Pressure Applied: YES NO YES NO
PRESSURE TEST Test Duration: All valves tested Manifold good for H2S
Valves last serviced: All chokes operated Water left in manifold
Setting max. allowable Handles on all valves Water left in K&C lines
pressure on remote choke:
Standpipe manifold tested K&C lines pumped through
Pressure applied Manifold line-up OK after test
4 CHARGE PUMPS Eletric pump cut in: Accumulator pressure: YES NO
Electric pump cut-out: Manifold pressure: Filters checked
Air pump cut-in: U Annular pressure: Storage tank level checked
Air pump cut-out: L Annular pressure: Mixing unit checked
Total accumulator volume: Panel used for BOP test: Low level alarms checked
Usable accum. vol. (3000-1200psi): Precharges last checked: Functions left in correct mode
Recharge time (1200-3000psi): Remote compressor available
5 ACCUMULATOR Accumulators and Pumps Accumulators only
PERFORMANCE UNIT Time to Volume Pressure Time to Volume Pressure
CHECK Close Close
Initial Final Initial Final
Annular
Annular
Blind Shear Ram
Pipe Ram
Pipe Ram
Pipe Ram
CL Inner Valve
CL Outer Valve
KL Inner Valve
KL Outer Valve
6 EQUIPMENT Are the following items on the rig, in good operating condition and pressure tested?
CHECK TEST YES NO YES NO YES NO
Circulating head Kelly saver sub & rubber Trip tank
DP Safety Valve Hang-off tool PVT and alarms
XOs to DCs for DPSV Gas buster Flo-show and alarms
Inside BOP De-gasser Nitrogen for precharge
Drop in BOP sub + dart Gas detector Engine H2O spray and s/d
7 FAULTY Mention here leaks experienced in testing parts used, faulty or missing equipment and remedial action
EQUIPMENT
8 SIGNATURES Driller: Toolpusher: Company Drilling Rep:
6-72
March 1995

Well Control Manual

Cargado por

Información del documento

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Well Control Manual

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

WELL CONTROL MANUAL

Click here to zoom in on text, then click on text to scroll through

Ladies and Gentlemen:

Publication of the manual in electronic format should make the abundance of

Navigating through the Manual

To go back or forward to a The header at the top of each

2 THE PREVENTION OF A KICK

3 WARNING SIGNS OF A KICK

4 ACTION ON DETECTING AN INFLUX

5 WELL KILL DECISION ANALYSIS

6 WELL KILL TECHNIQUES

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION UNIT

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION UNIT

API RP American Petroleum Institute Recommended Practice

1.1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 1-1

1.2 MANPOWER ORGANISATION 1-9

1.3 DRILLS AND SLOW CIRCULATING RATES 1-15

1.4 USE OF THE MUD SYSTEM 1-27

1.5 KICK TOLERANCE 1-35

1.1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

In order to be able to install additional pressure gauges it may be necessary to fabricate

Figure 1.1 Suggested Instrumentation for a Floating Rig

The following points should be noted from the proposed systems:

• A good selection of gauges should be available. Gauges should be calibrated on a regular

• It must be easy to change the gauges.

• Consideration should be given to completely isolating the supplementary pressure

Figure 1.2 Suggested Instrumentation for a Fixed Installation

Most rigs will not have suitable equipment to do this.

FROM CHOKE MANUAL

Figure 1.3 Suggested Fluid Measurement System

1.2 MANPOWER ORGANISATION

(a) The Company Representative

• To provide specific well control procedures, using the contingency plan as a

• To monitor and supervise the implementation of these procedures.

• To maintain communication with the Operations base.

• To assign the responsibility of keeping a diary of events.

(b) The Company Drilling Engineer

• To keep a diary of events.

(c) The Senior Contractor Representative

(d) The Contractor Toolpusher

(e) The Driller

(f) The Mud Engineer

(g) The Cementing Engineer

(h) The Subsea Engineer (where appropriate)

(j) The Mud Logging Engineers

• One member of the crew must keep a diary of events.

The objectives of a suitable system of communication are:

Figure 1.4 shows an example of a possible communication system on a semi-submersible␣rig

• Each line and method of communication is defined. It should be noted that:

– The rig telephone system is not overloaded.

Figure 1.4 An Example Communication System

(1) KICK TAKEN – WELL SHUT-IN – WELL BEING MONITORED

(2) PREKILL MEETING

(3) ALLOCATE RESPONSIBILITIES

OFF DUTY SUBSEA CONTRACTOR

(4) MAJOR LINES/METHOD OF COMMUNICATION

CONTRACTOR MARINE PUMPMAN/

SUBSEA COMPANY SERVICE COMPANY MUD LOGGING

1.3 DRILLS AND SLOW CIRCULATING RATES

It is important that returning drillcrews have frequent Drills.

The following Drills should be practised where applicable:

3 D1: Kick while Tripping

However, as a guideline the following procedure should be initiated:

1. Stop other operations.